2023 BMW 5 Series 6

Content A-Z
OWNER'S HANDBOOK.
BMW 5 SERIES SALOON.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A6ADA5 - X/22 OwnersManuals2.com

OwnersManuals2.com
WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Handbook.
Congratulations on your choice of a BMW.
The better you are acquainted with your vehicle, the easier you will find it
is to operate in traffic. We therefore request:
Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Handbook in your vehicle. It contains
important information on how to operate your vehicle, helping you get the
most out of your BMW's technical features. It also contains information
to help keep your BMW operating safely on the road and maintain its full
resale value.
When the vehicle leaves the factory, the printed Owner's Handbook is the
most up-to-date version. After a vehicle software update – for example,
a Remote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Handbook for the
vehicle will contain updated information.
Supplementary information is provided in further on-board literature.
We wish you a safe and pleasant journey.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – for example, a Remote Software Up-

grade – the Integrated Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain
updated information.
NOTES
Notes ..................................................................................................................... 6
QUICK REFERENCE
Getting in ............................................................................................................. 18
Adjustment and operation ............................................................................... 22
On the move ....................................................................................................... 27
CONTROLS
Vehicle cockpit ................................................................................................... 34
Sensors in the vehicle ....................................................................................... 39
Vehicle operating condition ............................................................................. 43
iDrive .................................................................................................................... 47
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ................................................................... 63
General settings ................................................................................................. 67
Personal settings ............................................................................................... 72
Connections ........................................................................................................ 78
Opening and closing ......................................................................................... 87
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel ................................................................. 123
Carrying children safely .................................................................................. 140
Driving ................................................................................................................. 151
Displays ............................................................................................................. 170
Lights ................................................................................................................. 194
Safety ................................................................................................................ 202
Driving stability control systems .................................................................... 241
Driver assistance systems ............................................................................. 246
Driving comfort ................................................................................................ 307
Air conditioning ................................................................................................ 310
4
Interior equipment ........................................................................................... 329
Storage compartments ................................................................................... 337
Luggage compartment ................................................................................... 341
DRIVING HINTS
Driving precautions ......................................................................................... 348
Trailer operation .............................................................................................. 355
Saving fuel ......................................................................................................... 361
MOBILITY
Refuelling .......................................................................................................... 370
Wheels and tyres ............................................................................................. 372
Engine compartment ...................................................................................... 399
Operating fluids ............................................................................................... 402
Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 414
Replacing parts ................................................................................................. 417
Help in case of a breakdown ......................................................................... 423
Care .................................................................................................................... 431
REFERENCE
Technical data ................................................................................................. 436
Seats for child restraint systems ................................................................... 451
Appendix ........................................................................................................... 454
Everything from A to Z ................................................................................... 456
© 2022 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Not to be reproduced, wholly or in part, without written permission from BMW AG, Munich.
English ID7 X/22, -
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
NOTES Notes
Notes
About this Owner's Media overview
Handbook
General
Orientation Content from the Owner's Handbook can be
accessed through various media. The Owner's
The quickest way to find information on a par-
Handbook is available in the following media:
ticular topic or feature is to consult the alpha-
betical index. ▷ Printed Owner's Handbook.
For an overview of the vehicle, we recommend ▷ Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehi-
the quick reference in the Owner's Handbook. cle.
Validity of Owner's Handbook Printed Owner's Handbook

The printed Owner's Handbook describes all
Vehicle production standard, country-specific and optional equip-
When the vehicle leaves the factory, the con- ment available for the model range.
tents of the printed Owner's Handbook are
up to date. Any updates introduced after the Integrated Owner's Handbook in
copy deadline may result in discrepancies be- the vehicle
tween the printed Owner's Handbook and the
Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle. Principle
Notes on updates can be found in the appen- The Integrated Owner's Handbook describes
dix of the printed Owner's Handbook for the the specific equipment and functions present
vehicle. in the vehicle.
The Integrated Owner's Handbook can be
After a software update in the vehicle shown on the control display.
After a vehicle software update, for example,
via Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated Selecting the Owner's Handbook
Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain
the latest information. 1. Press the button.
2. "CAR"
Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
3. "Owner's Handbook"
Entertainment, Communication
4. Select the required method of accessing
The Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Enter-
the contents.
tainment, Communication is available as a
printed book from authorised Service Partners.
Scrolling within the Owner's Handbook
These topics are also covered in the Integrated
Turn the Controller until the next or previous
Owner's Handbook in the vehicle.
contents are displayed.
6
Notes NOTES
Context-sensitive help BMW Driver's Guide App

The BMW Driver's Guide App describes the
General specific equipment and functions present in
The Integrated Owner's Handbook can be ac- the vehicle. The app can be displayed on
cessed from any menu. Depending on the smartphones and tablets.
selected function, the associated description
or the main menu of the Integrated Owner's BMW Driver's Guide web version
Handbook is displayed.
BMW Driver's Guide Web shows the most ap-
propriate information for the selected vehicle.
Accessing when using iDrive
Where possible, only the equipment and func-
To switch from the function on the control dis- tions actually installed in the vehicle will be
play directly to the Options menu: described. BMW Driver's Guide Web can be
displayed on any current browser.
1. Press the button.
2. "Help"
Icons and displays
Accessing when a Check Control message is
displayed Icons in the Owner's Handbook
To switch directly from the Check Control mes-
sage on the control display: Icon Meaning
"Owner's Handbook" Precautions that must be followed in
order to avoid the possibility of injury
Supplementary Owner's Handbooks to yourself and to others as well as
Please also pay attention to the Supplemen- serious damage to the vehicle.
tary Owner's Handbooks which are provided Measures that can be taken to help
along with the on-board literature as required. protect the environment.
"..." Texts on a display in the vehicle for

Additional sources of selecting functions.
information ›...‹ Commands for the voice control
system.
Service Partner ››...‹‹ Replies by the voice control system.
An authorised service partner will be happy to
answer any questions you may have. Actions
Actions that need to be carried out are shown
Internet as a numbered list. The list of steps must be
Vehicle information and general information on carried out in the specified sequence.
BMW – on technology, for example – are avail-
able on the Internet: www.bmw.com. 1. First action.
2. Second action.
7
NOTES Notes
Lists The production date is defined as the calendar

month and the calendar year in which the vehi-
Alternative options and lists of items with no
cle body and the transmission assemblies are
implied sequence are shown as bullet point
joined and the vehicle is driven or moved from
lists:
the production line.
▷ First option.
▷ Second option.
Status of the Owner's
Icon on components and Handbook
assemblies
This symbol on a vehicle component General
indicates that further information on the
The high standards of safety and quality that
component is available in the Owner's
characterise the vehicles are ensured through
Handbook.
ongoing development. On rare occasions, this
may mean that the features described in this
Vehicle equipment handbook will vary from those in your vehicle.
This Owner's Handbook describes all models For Australia/New Zealand: general
and all the standard, national and optional When reading this Owner's Handbook, please
equipment available for the model range. As bear the following in mind: to ensure that our
a result, this Owner's Handbook may also vehicles continue to embody the highest qual-
contain descriptions and illustrations of equip- ity and safety standards, we pursue a policy
ment and functions which are not installed in of continuous, ongoing development. Because
your vehicle, for example on account of the op- modifications in the design of both vehicles
tional equipment selected or the national-mar- and accessories may be introduced at any
ket version. time, your own vehicle's equipment may vary
This also applies to safety-relevant functions from that described in this manual. For the
and systems. same reason, it is also impossible to guarantee
that all descriptions will be completely accurate
Please comply with the relevant laws and reg-
in all respects.
ulations when using the corresponding func-
tions and systems. We must therefore request your understand-
ing of the fact that the manufacturer of
If certain equipment and models are not de-
your vehicle is unable to recognise legal
scribed in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the
claims based on discrepancies between the
Supplementary Owner's Handbooks provided.
data, illustrations and descriptions in this Own-
In right-hand drive vehicles, some operating er's Handbook and your own vehicle's equip-
elements are arranged differently from those ment. Please note, too, that some of the op-
shown in the illustrations. tional equipment described in this Owner's
Handbook is not available on Australian mod-
els due to restrictions imposed by Australian
Production date Design Rules and other requirements.
Should you require any further information,
The production date of your vehicle can be please contact your Service Partner or a quali-
found at the bottom of the body pillar on the
driver's door.
8
Notes NOTES
fied specialist workshop, who will be pleased and approval requirements prevailing in that
to advise you. country. If the vehicle does not comply with the
homologation requirements in a certain coun-
Validity of Owner's Handbook try, no warranty claims can be lodged there
for the vehicle. Warranty claims may also be
Vehicle production invalidated if the electrical system has been
modified, for example through the use of con-
When the vehicle leaves the factory, the con-
trol units, hardware, or software which the ve-
tents of the printed Owner's Handbook are
hicle manufacturer classifies as unsuitable. A
up to date. Any updates introduced after the
Service Partner is able to provide further infor-
copy deadline may result in discrepancies be-
mation.
tween the printed Owner's Handbook and the
Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle. Note: in addition to the warranty required by
law, the selling Authorised BMW Retailers or
Notes on updates can be found in the appen-
the selling BMW AG subsidiaries in Germany
dix of the printed Owner's Handbook for the
grant additional benefits with the purchase of
vehicle.
new BMW vehicles within the framework of
the BMW Warranty Booklet. More information:
After a software update in the vehicle www.bmw.de/qualitaetsbrief.
via Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated Maintenance and repairs
The advanced technology used in your vehicle,
the latest information.
for example the state-of-the-art materials and
high-performance electronics, requires appro-
Your own safety priate maintenance and repair methods.
The manufacturer of the vehicle therefore rec-
ommends having the corresponding work car-
Intended use ried out by an authorised Service Partner, e.g.
Please comply with the following when using a dealership or a BMW service partner. If you
the vehicle: choose to use a different specialist workshop,
▷ Owner's Handbook. BMW recommends using one that performs
the corresponding work, such as maintenance
▷ Information attached to the vehicle. Do not
and repair, in accordance with BMW specifica-
remove stickers.
tions and that employs properly trained per-
▷ Technical data of the vehicle. sonnel. In the Owner's Handbook, facilities of
▷ The applicable laws and safety standards this kind are referred to as "another qualified
of the country in which the vehicle is used. Service Partner or a specialist workshop".
▷ Vehicle papers and legal documents. If work such as maintenance and repair is
carried out incorrectly, it could result in subse-
Warranty quent damage with associated safety risks.
The vehicle is technically designed for the Incorrectly performed work on the vehicle
operating conditions and approval (homologa- paintwork can cause components, for example
tion) requirements of the country to which it the radar sensors, to fail or malfunction, result-
was first delivered. If the vehicle is to be driven ing in a safety hazard.
in another country, it may need to first be
adapted to any different operating conditions
9
NOTES Notes
Parts and accessories with the assistance of the relevant authorities,

the registered keeper can be identified from
BMW recommends using parts and accesso-
the vehicle identification number and the num-
ries that are approved by BMW and are there-
ber plate. There are also other ways of tracing
fore suitable for this purpose.
data collected in the vehicle back to the driver
You are recommended to consult a BMW Serv- or registered keeper, for example via the Con-
ice Partner for advice on genuine BMW parts nectedDrive account used.
and accessories, other BMW approved prod-
ucts and expert advice on all related matters. Data protection laws
The safety and compatibility of these products In accordance with current data protection law,
in conjunction with BMW vehicles have been vehicle users have certain rights vis-à-vis the
checked by BMW. vehicle manufacturer or companies that collect
BMW accepts product responsibility for gen- or process their personal data.
uine BMW parts and accessories. However, Vehicle users have a free and comprehensive
BMW cannot accept liability for parts or acces- right of access to their personal data which has
sory products of any kind which it has not ap- been collected and held by organisations.
proved.
Such organisations could be:
BMW is unable to assess each third-party
product of outside origin as to its suitability ▷ Vehicle manufacturer.
for use on BMW vehicles without safety risk. ▷ Qualified Service Partners.
Likewise no guarantee can be assumed even ▷ Specialist workshops.
if the product has been granted official appro-
▷ Service providers.
val in a specific country. Tests performed for
such approvals cannot always cover all operat- Vehicle users may request information about
ing conditions for BMW vehicles, and some of what personal data has been saved, what it is
them therefore are insufficient. used for and where it has come from. Proof of
ownership or use is required in order to obtain
this information.
Vehicle data and data The right of access also extends to information
protection about data that has been transferred to other
companies or bodies.
Please refer to the vehicle manufacturer's
Responsibility and rights website for the applicable data protection pol-
icy. This data protection policy contains infor-
Responsibility for data mation about the right to have data deleted or
Within the scope of data protection directives corrected. The vehicle manufacturer's website
and legislation, the manufacturer of the vehi- also provides its contact details and those of
cle is responsible for processing personal data its data protection officer.
which is collected when the vehicle is used The registered keeper can have the data
or from web pages, customer support, online stored in the vehicle read out by an authorised
services, and marketing campaigns. Service Partner, or another qualified Service
Partner, or a specialist workshop, for a fee, as
Personal identification necessary.
Every vehicle has a unique vehicle identifica- Vehicle data is read out by the socket for on-
tion number. Depending on the country, and board diagnosis, which is required by law.
10
Notes NOTES
Data processing Personal data

The collection of personal data may be neces- ▷ Personal information provided by custom-
sary to enable the manufacturer of the vehicle ers, for example date of birth, education,
to fulfil obligations to the customer or to leg- household size or occupation.
islators, or to offer high-quality products and ▷ Data to determine identity, for example
services. driver's licence.
These include, for example:
Contract data
▷ To fulfill contractual obligations regarding
the sale, servicing and repair of vehicles, for ▷ Customer number, contract number,
example sales processes, maintenance. booked online services.
▷ To fulfill contractual obligations regarding ▷ Stored payment information, for example
the provision of digital vehicle services, for credit card number.
example BMW ConnectedDrive.
Credit rating
▷ To safeguard product quality and the re-
search and development of new products, ▷ Information about transactions.
and to optimise service processes. ▷ Information about fraud or criminal offen-
▷ To perform sales, service and administra- ces.
tion processes, including branches and Na-
tional Sales Companies. Interests
▷ To provide customer support, for example Information provided by the customer regard-
contract processing. ing areas of interest, for example product pref-
erences, hobbies, and other personal preferen-
▷ To conduct advertising communication and
ces.
market research on the basis of personal
consent.
Use of web pages and communication
▷ To fulfill legal obligations, for example infor-
▷ Information on how web pages are used
mation regarding Technical Campaigns.
and whether messages are opened or for-
▷ To process warranty claims. warded.
▷ Account information regarding online serv-
Data collection ices, customer portals, and prospective
customer portals.
Type of data collected
Depending on the situation, the following per- Transaction and interaction data
sonal data may be collected. Information on the purchasing of products and
services, interactions with customer support
Contact details and participation in market research studies.
▷ Name, address, telephone number.
▷ Email address. Use of apps and services of the vehicle
manufacturer
Information on the use of apps on mobile devi-
ces and online services.
11
NOTES Notes
Information on vehicle functions and settings ▷ When providing personal data through cer-
Information on functions and settings in the tified address providers, provided that data
vehicle, for example when using online serv- protection requirements are met.
ices. ▷ When vehicle data, including the vehicle
identification number, is read out during
Vehicle-related sensor data and usage data service, maintenance and repair activities.
Data generated or processed in the vehicle.
▷ Driver assistance systems: processing of
Data in the vehicle
sensor data which is used to evaluate the
vehicle's surroundings or the driver's be- General
haviour. A number of electronic control devices are in-
▷ Personal settings: settings saved in the ve- stalled in your vehicle. Electronic control units
hicle profile, for example seat setting. process data that they receive from vehicle
sensors, generate themselves, or exchange
▷ Multimedia, navigation, for example desti-
with one another, for example. Many of the
nations.
control units are necessary for safe operation
of the vehicle, or provide assistance while driv-
Time of data collection ing, for example driver assistance systems.
Personal data may be collected at the There are also control devices which manage
following times: comfort or infotainment functions.
▷ When the customer makes direct contact Data saved in the vehicle can be deleted at
with the manufacturer of the vehicle, for ex- any time. This data is only transmitted to third
ample via the web page. parties if expressly requested in the course of
▷ When requesting information on products using online services. The transfer depends on
and services or direct purchases, for exam- the settings selected for using the services.
ple on web pages or in apps.
▷ When making direct purchases, for example Sensor data
on the web page. Driver assistance systems, for example Active
▷ When purchasing services directly, for ex- Cruise Control, Collision Warning, or Attentive-
ample online services. ness Assistant, process sensor data which is
used to evaluate the vehicle's surroundings or
▷ When the customer responds to direct mar- the driver's behaviour.
keting activities, for example when personal
data is provided. These include, for example:
▷ When using vehicles, products, services ▷ Status messages relating to the vehicle
and digital offers, for example web pages, and its individual components, for example
apps. wheel speed, wheel circumferential velocity,
deceleration, lateral acceleration, fastened
▷ When communicating personal data seat belts.
through qualified partners of the vehicle
manufacturer or through third-party provid- ▷ Ambient conditions, for example tempera-
ers, provided that data protection require- ture, rain sensor signals.
ments are met. The data is processed within the vehicle and
is usually transient. It is only saved for longer
than the operating period if it is required in
12
Notes NOTES
order to provide services agreed with the cus- vehicle manufacturer's secure data systems.
tomer. When the driver changes vehicle, these saved
profiles can simply be applied to a different
Electronic components vehicle.
Electronic components, for example control The vehicle settings stored in a driver profile
devices and vehicle keys, contain components can be changed at any time. A driver profile
for storing technical information. Information can be deleted at any time.
about the vehicle condition, component use
and wear, maintenance requirements, events Multimedia and navigation
or faults can be stored temporarily or perma- Data can also be imported into the vehicle
nently. entertainment and communication system, for
This information generally documents the con- example via a smartphone or MP3 player. The
dition of a component, a module, a system or imported data can be processed within the ve-
the vehicle's surroundings, including: hicle, for example to play the user's favourite
▷ Operating states of system components, music.
for example fill levels, tyre inflation pres- Depending on the equipment, this data in-
sure, battery status. cludes:
▷ Malfunctions and faults of important sys- ▷ Multimedia data, such as music, films, or
tem components, for example lights and photos, for playback in an integrated multi-
brakes. media system.
▷ Responses of the vehicle to particular driv- ▷ Address book data for use in conjunction
ing situations, for example triggering of an with an integrated hands-free system or an
airbag, activation of the driving stability integrated navigation system.
control systems. ▷ Destinations: depending on the equipment,
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events. route guidance can be started automati-
The data is required so that the control units cally using destinations learned by the nav-
can perform their functions. It is also used for igation system.
detecting and rectifying malfunctions, as well ▷ Data on usage of Internet services.
as to optimise vehicle functions. This data may be saved locally in the vehicle
Most of this data is transient and is only pro- or stored on a device that has been connected
cessed within the vehicle itself. Only a small to the vehicle, for example a smartphone, USB
proportion of the data is stored in event or fault stick or MP3 player.
memories in response to specific circumstan-
ces. Service data
Personal settings General
Convenience functions, such as seat, climate When services are required, for example re-
or light settings, enhance the driving experi- pairs, service operations, warranty work and
ence. The personal settings for these functions quality assurance measures, this technical in-
can be saved in a driver profile within the formation can be read out from the vehicle to-
vehicle and retrieved as required, for exam- gether with the vehicle identification number.
ple if the settings have been changed in the
meantime by another driver. Depending on the
equipment, these profiles can be saved in the
13
NOTES Notes
Stored data Furthermore, the manufacturer has product

Electronic vehicle components may contain monitoring obligations to meet in line with
data storage medium which store technical product liability law. To fulfil these obligations,
information relating to the vehicle condition, the vehicle manufacturer requires technical
events and faults. The data required for service data from the vehicle.
measures is processed locally and is deleted
automatically once the work is complete. An Goodwill and warranty claims
authorised Service Partner or another qualified Data from the vehicle can also be used to
Service Partner or a specialist workshop can check customer warranty claims. If goodwill
read out the information. During servicing and or warranty claims are asserted, the data is
repair work, data is read out by the socket read out and transferred to the vehicle manu-
for on-board diagnosis using special diagnosis facturer to resolve the claims promptly.
systems and sent to the vehicle manufacturer. Fault and event memories in the vehicle can
The customer is entitled to withhold consent to be reset when an authorised Service Partner or
the data being read out and forwarded. another qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop performs repair or servicing work.
Optimising service processes
The vehicle manufacturer maintains documen- Control over data
tation relating to each vehicle to ensure the You may request the stopping of data transfers
best possible service is provided. Within the to the vehicle manufacturer for the purpose of
scope of legal requirements, this documenta- ensuring product quality and optimising service
tion may be made available to authorised third processes.
parties, for example specialist workshops.
The authorised third parties may only use this Legal requirements regarding data
data for the purposes of performing the service disclosure
or repair order in question. This prevents work
from being duplicated unnecessarily on the ve- According to current law, the vehicle manufac-
hicle, for example. turer is obliged to provide the authorities with
any data it has stored. Data is provided to the
extent required and on a case-by-case basis,
Ensuring product quality
for example to investigate a criminal offence.
The data logs the technical conditions of the
Current law also gives state bodies authorisa-
vehicle and helps in locating faults, complying
tion to read out data from the vehicle them-
with warranty obligations and improving qual-
selves for individual cases. Information can be
ity.
read out from the airbag control unit, etc. to
To ensure product quality and the develop- shed light on the circumstances of an accident,
ment of new products, data on the usage of for example.
individual components and systems, for exam-
Within the framework of legal obligations in the
ple, lights, brake, electric windows, displays,
EU, certain vehicle consumption data, such as
can be read out. This data helps the vehicle
fuel or energy consumption and distance trav-
manufacturer to optimise the design of com-
elled, also called OBFCM data, is sent to the
ponents and systems. Data analysis also pro-
EU Commission by the vehicle manufacturer.
vides the basis for Technical Campaigns and
The registered keeper may refuse to provide
mandatory recalls.
this data for this purpose.
14
Notes NOTES
Mobile devices BMW ConnectedDrive

Depending on the equipment, mobile devices BMW ConnectedDrive networks the vehicle
such as smartphones can be connected to the with a number of digital services. When these
vehicle to control smartphone functions from services are used, only the data stored in the
the vehicle, for example Apple CarPlay. Sound vehicle and required to provide the service is
and images from the mobile device may be transferred online, for example information on
played back or displayed through the multime- identifying and locating the vehicle. Usage is
dia system in the vehicle, for example. based on a contractual agreement with the
Selected information is transferred to the mo- user.
bile device at the same time. Depending on In individual cases, the transfer of data is trig-
the type of integration, this includes position gered as a result of predefined events, such
data and other general vehicle information, for as an intelligent emergency call. The wireless
example. This enables optimum use of selec- network connection is established via an in-ve-
ted apps, for example navigation and music hicle transmitter and receiver unit or via per-
playback. How the data is processed further sonal mobile devices brought into the vehicle,
is determined by the provider of the particular for example smartphones. Data transfer can
app being used. be deactivated on request.
The wireless network connection enables on-
Services line functions to be used. These include on-
line services and apps supplied by the vehicle
General manufacturer or by other providers.
If the vehicle has a wireless network connec-
tion, data can be exchanged between the vehi- Services from other providers
cle and other systems, for example with BMW When using online services from other provid-
ConnectedDrive. ers, these services are the responsibility of the
relevant provider and subject to their data pro-
Services from the vehicle manufacturer tection conditions and terms of use. The ve-
The various functions of online services provi- hicle manufacturer has no influence over the
ded by the vehicle manufacturer are described data that is exchanged.
at appropriate points, for example in the Own- Information as to how personal data is collec-
er's Handbook or on the manufacturer's web ted and used in relation to services from third
page. The relevant legal information pertaining parties, the scope of such data and its pur-
to data protection is also given. pose, can be obtained from the relevant pro-
Personal data may be used to provide online vider.
services. Data is exchanged over a secure con-
nection, for example with the vehicle manufac- Personal decision
turer's data systems set up for this purpose. Every user decides for themselves whether
Any collection, processing and use of personal they wish to enter into a contract for a service
data above and beyond that needed to pro- such as BMW ConnectedDrive. Information on
vide the services always requires legal permis- the extent of data processing and the content
sion, a contractual agreement or consent of involved is provided in writing before the serv-
the user. ice is acquired and forms part of the vehicle
handover.
15
NOTES Notes
The user has the option to deactivate the serv- Engine compartment
ices at any time and consequently to stop the
data processing required for the services. It is
also possible to have the entire data connec-
tion activated or deactivated. Excluded from
this are functions and services which are re-
quired by law, for example emergency call sys-
tems.
Transparency concerning vehicle data

BMW CarData provides transparency in han-
dling vehicle data with the use of BMW Con- The vehicle identification number is engraved
nectedDrive. BMW CarData enables users to in the engine compartment, on the right side of
control whether vehicle data being processed vehicle.
in the context of BMW ConnectedDrive is
transferred to third parties. Users can decide Type plate on right-hand side
for each individual service offering whether
data access is to be granted or refused to third
parties, for example to insurance companies.
An archive can also be requested from BMW
CarData at any time. The archive provides in-
formation on the data that has been transmit-
ted and saved in the context of BMW Connect-
edDrive. BMW CarData can only be accessed
by third-party providers via the vehicle manu-
facturer's servers. Direct access to the vehicle
and its data is not permitted. The vehicle identification number is on the type
More information on BMW CarData is available plate on the right-hand side of vehicle.
on the BMW ConnectedDrive Customer Portal.
Type plate on left-hand side
Vehicle identification
number
General
Depending on the national-market equipment,
the vehicle identification number is located at
different positions in the vehicle. This chapter
describes all the positions that are possible for
the model range. The vehicle identification number is on the type
plate on the left-hand side of vehicle.
16
Notes NOTES
Windscreen
The vehicle identification number is addition-

ally located behind the windscreen.
iDrive
It is also possible to display the vehicle identifi-
cation number via iDrive.
For further information:
To display the vehicle identification number
and software part number, see page 79.
17
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
Getting in
Opening and closing Locking the vehicle
1. Close the driver's door.
Buttons on the vehicle key
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Keep the button on the vehicle key
pressed after locking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are closed

for as long as the button on the vehicle key is
pressed.
Central locking buttons

1 To unlock
2 To lock Overview
3 Without automatic tailgate operation: to
open the boot lid
With automatic tailgate operation: to open/
close the boot lid
4 Home lights
Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.
Central locking buttons.
Depending on the settings, this will unlock the
driver's door only, or all vehicle access points.
To lock
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the
Press the button with the front doors
button on the vehicle key again to unlock the
closed.
other vehicle access points.
Keep the button on the vehicle key The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
pressed after unlocking.
To unlock
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened for as long as the button on the vehicle Press the key.
key is pressed.
18
Getting in QUICK REFERENCE
Comfort Access Contactless opening and closing of the

boot lid
Principle
This feature allows you to access the vehicle Principle
without having to use the vehicle key. The boot lid can be opened and closed con-
Simply having the vehicle key with you, for ex- tactlessly, provided you are carrying the vehicle
ample in your trouser pocket, is sufficient. key with you.
The vehicle automatically recognises the vehi- Correct foot movement

cle key when it is in the immediate vicinity or
inside the vehicle interior. 1. Stand in the centre behind the vehicle, ap-
proximately an arm's length away from the
rear of the vehicle.
2. Kick your foot as far as possible underneath
the vehicle and immediately pull it back.
Your leg must move across the ranges of
both sensors.
Fully grip the handle of a vehicle door.
Locking the vehicle
Boot lid
Opening
With your finger, touch the grooved area on

the handle of a closed vehicle door for approx-
imately 1 second, without gripping the door
handle.
▷ Unlock the vehicle, then press the button on
the outside of the boot lid.
▷ Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approximately 1 sec-
ond.
19
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
If applicable, the doors are also unlocked. Driver's door

Without automatic tailgate operation:
closing
Close the boot lid manually.
With automatic tailgate operation:

closing
vehicle key until the boot lid has
closed. 1 Exterior mirrors
▷ Press the button on the inside of 2 Window lifters
the boot lid.
3 Safety switch
4 Seats, comfort functions
Displays, operating 5 Central locking system
elements 6 Opening the boot lid
Around the steering wheel Switch cluster
1 Light switch 1 Selector lever

2 Turn indicator, high-beam headlight 2 Controller
3 Instrument cluster 3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold
4 Windscreen wipers 4 Park assistance systems
5 Start/Stop button 5 Driving Experience Control
Indicator and warning lights iDrive

Indicator and warning lights can illuminate in a
variety of combinations and colours. Principle
When switching on drive-ready state, the func- iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain-
tionality of some lights is checked and they ment system and includes a large number of
illuminate briefly. functions.
20
Getting in QUICK REFERENCE
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
To go to the main menu.
To go to the Media/Radio menu.
To go to the Communication menu.
To go to the navigation map.
To go to the destination entry menu

of the navigation system.
To go to the previous screen.
To go to the Options menu.
Voice input
Activating voice input

Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Say the command.
Cancelling voice input

Press the button on the steering wheel
or say ›Cancel‹.
21
QUICK REFERENCE Adjustment and operation
Adjustment and operation

Seats, mirrors and steering Adjusting the head restraint
wheel Adjusting the height: manual head
restraints
Semi-electrically adjustable seats
▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide

1 Longitudinal direction the head restraint downwards.
2 Thigh support ▷ Up: push the head restraint upwards.
3 Backrest width After adjusting the height, make sure that the
4 Lumbar support head restraint engages correctly.
5 Backrest angle
6 Height, seat angle Adjusting the height: electrical head
restraints
Electrically adjustable seats
Press the switch up or down.
1 Thigh support
2 Forward/back position, height, seat angle
3 Backrest upper section
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Backrest angle, head restraint
22
Adjustment and operation QUICK REFERENCE
Adjusting the distance: manual head Adjusting the exterior mirrors

restraints
1 Adjusting
▷ Back: press the button and push back the 2 To select a mirror, automatic parking func-
head restraint. tion
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint forwards. 3 Folding in and out
After adjusting the distance, make sure that
the head restraint engages correctly.
Adjusting the steering wheel
Adjusting the distance: electric head Electrical steering wheel adjustment
restraints
The head restraint is moved automatically on
adjusting the backrest upper section.
Side extensions
Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel

to the correct forward/back position and height
for your seat position.
Manual steering wheel adjustment

Fold the side extensions forward to increase
lateral hold.
23
1. Fold the lever down. Button Function

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred Press: to switch the sound
height and angle to suit your seat position. output on/off.
3. Fold the lever back up. Turn: to adjust the volume.
Memory function
Changing the entertainment
Principle source.
The memory function enables the following
Press once: to change the sta-
settings to be stored and retrieved when re-
tion/music track.
quired:
/ Press and hold: to fast for-
▷ Seat position.
ward/rewind the music track.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Steering wheel position.
Favourite buttons.
▷ Height of the Head-up display.
Saving /
1. Set the desired position.
2. Press the button. The lettering in To activate/deactivate traffic

the button is illuminated. information.
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 on the door
To change waveband.
while the lettering is illuminated. A signal
sounds.
Apps menu.
Retrieving settings
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
Navigation destination entry
Infotainment Entering a destination via the search
Radio 1. Press the button on the Controller.

2. "Search"
Buttons and functions 3. Enter at least two letters or characters.
Depending on the equipment specification and If applicable, select point of interest catego-
national-market version, the following buttons ries in the Points of interest menu.
are installed in the radio.
If applicable, the search term will be auto-
matically completed in orange text.
Tilt the Controller upwards to accept the
suggested search term.
4. Select icon as appropriate.
24
Adjustment and operation QUICK REFERENCE
A list of results is displayed. ▷ Use the knurled wheel on the steering

5. If necessary, "Filter" wheel to select from the list in the instru-
ment cluster: "Accept"
6. "Show results"
▷ Via the touchscreen: tap the corresponding
7. Select the desired entry.
entry on the control display.
8. If necessary, "Start route guidance"
Dialling a number
Using the mobile phone 1. "COM"
2. If necessary, "Telephone"
General
3. "Dial number:"
Once the mobile phone has been connected in
the vehicle, it can be operated using iDrive and 4. Enter the numbers.
the buttons on the steering wheel. 5. Select the icon. The call is made using
the mobile phone to which the telephone
Connecting via Bluetooth® function is assigned.
1. "COM" To make a call via the additional telephone:
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. 1. Press the button.
4. "New device" 2. "Call via"
5. "Phone calls and audio"
Apple CarPlay© preparation
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is shown on
the control display.
Principle
6. Compare the control number shown on the
CarPlay allows selected functions of a compat-
control display with the control number on
ible Apple iPhone to be operated by Siri voice
the mobile device display, and confirm that
control and iDrive.
the two match.
7. A Bluetooth connection is established. Operating requirements
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle ▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with
and displayed in the device list. iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Appropriate mobile radio contract.
Accepting a call
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice control are
Depending on the equipment, incoming calls
activated on the iPhone.
can be accepted in different ways.
▷ The setting for mobile data may need to be
▷ Via iDrive:
activated on the iPhone.
"Accept"
▷ WiFi and Bluetooth are activated in the ve-
hicle.
▷ /
Press the relevant button on the steering Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
wheel.
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. "New device"
25

5. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the surroundings and select the
vehicle.
A control number is displayed.
the two match.
7. "Use Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list.
26
On the move QUICK REFERENCE
On the move
Driving Releasing
With drive-ready state switched on:
Drive-ready state Steptronic transmission: press the switch
with the brake applied or the selector lever in
Switching on drive-ready state position P.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Parking
1. Press the brake. Make sure the parking brake is engaged.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
Steptronic transmission
Switching off drive-ready state
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
Steptronic transmission:
R
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, engage se-
lector lever position P.
2. Apply the parking brake.
The engine is switched off.
Automatic Start/Stop function

The Automatic Start/Stop function switches
the engine off automatically when stationary
to save fuel. For driving off, the engine starts ▷ D Drive position.
automatically under the following conditions: ▷ N Neutral.
Steptronic transmission: ▷ R reverse gear.
▷ By releasing the brake pedal. Apply the brake until ready to drive off, other-
▷ With Automatic Hold activated: press the wise the vehicle will move when drive position
accelerator pedal. or reverse gear is selected.
Only engage selector lever position R when the
Parking brake vehicle is stationary.
Engaging
Pull the switch.
The LED on the switch and the indicator
light in the instrument cluster are illuminated.
27
QUICK REFERENCE On the move
Cancelling the selector lever lock Light and vision

Turn indicator, high-beam
headlight, headlight flasher
Turn indicators
Press and hold the button to cancel the selec-

tor lever lock.
Engaging selector lever position P

Only engage selector lever position P when the
vehicle is stationary. ▷ Flashing: press the lever past the resist-
ance point.
▷ One-touch signalling: lightly tap the lever
up or down.
▷ To indicate a turn briefly: press the lever as
far as the resistance point and hold it there
for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
High-beam headlight, headlight

flasher
Press button P.
Press the lever forwards or pull it back.

▷ High-beam headlight on, arrow 1.
The high-beam headlight is illuminated
when the low-beam headlight is switched
on.
▷ High-beam headlight off/headlight flasher,
arrow 2.
28
Lights and lighting Wiper system
Lighting functions Switching on the wiper system
Icon Function
Rear fog light.
Lights off.
Automatic driving lights control.
Daytime driving lights.
Side lights. Press the lever upwards to the desired posi-

tion.
▷ Rest position of the windscreen wipers: po-
Automatic driving lights control. sition 0.
Adaptive lighting functions. ▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
Low-beam headlight. ▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Instrument lighting.
Switching off the wiper system and
flick wiping
Parking light, right.
Parking light, left.
Press the lever down.

▷ To switch off: press lever downwards until
position 0 is reached.
▷ To flick wipe: press the lever downwards
from position 0.
29
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor Air conditioning

Automatic air conditioning
Button Function
Temperature.
To activate: press the lever upwards once from

position 0, arrow 1. Air conditioning function.
To deactivate: press the lever back to position
0. Maximum cooling.
Adjusting the sensitivity of the rain AUTO programme.

sensor
Air recirculation function.
Amount of air, manual.

AUTO programme intensity.
Air distribution, manual.
SYNC programme.
Turn the knurled wheel on the wiper lever.

Defrost function.
Cleaning the windscreen

Rear window heating.
Active seat ventilation.
Seat heating.
To go to the air conditioning

menu.
For the following settings, for
Pull the lever. example: upper body tempera-
ture adjustment, pre-cooling.
30
Pit stop Wheels and tyres
Tyre inflation pressure information

Refuelling
Fuel filler cap

1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
The tyre inflation pressure information can be

found on the tyre pressure label on the body
pillar of the driver's door.
After adjusting the tyre inflation

2. Turn the fuel filler cap anticlockwise.
pressure
3. Place the fuel filler cap in the holder on the
fuel filler flap. For Flat Tyre Monitor:
Reinitialise flat tyre monitor.
Petrol For the Tyre Pressure Monitor:
For optimal fuel consumption, the petrol The corrected tyre inflation pressures are ap-
should be sulphur-free or have a low sulphur plied automatically. Make sure that the tyre
content. settings are correct.
Fuels labelled on the pump as containing For tyres that are not listed in the tyre inflation
metal must not be used. pressure information on the control display, re-
set the Tyre Pressure Monitor.
Diesel
The engine is designed to run on diesel fuel Checking the tyre inflation pressure
complying with DIN EN 590 and ASTM D975. Check regularly and adjust as necessary:
▷ At least twice a month.
▷ Before a long journey.
Electronic oil measurement
Operating requirements
A current reading is available after approxi-
mately 30 minutes of normal driving.
31
Displaying the engine oil level How to get assistance

1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status" Hazard warning lights
3. "Engine oil level"
Different messages are shown on the control
display, depending on the engine oil level. Pay
attention to these messages.
Topping up engine oil
General
Stop the vehicle safely and switch off drive-
ready state before topping up with engine oil. The button is located in the centre console.
Topping up engine oil

ConnectedDrive
BMW Assistance
Contact BMW Assistance for information and
support on all aspects of your vehicle.
1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps"
3. "BMW Assistance"
4. Select the desired service.
Do not top up engine oil unless a message is
displayed in the instrument cluster. Follow the displays on the control display.
A voice contact is established.
Pay attention to the top-up quantity in the
message. BMW Teleservices
Do not add too much engine oil. Teleservices are services that help to keep the
Use the recommended engine oil grades. vehicle mobile.
Teleservices may include the following serv-
ices:
▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Teleservice Call.
▷ At the authorised Service Partner.
32
33
CONTROLS Vehicle cockpit
Vehicle cockpit
Vehicle equipment optional equipment selected or the national-
market version. This also applies to safety-rel-
evant functions and systems. Please comply
This chapter describes all standard, country-
with the relevant laws and regulations when
specific and optional equipment available for
using the corresponding functions and sys-
the model range. It may therefore describe
tems.
equipment and functions which are not avail-
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the
Around the steering wheel
1 Roller sunblind in the rear window Memory function 136

118
2 Safety switch 118 Massage function 137
3 Window lifters 116 6 Lights
4 Exterior mirror operation 134

5 Seat comfort functions
34
Vehicle cockpit CONTROLS
Rear fog light 199 High-beam Assistant 198
Light switch 194 Full Black Panel Display:

Widgets 173
Lights off Instrument cluster without exten-
ded functionality:
Automatic driving lights control
194 Widgets 174
Daytime driving lights 196 Trip data 189
Side lights 195 9 Buttons on steering wheel, left
Manual Speed Limiter 249
Automatic driving lights control
194 Depending on the equipment:
Adaptive lighting functions 196 Cruise Control on/off 250
High-beam Assistant 198
Low-beam headlight 195
Depending on the equipment:

Instrument lighting 200
Active Cruise Control on/off 253
With Steering and Lane Control
Right parking light 195
Assistant 266:
Cruise Control, distance control
Left parking light 195 and lane tracking on/off
Cruise Control: to store a speed

7 Central locking system 103
Speed Limit Assist: to accept the
To unlock
suggested speed 262
To interrupt Cruise Control
To lock
Resuming Cruise Control

8 Steering column lever, left
Turn indicator 159 Active Cruise Control: to increase
the distance
High-beam headlight, headlight Active Cruise Control: to reduce
flasher 160 the distance
Cruise Control rocker switch
10 Instrument cluster 170
35
11 Buttons on steering wheel, right Windscreen wipers 160

Selection lists 189
Rain sensor 161
Volume, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment,
To clean the windscreen 162
Communication 6
Voice control system 55
13 To switch drive-ready state on/off
151
To change the station/music
track, see the Owner's Handbook Automatic Start/Stop function
for Navigation, Entertainment, 151
Communication 6
Telephone, see Owner's 14 Horn, entire area
Handbook for Navigation, Enter-
tainment, Communication 6
Knurled wheel for selection lists 189 15 Steering wheel heating 136
12 Steering column lever, right

16 To adjust the steering wheel 135
17 To unlock the bonnet 400
18 To open and close the boot lid

109
19 Fold-down compartment 338
36
Vehicle cockpit CONTROLS
Around the centre console
1 Control display 50 9 Parking assistance systems 276

2 Ventilation 315
3 Hazard warning lights 423 Panorama View 301
Intelligent Safety 207

10 Driving Experience Control 154
SPORT drive mode
4 Glove compartment 337 COMFORT drive mode
5 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 6 ECO PRO drive mode
6 Automatic air conditioning 310
7 Controller with buttons 51 ADAPTIVE drive mode
8 Parking brake 156
Dynamic Stability Control 241
Automatic Hold 158
11 Steptronic transmission: selector lever 163
37
Around the headliner
1 Emergency call, SOS 425 4 Reading lights 200
2 To operate the electric glass sun- 5 Interior lights 200

roof 119
3 Front passenger airbag indicator

light 204
38
Sensors in the vehicle CONTROLS
Sensors in the vehicle

Vehicle equipment Cameras
This chapter describes all standard, country- Front camera
optional equipment selected or the national-
tems.
The front camera is located in the radiator
grille.
Overview
Depending on the equipment, the following Cameras behind the windscreen
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-
cle:
▷ Front camera.
▷ Cameras behind the windscreen.
▷ Exterior mirror cameras.
▷ Reversing Assist Camera.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Side radar sensors, front.
▷ Side radar sensors, rear. The cameras behind the windscreen are loca-
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump- ted in the area of the interior mirror.
ers.
▷ Side ultrasonic sensors.
Keep the vehicle clean and unobstructed in the
area of the cameras and sensors.
39
CONTROLS Sensors in the vehicle
Exterior mirror cameras ▷ Camera behind the windscreen: the camera

has overheated due to excessive tempera-
tures and was temporarily switched off.
▷ Camera behind the windscreen: during
camera calibration immediately after vehi-
cle delivery.
A Check Control message may be displayed if
the system limits are reached.
An exterior mirror camera is located under

Radar sensors
each exterior mirror housing.
Safety information
Reversing Assist Camera
WARNING
Due to external influences, e.g. interference,
the radar sensors of the vehicle and thus also
the driving assistance systems can be distur-
bed. There is a risk of accident. Observe the
traffic situation, be ready to take over steer-
ing and braking at any time, and actively in-
tervene if the situation warrants it.
The Reversing Assist Camera is located in the Front radar sensor

handle strip of the boot lid.
System limits of the cameras

The camera may have restricted functionality
or incorrect information may be displayed in
situations such as the following:
▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.
▷ On steep crests or dips or on tight bends.
▷ When the camera field of view is covered,
The front radar sensor is located in the front
for example by a fogged up windscreen or
bumper.
stickers.
▷ If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.
▷ With the exterior mirrors folded in.
▷ In the case of bright oncoming light or
strong reflections, for example if the sun is
low in the sky.
▷ In the dark.
40
Sensors in the vehicle CONTROLS
Side radar sensors, front ▷ After work performed incorrectly on the ve-
hicle paintwork near to the sensors.
▷ At steep crests or hollows of hills.
Ultrasonic sensors
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear
The radar sensors are located on the side of bumpers
the front bumper.
The ultrasonic sensors of the
Park Distance Control are loca-
Side radar sensors, rear ted in the front and rear bump-
ers.
Side ultrasonic sensors
The radar sensors are located on the side be-

hind the rear bumper.
System limits of the radar sensors

The ultrasonic sensors of the Park Assist are
The radar sensors may have restricted func- located on the side in the front and rear bump-
tionality or may not be available at all in situa- ers.
tions such as the following:
▷ If the sensors are contaminated, for exam-
ple by icing.
System limits of the ultrasonic
sensors
▷ If the sensors are obscured, for example by
stickers, foils or a number plate holder. The physical limits of ultrasound measurement
may be reached when detecting objects in sit-
▷ If the sensors are misaligned, for example
uations involving the following, for example:
due to parking damage.
▷ If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g. by
▷ If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-
stickers.
ered, for example by protruding loads.
▷ If the sensors are misaligned, for example
▷ When the field of view of the sensors is cov-
due to parking damage.
ered, for example by garage walls, hedges,
snow hills, vehicles or trailers.
41
CONTROLS Sensors in the vehicle
▷ After work performed incorrectly on the ve-

hicle paintwork near to the sensors.
▷ Small children and animals.
▷ Persons wearing certain types of clothing,
for example a jacket.
▷ If there is external interference with the ul-
trasonic sound, for example by passing ve-
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic
sources.
▷ Certain weather conditions; for example,
high air humidity, wet conditions, snowfall,
cold, extreme heat or strong wind.
▷ Trailer drawbars and tow hitches of other
vehicles.
▷ Thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ Moving objects.
▷ Higher protruding objects, for example pro-
jecting walls.
▷ Objects with corners, edges and smooth
surfaces.
▷ For objects with fine surfaces or structures,
e.g. fences, plants or bushes.
▷ Objects with porous surfaces.
▷ Small and low objects such as boxes.
▷ Soft obstacles or obstacles covered in foam
material.
▷ In washing bays and car washes.
▷ On uneven surfaces, for example speed
bumps.
▷ In the presence of dense exhaust fumes.
▷ The ultrasonic sensors do not take into ac-
count loads projecting beyond the outline of
the vehicle.
▷ If the cover of the trailer tow hitch is incor-
rectly seated.
42
Vehicle operating condition CONTROLS
Vehicle operating condition

Vehicle equipment Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can start moving and
roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before
leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- Observe the following to ensure that the vehi-
evant functions and systems. Please comply cle is secured against rolling away:
with the relevant laws and regulations when ▷ Apply the parking brake.
▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb
tems.
on uphill or downhill gradient.
▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on uphill
General or downhill gradient, for example with a
chock.
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in
one of the three states:
WARNING
▷ Rest state.
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
▷ Standby state.
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
▷ Drive-ready state. themselves or other road users, for example
by the following actions:
Rest state ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.

▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Principle ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
If the vehicle is in rest state, it is switched off. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Operating vehicle equipment.
General There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
The vehicle is in rest state before you open it leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-
from outside and once you have left the vehicle hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-
and locked it. cle key with you and lock the vehicle.
Automatic rest state

The vehicle switches automatically to rest
state in conditions such as the following:
43
CONTROLS Vehicle operating condition
▷ After a few minutes, if no operation is per- General

formed on the vehicle.
The vehicle switches to standby state after the
▷ When the vehicle battery state of charge is front doors are opened from the outside.
low.
▷ Depending on the iDrive setting: one or Manual standby state
both of the front doors is opened when
leaving the vehicle after a journey. General
In some situations, for example during a tele- The standby state can be switched on again
phone call or when the low-beam headlight is after the rest state has been automatically es-
switched on, the vehicle will not switch auto- tablished.
matically to rest state.
With button on the radio
Establishing rest state on opening
Press the button on the radio.
the front doors The control display and instru-
After a trip, the rest state can be established ment cluster illuminate.
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,
the driver and front passenger must exit the
vehicle.
1. "CAR" With the Start/Stop button

2. "Settings" Press the Start/Stop button. The
control display and instrument
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
cluster illuminate.
4. "Switch off after door opening"
Manual activation of rest state

To establish rest state in the vehicle at the end Display in the instrument cluster
of the journey:
OFF is shown in the instru-
Press and hold the button on ment cluster. The drivetrain is
the radio until the OFF display switched off and standby state
on the instrument cluster turns switched on.
off.
Drive-ready state
Standby state
Principle
Principle Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to
When standby state is activated, most func- starting the engine.
tions can be operated while the vehicle is still
stationary. Any desired settings can be per-
formed.
44
Vehicle operating condition CONTROLS
General Switching on drive-ready state

Some functions, for example Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control, can only be operated when drive- Principle
ready state is switched on. Drive-ready state is switched on
using the Start/Stop button.
Safety information
DANGER
A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ven- Steptronic transmission
tilation can allow harmful exhaust fumes to
1. Press the brake.
enter the vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain
pollutants which are colourless and odour- 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
less. In enclosed spaces, exhaust fumes can Starting proceeds automatically for a short
also build up outside the vehicle. There is a time and stops as soon as the engine starts.
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe clear
Most of the indicator and warning lights in
and ensure sufficient ventilation.
the instrument cluster illuminate for varying
lengths of time.
WARNING Petrol engine

An unsecured vehicle can start moving and Depending on the motorisation, full drive
roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before power and the entire engine speed range may
leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against not be available until approx. 30 seconds after
rolling away. the engine is started. In this case, the vehicle
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi- will not accelerate in the usual way.
cle is secured against rolling away: For further information:
▷ Apply the parking brake. ▷ Revolution counter, see page 183.
▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb ▷ Full Black Panel Display:
on uphill or downhill gradient. Power display, see page 184.
or downhill gradient, for example with a Diesel engine
chock.
With the engine cold and at temperatures be-
low 0 ℃, 32 ℉ the starting operation can be
delayed slightly due to automatic preheating.
NOTICE
A Check Control message is shown.
Repeated attempts to start the engine or
After starting the engine, full drive power and
starting it several times in quick succession
the entire engine speed range may not be
can cause the starter to overheat. Fuel will
available until the engine is at operating tem-
also be unburned or insufficiently burned,
perature. Pay attention to the engine tempera-
which could cause the catalytic converter to
ture display and power display as applicable.
overheat. There is a risk of material damage.
In this case, the vehicle will not accelerate in
Avoid repeated starting in quick succession.
the usual way.
45
CONTROLS Vehicle operating condition
▷ Revolution counter, see page 183.

▷ Engine temperature display, see page 186.
▷ Full Black Panel Display:
Power display, see page 184.
Display in the instrument cluster

The activated drive-ready state is indicated
in the instrument cluster, depending on the
equipment, by the display of information re-
quired for driving or the READY display.
Switching off drive-ready state
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, engage se-
lector lever position P.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
changes to standby state.
46
iDrive CONTROLS
iDrive
Vehicle equipment or devices if the traffic situation allows you to
do so. Stop if necessary and operate the sys-
tems or devices with the vehicle at a stand-
still.
Digit input and display
Main menu
General
using the corresponding functions and sys- The main menu is divided into two areas. The
tems. left area contains menu items that can be used
to access all the iDrive functions. The right
area contains widgets that provide quick ac-
Operating concept cess to certain functions.
Principle
iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain-
ment system and includes a large number of
functions.
General
Depending on the equipment, the functions
can be operated as follows:
▷ Via the Controller. Media/Radio
▷ Via the control display. All of the entertainment system functions,
▷ Via the touchpad. for example radio stations or connection with
external devices.
▷ Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
▷ Via gesture control. Communication
Telephone and message functions, e-mail
Safety information and calendar, as well as the connection and
management of mobile devices such as smart-
WARNING phones.
Operating integrated information systems

Navigation
and communication devices during a journey
may distract you from the traffic situation. Access to navigation system, destination
You could lose control of the vehicle. There is entry and traffic information. Configurable map
a risk of accident. Only operate the systems
47
CONTROLS iDrive
views as well as other functions such as Points Input comparison

of Interest and areas to avoid. When entering names and addresses, the se-
lection is gradually narrowed down or may be
My vehicle supplemented with every subsequent charac-
Information on vehicle status and jour- ter entered.
neys. Access to the Integrated Owner's Entries are continuously compared with the
Handbook as well as management of driver data saved in the vehicle.
profiles and ranges of adjustment for the vehi-
cle and iDrive. ▷ Only letters and characters for which data
is available are offered when making a digit
Apps input.
Management of apps, access to apps as ▷ Destination search: place names can be

well as vehicle functions. Additional apps and entered in all languages available in iDrive.
vehicle functions can be obtained from the
BMW Store. Activating/deactivating functions
Some menu items are preceded by a check-
Widgets box. The box indicates whether the function is
Widgets provide quick access to fre- enabled or disabled. Selecting the menu item
quently used functions. The defined widgets enables or disables the function.
display dynamic content – for example, the Function is enabled.
navigation map – and also serve as buttons. Function is disabled.
Letters and numbers Status information

Letters and numbers can be selected when
entering a destination, for example. General
Letters and numbers can be entered using The status field is located in the top area of the
the controller, the touchpad, control display control display. Status information is displayed
or voice control depending on the equipment. in the form of icons.
The keyboard display changes automatically.
Icons for telephone
Icon Function
To switch between upper and Icon Meaning

lower case.
Incoming or outgoing call.
To enter a space.
Missed call.
To switch between languages.
Signal strength of mobile phone net-
To use voice input. work.
To confirm your digit input. Network search.
Move the entry area to the left No mobile phone network available.
or right.
Mobile phone charge level is critically
low.
Data transfer not possible.
48
iDrive CONTROLS
Icon Meaning Icon Meaning
Roaming active. Passenger on board.
Tracking active. Do not disturb.
SMS received.
Favourite buttons
Message received.
Reminder. General
iDrive functions, for example radio stations,
Sending not possible.
navigation destinations, phone numbers and
shortcuts to the menu, can be saved to favour-
Icons for entertainment ite buttons and accessed directly.
Icon Meaning Overview

Bluetooth audio.
USB device.
Connected Music with Spotify.
WiFi.
Apple CarPlay.
Android Auto.
Other icons Favourite buttons
Icon Meaning
Saving a function
Check Control message.
A function can be saved to a favourite button.
Sound output active. A button that has already been assigned a
function can be overwritten with a different
Sound output deactivated. function.
Voice control system active. 1. Select the function via iDrive, for example
Current vehicle position. radio station.
Traffic information. 2. Press and hold the desired button

Driver profile. until the bar shown on the control display
has fully loaded.
Notifications.
Data protection. Performing a function

Press the key.
Route guidance active.
49
CONTROLS iDrive
The function is carried out immediately. If you Control display

have selected a phone number for example,
the connection will also be established. Safety information
Displaying the button assignment

NOTICE
Touch the buttons with your finger. Do not
wear gloves or use objects. Objects located in front of the control display
may slip and damage the control display.
The button assignment is displayed in the up-
There is a risk of material damage. Do not
per area of the control display.
place objects in front of the control display.
Deleting all button assignments

It is possible to remove the assignments of all Switching on/off automatically
buttons. The control display is switched on automati-
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and simulta- cally when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon
neously for approx. 5 seconds. as the control display is required for operation.
2. "OK" In certain situations, the control display is
switched off automatically, for example if no
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-
Control display and eral minutes.
Controller Switching on/off manually

The control display can also be switched off
Principle manually.
The iDrive functions are shown on the control
1. Tilt the Controller up.
display.
2. "Screen off"
Overview Press the Controller or any button on the Con-
troller to switch it back on again.
System limits
If the control display is exposed to very high
temperatures, for example because of strong
sunlight, the brightness may be reduced and
the control display may even switch itself off.
Normal functions will be restored when the
temperature is reduced, for example by provid-
ing shade or using the air conditioning.
1 Control display
2 Controller
50
iDrive CONTROLS
Controller Buttons on the Controller
General Button Function

The buttons are used to go to menus directly. To go to the main menu.
The Controller is used to select menu items
and perform settings.
To go to the Media/Radio menu.
Operation
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex- To go to the Communication menu.
ample.
To go to the navigation map.
To go to the destination entry menu

of the navigation system.
To go to the previous screen.
To go to the Options menu.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.
Operation using the

Controller
Going to the main menu
Press the key.
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between

screens, for example.
The main menu is displayed.
51
CONTROLS iDrive
Selecting the menu ▷ To delete the selected page: "Delete

page".
Selecting menu items ▷ To adapt the widget content: select the
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu widget.
item is highlighted. 5. "Done"
2. Press the Controller.
Adapting the content
Selecting widgets Depending on the equipment, the content of
1. In the main menu, tilt the Controller to the the "MEDIA" and "COM" menus can be adap-
right. ted, for example to delete entries for unused
functions in the menu.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget
is selected. 1. Select menu.
3. Press the Controller. 2. "Personalise menu"
It is also possible to select widgets in the in- 3. Select the desired setting.
strument cluster.
Switching between screens
Adapting the menu After a menu item has been selected, for ex-
ample "Settings", a new screen is displayed.
Adapting widgets
▷ Tilt the Controller to the left.
You can adapt the widgets in the main menu. It
The current screen is closed and the previ-
is possible to create multiple pages with widg-
ous screen is displayed.
ets and switch between the pages. It is only
possible to make adaptations with the vehicle
▷ Press the button.
at a standstill.
The previous screen is opened again.
1. Select the required page in the main menu.
▷ Tilt the Controller to the right.
Only the page that is currently selected can
be adapted. The new screen is opened.
2. Tilt the Controller up. An arrow indicates that further screens can be
called up.
3. "Adjust main menu"
4. Select the desired adaptation: Accessing the Options menu
▷ Select the icon and the desired
Menu items are used to access additional op-
widget: to add a new widget.
tions.
The desired widget will be added at the
Various options are available depending on
relevant position. It is possible to display
the menu item selected.
a maximum of four widgets per page.
Press the key.
▷ Select the icon: to delete the selec-
ted widget.
Available options are displayed.
▷ To add a new page: "Add page".
52
iDrive CONTROLS
Entering letters and numbers Entering letters and numbers

▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
Digit input the control display.
1. Turn the Controller: to select letters or num- ▷ Always enter associated characters, for ex-
bers. ample accents or dots, so that the letter can
2. : to confirm your digit input. be clearly identified.
▷ The input options depend on the set lan-
Deleting guage. You may need to enter special char-
acters using the Controller.
Icon Function Set system language, see page 68.
Press the Controller: to delete letters or
numbers. Entering special characters
Press and hold the Controller: to delete
Digit input Operation
all letters or numbers.
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the
ter. touchpad.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en- To enter a space. From the centre of the
tries, the letters for which entries exist can be touchpad, swipe to the
displayed in a letter field. right.
1. Turn the Controller quickly to the left or To enter a hy- At the top of the touch-
right. phen. pad, swipe to the right.
2. Select the initial letter of the desired entry. To enter an un- At the bottom of the
The first entry for the selected letter is dis- derscore. touchpad, swipe to the
played in the list. right.
Using the map

Operation by touchpad
The navigation system's map can be moved
using the touchpad. Tap the map on the con-
General trol display and then continue the operation
Depending on the equipment, some iDrive using the touchpad.
functions can be operated with the touchpad
Function Operation
of the controller.
To move the map. Swipe in the appropri-
Selecting functions ate direction.
1. "CAR" To display the Tap once.
2. "Settings" menu.
3. "General settings"
4. "Touchpad"
5. Select the desired setting.
53
CONTROLS iDrive
Using alphabetical lists ▷ Tap the icon and select the desired
widget: to add a new widget.
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en- The desired widget will be added at the
try exists. relevant position. It is possible to display
a maximum of four widgets per page.
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.
▷ Tap the icon.
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed
in the list. The widget is enlarged.
▷ Tap the icon.
The widget is reduced.
Operation via control display
▷ Tap the icon.
The widget is deleted.
General
▷ To add a new page: tap "Add page".
Depending on the equipment, the control dis-
play may be equipped with a touchscreen. ▷ To delete the selected page: tap "Delete
page".
It is possible to tap on menu items and widg-
ets. Touch the control display with your fingers. ▷ To adapt the content of the widget: tap
Do not use any objects. the centre of the widget.
4. Tap "Done".
Going to the main menu
Tap the icon. Showing/hiding the display bar
In the top part of the control display, it is pos-
sible to show or hide a display bar with addi-
tional functions.
▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis-
play bar at the top edge of the screen.
▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display
bar at the top edge of the screen.
Switching between screens

The main menu is displayed. After selecting a menu item, a new screen is
displayed.
Adapting widgets An arrow indicates that further screens can be
You can adapt the widgets in the main menu. It called up.
is possible to create multiple pages with widg- ▷ Swipe to the left.
ets and switch between the pages. It is only
▷ Tap the arrow.
possible to make adaptations with the vehicle
at a standstill. The new screen is opened.
1. Select the required page in the main menu.

Only the page that is currently selected can
be adapted.
2. Tap the icon in the main menu.
3. Select the desired adaptation:
54
iDrive CONTROLS
Entering letters and numbers BMW Intelligent Personal

Digit input Assistant
1. Depending on the equipment, tap the
icon on the control display or a key- Principle
board will be displayed when you approach The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
the control display. personal assistant that enables natural voice
2. Enter the required letters and numbers. control of various vehicle functions. The Per-
sonal Assistant simplifies the operation of the
Deleting vehicle with the automation of processes and
routines.
Icon Function
General
Tap the icon: to delete letter or number.
▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-
Tap and hold the icon: to delete all let- able depending on the national-market ver-
ters or numbers. sion.
▷ The system includes special microphones
Using the map on the driver's side and the passenger's
side.
The navigation map can be moved on the con-
trol display. ▷ Say commands at a normal volume.
Speaking directly into the microphone does
Function Operation not improve the speech recognition.
To move the map. Swipe in the appropri- ▷ Commands and numbers should be spoken
ate direction. fluently, with the usual emphasis and at a
normal volume and speed.
To zoom in/out on Pinch together or move
the map. apart your fingers. ▷ ›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-
ken.
To display the Tap once.
menu. Operating requirements
▷ A system language that is supported by the
Using alphabetical lists Personal Assistant must be set via iDrive.
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en- Set system language, see page 68.
tries, the letters for which entries exist can be ▷ Always say commands in the configured
displayed in a letter field. system language.
1. Tap the letter in front of the list. For the full range of functions, the following
A letter box is displayed. functions should be activated, set or booked:
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry. ▷ Online speech processing, see page 58.
▷ All settings under
BMW ConnectedDrive, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication.
▷ Activation word, see page 56.
55
CONTROLS iDrive
▷ A driver profile. Preset activation word

▷ Synchronising a driver profile, see The preset activation word ›Hello BMW‹ can
page 76. be activated and deactivated.
▷ Relevant ConnectedDrive Services via the 1. "CAR"
ConnectedDrive Store.
2. "Settings"
Activating voice input 3. "General settings"

4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
General 5. "Voice control"
Voice input can be activated in various ways: 6. "Activation word"
7. "Activation word"
▷ Press the button on the steering
wheel. Personal activation word
The microphone on the driver's side is ac- A personal activation word can be set in the
tive. active driver profile in addition to the preset
▷ Say the activation word ›Hello BMW‹ or the activation word ›Hello BMW‹. The personal ac-
personal activation word. tivation word can also be changed or deleted.
The microphones on the driver's or front The activation word should consist of multiple
passenger's side are active with the syllables to ensure good detection. An addi-
following voice control, depending on tion, such as ›Hello‹ is not necessary.
where the activation word was spoken.
1. "CAR"
Then say the command. The activation word
2. "Settings"
and the command can be spoken without
pause in one sentence. It's possible that there 3. "General settings"
may be no further spoken commands available 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
for the selected function. In this case, switch to
5. "Voice control"
iDrive to operate the function.
6. "Activation word"
Button on the steering wheel 7. "Personal activation word"
8. "Set personal activation word"
1. Press the button on the steering 9. Select the desired setting.
wheel briefly.
2. Say the command. Activation word from third-party providers
Depending on the national-market version,
Activation word some third-party providers provide digital voice
assistants, for example Amazon Alexa.
General
Supported voice assistants can be used with
Saying the activation word ›Hello BMW‹ or the a connected smartphone in the vehicle. In ad-
personal activation word starts the system. dition to the preset or personal activation word,
56
iDrive CONTROLS
the activation word of voice assistants from Communication

connected third-party providers can be used. For example, when a mobile phone is connec-
1. "CAR" ted, calls can be started or SMS can be sent.
2. "Settings" ▷ ›Call John Smith on the mobile phone.‹
3. "General settings" ▷ ›Dial the number 0370 505 0160.‹
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" ▷ ›New text message to John Smith: I'm on

my way.‹
5. "Voice control"
6. "Third-party providers" Entertainment
7. Select the desired setting. ▷ ›Play Blue Suede Shoes by Elvis Presley.‹
▷ ›Next track.‹
Cancelling voice input
Air conditioning
▷ Press the button on the steering
▷ ›Turn off air conditioning.‹
wheel again.
▷ ›Activate fresh air.‹
▷ ›Cancel‹
▷ ›I'm cold.‹
▷ Tilt the controller to the right or left.
▷ Press the Controller. Windows and light
▷ ›Open the windows automatically.‹
Possible commands
▷ ›Delete activation point for the automatic
window lifter.‹
General
▷ ›Ambient light.‹
Most of the contents on the control display, for
example menu items and list entries, can be
Owner's Handbook by voice control
said as commands. Say list entries as shown.
It is possible to ask simple questions about
Instructions can be issued or questions can be
the vehicle functions and about operating the
asked where the Personal Assistant provides
vehicle.
support.
The voice control system and the feedback it
Functional examples provides are not a substitute for the printed
or Integrated Owner's Handbook. The speech
Vehicle status and vehicle information recognition function and the quality of the
feedback may vary.
▷ ›Is my tyre pressure still OK?‹
›How do you disable the front passenger
▷ ›Show me the sport displays.‹
airbag‹
▷ ›Open Owner's Handbook.‹
The Personal Assistant gives a response.
Where applicable, the section of the Integrated
Navigation
Owner's Handbook is displayed on the control
▷ ›Drive me to 1 High Street in Manchester.‹ display if the vehicle is at standstill.
▷ ›Take me home.‹
▷ ›Are there any traffic messages?‹
57
CONTROLS iDrive
Menu items celled inadvertently, for example due to back-

Commands for the menu items are spoken in ground noise or conversations in the vehicle.
the same way as they are selected using the 1. "CAR"
Controller.
2. "Settings"
1. Activate the voice input. 3. "General settings"
2. ›MEDIA‹ 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
3. ›Saved stations‹ 5. "Voice control"
The saved stations are displayed on the con- 6. "Speaking during voice output"
trol display.
Online speech processing
Help for voice control
Online speech processing improves the quality
▷ ›Voice commands‹: to have voice command of the speech recognition and search results
options read aloud. for points of interest. To use the function, data
▷ ›General information on voice control‹: have is sent across an encrypted connection to a
information on the operating principle of the service provider where it is delete stored.
voice control announced.
1. "CAR"
▷ ›Help‹: to have help on the current menu
read aloud. 2. "Settings"
Settings 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control"
Selecting the voice control
6. "Online speech processing"
You can select whether the system uses the
standard dialogue or the short variant. Adjusting the volume
If the short variant of the voice control is selec- Turn the volume control button during the spo-
ted, the system announcements are given in ken instructions until the desired volume is ob-
shortened form. tained.
1. "CAR" The volume setting is retained even if you
2. "Settings" change the volume of other audio sources.
Using the voice control of the
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
smartphone
5. "Voice control"
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-
6. "Length of answers" nected to the vehicle can be operated via voice
7. Select the desired setting. input.
The device must be connected via Apple Car-
Saying during voice output Play or Android Auto.
It is possible to answer while the voice control
system is giving feedback. The function can be 1. Press and hold the button on the
deactivated if the feedback is frequently can- steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
58
iDrive CONTROLS
The voice control of the smartphone is acti- Adapting the programme

vated. 1. "CAR"
2. "Caring Car"
2. Release the button.
3. Select the desired programme.
If activation is successful, a confirmation
appears on the control display. 4. "Music settings"
Automating habits
System limits
General ▷ The Personal Assistant provides informa-
The Personal Assistant is able to automate tion about vehicle functions that may not be
regular practices; for example, automatically installed in the vehicle.
activating the seat heating once a certain out- This also applies to safety-relevant func-
side temperature is reached. This involves cre- tions and systems.
ating rules that can be activated and deactiva-
▷ Certain noises may be detected and could
ted at any time.
cause problems. Keep doors, windows and
the glass sunroof closed.
Activating/deactivating
▷ Noises from the front passenger or other
1. "APPS"
passengers can impair the system. Avoid
2. "Installed apps" background noise in the vehicle while you
3. "Personal assistant" are speaking.
4. "Automate habits" ▷ Strong dialects may prevent speech recog-
5. Select the desired setting. nition from working properly.
▷ A poor data connection influences the re-
Caring Car sponse time of the Personal Assistant and
the Search.
Principle
A short programme harmonises various vehi- BMW gesture control
cle functions in the interior to suit driver re-
quirements.
Principle
General BMW gesture control enables some iDrive
By selecting a programme, the interior lighting, functions to be operated simply by moving
climate control and music selection will be ad- your hands.
justed. A programme lasts for 3 minutes.
1. "CAR"
2. "Caring Car"
3. Select the desired programme.
The programme can be ended prematurely:
"End programme"
59
CONTROLS iDrive
Overview 4. "Gesture control"

5. "Gesture control"
Settings
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Gesture control"
The camera in the headliner detects gestures
made in the area of the centre console at the Performing gestures
height of the control display. ▷ Perform the gestures under the interior mir-
ror and to the side of the steering wheel.
Activating/deactivating ▷ Perform the gestures clearly.
1. "CAR" ▷ The gestures can also be performed from
2. "Settings" the passenger's side.
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move your index finger forward in the direction of To accept phone call.
the display and back again. To select the highlighted entry
of a list during voice input.
To confirm the pop-up.
Move your hand across the width of the control To reject phone call.
display in the direction of the passenger's side. To close the pop-up.
To end voice input.
Slowly move your hand in a clockwise circle with To increase the volume.
your index finger pointing forward.
Gesture is detected after approximately one cir-
cular movement.
60
iDrive CONTROLS
Gesture Operation Function
Slowly move your hand in an anticlockwise circle To reduce the volume.

with your index finger pointing forward.
Gesture is detected after approximately one cir-
cular movement.
Pinch your thumb and index finger together and Surround View: to rotate cam-
move your hand horizontally right or left. era view.
This gesture is only possible
with the vehicle at standstill.
Move your index and middle fingers apart and Individually assignable ges-
extend them forwards. ture.
With your thumb stretched out to the left, move To skip back.
your fist back and forth. The previous music track is
played.
With your thumb stretched out to the right, move Skip function forwards.
your fist back and forth. The next music track is played.
Stretch out all five fingers, make a fist and then Individually assignable ges-
stretch out all five fingers again. ture.
Assigning a gesture individually Selecting the function

1. "CAR"
General 2. "Settings"
Two gestures can be assigned individually and 3. "General settings"
can be configured for certain functions, for ex-
ample: 4. "Gesture control"
▷ Route guidance to home address. 5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or

"Function assignment gesture 2"
▷ Mute/playback.
▷ Control display on/off.
61
CONTROLS iDrive
System limits
Detection of gestures by the camera in the
headliner can be disrupted under the following
circumstances:
▷ The camera lens is covered.
▷ There are objects on the interior mirror.
▷ The camera lens is dirty; clean the camera
lens.
Sensors and camera lenses, see page 435.
▷ The gesture is performed outside the de-
tection range.
▷ Wearing of gloves or jewellery.
▷ Smoking in the interior.
62
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade

Vehicle equipment ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
This chapter describes all standard, country- There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
specific and optional equipment available for leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-
the model range. It may therefore describe hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-
equipment and functions which are not avail- cle key with you and lock the vehicle.
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- Operating requirements
evant functions and systems. Please comply ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
tems.
▷ Mobile reception.
▷ A consent for the transmission of the corre-
BMW Remote Software sponding data was given in the Data Pro-
Upgrade tection menu.
Further information:
Principle Data protection, see page 72.
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-
date the entire software of the vehicle. This Search for an upgrade
makes new functions, functional enhance-
ments or quality improvements available. Operating requirements
The standby state must be turned on to search
General for a software upgrade.
BMW recommends carrying out the Remote
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes Automatic search
available. The vehicle regularly searches for updates in
the background.
Safety information
Manual search
1. "CAR"
WARNING
2. "Settings"
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger 3. "General settings"
themselves or other road users, for example 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
by the following actions: 5. "Search for upgrades"
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. 6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
▷ Releasing the parking brake. play.
▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
63
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Download of an upgrade display while downloading and following suc-

cessful completion of the installation.
Automatic download This information is also available in the Con-
The data for the Remote Software Upgrade is nectedDrive customer portal.
automatically downloaded to the vehicle when
available. No consent to download is required. Displaying information
Display in the vehicle:
Via BMW app
1. "CAR"
If an upgrade is available, information about
2. "Settings"
the new software version is displayed in the
BMW app. 3. "General settings"
The data for the upgrade can then be down- 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
loaded to a mobile device, for example via an 5. "Info on version"
existing Wi-Fi connection. Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal
The data can then be transferred from the mo- on the Internet:
bile device to the vehicle. www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.
This transmission method accelerates the
download of the data, for example in areas Installing the upgrade
with limited mobile network availability.
1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to General

the smartphone. ▷ Installing the upgrade may cause software
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app. modifications not made by the vehicle man-
ufacturer to be deleted, such as perform-
3. Establish the connection to the vehicle.
ance increases.
▷ iOS: connect Bluetooth audio and WiFi.
▷ Modifications to the on-board power supply
▷ Android: connect WiFi. of the vehicle, for example to control units
The data transfer of the upgrade from the that have not been made by the manufac-
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the turer of the vehicle, can cause the installa-
background only while driving. tion to malfunction.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis- ▷ Installation can take around 20 minutes.
play. ▷ Installation cannot be interrupted.
For further information: ▷ The vehicle cannot be used during installa-
Connect mobile devices to the vehicle, see tion.
page 78. ▷ You may leave the vehicle during installa-
tion.
Release notes ▷ The installation does not occur until the
consent was given.
General
The release notes describe the updates inclu-
ded in the Remote Software Upgrade. The ver-
sion information can be shown on the control
64
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
Prerequisites for the installation Starting installation

▷ Adequate charge state of the battery. The upgrade can be installed when all prereq-
▷ The outside temperature is above -10 ℃, uisites have been met.
14 ℉. 1. "CAR"
▷ The vehicle is parked on level ground. 2. "Settings"
▷ The hazard warning lights are switched off. 3. "General settings"
▷ The selector lever position P is engaged. 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
▷ The engine is turned off and sufficiently 5. "Start upgrade now"
cooled down.
Follow the instructions on the control dis-
▷ The automatic engine start for pre-condi- play.
tioning is not enabled via iDrive.
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre- Functional limitations
requisites on the control display.
During the upgrade, many of the functions are
If the prerequisites are not met, for example temporarily unavailable, for example:
a sufficient vehicle battery charge state, the
▷ Hazard warning lights.
upgrade will not be offered for installation.
▷ Central locking system and, if necessary,
Look out for an offer to install, for example
Comfort Access.
after driving for a long period.
▷ Side lights.
Preparing the vehicle ▷ Horn.
▷ Park the vehicle in a safe place off the pub- ▷ Alarm system.
lic roads. ▷ Emergency call.
▷ Mobile phone reception must be guaran- ▷ Window lifters.
teed so that an error message can be sent
▷ Operating the boot lid.
if the installation is cancelled, for example.
▷ Glass sunroof.
▷ Close the windows.
▷ Fuel filler flap lock.
▷ Close the glass sunroof.
The driver's door can be unlocked and locked
▷ Closing the luggage compartment
from outside with the integrated key.
▷ Remove devices that consume energy, for
example mobile phone. After successful upgrade
▷ Disconnect the trailer or load carrier. The vehicle can be used again immediately.
▷ The vehicle key must be located in the vehi- Purchased services, e.g. Real Time Traffic In-
cle for the consent for installation. formation or Remote Services, are automati-
▷ Switch off the exterior lights. cally reactivated during your next drive.
▷ Remove the devices connected to the After an extended stationary period, charge
socket for on-board diagnosis. the vehicle battery with an extended drive.
65
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-
structions on the control display or in the BMW
app.
If the malfunction cannot be rectified, contact
an authorised Service Partner or another quali-
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
Validity of Owner's Handbook
Vehicle production
When the vehicle leaves the factory, the con-
tents of the printed Owner's Handbook are up
to date.
After a software update in the vehicle

via Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated
the latest information.
66
General settings CONTROLS
General settings
Vehicle equipment Setting the time format
1. "CAR"
This chapter describes all standard, country- 2. "Settings"
equipment and functions which are not avail- 4. "Date and time"
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the 5. "Time format:"
optional equipment selected or the national- 6. Select the desired setting.
with the relevant laws and regulations when Automatic time setting
tems. Depending on the equipment, the time, date
and, if necessary, time zone are updated auto-
matically.
Time
1. "CAR"
Setting the time zone 2. "Settings"
1. "CAR" 3. "General settings"
2. "Settings" 4. "Date and time"
3. "General settings" 5. "Automatic time setting"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time zone:" Date
Setting the date
Setting the time 1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
4. "Date and time"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Date:"
5. "Time:"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours displayed.
are displayed.
8. Select the month and year.
8. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-
9. "OK"
nutes are displayed.
9. "OK"
67
CONTROLS General settings
Setting the date format of the driver. This system supports various ve-
hicle assistance systems, for example:
1. "CAR"
▷ Attentiveness Assistant.
2. "Settings"
▷ Steering and Lane Control Assistant with
Assisted Driving Plus.
4. "Date and time"
5. "Date format:" Activating/deactivating
6. Select the desired setting. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Language 3. "General settings"
4. "Driver Attention Camera"
Setting the system language 5. Select the desired setting.
1. "CAR"
System limits
2. "Settings"
The Driver Attention Camera may have re-
stricted functionality in situations such as the
4. "Language" following:
5. Select the desired setting. ▷ If the Driver Attention Camera is covered by
the steering wheel rim.
Selecting the units of ▷ If the driver is wearing sunglasses that

block infrared light.
measurement
Depending on the national-market version, it Trip data settings
is possible to select the units of measurement
for various values, for example, consumption,
Principle
distances and temperature.
The intervals at which the trip data is reset can
1. "CAR" be adjusted.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" Resetting trip data
4. "Units" 1. "CAR"
5. Select the desired setting. 2. "Settings"
4. "Reset journey data"
Driver Attention Camera
Principle
The instrument cluster contains a camera
which monitors the driver's activity. The cam-
era evaluates the head position and opening of
the eyes in order to analyse the attentiveness
68
Speed limit warning Activating/deactivating pop-

ups
Principle
The speed limit warning can be used to set a Pop-ups are automatically shown on the con-
speed limit. A warning will be issued when this trol display for some functions. Some of these
speed limit is exceeded. pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.
1. "CAR"
General 2. "Settings"
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again, after drop-
ping below it by 5 km/h, 3 mph. 4. "Pop-ups"
Adjusting
1. "CAR"
Control display
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" Brightness
4. "Speed warning"
1. "CAR"
5. "Warning above:"
2. "Settings"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
3. "Displays"
is displayed.
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
Activating/deactivating 6. Press the Controller.
1. "CAR" 7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright-
ness is obtained.
2. "Settings"
Depending on the lighting conditions, the
4. "Speed warning"
brightness control may not be immediately ap-
5. "Speed warning" parent.
Setting the current speed as the

speed limit warning Resetting vehicle data
1. "CAR"
All individual settings can be reset to the
2. "Settings" factory settings when drive-ready state is
3. "General settings" switched off. Data can only be deleted with the
4. "Speed warning" vehicle at a standstill.
5. "Select current speed" 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
69
CONTROLS General settings
4. "Reset vehicle data" portant customer information remain for as

5. "Reset vehicle data" long as they are relevant.
If the settings saved in a driver profile are 1. Tilt the Controller up.
synchronised with a ConnectedDrive account, 2. "Notifications"
these settings will be retained in the Connect-
3. Select the desired notifications.
edDrive account.

Notifications 5. Select the desired setting.
Principle Settings
All notifications received by the vehicle are It is possible to specify which notifications are
shown centrally in the menu in the form of a allowed and which notifications are displayed
list. at the start or end of a journey.

General 2. "Notifications"
The following notifications can be displayed: 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
▷ Traffic messages. 4. "Settings"
▷ Check Control messages. 5. Select the desired setting.
▷ Service requirement messages.
▷ Communication messages, for example e- Displaying notifications
mail, SMS or reminders.
▷ Messages, for example from the BMW app. General
▷ Messages from the vehicle manufacturer, The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant can be
for example technical information or impor- used to set the extent to which notifications
tant customer information. are displayed. Depending on the situation, the
desired status can be activated.
The number of notifications is also displayed in
the status field. State Description
"Do not Incoming calls and non-urgent

Accessing notifications disturb" notifications are not displayed.
1. Tilt the Controller up. The icon in the status
2. "Notifications" information is displayed to in-
3. Select the desired notification. dicate the number of notifica-
tions.
Deleting notifications "Passenger Private contents, for example
Notifications can be deleted from the list. on board" messages, will not be dis-
Permanent Check Control messages or mes- played directly.
sages from the vehicle manufacturer with im- The icon in the status
information is displayed to in-
dicate the number of notifica-
tions.
70
2. "Notifications"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Notification display"
71
CONTROLS Personal settings
Personal settings
Vehicle equipment Deleting personal data in the vehicle
This chapter describes all standard, country- Principle

specific and optional equipment available for Depending on use, the vehicle stores personal
the model range. It may therefore describe data such as saved radio stations. This per-
equipment and functions which are not avail- sonal data can be permanently deleted using
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the iDrive.
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- General
Depending on the equipment, the following
data is deleted:
tems. ▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Saved radio stations.
▷ Saved favourite buttons.
Data protection ▷ Journey and on-board computer values.
▷ Navigation, for example saved destina-
Data transfer tions.
▷ Phone book.
Principle
▷ Online data, for example favourites, cook-
The vehicle offers various services which re-
ies.
quire data to be transferred to BMW or a serv-
ice provider. ▷ Office data, for example voice memos.
▷ Login accounts.
General ▷ Linking vehicle and ConnectedDrive ac-
Data transfer can be deactivated for some count.
services. If data transfer has been deactivated It may take up to 15 minutes in total to delete
for a service, then that service cannot be used. data.
Settings Operating requirements

Data transfer can be configured individually in Data can only be deleted with the vehicle at a
various stages or for individual services. standstill.
1. "CAR"
Deleting data
2. "Settings"
Personal data in the vehicle is deleted when
the vehicle is reset to its factory settings.
4. "Data privacy"
Reset vehicle data, see page 69.
72
Personal settings CONTROLS
Driver profiles This option is offered for a limited time in

new vehicles.
As soon as the engine is started or any button
Principle is pressed, the welcome display disappears.
Driver profiles can be created in order to store
personalised vehicle settings. If multiple driv- Setup assistant
ers use a vehicle, each driver can create a
The setup assistant is available for a limited
personalised driver profile. If a driver profile is
time on the welcome display of new vehicles to
selected, the vehicle automatically adopts the
allow the main vehicle settings to be defined.
settings stored in the driver profile.
Select "Getting started" to start the setup as-
General sistant.
You can create three personal driver profiles. The setup assistant can be started at any time
using iDrive.
There is also a guest profile available which
can be selected by any driver. The guest profile 1. "CAR"
is active if no personal driver profile has been 2. "Settings"
selected.
Changes to the vehicle settings are saved au-
4. "Getting started"
tomatically in the active driver profile or in the
guest profile. The driver is guided through the following
functions step by step:
The vehicle settings can be adjusted to the rel-
evant driver as soon as the vehicle is unlocked. ▷ Set the system language.
This requires recognition by vehicle key or digi- ▷ ConnectedDrive countries:
tal key to be assigned to a driver profile. If the setup assistant has been called up in
ConnectedDrive countries:The settings saved the guest profile: creating the driver profile.
in the driver profile can be synchronised with ▷ Pair mobile devices with the vehicle.
the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account.
▷ If the setup assistant has been called up
This enables the settings to be used in other
from a previously defined driver profile: set-
BMW vehicles as well.
ting up the Personal Assistant.
Operating requirements ▷ Depending on whether the setup assistant

has been called up from a previously de-
When a driver profile is being created, changed fined driver profile or a guest profile: setting
or deleted, the vehicle cannot move at any up services or confirming the declaration
more than walking speed. regarding the transfer of vehicle data.
▷ Setting up other operating methods.
Welcome display
The selected settings are saved in the active
The welcome display is shown once the con-
driver profile.
trol display is switched on.
The following actions can be performed on the Guest profile
welcome display:
The guest profile can be activated by any
▷ Switch the driver profile. driver. Vehicle settings that are made when the
▷ Start the setup assistant. guest profile is active are saved in the guest
profile.
73
The guest profile is automatically active in the ▷ "Via My BMW app"

following cases: Scanning the displayed QR code will ac-
▷ No driver profile has been created yet. cept the login data for the Connected-
▷ No driver profile is assigned to the vehicle Drive account from the BMW app.
key used to unlock the vehicle. ▷ "Log in"
▷ No driver profile is assigned to the digital The login details must be entered via
key used to unlock the vehicle. iDrive.
The following restrictions apply: ▷ "New registration"
▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed. Scan the displayed QR code and follow
▷ Recognition cannot be assigned to the the instructions on the smartphone.
guest profile. 5. If the vehicle is in the guest profile:
▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the "Transfer current settings"
guest profile. The settings of the guest profile are ap-
▷ ConnectedDrive countries:Synchronisation plied.
with a ConnectedDrive account is not pos- 6. ConnectedDrive countries:
sible.
"Synchronise driver profile"
The guest profile is selected on the welcome
Future changes to the settings are
display or via iDrive:
synchronised with the BMW Cloud.
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles" Selecting recognition
As an alternative to steps 1 and 2, it is pos- 1. "CAR"
sible to tap the profile picture in the upper 2. "Driver profiles"
status bar.
3. "Guest"
As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possi-
4. "OK" ble to tap the profile picture in the upper
status bar.
Creating a driver profile 4. "Driver recognition"
1. "CAR" 5. Select the desired setting:
2. "Driver profiles" ▷ "with vehicle key"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. The vehicle key that is detected in the
As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possi- vehicle interior is assigned to the driver
ble to tap the profile picture in the upper profile. If multiple vehicle keys are de-
status bar. tected, the unwanted vehicle keys must
4. "Add driver profile" be removed from the vehicle interior.
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:A name ▷ "With Digital Key"

must be entered for the driver profile. The digital key that is detected in the
ConnectedDrive countries:An existing Con- vehicle interior is assigned to the driver
nectedDrive account must be assigned to profile. If multiple digital keys are detec-
a driver profile. There are several possible
ways of doing this:
74
ted, the unwanted digital keys must be Setting up PIN protection

removed from the vehicle interior.
Without the vehicle key or digital key, a driver
6. "Activate linkage" profile with recognition cannot be activated. A
If the driver is not carrying the vehicle key PIN can be set up that will allow the driver
or the smartphone with the digital key, or if profile to be activated in such cases.
the vehicle key or digital key is not detected, Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not avail-
the driver profile can be selected from the wel- able:If PIN protection has not been set up or
come display, provided that PIN protection has the PIN is not known, the driver profile cannot
been set up. be activated.
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is avail-
Automatic recognition able:If PIN protection has not been set up or
If recognition has been defined, automatic acti- the PIN is not known, the driver profile can be
vation of the driver profile is triggered by the activated with the login details for the relevant
following activities: ConnectedDrive account.
▷ By unlocking the vehicle using the assigned 1. "CAR"
vehicle key button.
2. "Driver profiles"
▷ By unlocking the vehicle using an outside
door handle. The assigned vehicle key or
the assigned digital key must be carried. As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possi-
ble to tap the profile picture in the upper
▷ By automatic unlocking when approaching
status bar.
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the
assigned digital key must be carried. De- 4. "Driver recognition"
pending on the national-market version, it 5. "using PIN"
may not be possible to recognise the digital
key. Changing/cancelling recognition
If there are several vehicle keys or digital keys If a different vehicle key or a different digital
in the vicinity of the vehicle, the activation of key is assigned to a driver profile, the current
the driver profile takes place according to the assignment must be cancelled first.
following priority:
1. "CAR"
▷ The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers
activation of the assigned driver profile. 2. "Driver profiles"
If the vehicle is unlocked using an unas- 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
signed key, the guest profile is activated. As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possi-
▷ If a vehicle key and a digital key are detec- ble to tap the profile picture in the upper
ted at the same time, the digital key trig- status bar.
gers the activation of the assigned driver 4. "Driver recognition"
profile. 5. Select the desired setting:
▷ If another key is detected on the driver’s ▷ "with vehicle key"
door after activation of the driver profile, the
driver profile of the last key detected is acti- ▷ "With Digital Key"
vated. 6. "Activate linkage"
If no driver profile is assigned to this key,
the guest profile is activated.
75
If the vehicle and the vehicle key are handed As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possi-
over for a service, for example, carry out the ble to tap the profile picture in the upper
following steps first: status bar.
▷ Set up PIN protection. 4. "Settings"
▷ Cancel recognition via the vehicle key. 5. "Synchronise driver profile"
▷ Switch to the guest profile. 6. "Synchronise driver profile"
This means that when the vehicle key is
handed over, it cannot be used to access the Renaming a driver profile
personal driver profile. Non-ConnectedDrive countries:
1. "CAR"
Selecting a driver profile
The driver profile is selected automatically
based on the recognition of the key. As an alternative to steps 1 and 2, it is pos-
sible to tap the profile picture in the upper
If the guest profile is active, the driver profile is
status bar.
selected on the welcome display or via iDrive.
A PIN may need to be entered. 3. Select a driver profile.
4. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
5. Enter a profile name.
6. Select the icon.
As an alternative to steps 1 and 2, it is pos-
sible to tap the profile picture in the upper ConnectedDrive countries:
status bar. The name of the driver profile is transferred
3. Select a driver profile. from the ConnectedDrive account. Changes to
the profile name must be made in the Con-
4. "OK"
nectedDrive account.
The settings saved in the selected driver profile
are applied automatically.
Selecting a profile picture
1. "CAR"
Switching synchronisation with the
ConnectedDrive account on/off 2. "Driver profiles"
The settings saved in the driver profile are 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
synchronised with the personal Connected- As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possi-
Drive account. This allows the personal set- ble to tap the profile picture in the upper
tings to also be used in other BMW vehicles status bar.
with ConnectedDrive access, provided that this 4. "Avatar"
function is supported.
5. Select the desired profile picture.
Synchronisation with the ConnectedDrive ac-
ConnectedDrive countries:
count is enabled when a driver profile is cre-
ated or via iDrive: The profile picture is transferred from the Con-
nectedDrive customer portal or the BMW app.
1. "CAR"
76
Deleting a driver profile

1. "CAR"
As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possi-
ble to tap the profile picture in the upper
status bar.
4. "Settings"
5. "Remove driver profile"
6. Select the desired driver profile.
7. "Remove now"
ConnectedDrive countries:If the driver profile
has been synchronised with a ConnectedDrive
account, the data saved in the ConnectedDrive
account is retained.
System limits
It is not always possible to detect the desired
vehicle key uniquely. This may be the case in
the following scenarios, for example:
▷ If there is a change of driver without the
vehicle being locked and unlocked.
▷ When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-
tal keys with an assigned driver profile are
located in the outer area on the driver's
side of the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle was unlocked from the
BMW app.
ConnectedDrive countries:
It is only possible to create a driver profile
and synchronise it with the ConnectedDrive ac-
count if mobile phone reception is available for
the vehicle.
Using the personal settings saved in the Con-
nectedDrive account in other vehicles is sub-
ject to certain technical restrictions. For exam-
ple, there may be stored settings for a system
that is not available in other vehicles, or only in
an incompatible version.
77
CONTROLS Connections
Connections
tems.
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle

Principle General
The vehicle offers various types of connections The following list shows possible functions and
for using mobile devices. Which connection the appropriate connection types for them. The
type to select depends on the mobile device range of functions depends on the mobile de-
and the function you wish to use. vice.
Function Connection type Icon in the de-

vice list
Making calls using the hands-free Bluetooth.

system.
Operating telephone functions via
iDrive or touchscreen.
Other functions, for example contacts
or SMS.
Playing music from a smartphone or Bluetooth audio.

audio system.
WiFi in the vehicle: WiFi.

Using apps in the vehicle.
Wi-Fi hotspot: WiFi.

Using the vehicle's Internet access.
USB port: USB.

Playing music or video from a USB
device.
78
Connections CONTROLS
Function Connection type Icon in the de-

vice list
Apple CarPlay: Bluetooth and WiFi.

Operating apps via iDrive and by
voice commands.
Android Auto: Bluetooth and WiFi.

Operating apps via iDrive and by
voice commands.
The following connection types require one-off Displaying the vehicle identification
pairing with the vehicle: number and software part number
▷ Bluetooth. When searching for compatible devices, the
▷ WiFi. vehicle identification number and software part
Paired devices are then automatically recog- number may have to be stated. These num-
nised and connected to the vehicle. bers can be displayed in the vehicle.
1. "COM"
Safety information 2. "Mobile devices"
WARNING 4. "Settings"
Operating integrated information systems 5. "Bluetooth information"
and communication devices during a journey
6. "System information"
may distract you from the traffic situation.
You could lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only operate the systems
or devices if the traffic situation allows you to
Managing mobile devices
do so. Stop if necessary and operate the sys-
tems or devices with the vehicle at a stand- General
still. ▷ Following one-off pairing, the devices
are automatically detected and connected
again when standby state is switched on.
Compatible devices
▷ The data saved on the SIM card or in the
mobile phone – for example, contacts – is
General transferred to the vehicle following detec-
Information on compatible mobile devices is tion and can be used via iDrive.
available as follows:
▷ Some devices may require particular set-
▷ On the BMW homepage. tings, for example authorisation; see the
▷ Via the hotline/customer support. operating instructions of the device.
▷ At an authorised Service Partner or another
qualified Service Partner or a specialist Displaying the device list
workshop. All devices paired or connected to the vehicle
are displayed in the device list.
79
A maximum of four devices can be connected The device remains paired and can be
to the vehicle via Bluetooth and ten devices via connected again.
WiFi. ▷ "Delete device"
1. "COM" The device is disconnected and deleted
2. "Mobile devices" from the device list.
An icon to the right of the device name indi- ▷ "Connection mode"
cates which function the device is used for. Select a connection mode, for example
If the icon is shown in white, there is an ac- Apple CarPlay.
tive connection to the vehicle with this function. ▷ "Telephone"
The icon is shown in grey when the device Set the telephone.
function is inactive.
▷ "Bluetooth audio"
Icon Meaning Playback of music files via Bluetooth
Telephone. from external devices, for example au-
dio devices or mobile phones.
Bluetooth audio.
▷ "Apps"
WiFi in the vehicle, Wi-Fi hotspot. With the installed BMW app, apps from
the smartphone can be displayed in the
Apps.
vehicle.
Apple CarPlay. ▷ "Wi-Fi"
Android Auto. Connects the device to the WiFi in the
vehicle.
Configuring the device
Telephone priority
Functions can be activated or deactivated on a
paired or connected device. If several mobile phones are connected with
the vehicle, the priorities for these mobile
The range of functions depends on the mobile
phones can be defined. The mobile phone with
device.
the highest priority is preferably used, for ex-
Observe the information on the control display. ample for outgoing calls and messages.
1. "COM" 1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices" 2. "Mobile devices"
3. Select the required device. 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. Select the desired setting: 4. "Settings"
▷ "Connect device" 5. "Priorities for telephony"
Functions assigned to the device before 6. Select the required device.
disconnection are reassigned to the de-
7. Move to select the desired priority.
vice upon reconnection. If applicable,
these functions are deactivated for an
already connected device.
▷ "Disconnect device"
80
Bluetooth connection Frequently Asked Questions

For the mobile device to work correctly, all con-
ditions need to be met and all the necessary
steps need to be carried out in the correct or-
▷ Compatible device with Bluetooth interface. der. Even when this is done, however, there
Compatible devices, see page 79. may still be instances where the mobile device
▷ The vehicle key or BMW display key is loca- does not function as expected.
ted in the vehicle. In such cases, the following explanations may
▷ The device is operational. provide assistance:
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and Why was it not possible to pair or connect the
switched on in the vehicle. mobile phone?
▷ The control display indicates that the sys- ▷ Too many Bluetooth devices are paired to
tem is ready for pairing. the mobile phone or the vehicle.
▷ The device may require certain Bluetooth In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connection
default settings, for example visibility; see with other devices.
the operating instructions of the device. Delete the Bluetooth connection from the
device list on the mobile phone and start a
Activating Bluetooth new device search.
1. "COM" Too many Bluetooth devices with the same
function are paired. Adapt the functions in
2. "Mobile devices"
the device list on the control display.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode
4. "Settings" or the battery is low.
5. "Bluetooth" Charge the mobile phone and deactivate
6. Select the setting. power-save mode if necessary.
Why does the mobile phone no longer re-
Connecting a device spond?
1. "COM" ▷ The applications on the mobile phone are
2. "Mobile devices" no longer functioning.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
4. "New device" ▷ Ambient temperature too high or too low to
operate the mobile phone.
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-
treme ambient conditions.
Why is it not possible to operate the telephone
functions via iDrive?
the mobile device display, and confirm that ▷ No telephone functions are configured for
the two match. the mobile phone.
7. A Bluetooth connection is established.
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle
and displayed in the device list.
81
Connect the mobile phone with the tele-

phone function.
WiFi connection
Why are no phone book entries, not all entries
or incomplete entries being displayed?
General
▷ The transfer of the phone book entries is For certain applications, for example apps,
not yet completed. data is exchanged between the vehicle and a
smartphone via WiFi.
▷ It's possible that only the phone book en-
tries from the mobile phone or the SIM card
have been transferred.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries containing special characters. ▷ Compatible device with activated WiFi inter-
face.
▷ It may not be possible to transfer contacts
from social networks.
Activating WiFi in the vehicle
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
transferred is too high. 1. "COM"
▷ The volume of data for a particular contact 2. "Mobile devices"

is too large, for example due to saved infor- 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
mation such as memos. 4. "Settings"
Reduce the data volume for the contact. 5. "Wi-Fi"
▷ The mobile phone has only been connected
as an audio source.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it Wi-Fi hotspot
to the telephone function.
▷ A contact was created in the telephone Principle
contact list after the last synchronisation. Compatible devices with a WiFi interface can
Re-synchronise the contacts: "Reload use the vehicle's Internet connection via the
contacts" Wi-Fi hotspot.
How can the telephone connection quality be
improved? General
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal Up to ten devices can be connected at the
on the mobile phone; the procedure varies same time using the Wi-Fi hotspot.
depending on the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone in the wireless Operating requirements
charging tray. ▷ Compatible device with activated WiFi inter-
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa- face.
rately in the sound settings. Compatible devices, see page 79.
If all the points on the list have been reviewed ▷ WiFi is activated in the vehicle.
and the desired function cannot be performed, ▷ Internet usage is activated in the vehicle.
contact the Hotline, an authorised Service
▷ Registration and, if necessary, data con-
Partner or another qualified Service Partner or
tract with a service provider.
a specialist workshop.
82
Connecting a device to the Internet Deactivating Internet usage via the

via a Wi-Fi hotspot Wi-Fi hotspot
Registration will be required and a data vol- Internet usage may be deactivated if the data
ume may need to be purchased from a service volume is used up, for example.
provider when you first connect to the Internet
1. "COM"
via the Wi-Fi hotspot.
2. "Mobile devices"
Data volume can be purchased via the connec-
ted mobile phone or the ConnectedDrive Store, 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
depending on the country version. 4. "Settings"
1. "COM" 5. "Wi-Fi hotspot"
2. "Mobile devices" 6. Select the desired setting.
4. "New device" Apple CarPlay© preparation
5. "Internet, apps"
The hotspot name and hotspot code are Principle
displayed on the control display.
CarPlay enables selected functions of a com-
6. Activate Internet usage via WiFi if neces- patible Apple iPhone to be operated by Siri
sary. voice control and iDrive.
"Open settings"
7. Activate Internet usage. Operating requirements
"Wi-Fi hotspot" ▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with
iOS 7.1 or later.
8. Tilt the Controller to the left.
Compatible devices, see page 79.
9. On the mobile device, search for WiFi net-
works. Select the network name on the de- ▷ Appropriate mobile radio contract.
vice. ▷ Bluetooth, WiFi and Siri voice control are
10. Enter the hotspot code on the device and activated on the iPhone.
connect. ▷ The setting for mobile data may need to be
The device is displayed in the device list. activated on the iPhone.
A QR code is also displayed on the control ▷ WiFi and Bluetooth are activated in the ve-
display. As an alternative, this QR code can hicle.
be used to connect the mobile device with the
hotspot. Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
This data volume is used by all devices con- 1. "COM"
nected via the hotspot. 2. "Mobile devices"
4. "New device"
83
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth

devices in the surroundings and select the
Android Auto© preparation
vehicle.
Principle
7. Compare the control number shown on the Android Auto enables selected functions of
control display with the control number on a compatible smartphone to be operated by
the mobile device display, and confirm that Google Assistant voice control and iDrive.
the two match.
General
8. "Use Apple CarPlay"
The range varies from country to country.
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list.
Operation ▷ Compatible Android smartphone: Samsung
or Google smartphone with Android 10 or
For further information, see the Integrated
an Android smartphone with Android 11, re-
Owner's Handbook or the Owner's Handbook
gardless of the manufacturer.
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.
▷ Compatible devices, see page 79.
Frequently Asked Questions ▷ Appropriate mobile radio contract.
For the mobile device to work correctly, all con- ▷ Bluetooth and WiFi are activated on the
ditions need to be met and all the necessary smartphone.
steps need to be carried out in the correct or- ▷ The smartphone must support a WiFi con-
der. Even when this is done, however, there nection with 5 GHz.
may still be instances where the mobile device
▷ The setting for mobile data may need to be
does not function as expected.
activated on the smartphone.
In such cases, the following explanations may
▷ WiFi and Bluetooth are activated in the ve-
provide assistance:
hicle.
The iPhone has already been paired with
Apple CarPlay. When a new connection setup Pairing the smartphone with
is established, CarPlay can no longer be selec-
Android Auto
ted.
1. "COM"
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the de-
vice list. 2. "Mobile devices"
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con- 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
cerned from the list of saved connections 4. "New device"
under Bluetooth and under WiFi. 5. "Phone calls and audio"
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device. The vehicle's Bluetooth name is shown on
If the steps listed have been carried out and the control display.
the desired function still cannot be performed: 6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
contact the hotline, an authorised Service Part- devices in the surroundings and select the
ner, another qualified Service Partner or a spe- vehicle.
cialist workshop.
84

USB connection
the two match. General
8. "Use Android Auto" The following mobile devices can be connec-
9. If applicable, complete setup on the mobile ted to the USB port:
device. ▷ Mobile phones.
The smartphone is connected to the vehicle ▷ Audio devices, for example MP3 players.
and displayed in the device list. ▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. Formats
Operation FAT32 and exFAT are recommended.
For further information, see the Integrated A connected USB device is charged via the
Owner's Handbook or the Owner's Handbook USB port if the device supports this. Pay at-
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication. tention to the maximum charge current of the
USB port.
Frequently Asked Questions The following can be done at USB ports sup-
For the mobile device to work correctly, all con- porting data transfer:
ditions need to be met and all the necessary ▷ Playback of music files.
steps need to be carried out in the correct or-
der. Even when this is done, however, there ▷ Playback of video films.
may still be instances where the mobile device When connecting, bear the following in mind:
does not function as expected. ▷ Do not use force when inserting the con-
In such cases, the following explanations may nector into the USB port.
provide assistance: ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
The smartphone has already been paired with ▷ Protect the USB device from mechanical
Android Auto. When a new connection setup damage.
is established, Android Auto can no longer be
▷ Due to the large variety of USB devices
selected.
available on the market, it is not possible
▷ Delete the smartphone concerned from the to guarantee that every device can be oper-
device list. ated via the vehicle.
▷ On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con- ▷ Do not expose the USB devices to extreme
cerned from the list of saved connections environmental conditions, for example very
under Bluetooth and under WiFi. high temperatures; see the operating in-
▷ Pair the smartphone as a new device. structions of the device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and ▷ Due to the large variety of different com-
the desired function still cannot be performed: pression techniques, correct playback of
contact the hotline, an authorised Service Part- the media stored on the USB device cannot
ner, another qualified Service Partner or a spe- be guaranteed in every case.
cialist workshop. ▷ To ensure correct transmission of the
stored data, do not charge a USB device
from the 12 V power socket in the vehicle
85
when the device is also connected to the

USB port.
▷ Depending on how the USB device is being
used, settings may need to be performed
on the USB device; see the operating in-
structions of the device.
Unsuitable USB devices:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with several
slots.
▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Compatible device with USB port.
Compatible devices, see page 79.
Connecting a device
Connect the USB device to a USB port using a
suitable adapter cable.
The USB device is displayed in the device list.
USB port, see page 333.
86
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Opening and closing


The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
Batteries or button cells can be swallowed
and lead to serious or fatal injuries within two
hours, for example due to internal burns or
chemical burns. There is a danger of injury or
danger to life. Keep the vehicle key and bat-
teries out of reach of children. Immediately
seek medical help if there is any suspicion
that a battery or button cell has been swal-
tems.
lowed or is located in any part of the body.
Vehicle key
WARNING
General Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left
inside can lock the doors from the inside and
Depending on the equipment, the delivery
lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle
specification includes two vehicle keys or one
cannot be opened from the outside. There is
vehicle key and the BMW display key.
a danger of injury. Carry the vehicle key with
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat- you so that you can open the vehicle from the
tery. outside.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, various settings are possible
for the button functions.
WARNING
A driver profile with personalised settings can
With some national-market versions, unlock-
be assigned to a vehicle key.
ing from the inside requires specific knowl-
To provide information on maintenance re- edge.
quirement, the service data is saved in the ve-
There is a danger of injury or danger to life
hicle key.
if persons remain in the vehicle for extended
To prevent the vehicle key from being locked periods and are exposed to extreme temper-
in, take it with you whenever you leave the atures as a result. Do not lock the vehicle
vehicle. from the outside when there is someone in-
side it.
87
CONTROLS Opening and closing
To unlock
WARNING
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle General
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger The vehicle's response when unlocked with
themselves or other road users, for example the vehicle key depends on the following set-
by the following actions: tings:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ Whether the first press of the button opens
▷ Releasing the parking brake. just the driver's door and the fuel filler flap,
or all the vehicle access points.
▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
▷ Whether the unlocking of the vehicle is ac-
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
knowledged with a light signal or an acous-
▷ Operating vehicle equipment. tic signal.
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not ▷ Whether the welcome light is switched on
leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve- when the vehicle is unlocked.
hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-
Welcome light, see page 195.
cle key with you and lock the vehicle.

Overview Press the button on the vehicle key.
If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap

have been unlocked because of the settings,
press the button on the vehicle key again to
unlock the other vehicle access points.
The following functions are also carried out:
▷ If a driver profile has been assigned to the
vehicle key, this driver profile is activated
and its saved settings are applied.
1 To unlock ▷ The interior lights are switched on unless
2 To lock they were switched off manually.
Pre-conditioning 320 ▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
3 Without automatic tailgate operation: to If the exterior mirrors were folded in using
open the boot lid the button inside the vehicle, they are not
With automatic tailgate operation: to open/ folded out when the vehicle is unlocked.
close the boot lid ▷ With anti-theft security system:The anti-
4 Home lights theft security system is switched off.
▷ With alarm system:The alarm system is
switched off.
The vehicle is operational after one of the front
doors is opened.
The lighting functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
88
Comfort opening Comfort closing

Keep the button on the vehicle key
pressed after unlocking. Safety information
The windows and the glass sunroof with sun

WARNING
protection are opened for as long as the button
on the vehicle key is pressed. Parts of the body can become trapped when
the comfort closing feature is operated. There
To lock is a danger of injury. When the comfort clos-
ing feature is operating, make sure that the
movement range is kept clear.
General
The vehicle's response when locked with the
vehicle key depends on the following settings: Closing
▷ Whether locking of the vehicle is acknowl- Keep the button on the vehicle key
edged with a light signal or an acoustic sig- pressed after locking.
nal.
▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automati- The windows and the glass sunroof with sun
cally folded in when the vehicle is locked. If protection are closed for as long as the button
the hazard warning lights are switched on, on the vehicle key is pressed.
the exterior mirrors are not folded in. The exterior mirrors are folded in, provided
▷ Whether the home lights are activated that they were not folded in when the vehicle
when the vehicle is locked. was locked. If the hazard warning lights are
switched on, the exterior mirrors are not folded
Locking the vehicle in.
1. Close the driver's door.

Switching on the interior lights and
2. Press the button on the vehicle key. exterior lights
The following functions are carried out: With the vehicle locked, press the button
▷ All the doors, the boot lid and fuel filler flap on the vehicle key.
are locked. The function is not available for the first 10 sec-
▷ With anti-theft security system:The anti- onds after locking.
theft security system is switched on. This ▷ The interior lights are switched on unless
prevents the doors from being unlocked us- they were switched off manually.
ing the locking buttons or the door handles.
Interior lights, see page 200.
switched on. ▷ Depending on the settings, elements of the
exterior lights are switched on.
If drive-ready state is still switched on when
locking, the vehicle horn sounds twice. If this The lighting functions may depend on the am-
happens, switch off drive-ready state using bient brightness.
Start/Stop button.
89
Boot lid With automatic tailgate operation:

closing
General Press and hold the button on the vehi-
To prevent the vehicle key from being locked cle key until the boot lid has closed.
in, do not place it in the luggage compartment.
Releasing the button stops the closing proc-
Depending on the equipment and the national-
ess.
market version, it is possible to select whether
the boot lid can be unlocked with the vehicle If the doors were not unlocked, the boot lid is
key and how the vehicle doors respond. locked again as soon as it is closed.
With automatic transmission: selector lever po-
sition P must be engaged to open the boot lid Switching on the home lights
with the vehicle key. Press and hold the button on the vehi-
When the trailer socket is occupied, the boot lid cle key for approximately 1 second.
cannot be opened with the vehicle key.
The duration of the home lights function can
be adjusted.
Safety information
Home lights, see page 195.
WARNING
Parts of the body can become trapped when Replacing the battery
the boot lid is operated. There is a danger of
injury. When opening and closing, make sure
that the movement range of the boot lid is NOTICE
kept clear. Unsuitable batteries in a battery-operated
device can damage the device. There is a
risk of material damage. Always replace the
NOTICE discharged battery with a battery with the
same voltage, the same size and the same
The boot lid swings rearwards and upwards
specification.
when opened. There is a risk of material
damage. When opening and closing, make
sure that the movement range of the boot lid 1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle
is kept clear. key.
Integrated key, see page 102.
2. Position the integrated key under the bat-
Opening tery compartment lid, arrow 1, and pry off
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key for approximately 1 second.
On some equipment versions, the doors are

also unlocked each time.
90
the lid by moving the lever of the integrated other qualified Service Partner or a specialist
key, arrow 2. workshop.
If a driver profile has been assigned to the lost
vehicle key, the connection to this vehicle key
must be deleted. A new vehicle key can then
be assigned to the driver profile.
Malfunction
General
3. Use a pointed object to press the battery in It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the
the direction of the arrow and lift it out. vehicle key in some circumstances, including
the following:
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
▷ Disruption of the radio link by transmis-
sion masts or other equipment transmitting
powerful signals.
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key by metallic ob-
jects.
Do not transport the vehicle key together
with metallic objects.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with the
positive side facing up. ▷ Disruption of the radio link by mobile
phones or other electronic devices in the
5. Press the cover back into position and close immediate vicinity of the vehicle key.
it.
6. Insert the integrated key into the vehicle with electronic devices.
key until the integrated key engages.
▷ Interference with the radio transmission
Dispose of old batteries with an author- caused by the charging process of mobile
ised Service Partner, another qualified devices, for example a mobile phone.
Service Partner or a specialist work-
▷ The vehicle key is located in the immediate
shop, or hand them in to an authorised collec-
vicinity of the wireless charging tray.
tion point.
Place the vehicle key somewhere else.
If there is a malfunction, the vehicle can be
Additional vehicle keys unlocked and locked from the outside with the
Additional vehicle keys are available from an integrated key.
authorised Service Partner or another qualified For further information:
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
Integrated key, see page 102.
Loss of vehicle keys
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-
placed by an authorised Service Partner or an-
91
Switching on drive-ready state via BMW display key

emergency detection of the vehicle key
General
Depending on the national-market version, the
BMW display key may not be available.
In this case, the pre-heating can be operated
via the BMW app.
The delivery specification of the BMW display
key includes an additional mechanical key.
When using the display key, you should also
carry the mechanical key, for example in your
Drive-ready state cannot be switched on if the
wallet or purse. The mechanical key is used in
vehicle key has not been detected.
the same way as the integrated key.
If this happens, proceed as follows:
The display key supports all functions of the
1. Hold the rear side of the vehicle key against standard vehicle key.
the mark on the steering column. Pay at- The following functions are also available:
tention to the display in the instrument
▷ Call up status of doors and windows.
cluster.
▷ Call up status of the alarm system.
2. If the vehicle key is detected:
▷ Call up service information.
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
onds. ▷ Call up range with the available fuel.
If the vehicle key is not detected, change the ▷ With pre-heating: operate pre-heating.
position of the vehicle key slightly and repeat Without pre-heating: operate pre-cooling.
the procedure.
▷ Pre-conditioning via Remote Engine Start
▷ Remote Control Parking.
Frequently Asked Questions
What measures can be taken to enable a vehi-
cle to be opened if the vehicle key has acciden- Integrated key, see page 102.
tally been locked inside the vehicle?
▷ The Remote Services of the BMW app can Safety information
be used to lock and unlock a vehicle.
This requires an active BMW Connected- WARNING
Drive contract and the BMW app must be Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left
installed on a smartphone. inside can lock the doors from the inside and
▷ Unlocking of the vehicle can be requested lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle
via the BMW ConnectedDrive call centre. cannot be opened from the outside. There is
This requires an active BMW Connected- a danger of injury. Carry the vehicle key with
Drive contract. you so that you can open the vehicle from the
outside.
92
With automatic tailgate operation: to open/

WARNING close the boot lid
With some national-market versions, unlock- 2 To unlock
ing from the inside requires specific knowl- 3 Home lights
edge.
4 To lock
if persons remain in the vehicle for extended 5 Parking button
periods and are exposed to extreme temper- 6 Display
atures as a result. Do not lock the vehicle 7 Back
from the outside when there is someone in-
8 Switching display on/off
side it.
9 Micro-USB charging interface
WARNING Reception range

Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle The number of available functions of the dis-
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger play key depends on distance to vehicle.
themselves or other road users, for example ▷ In the close reception range, all functions of
by the following actions: the display key are available.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ In the extended reception range, the status
▷ Releasing the parking brake. information can be called up.
▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. With pre-heating: pre-heating can be oper-
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. ated.
▷ Operating vehicle equipment. Without pre-heating: pre-cooling can be op-

erated.
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve- ▷ Outside the reception range, it is possible
hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi- to display the most recent status informa-
cle key with you and lock the vehicle. tion transmitted from vehicle.
This icon is shown on the display if one
of the buttons is pressed outside the reception
Overview range.
Display
General
The display is divided into the upper status
line, the information area and the lower status
line.
Upper status line

1 Without automatic tailgate operation: to The upper status line shows the following in-
open the boot lid formation:
93
▷ / Vehicle locked/vehicle unlocked. To show content on the display:

▷ Time set in vehicle. 1. Press the button on the left of the display
▷ State of charge of the battery of the key.
display key. 2. Next, swipe your finger from the bottom to
the top to cancel the display lock.
Information area
Switch off the display to increase the battery
The information area is where information can life:
be called up and additional functions carried
out. 1. Unlock the display if necessary.
If the information area contains more than one 2. Press and hold the button on the left side of
page, page indicators are displayed below the the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
information. 3. "OK"
The current page is indicated by a To switch on the display:
filled-in icon. Press the button on the left of the display key.
Swipe to the left or right to switch between the
pages. Operating principle
If further information can be accessed on a Depending on the equipment, there are up to
page, tap on the corresponding icon. five main menus, via which sub-menus can be
Tap icon below the display to return to the accessed.
higher-level page.
Main menu Information/function
Lower status line "Security /

The lower status line shows whether the dis- information" Status of the doors.
play key is within the reception range. Status of the alarm sys-
▷ "Connected": the display key is located in tem.
the reception range. After alarm activation:
▷ "Updated": the display key is located out- date, time and reason for
side of the reception range. It indicates the alarm activation.
when the last data transfer from the vehicle
took place.
Status of the windows.
Switching off/on Status of the glass sun-
The content of the display is hidden automati- roof.
cally after a brief time to reduce battery power "Vehicle Service Interval Indica-
consumption. information" tors of Condition Based
To manually hide the display: press the button Service.
on the left of the display key. Status of the parking
lights.
"Range Range with the available

information" fuel.
94
Main menu Information/function from overheating and in exceptional cases,

the charging process is temporarily inter-
"Preconditioning With pre-heating: oper- rupted.
setting" ate pre-heating.
▷ When inserting the display key into the
Without pre-heating: op- wireless charging tray, make sure there
erate pre-cooling. are no objects between it and the wireless
Pre-conditioning via Re- charging tray.
mote Engine Start.
Safety information
"R/C parking" Driving into/leaving park-
ing space using remote
control. WARNING
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
Battery of the display key wireless charging tray, any metal objects lo-
cated between the device and the tray can
General become very hot. If storage media or elec-
tronic cards, for example smart cards, cards
Bear the following in mind:
with magnetic strips or cards for transmit-
▷ If the charge state of the display key bat- ting signals, are placed between the device
tery decreases, the display is automatically and the tray, their function may be impaired.
switched off. The battery must be charged There is a danger of injury or material dam-
so the display can be switched on again. age. When charging mobile devices, make
The standard buttons remain functional un- sure there are no objects between the device
til the battery is completely flat. and the tray.
▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first
time or if the key has not been used for an Charging
extended period.
Via USB
▷ The display key can be used while charging
via the USB port. If the battery is fully dis- Connect the display key to a USB port using
charged, it can take some time before the the micro-USB charging interface.
display key can be used again.
In the centre console
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers
available on the market, there can be no
guarantee that every charger will work per-
fectly. The charging time depends on the
battery charger used.
▷ Charging via the USB port can cause the
battery charger and the display key to heat
up.
Charging in the wireless charging tray can
cause the dock and the display key to heat
up.
At higher temperatures, the charge current
may be reduced to prevent the display key
95
1. Open the cover of the dock. ▷ Disruption of the radio link by mobile
phones or other electronic devices in the
2. Place the display key in the middle of the
immediate vicinity.
wireless charging tray in front of the cup
holders. ▷ Interference with the radio transmission
caused by the charging process of mobile
Make sure that the display is pointing up-
devices, for example a mobile phone.
wards.
Do not transport the display key together with
3. Close the cover of the dock.
metallic objects or electronic devices.
LED displays If there is a malfunction, the vehicle can be

unlocked and locked from the outside with the
Col- Meaning mechanical key.
our
Switching on drive-ready state by
Blue Display key is charging. emergency detection of the BMW
The blue LED stays illuminated once display key
the inserted display key is fully
charged.
Or- Display key is not charging.

ange The display key may be exposed
to excessively high temperature or
there may be foreign bodies in the
charging tray.
Red Display key is not charging.

Contact an authorised Service Part- Drive-ready state cannot be switched on if the
ner or another qualified Service Part- display key has not been detected.
ner or a specialist workshop.
If this happens, proceed as follows:
Malfunction 1. Hold the back of the display key against the

mark on the steering column. Pay attention
General to the display in the instrument cluster.
2. If the display key is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the
onds.
BMW display key in some circumstances, in-
cluding the following: If the display key is not detected, change the
position of the display key slightly and repeat
▷ The battery of the display key is flat.
the procedure.
▷ Disruption of the radio link by transmis-
sion masts or other equipment transmitting
Resetting the BMW display key
powerful signals.
If the charged display key can no longer be
▷ Shielding of the display key by metallic ob-
switched on, or the display no longer responds
jects.
to inputs, the display key can be reset.
96
Press and hold the following buttons on the

display key simultaneously for at least 10 sec- WARNING
onds until the display switches off and on
again:
▷ edge.
▷ if persons remain in the vehicle for extended
periods and are exposed to extreme temper-
atures as a result. Do not lock the vehicle
from the outside when there is someone in-
Key Card side it.
Principle
The Key Card can be used to lock, unlock and WARNING
start the vehicle. Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
General themselves or other road users, for example
The availability of the Key Card depends on by the following actions:
the vehicle equipment and country. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
A digital key that has already been paired with ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
digital key must be activated via iDrive.
When you exit the vehicle, deactivate the Key
Card or take the Key Card with you, as it can
be used to start the vehicle when activated. Al- There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
ways take the vehicle key with you to a service leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-
appointment. hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi-
Safety information
Connection to the vehicle
WARNING The vehicle and Key Card communicate using
Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left near field communication, NFC.
inside can lock the doors from the inside and
lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle Activating/deactivating the Key Card
cannot be opened from the outside. There is in the vehicle
a danger of injury. Carry the vehicle key with
you so that you can open the vehicle from the General
outside.
To activate the Key Card, it must be in the
smartphone tray and there must be a vehicle
key in the vehicle.
To deactivate the Key Card, there must be a
vehicle key in the vehicle.
97
If BMW Digital Key is enabled for the vehicle, a Unlocking and locking the vehicle
digital key can be used instead of the vehicle
key.
A deactivated Key Card will remain in the list of
registered digital keys.
Activating the Key Card
Hold the activated Key Card directly and cen-

trally up against the outside door handle on
the driver's door.
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change
the position of the Key Card and repeat the
process.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place the Key Card in the middle of the
Switching on drive-ready state
smartphone tray.
3. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play to activate the Key Card. NOTICE
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the
Deactivating the Key Card wireless charging tray at the same time, the
1. "CAR" Key Card may be damaged. There is a risk of
material damage. Do not place the Key Card
2. "Settings"
in the wireless charging tray at the same time
3. "Doors/ vehicle access" as a mobile device.
4. "Digital Key"
5. Select Key Card.
6. "Key Card active"
A deactivated Key Card will remain in the list of
registered digital keys.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.

2. Place the activated Key Card in the middle
of the smartphone tray.
3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en-
gine.
98
With wireless charging tray:The Key Card can can then be handed over, instead of the smart-
be taken out of the tray after starting the en- phone. Always take the vehicle key with you to
gine so that the tray can be used to charge a service appointment.
compatible smartphones.
Safety information
Malfunction
Objects between the sensors and the Key WARNING
Card, for example a purse/wallet or smart-
phone case, may prevent the vehicle from de- Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left
tecting the Key Card. inside can lock the doors from the inside and
lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle
cannot be opened from the outside. There is
BMW Digital Key a danger of injury. Carry the vehicle key with
you so that you can open the vehicle from the
outside.
Principle
BMW Digital Key allows you to use a compat-
ible smartphone to lock, unlock and start the WARNING
vehicle.
General edge.
The availability of the BMW Digital Key de-
pends on the equipment and national-market
if persons remain in the vehicle for extended
version.
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compati- atures as a result. Do not lock the vehicle
ble smartphone or another compatible mobile from the outside when there is someone in-
end device, for example a smartwatch. side it.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compati-
ble smartphone, this function must be offered
by the smartphone manufacturer. Users can WARNING
check whether the smartphone and the vehicle
are compatible in the BMW app.
A driver profile with individual settings can be themselves or other road users, for example
assigned to a digital key. by the following actions:
For further information: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Driver profiles, see page 73. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
When using a smartphone as a digital key, al- ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
ways have a vehicle key or the activated Key
Card about your person too. This will mean
that you can still access the vehicle even if ▷ Operating vehicle equipment.
the smartphone is not working. It is also useful
to keep the vehicle key or Key Card on your
person if the vehicle has to be handed over to
another person. The vehicle key or Key Card
99
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not Passing on authorisation

leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve- To share the digital key, select the correspond-
hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi- ing function on the smartphone, for example in
cle key with you and lock the vehicle. the Wallet app.
As soon as a digital key is shared with a per-
Connection to the vehicle son, this person receives an invitation. If the in-
vitation is accepted, the digital key is activated
The vehicle and smartphone communicate us-
on the recipient's smartphone.
ing near field communication, NFC.
Limiting the range of functions
Certain functions of the digital key can be limi-
▷ The smartphone is compatible with BMW ted before handing it over. For example, re-
Digital Key. strictions on driving stability control systems
▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected- can be suppressed and engine performance
Drive account of the registered keeper. can be reduced before the digital key is given
▷ The smartphone battery is sufficiently to a beginner driver. For more information, re-
charged. The minimum battery charge refer to the ConnectedDrive portal and the BMW
quired depends on the smartphone in app.
question.
Authentication
Enabling the main digital key Depending on the recipient's smartphone
The registered keeper's smartphone is ena- model, authentication may be required for se-
bled as the main digital key in the vehicle. curity reasons.
To do so, the registered keeper must provide An authorised vehicle key, the main digital key
proof of authorisation for their vehicle. or another method can be used to perform the
Proof of authorisation can be initiated via the authentication. Corresponding information is
BMW app or the activation code in the corre- displayed for your attention on the smartphone
sponding smartphone feature, for example in or control display.
the Wallet app. Both vehicle keys must be in
the vehicle during enabling. Deleting a shared key
Follow the enabling instructions in the Digital
Key menu within the BMW app or on the con- General
trol display. Shared keys can be deleted via the smart-
phone associated with the main digital key, via
Sharing digital keys the smartphone associated with a shared key
or in iDrive.
General A shared key will only be deleted via the
Digital Key enables digital keys to be shared smartphone associated with the main digital
with other people. This option is provided via key if the vehicle is being used with a key other
the smartphone enabled as the main digital than the one that is to be deleted.
key. This function must be supported by the If the smartphone associated with a shared
smartphone. key or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it
will be deleted immediately.
100
Deleted digital keys are removed from the list Unlocking and locking the vehicle
of enabled digital keys.
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
Deletion in iDrive
To enable a digital key to be deleted in iDrive,
there must be an authorised vehicle key in the
vehicle or the main key must be in the smart-
phone tray.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Hold the NFC antenna on the smartphone di-
rectly and centrally up against the outside door
3. "Doors/ vehicle access" handle on the driver's door.
4. "Digital Key" The position of the NFC antenna will depend
5. Select a digital key as necessary. on the smartphone model.
6. "Delete key" When using a smartphone to lock the vehicle,
make sure that all doors and the tailgate are
Resetting the function closed.
To reset BMW Digital Key function, there must
be an authorised vehicle key in the vehicle. Switching on drive-ready state
All digital keys, including the main key, are de-
leted when the BMW Digital Key function is
reset. The digital key of the Key Card is not
deleted.
Following the reset, it will no longer be possi-
ble to lock, unlock or start the vehicle with a
digital key.
The main digital key must be enabled again in
order to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
1. "CAR" 1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. "Settings" 2. Place the smartphone in the middle of the
smartphone tray.
Make sure that the display is pointing up-
4. "Digital Key"
wards.
5. "Reset function"
3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.
4. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en-
gine.
Selling the smartphone

Delete all digital keys from the smartphone
before selling it. This ensures that the smart-
phone can no longer be used for the vehicle.
101
Selling the vehicle Safety information

Before selling a vehicle, reset the digital key
function or remove the vehicle from the Con- WARNING
nectedDrive account of the current registered
keeper. With some national-market versions, unlock-
If the vehicle is removed from the Connected- edge.
Drive account, all digital keys for the vehicle
are deleted. The digital key of the Key Card is There is a danger of injury or danger to life
not deleted. if persons remain in the vehicle for extended
atures as a result. Do not lock the vehicle
System limits from the outside when there is someone in-
With a digital key, it is not possible to switch off side it.
the interior movement sensor and the tilt alarm
sensor of the alarm system.
For further information: NOTICE
Alarm system, see page 115. The door lock is fixed to the door. The
door handle can be moved. Pulling the door
Malfunction handle when the integrated key is inserted
It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the can damage the paint or the integrated key.
digital key in some circumstances, including There is a risk of material damage. Pull out
the following: the integrated key before pulling on the outer
door handle.
▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sen-
sors in the vehicle by an unsuitable smart-
phone cover.
Removing
▷ There are objects between the smartphone
and its cover, for example a card with a chip
or the Key Card.
Integrated key
General
The integrated key enables the driver's door
to be unlocked and locked without the vehicle
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
key.
integrated key, arrow 2.
integrated key also fits the glove compartment.
The integrated key is used to operate the key
switch for the front passenger airbags.
102
Locking/unlocking via the door lock Alarm system

1. Pull the door handle outwards with one If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
hand and hold it. key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-
tem is triggered when the door is opened.
If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key
via the door lock, the alarm system is not acti-
vated.
Central locking buttons

General
2. Slide one finger of your other hand under If an accident of appropriate severity occurs,
the cover cap from behind and press the the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The
cover outwards. hazard warning lights and interior lights are
Support the cover cap with your thumb to switched on.
stop it falling out of the door handle.
Overview
3. Remove the cover cap.

4. Unlock or lock the door lock with the Central locking buttons.
integrated key.
To lock
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

▷ Locking does not activate the vehicle's anti-
theft protection system.
To unlock
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
Press the key.
from the inside.
103
Opening To unlock
▷ Press the button to unlock all the
doors together. General
Pull the door handle above the armrest. The vehicle's response when unlocked via
Comfort Access depends on the following set-
▷ Pull the door handle on the door being
tings:
opened. The other doors remain locked.
▷ Whether the unlocking of the vehicle is ac-
knowledged with a light signal or an acous-
Comfort Access tic signal.
▷ Whether the welcome light is switched on
Principle when the vehicle is unlocked.
This feature allows you to access the vehicle

without having to use the vehicle key.
Simply having the vehicle key with you, for ex-
ample in your trouser pocket, is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically recognises the vehi-
cle key when it is in the immediate vicinity or
inside the vehicle interior.
General
Comfort Access supports the following func-
tions: Fully grip the handle of a vehicle door.
▷ Unlocking and locking of the vehicle using
the door handle. The following functions are also carried out:
▷ Comfort closing. ▷ If a driver profile has been assigned to the
vehicle key, this driver profile is activated
▷ Contactless vehicle unlocking and locking.
and its stored settings are applied.
▷ Unlocking and locking of the vehicle using
▷ The interior lights are switched on unless
the BMW Digital Key.
they were switched off manually.
▷ Open the boot lid.
▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
▷ Contactless opening and closing of the boot
If the exterior mirrors were folded in using
lid.
the button inside the vehicle, they are not
folded out when the vehicle is unlocked.
▷ With anti-theft security system:The anti-
▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be theft security system is switched off.
located outside the vehicle in the vicinity of
the doors. ▷ With alarm system:The alarm system is
switched off.
▷ The vehicle can only be unlocked and
locked again after approximately 2 sec-
onds.
104
To lock Comfort closing
General Safety information

The vehicle's response when locked via Com-
fort Access depends on the following settings: WARNING
▷ Whether locking of the vehicle is acknowl- Parts of the body can become trapped when
edged with a light signal or an acoustic sig- the comfort closing feature is operated. There
nal. is a danger of injury. When the comfort clos-
▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automati- ing feature is operating, make sure that the
cally folded in when the vehicle is locked. If movement range is kept clear.
the hazard warning lights are switched on,
the exterior mirrors are not folded in.
▷ Whether the home lights are activated Closing
when the vehicle is locked.
Locking the vehicle

Close the driver's door.
With your finger, touch the knurled area on the

handle of a closed vehicle door and keep your
finger there without gripping the door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and the

With your finger, touch the grooved area on glass sunroof with sun protection are closed.
the handle of a closed vehicle door for approx- The exterior mirrors are folded in, provided
imately 1 second, without gripping the door that they were not folded in when the vehicle
handle. was locked. If the hazard warning lights are
switched on, the exterior mirrors are not folded
The following functions are carried out:
in.
▷ All the doors, the boot lid and fuel filler flap
are locked.
Opening the boot lid
▷ With anti-theft security system:The anti-
theft security system is switched on. This General
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-
If the boot lid is opened using Comfort Access,
ing the locking buttons or the door handles.
locked doors are not unlocked.
To prevent the vehicle key from being locked
switched on.
105
Safety information General

WARNING in, do not place it in the luggage compartment.
Parts of the body can become trapped when If the vehicle key is within the sensor range,
the boot lid is operated. There is a danger of the boot lid can be accidentally opened or
injury. When opening and closing, make sure closed by an unintentional or misinterpreted
that the movement range of the boot lid is foot movement.
kept clear. The sensor range extends to approximately
1.50 m, 5 ft behind the rear area.
If the boot lid is opened contactlessly, locked
NOTICE doors are not unlocked.
when opened. There is a risk of material
Safety information
damage. When opening and closing, make
sure that the movement range of the boot lid WARNING
is kept clear.
When opening/closing contactlessly, there is
a risk of touching vehicle parts, for example
Opening the hot exhaust system. There is a danger of
injury. Make sure you are standing securely
as you move your foot, and do not touch the
vehicle.
WARNING
Parts of the body can become trapped when
the boot lid is operated. There is a danger of
that the movement range of the boot lid is
Press the button on the outside of the boot lid.
kept clear.
Contactless opening and closing of

the boot lid NOTICE
Principle when opened. There is a risk of material
The boot lid can be opened contactlessly, pro- damage. When opening and closing, make
vided you are carrying the vehicle key with you. sure that the movement range of the boot lid
If automatic tailgate operation is installed, it is kept clear.
can also be closed contactlessly. Two sensors
detect a forward foot movement in the central
rear area and the boot lid is opened or closed. Operating requirements
sition P must be engaged for touchless open-
ing of the boot lid.
106
It is not possible to open the boot lid contact- Closing

lessly if the trailer socket is occupied. The boot lid can only be closed contactlessly
Contactless opening and closing of the boot lid if the automatic tailgate operation feature is
must be activated in the settings. installed.
Perform the foot movement as described
Settings above.
Contactless opening and closing of the boot lid The hazard warning lights flash and an acous-
can be switched on or off. tic signal sounds.
1. "CAR" Moving your foot again will stop the closing
2. "Settings" operation, and moving it one more time after
that will open the boot lid again.
4. "Tailgate" System limits
Detection of foot movement may be restricted
Correct foot movement
by the following external circumstances:
1. Stand in the centre behind the vehicle, ap-
▷ Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle.
proximately an arm's length away from the
rear of the vehicle. ▷ Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle.
2. Kick your foot as far as possible underneath Movement in the vicinity of the sensors may
the vehicle and immediately pull it back. cause the luggage compartment to open or
Your leg must move across the ranges of close unintentionally, for example if water
both sensors. flows underneath the vehicle during cleaning
or in heavy rain. To prevent the luggage com-
partment from opening or closing unintention-
ally, make sure that the vehicle key is far
enough away from the rear of the vehicle.
Contactless vehicle unlocking and

locking
Principle
The vehicle is unlocked when the driver ap-
Opening proaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle
key.
Perform the foot movement as described
above. If the driver moves away from the unlocked ve-
hicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle is locked.
The hazard warning lights flash before the
boot lid opens.
General
With automatic tailgate:Moving your foot again
The vehicle is unlocked when an authorised
will stop the opening procedure, and moving it
vehicle key is detected in the unlocking zone.
one more time after that will close the boot lid
again. The unlocking zone is an area with a radius
of approximately 1.50 m, 5 ft from the door
handles.
107
The vehicle is locked when the vehicle key Operating requirements

leaves the locking zone. ▷ Drive-ready state must be switched off.
The locking zone is an area with a radius of ▷ Unlocking: on entering the unlocking zone,
approximately 3 m, 9 ft from the door handles. the doors and boot lid must be closed.
If the vehicle key remains within the unlocking ▷ Locking: on leaving the locking zone, the
zone without moving for a prolonged period of doors and boot lid must be closed.
time, the vehicle is locked automatically.
▷ For contactless locking of the vehicle, no
If a person is detected on the front passenger second vehicle key may be within a radius
seat when locking, and if the front passenger's of 6 m, approx. 18 ft around the vehicle.
seat belt is in the seat belt buckle when lock-
ing: ▷ If the vehicle has been in rest state for
several days, contactless unlocking/locking
▷ The vehicle is locked, but not protected is not possible until the vehicle has been
against theft. driven.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
The vehicle's response in the case of con- Locking after Remote Control Parking
tactless unlocking/locking depends on the Use the vehicle key to lock the vehicle in the
following settings: following situations:
▷ Whether automatic unlocking is active. ▷ After parking the vehicle using Remote
▷ Whether automatic locking is active. Control Parking.
▷ Whether only the driver's door and the fuel ▷ After the first journey when Remote Control
filler flap or all vehicle access points are un- Parking has been used to leave a parking
locked. space.
Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the
driver's door and the fuel filler flap are un- Malfunction
locked only when the driver approaches the It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the
vehicle on the driver's side. vehicle key in some conditions, including the
All vehicle access points: the vehicle is un- following:
locked regardless of which side the driver ▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
approaches the vehicle from. To replace the battery, see page 90.
▷ Whether the locking and unlocking of the ▷ Disruption of the radio link by transmis-
vehicle is acknowledged with a light signal sion masts or other equipment transmitting
or an acoustic signal. powerful signals.
▷ Whether the welcome light is switched on ▷ Shielding of the vehicle key by metallic ob-
when the vehicle is unlocked. jects.
▷ Whether the home lights are activated Do not transport the vehicle key together
when the vehicle is locked. with metallic objects.
▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automati- ▷ Disruption of the radio link by mobile
cally folded out and in when the vehicle is phones or other electronic devices in the
unlocked and locked. immediate vicinity of the vehicle key.
with electronic devices.
108
Wet or snowy conditions may affect the ability

of the door handles to detect a lock request. NOTICE
If a fault occurs, unlock and lock the vehicle The boot lid swings rearwards and upwards
with the buttons on the vehicle key or with the when opened. There is a risk of material
integrated key. damage. When opening and closing, make
For further information: sure that the movement range of the boot lid
Integrated key, see page 102. is kept clear.
Boot lid Without automatic tailgate

operation: opening and closing
General Opening from outside
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, it is possible to select whether
the boot lid can be unlocked with the vehicle
key and how the vehicle doors respond.
sition P must be engaged to open the boot lid
with the vehicle key.
The boot lid may not open when the vehicle is ▷ Unlock the vehicle, then press the button on
in valet parking mode. the outside of the boot lid.
When the trailer socket is occupied, the boot lid ▷ With Comfort Access: while carrying the key
cannot be opened with the vehicle key or with with you, press the button on the outside of
the button in the interior. the boot lid.
Valet parking mode, see page 111.
vehicle key for approximately 1 sec-
ond.
Safety information
When you unlock with the vehicle key, the
doors may also be unlocked.
WARNING
Parts of the body can become trapped when Depending on the vehicle: opening
the boot lid is operated. There is a danger of from inside
injury. When opening and closing, make sure Press the button in the driver's door stor-
that the movement range of the boot lid is age compartment.
kept clear.
109
Closing If applicable, the doors are also unlocked.
From inside
Press the button in the driver's door stor-
age compartment.
Cancelling the opening procedure

The opening procedure is interrupted:
▷ If the vehicle begins to move.
Pull the boot lid down using the handle re- ▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
cesses. the boot lid. Pressing again closes the boot
lid.
With Comfort Access:When the driv- ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
er's door is closed, press the button boot lid. Pressing again closes the boot lid.
on the inside of the boot lid to lock an ▷ By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
unlocked vehicle before closing the boot lid. Pressing again resumes the opening proce-
dure.
With automatic tailgate operation: Pressing and holding the button closes the
opening and closing boot lid again.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the
Opening driver's door. Pressing again resumes the
opening procedure.
From outside
Closing
From outside

vehicle key until the boot lid has closed.
Releasing the button stops the movement.
▷ Press the button on the inside of

the boot lid.
▷ Unlock the vehicle, then press the button on
the outside of the boot lid. With Comfort Access:
▷ With Comfort Access: while carrying the key
▷ Press the button on the inside of
with you, press the button on the outside of
the boot lid.
the boot lid.
The vehicle is locked after the boot lid has
▷ Press and hold the button on the been closed. For this to happen, the driver's
vehicle key for approximately 1 sec- door must be closed and the vehicle key
ond.
110
must be outside the vehicle in the vicinity of Luggage compartment emergency

the boot lid. release
From inside
Pull and hold the button in the driver's
door storage compartment.
For this function, the vehicle key must be in-

side the vehicle.
Cancelling the closing operation

The closing operation is interrupted in the
following situations: Pull the handle in the luggage compartment.
▷ When driving off suddenly. This will unlock the boot lid.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the boot lid. Pressing again re-opens the
boot lid. Soft-close function for doors
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
boot lid. Pressing again re-opens the boot Safety information
lid.
▷ By releasing the button on the vehicle key.
WARNING
Pressing and holding it again resumes the
closing operation. Parts of the body can become trapped when
the doors are operated. There is a danger of
▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling and holding the button again re-
that the movement range of the doors is kept
sumes the closing operation.
clear.
Malfunction
In the event of an electrical fault, operate the Closing
unlocked boot lid manually; do so slowly and To close, press the door gently.
without sudden movements.
The closing operation is then performed auto-
matically.
Valet parking mode

Principle
The control display is disabled in valet parking
mode. Operation via iDrive is no longer possi-
ble.
This mode can be used, for example, if the ve-
hicle is to be handed over to a parking service.
111
General Activating valet parking mode

In valet parking mode, the vehicle settings can-
not be changed via iDrive. Personal settings General
cannot be changed. Personal data cannot be Before activating valet parking mode, a PIN
displayed. must be defined so that valet parking mode
In addition, the following actions are per- can be deactivated later on.
formed: The procedure for entering a PIN varies de-
▷ The volume of the audio system is limited. pending on the active driver profile.
▷ The integrated universal remote control is
deactivated. Driver profile with PIN
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control cannot be A PIN has been defined for the active driver
turned off. profile.
▷ Depending on the vehicle, the boot lid can It is not necessary to enter another PIN.
be locked and disconnected from the cen- 1. "Lock tailgate as well"
tral locking system.
The boot lid is locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
2. "Activate now"
▷ At least one driver profile has been created.
▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active. Driver profile without PIN
▷ A ConnectedDrive account is assigned to at A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.
least one driver profile.
1. "PIN"
Calling up the menu for valet 2. Enter PIN.
parking mode 3. "Lock tailgate as well"
Via the shutdown display from the central locking system.
The shutdown display is displayed after 4. "Activate linkage"
switching off drive-ready state. Select the en- 5. "Activate now"
try for valet parking mode on the shutdown
display. Guest profile
The active driver profile is the guest profile.
Via the display bar at the top of the
control display A PIN must be entered.
1. Tilt the Controller up. 1. "PIN"
2. "Valet parking mode" 2. Enter PIN.
3. "Lock tailgate as well"
Via the vehicle settings
1. "CAR" from the central locking system.
2. "Settings" 4. "Activate now"
4. "Valet parking mode"
112
This PIN can be used once to deactivate If you have forgotten the PIN, valet parking
valet parking mode when the guest profile mode must be deactivated via a personal
is active. driver profile.
Deactivating valet parking mode

Settings
General
The lock display for valet parking mode is dis- General
played on the control display. Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
How valet parking mode is deactivated de- market version, various settings are possible
pends on which driver profile is selected on the for opening and closing.
lock display. These settings are saved for the current driver
profile.
Driver profile with PIN
Regardless of which driver has activated valet Unlocking and locking
parking mode, a driver can deactivate valet
parking mode by entering his/her PIN. Doors
1. Select a driver profile. 1. "CAR"
2. Enter the PIN assigned to the driver profile. 2. "Settings"
If you have forgotten the PIN, valet parking 3. "Key button assignment"
mode must be deactivated by entering the as- 4. Select the icon.
signed ConnectedDrive login details. 5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Driver profile without PIN
Only the driver's door and fuel filler flap
Valet parking mode was activated by a differ-
are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
ent person. To deactivate valet parking mode,
the entire vehicle.
a driver without a PIN must enter the login
details for his/her ConnectedDrive account. ▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
1. Select a driver profile.
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive login details as- Vehicle acknowledgement signals
signed to the driver profile.
1. "CAR"
Guest profile 2. "Settings"
It is only possible to deactivate valet parking 3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
mode in the guest profile if the mode was acti- 4. To deactivate or activate desired acknowl-
vated in the guest profile. edgement signals:
1. Select the guest profile. ▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
2. Enter the PIN that was set during activa- Unlocking is acknowledged by two
tion. flashes, locking by one flash.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
113
Unlocking is acknowledged by two Depending on the equipment and national-

acoustic signals, locking by one acoustic market version, this setting may not be avail-
signal. able.
1. "CAR"
Automatic folding of the mirrors
2. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
3. "Key button assignment"
2. "Settings"
4. Select the icon.
The text next to the icon indicates the cur-
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"
rent setting.
Automatic unlocking 5. Select the desired setting:
1. "CAR" ▷ "Tailgate"
2. "Settings" Depending on the equipment, the boot

lid will be unlocked or opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
4. "Unlock at end of journey"
Depending on the equipment, the boot
After drive-ready state has been switched lid will be unlocked or opened and the
off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the doors are unlocked.
locked vehicle is automatically unlocked.
▷ "Tailgate opens after unlocking"
Automatic locking The vehicle must be unlocked before
the boot lid can be operated with the
1. "CAR"
vehicle key.
2. "Settings"
▷ "Lock tailgate button"
Operation of the boot lid with the vehicle
4. Select the desired setting: key is disabled.
▷ "Lock in a few minutes"
The vehicle is automatically locked Comfort Access
again after a short while if no doors are
opened after unlocking. Contactless locking and unlocking
▷ "Lock after pulling away" Contactless locking and unlocking can be
On driving off, the vehicle is locked auto- switched on or off.
matically. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Boot lid
Boot lid and doors 4. "Comfort access"
You can set up if only the boot lid will be un-
locked or if the doors will also be unlocked Closing the glass sunroof
when the boot lid is unlocked. automatically
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
114
3. "Doors/ vehicle access" Depending on local regulations, the acous-

4. "Automatic roof closing" tic alarm may be suppressed.
After locking, the open glass sunroof is au- ▷ Optical alarm:

tomatically moved to the raised position in By flashing of the hazard warning lights
the event of rain or after six hours. and, if applicable, the headlights.
To safeguard operation of the alarm system,
Establishing rest state after opening do not modify the system.
the front doors
1. "CAR" Switching on/off
2. "Settings" The alarm system is switched off/on as soon
as the vehicle is unlocked/locked with the vehi-
cle key or using Comfort Access.
4. "Switch off after door opening"
Rest state, see page 43. Opening the doors when the alarm
system is switched on
Alarm system The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if it has been unlocked via the door
lock using the integrated key.
Principle
The alarm system visually and acoustically Opening the boot lid with the alarm
signals when someone attempts to open the system switched on
locked vehicle.
The boot lid can be opened even with the
alarm system switched on.
General
When re-closed, the boot lid is locked and
The alarm system responds to the following monitored again provided that the doors are
changes in a locked vehicle: locked. The hazard warning lights flash once.
▷ A door, the bonnet or the boot lid is
opened. Indicator light on the interior mirror
▷ Movements inside the vehicle interior.
▷ A change in the vehicle's angle of inclina-
tion, for instance if an attempt is made to
jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it
prior to towing away.
▷ An interruption in the battery voltage.
▷ Improper use of the diagnostic socket.
▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con-
nected to the on-board diagnostic socket.
▷ Indicator light flashes every 2 seconds:
The alarm system indicates these changes vis-
ually and audibly: The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Acoustic alarm: ▷ Indicator light flashes for approximately
10 seconds then switches to flashing every
2 seconds:
115
The interior movement detector and tilt ▷ When transporting the vehicle via motorail,
alarm sensor are not active because the car ferry or trailer.
doors, bonnet or boot lid are not closed ▷ When there are pets in the vehicle.
correctly. Correctly closed access points are
▷ When the vehicle is locked after starting to
secured.
refuel.
Once the remaining open access points
The tilt alarm sensor and interior movement
have been closed, the interior movement
detector can be switched off for such situa-
detector and tilt alarm sensor are switched
tions.
on.
▷ The indicator light extinguishes after the Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
vehicle has been unlocked:
interior movement detector
This means that the vehicle is not being
tampered with. Within 10 seconds of locking the vehicle,
press the button on the vehicle key.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until drive-ready state is switched on, but The indicator light illuminates for approxi-
for no longer than approximately 5 minutes: mately 2 seconds and then flashes again.
The alarm has been triggered. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior move-
ment detector are switched off until the next
time the vehicle is locked.
Tilt alarm sensor
The vehicle's angle of inclination is monitored. Ending the alarm
The alarm system responds, for example when ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
there is an attempt to steal a wheel or tow the
vehicle away. ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key
and switch on drive-ready state using the
emergency detection of the vehicle key.
Interior movement detector
Malfunction, see page 91.
The vehicle interior is monitored.
▷ With Comfort Access: fully grip the door
The alarm system responds when movement
handle of the driver's or front passenger
is detected in the vehicle interior.
door while carrying the vehicle key.
To ensure perfect functioning, the windows
and glass sunroof must be closed.
Window lifters
Avoiding false warnings
General
General
The windows can be opened and closed from
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior move- outside with the vehicle key.
ment detector may trigger an alarm even
though no unauthorised activity is taking place. With Comfort Access:The windows can be
closed from outside using Comfort Access.
Situations where false warnings may occur:
If a window is often opened in the same loca-
▷ In washing bays or car washes. tion, this task can be carried out by the BMW
▷ In two-level garages. Intelligent Personal Assistant. For example, if
you often use the same multi-storey car park.
116
For further information: Opening

▷ Vehicle key, see page 87. ▷ Press the switch as far as the re-
▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, see sistance point.
page 55. The window opens for as long as the
switch is held.
Safety information ▷ Press the switch past the resist-
ance point.
WARNING The window is opened automatically.
Parts of the body can become trapped when Pressing the switch again stops the move-
the windows are operated. There is a danger ment.
of injury or material damage. When opening
and closing, make sure that the movement Closing
range of the windows is kept clear. ▷ Pull the switch as far as the resist-
ance point.
The window closes for as long as the
Overview switch is held.
▷ Pull the switch past the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically if the
door is closed. Pulling the switch again
stops the movement.
Anti-trap mechanism
Principle
Window lifters
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or
parts of the body from becoming trapped be-
Safety switch tween the door frame and window while a win-
dow is being closed.
Operating requirements General

The windows can be operated under the If resistance or an obstruction is detected while
following conditions. a window is being closed, the closing process
is interrupted.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
▷ For a short while after rest state has been
established.
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle interior.
117
Safety information Roller sunblinds for the rear

window
WARNING
Accessories on the windows, for example Safety information
aerials, can impair the anti-trap mechanism.
There is a danger of injury. Do not attach
any accessories within the movement range NOTICE
of the windows. Objects placed on the parcel shelf may dam-
age the roller sunblinds while the roller sun-
blinds are being operated. There is a risk
Closing with no anti-trap mechanism of material damage. During operation, make
If an external hazard or ice prevents normal sure that the movement range of the roller
closure, proceed as follows: sunblinds is clear.
1. Pull the switch past the resistance

point and hold it in this position. Overview
The window is closed but with restricted
anti-trap mechanism. If the closing force
exceeds a certain level, the closing opera-
tion is interrupted.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance

point again within approximately 4 seconds
and hold it in this position.
The window is closed with no anti-trap
mechanism. Button for the roller sunblind.
Safety switch
Operation
Principle
Press the button to open the closed
The safety switch can be used to prevent chil- roller sunblind or to close the opened
dren from opening and closing the rear win- roller sunblind.
dows with the switches in the rear, for exam-
ple. Pressing the button again during the move-
ment moves the roller sunblind in the opposite
If an accident of appropriate severity occurs, direction.
the safety function is automatically switched
off.
System limits
Switching on/off If the roller sunblind can no longer be moved
Press the key. after a number of operations in immediate
succession, the overheating protection mech-
The LED is illuminated when the
anism is active. The system is blocked for a
safety function is switched on.
118
limited time to prevent overheating. Allow the Safety information

system to cool down.
The roller sunblind cannot be moved at low
WARNING
interior temperatures.
Parts of the body may become trapped when
the glass sunroof is operated. There is a
Roller sunblinds, rear side danger of injury. When opening and closing,
make sure that the movement range of the
windows glass sunroof is kept clear.
Safety information
Overview
WARNING
When the roller sunblinds are closed and the
windows opened, the roller sunblinds can be
heavily stressed during the journey due to the
air stream. The roller sunblinds can become
damaged and endanger vehicle occupants.
There is a danger of injury. Do not open the
windows during the journey when the roller
sunblinds are closed.
To open/close the glass sun-
Pull the roller sunblind out with the loop and roof/sun protection.
hook into the holder.
Electric glass sunroof

General The glass sunroof and the sun protection can
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are be operated under the following conditions.
operated using the same switch. ▷ Standby state is switched on.
The glass sunroof can be opened and closed ▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
from outside with the vehicle key. ▷ For a short while after rest state has been
With Comfort Access:The glass sunroof can be established.
closed from outside using Comfort Access. The vehicle key must be in the vehicle interior.
Raising/closing the glass sunroof

Press the switch briefly up.
119
▷ The closed glass sunroof is raised and the Opening/closing the glass sunroof
sun protection opens slightly. and sun protection together
▷ The opened glass sunroof closes to the
▷ Slide the switch back beyond
raised position. The sun protection does
the resistance point twice in
not move.
quick succession.
▷ The raised glass sunroof is closed.
The glass sunroof and
the sun protection open to-
Opening/closing the glass sunroof gether.
and sun protection separately Pressing the switch again
stops the movement.
▷ Slide the switch backwards
as far as the resistance point ▷ Slide the switch forwards beyond the re-
and hold. sistance point twice in quick succession.
The sun protection opens The glass sunroof and the sun protection
for as long as the switch close together.
is pressed. If the sun protec- Pressing the switch again stops the move-
tion is already fully open, the ment.
glass sunroof is opened.
▷ Slide the switch forwards as far as the re-
Comfort position
sistance point and hold.
In some models, wind noise levels inside the
The glass sunroof closes for as long as
vehicle are lowest when the glass sunroof is
the switch is held. If the glass sunroof is
not fully open. On these models, the automatic
already closed or is in the raised position,
function initially only opens the glass sunroof
the sun protection is closed.
as far as this comfort position.
▷ Slide the switch backwards beyond the re-
Pressing the switch again opens the glass
sistance point.
sunroof fully.
The sun protection is opened automatically.
If the sun protection is already fully open, Closing when it is raining
the glass sunroof is opened automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the move- Principle
ment.
After locking, the open glass sunroof is auto-
▷ Slide the switch forwards beyond the re- matically moved to the raised position in the
sistance point. event of rain or after six hours.
The glass sunroof is closed automatically.
If the glass sunroof is already closed or is Operating requirements
in the raised position, the sun protection is ▷ Rain must be able to reach the sensor field
closed automatically. in the area of the interior mirror. The sen-
Pressing the switch again stops the move- sor field may be obscured by a car port or
ment. bridge, for example.
▷ Vehicle must be in rest state.
▷ The function must be activated in the set-
tings.
120
For settings, see page 113. 1. Close all doors.

2. Slide the switch forwards beyond the re-
Malfunctions
sistance point and hold it in this position.
The open glass sunroof is not moved to the
The glass sunroof is closed with restricted
raised position under the following circumstan-
anti-trap mechanism. If the closing force
ces:
exceeds a certain level, the closing opera-
▷ The glass sunroof is blocked. tion is interrupted.
▷ The anti-trap mechanism cannot be guar- 3. Slide the switch forwards once again be-
anteed. yond the resistance point and hold until
▷ There is a system error, for example due the glass sunroof closes with no anti-trap
to a temporary open circuit. In this case, mechanism. Ensure that the closing range
initialising the glass sunroof can help. is clear.
An error message is shown on the control dis-
play. No further closure is attempted. Closing with no anti-trap mechanism
from a raised position
If rain detection is not possible due to the sys-
tem, the open glass sunroof is immediately If an external hazard or ice prevents normal
moved to the raised position. An error mes- closure, proceed as follows:
sage is shown on the control display.
Anti-trap mechanism
Principle
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or 1. Close all doors.
parts of the body from becoming trapped be- 2. Slide the switch forwards beyond the re-
tween the roof frame and glass sunroof while sistance point and hold it in this position.
the glass sunroof is being closed.
Initialising after an open circuit
General
If resistance or an obstruction is detected while General
the glass sunroof is being closed, the closing If a open circuit occurs while the glass sunroof
operation is interrupted once the roof reaches is opening or closing, it may only have restric-
the half-open position or when closing from ted functionality afterwards. In this case, initial-
the raised position. ising the system can help.
The system can be initialised if the following
Closing with no anti-trap mechanism
conditions are met:
from an open position
▷ The vehicle is parked on level ground.
If an external hazard or ice prevents normal
closure, proceed as follows: ▷ The vehicle does not move until initialisa-
tion is complete.
▷ Drive-ready state is activated.
▷ The outside temperature is above
5 ℃/41 ℉.
121
During initialisation, the glass sunroof closes

with no anti-trap mechanism.
Ensure that the closing range is clear.
Initialising the system

Press the switch up and hold
until initialisation is complete:
Initialisation begins within 15 seconds.

▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens, then
closes again.
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
Initialisation is complete once the glass sun-
roof and sun protection have opened then
closed again.
122
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle equipment Seats
This chapter describes all standard, country- Safety information
equipment and functions which are not avail- WARNING
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the Setting the seat during a journey could cause
optional equipment selected or the national- the seat to move unexpectedly. You could
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
evant functions and systems. Please comply accident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's
with the relevant laws and regulations when side when at a standstill.
tems.
WARNING
Safe seating position If the backrest is angled too far back, the pro-
tective effect of the seat belt will no longer
A seat position that suitably meets the needs be guaranteed. There is a risk of sliding un-
of the occupants is essential for relaxed driving der the seat belt in the event of an accident.
with minimum fatigue. There is a danger of injury or danger to life.
In an accident, the correct seat position plays Adjust the seat before starting the journey.
an important role. Pay attention to the notes in Adjust the backrest to the most upright posi-
the following chapters. tion possible, and do not change it during the
journey.
▷ Seats, see page 123.
▷ Seat belts, see page 127. WARNING
▷ Head restraints, see page 131. There is a risk of entrapment when the seats
▷ Airbags, see page 202. are moved. There is a danger of injury or
material damage. Before making any adjust-
ment, make sure that the movement range of
the seat is clear.
123
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Partly electrically adjustable seats Backrest angle
Overview
Tilt the switch forwards or backwards.
1 Longitudinal direction Height

2 Thigh support
3 Backrest width
4 Lumbar support
5 Backrest angle
6 Height, seat angle
Longitudinal direction
Seat angle
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired

direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently
forward or back to make sure it engages prop-
erly.
Tilt the switch up or down.
Electrically adjustable seats
General
The current seat position can be saved using
the memory function.
124
Overview Seat angle
1 Thigh support Tilt the switch up or down.

2 Forward/back position, height, seat angle
3 Backrest upper section Backrest angle
4 Backrest width
5 Lumbar support
6 Backrest angle, head restraint
Longitudinal direction
Tilt the switch forwards or backwards.
Adjusting the seat position

automatically
General
Press the switch forwards or backwards.
The driver's seat setting is saved for the cur-
rent driver profile. When a driver profile is se-
Height lected, the saved position is set automatically.
Enabling/disabling settings
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select driver’s seat.
125
Calibrating the front seats Thigh support

General Multifunction seat
As soon as the electric seat adjustment no lon-
ger functions precisely, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed on the control display.
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of entrapment when the seats Press the switch forwards or backwards.
are moved. There is a danger of injury or
material damage. Before making any adjust- Sport seat
the seat is clear.
Calibrating the front seat

1. Push the switch forward again in a longitu-
dinal direction until the seat stops.
2. Push the switch forward again until the seat
stops.
3. Reset the desired seat position.
Pull the lever on the front of the seat and ad-
As soon as the message on the control dis- just the thigh support forwards or backwards.
play disappears, the calibration is complete.
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-
bration. Lumbar support
If the message is not hidden after repeated
calibration, have the system checked by an au- Principle
thorised Service Partner or another qualified The curvature of the backrest can be changed
Service Partner or a specialist workshop. to provide support for the lumbar region, or
lordosis. The upper edge of the pelvis and the
spinal column are supported to encourage an
upright sitting posture.
Adjusting
▷ Press the button at the front/
rear:
126
The curvature is in- Adjusting

creased/decreased.
▷ Press the button at the top/bottom:
The curvature is shifted upwards/down-
wards.
Backrest width
Principle
The backrest width can be adjusted to improve
▷ Press the button at the front:
lateral support when cornering.
The backrest upper section is tilted for-
General wards.
The backrest width is changed by adjusting ▷ Press the button at the rear:
the side sections of the backrest. The backrest upper section is tilted back-
Temporarily, the backrest width opens com- wards.
pletely to facilitate getting into and out of the
vehicle.
Seat belts
Adjusting
▷ Press the button at the front: General
Backrest width is reduced. For the safety of the vehicle occupants, the ve-
▷ Press the button at the rear: hicle is equipped with five seat belts. However,
the seat belt can only provide protective effect
Backrest width is increased.
when worn correctly.
Before each journey, always make sure that
Backrest upper section all occupants have fastened their seat belts.
The airbags supplement the seat belts as an
Principle additional safety device. The airbags are not a
The backrest upper section provides support substitute for the seat belts.
for the back in the shoulder region. When ad- All belt fastening points are designed to ach-
justed correctly, it ensures a relaxed seat posi- ieve the best possible protective effect of the
tion, and reduces strain on the shoulder mus- seat belts with proper use of the seat belts and
cles. correct seat setting. Notes on sitting safely,
see page 123.
The two outer seat belt buckles on the rear
seats are intended for those sitting on the left
and right.
The inner seat belt buckle on the rear seats is
intended for the person sitting in the middle.
127
Safety information belt should be replaced if the seat belt strap

becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.
Seat belts should not be worn with straps
WARNING twisted. Each seat belt assembly must only
If a seat belt is used by more than one per- be used by one occupant; it is forbidden to
son at the same time, the protective effect of put a belt around a child being carried on the
the seat belt is no longer guaranteed. There occupant's lap.
is a danger of injury or danger to life. Only It is essential to replace the entire seat belt
one person should use each seat belt at any assembly after it has been worn in a severe
one time. Do not allow infants and children impact even if damage to the assembly is not
to travel on the lap of another occupant. In- obvious.
stead, secure the infant or child in child re-
straint systems intended for this purpose.
WARNING
No modifications or additions should be
WARNING
made by the user that will either prevent the
The protective effect of the seat belts may be seat belt adjusting devices from operating to
restricted or may even fail completely if the remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assem-
seat belts are worn incorrectly. If a seat belt is bly from being adjusted to remove slack.
not worn correctly, additional injuries can be
caused, for example in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or avoidance manoeuvre. There
WARNING
is a danger of injury or danger to life. Make
sure that all vehicle occupants have fastened If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
their seat belts correctly. protective effect of the middle seat belt is not
ensured. There is a danger of injury or dan-
ger to life. Lock the wider rear seat backrest
when using the middle seat belt.
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear upon the
bony structure of the body and should be
WARNING
worn low across the front of the pelvis, or the
pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable. The protective effect of the seat belts may be
Wearing the lap section of the belt across the restricted or may even fail completely in the
abdominal area must be avoided. following situations:
Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as ▷ If the seat belts or seat belt buckles are
possible, consistent with comfort, to provide damaged, dirty or have been modified in
the protection for which they have been de- another way.
signed. A slack seat belt will greatly reduce ▷ The seat belt tensioners or belt retrac-
the protection afforded to the wearer. tors have been modified.
Care should be taken to avoid contamina- Seat belts can be damaged in an accident
tion of the seat belt strap by polishes, oils without the damage necessarily being appa-
and chemicals and particularly battery acid. rent. There is a danger of injury or danger
Cleaning may safely be carried out using to life. Do not modify seat belts, seat belt
a mild soap and water solution. The seat buckles, seat belt tensioners, belt retractors
128
and belt anchor points and ensure that they Fastening the seat belt
are kept clean. After an accident, have the
1. When fastening the seat belt, guide it
seat belts inspected at an authorised Service
slowly over the shoulder and pelvis.
Partner or another qualified Service Partner
or a specialist workshop. 2. Insert the seat belt tongue in the seat belt
buckle. The seat belt buckle must be heard
to engage.
Correct seat belt use
▷ Place the seat belt tightly over the pelvis
and shoulder, close to the body and without
twisting.
▷ Make sure that the seat belt is positioned
low at the hips in the area of the pelvis. The
seat belt must not press on the abdomen.
▷ The seat belt must not be allowed to rub
against sharp edges, be routed over solid
or breakable objects or be trapped. If fastened, the driver's and front passenger's
seat belt strap is automatically tensioned once
▷ Avoid wearing bulky clothing.
when driving off.
▷ Keep the seat belt taut by occasionally pull-
ing upwards on the upper body area.
Unfastening the seat belt
1. Hold the seat belt firmly.
Setting for automatic retracting seat
belts 2. Press the red button on the seat belt
buckle.
▷ Draw the seat belt tongue attached to the
seat belt across the body and press it into 3. Guide the seat belt back up to the auto-
the seat belt buckle until a 'click' is heard. matic reel.
▷ Adjustment of the belt length is very im-

portant. To adjust the lap belt and check
Middle seat belt in the rear
whether the seat belt buckle has locked
correctly, pull upwards on the shoulder Fastening the seat belt
strap until the lap belt fits tightly.
▷ The length of the diagonal shoulder strap
adjusts itself automatically to allow free-
dom of movement.
▷ To release the seat belt, press the button
on the seat belt buckle.
129
1. Pull the seat belt tongue at the end of the Display in the instrument cluster
belt out of the bracket on the parcel shelf. A Check Control message is shown.
2. Insert the lower seat belt tongue in the belt Check whether the seat belt has been
lock, arrow 1. fastened correctly.
3. Insert the upper seat belt tongue in the seat
belt buckle, arrow 2. Rear seat belt warning
The seat belt buckles must be heard to en-
gage. General
The seat belt warning is automatically activa-
Unfastening the seat belt ted every time the engine starts.
1. Hold the seat belt firmly. The seat belt warning will also be activated if a
2. Press the red button on the seat belt rear seat belt is unfastened during the journey.
buckle.
3. Use the seat belt tongue, arrow 1, to open Display in the instrument cluster
the belt lock, arrow 2. The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
illuminated after engine start.
The displays may vary depending on the
equipment and national-market version.
Icon Description
Green: seat belt fastened on

the corresponding rear seat.
4. Guide the seat belt to the bracket on the

parcel shelf.
Red: seat belt not fastened on
Seat belt warning for driver’s and the corresponding rear seat.
front passenger seat
General
The seat belt warning is activated when the
seat belt on the driver's side is not fastened. Safety function
In some national-market versions, the seat belt In critical driving situations, for example full
warning is also enabled when the front pas- braking, the front seat belts are tensioned au-
senger seat belt is not fastened or objects are tomatically.
placed on the front passenger seat. If the driving situation passes without an acci-
The seat belt warning will also be activated if a dent, the belt tension is slackened again.
seat belt is unfastened during the journey. If the belt tension does not loosen automati-
cally, stop the vehicle and unfasten the seat
belt by pressing the red button in the seat belt
130
buckle. Fasten the seat belt again before con- ▷ Do not fit any covers on the seats or
tinuing driving. head restraints.
▷ Do not hang objects such as coat hang-
ers directly on the head restraint.
Front head restraints ▷ Only use accessories that have been
classified as safe for attaching to the
General head restraint.
The current head restraint position can be ▷ Do not use any accessories, for example
saved with the memory function. cushions, during the journey.
Safety information
Active head restraint
In the event of a severe rear-end collision, the
WARNING active head restraint automatically reduces the
If the head restraints are removed or incor- distance to the head.
rectly adjusted, they cannot provide protec- Check the active head restraint if it has been
tive effect as intended and head and neck in- subjected to an accident or is damaged, and
juries may result. There is a danger of injury. have it replaced if necessary.
▷ Before a journey, re-install any removed
head restraints on all occupied seats. Adjusting the height: manual head
▷ Adjust the head restraint so that its cen- restraints
tre supports the back of the head at eye
level where possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. If necessary, adjust the dis-
tance by adjusting the backrest angle.
WARNING
Parts of the body can become trapped when ▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
the head restraint is moved. There is a dan- the head restraint downwards.
ger of injury. When moving the head restraint,
▷ Up: push the head restraint upwards.
make sure that the movement range is kept
clear. After adjusting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint impair the pro-
tective effect of the head restraint in the head
and neck area. There is a danger of injury.
131
Adjusting the height: electric head Adjusting the side sections

restraints
Fold the side sections forwards to increase lat-

Press the switch up or down. eral support in the rest position.
Adjusting the distance: manual Removing

head restraints The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints

Safety information
WARNING
If the head restraints are removed or incor-
rectly adjusted, they cannot provide protec-
▷ Back: press the button and push back the tive effect as intended and head and neck in-
head restraint. juries may result. There is a danger of injury.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint forwards. ▷ Before a journey, re-install any removed
After adjusting the distance, make sure that head restraints on all occupied seats.
the head restraint engages correctly. ▷ Adjust the head restraint so that its cen-
tre supports the back of the head at eye
Adjusting the distance: electric head level where possible.
restraints ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
The head restraint is moved automatically on
of the head. If necessary, adjust the dis-
adjusting the backrest upper section.
tance by adjusting the backrest angle.
132
WARNING
the head restraint is moved. There is a dan-
ger of injury. When moving the head restraint,
make sure that the movement range is kept
clear.
▷ Backwards: press the button, arrow 1, and

WARNING
fold back the head restraint.
Objects on the head restraint impair the pro-
▷ Forwards: fold the head restraint forwards
tective effect of the head restraint in the head
as far as it will go. Ensure that the head
and neck area. There is a danger of injury.
restraint engages correctly.
▷ Do not fit any covers on the seats or
head restraints.
▷ Do not hang objects such as coat hang-
Adjusting the height
ers directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been
classified as safe for attaching to the
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for example
cushions, during the journey.
Folding down the middle head

restraint The height of the outer head restraints can be
The middle head restraint can be folded back adjusted.
to improve rearward visibility. Only fold down ▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
the head restraint if no one is intending to sit the head restraint downwards.
on the middle seat. ▷ Up: push the head restraint upwards.
After adjusting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Removing
With through-loading system:
The outer head restraints can be removed.
Only remove the head restraint if no-one is
intending to sit in the seat in question.
133
your shoulder to estimate the distance from

following traffic.
Overview
1. Fold down the respective rear seat back-

rest.
To enlarge the luggage compartment, see
page 343.
2. Push the head restraint up until resistance
is felt. 1 Adjusting
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head 2 To select a mirror, automatic parking func-
restraint fully out. tion
3 Folding in and out
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
restraint.
Press the key.
After installation, make sure that the head re-
straint engages correctly. The selected mirror moves in response
to the button movement.
Exterior mirrors To select a mirror

To switch to the other mirror:
General
Push the switch.
The mirrors setting is saved for the current
driver profile. If a driver profile is selected, the
saved position is loaded automatically. Malfunction
The current exterior mirror positions can be In the event of an electrical fault, press the
saved with the memory function. edges of the mirror glass to adjust the mirror.
Safety information Folding in and out
WARNING NOTICE
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than Because of its width, the vehicle could sus-
they appear. The distance from road users tain damage in car washes. There is a risk
behind the vehicle could be incorrectly esti- of material damage. Before washing, fold the
mated, for example when changing driving mirrors in manually or with the button.
lane. There is a risk of accident. Look over
134
Press the key. Interior mirror

The mirrors can be folded in at vehicle speeds
up to approx. 20 km/h, 15 mph.
General
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Folding the mirrors in and out is useful in the
following situations: The function is controlled by photocells:
▷ In car washes. ▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ In narrow streets. ▷ On the back of the mirror.
Mirrors which are folded in automatically fold
out when the vehicle reaches a speed of ap- Overview
proximately 40 km/h, 25 mph.
Automatic heating
When required, both exterior mirrors are au-
tomatically heated when drive-ready state is
switched on.
Automatic anti-dazzle
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is dim-
med automatically. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this function. Operating requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
Automatic parking function ▷ Do not obstruct the zone between the inte-
rior mirror and the windscreen.
Principle
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror
glass on the passenger's side is tilted down- Steering wheel
wards. When parking, for example, this gives
the driver a better view of the kerb or other Safety information
objects near the ground.
Activating WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving
1. Push the switch to the driver's mir- may cause the steering wheel to move unex-
ror position. pectedly. You could lose control of the vehi-
2. Engage selector lever position R. cle. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust
the steering wheel when the vehicle is at a
The automatic parking function is deactivated standstill.
when the trailer socket is occupied.
Deactivating
Push the switch to the front passenger's side
exterior mirror position.
135
Electrical steering wheel adjustment Steering wheel heating
General Overview
The steering wheel adjustment is saved for the
current driver profile. If a driver profile is selec-
ted, the position that applies when drive-ready
state is switched on is loaded automatically.
The current steering wheel position can be
saved with the memory function.
Temporarily, the steering wheel moves to the
highest position to facilitate getting into and
out of the vehicle.
Button for steering wheel heating
Adjusting
Switching on/off
Press the key.
If a journey is resumed within about 15 minutes

after a temporary stop, steering wheel heating
switches on automatically provided that the
function had been active at the end of the pre-
vious journey.
Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel
to the correct forward/back position and height
for your seat position. Memory function
Manual steering wheel adjustment Principle

The memory function enables the following
settings to be stored and retrieved when re-
quired:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Height of the Head-up display.
General
1. Fold the lever down fully.
For each driver profile, two memory slots can
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands
be assigned with different settings.
and adjust it in the longitudinal direction
and height of the seat position. The following settings are not saved:
3. Fold the lever back up.
136
▷ Backrest width. Retrieving settings

▷ Lumbar support. Press the desired button 1 or 2.
The saved position is retrieved.
Safety information
The operation is halted when you press a seat
setting switch or press one of the memory but-
WARNING tons again.
Using the memory function while driving may The adjustment of the seat position on the
cause the seat or steering wheel to move driver's side is interrupted after a short time
unexpectedly. You could lose control of the while driving.
vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the memory function when the vehicle is at
standstill. Massage function
Principle
WARNING Depending on the programme, the massage
There is a risk of entrapment when the seats function helps to relax the muscles and im-
are moved. There is a danger of injury or prove blood flow, and is able to avoid feelings
material damage. Before making any adjust- of fatigue.
the seat is clear. General
Eight different massage programmes can be
selected:
Overview
▷ Pelvic activation.
▷ Upper-body activation.
▷ Whole body mobilisation.
▷ Back massage.
▷ Shoulder massage.
▷ Lumbar massage.
▷ Upper-body training.
▷ Whole body exercise.
The memory buttons are on the front door.
Overview
Saving
1. Set the desired position.
2. Press the button. The lettering in

the button is illuminated.
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the
lettering is illuminated. A signal sounds.
137
Massage function Rear
Switching on
Press the button once for each inten-
sity level.
The highest intensity level is selected if the
three LEDs are illuminated.
Switching off
Seat heating
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs are extinguished.
Switching on
Selecting the massage programme Press the button once for each tem-
1. "CAR" perature stage.
2. "Settings" The highest temperature if the three LEDs are
3. "Seat comfort" illuminated.
4. Select the desired seat. If a drive is resumed within about 15 minutes

5. "Seat massage" after a temporary stop, seat heating is auto-
matically activated at the last temperature set-
ting.
If ECO PRO is activated, the heater output is
Seat heating reduced.
Overview ECO PRO, see page 362.
Front Switching off

Press and hold the button until the bar
display on the climate display no lon-
ger illuminates.
Seat heating distribution

The heating effect between the seat cushion
and the backrest can be varied.
1. "CAR"
Seat heating 2. "Settings"
3. "Climate comfort"
4. Select the desired menu item.
138
5. Select the desired seat. Climate control rules

6. Press and turn the Controller to adjust the
seat heating distribution.
Principle
Depending on the equipment, some heating
Active seat ventilation and air conditioning functions can be activated
automatically according to the outside temper-
ature.
Principle
Fans integrated into the seat cushion and General
backrest ensure a pleasant seating climate.
The outside temperature from which the func-
tions are to be activated automatically can be
Overview set using iDrive.
The functions are activated if the outside tem-
perature exceeds or falls below the set tem-
perature in the first few minutes after drive-
ready state has been switched on. The system
re-calibrates if the settings are changed.
Depending on equipment, the following func-
tions can be activated automatically:
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Steering wheel heating.
Active seat ventilation
▷ Active seat ventilation.
If the journey is continued within about 15 mi-
Switching on active seat ventilation nutes after a temporary stop, the functions are
automatically activated with the most recent
Press the button once for each venti- settings.
lation stage.
The highest setting is selected if the three Operating requirements
LEDs are illuminated.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
After a short time, the system automatically
switches down one level. Activating/deactivating
1. "CAR"
Switching off active seat ventilation 2. "Settings"
Press and hold the button until the 3. "Climate comfort"
LEDs are extinguished.
4. If necessary, "Automate habits"
5. Select the desired function.
6. Activate the required rule.
7. If applicable, adjust the level.
139
CONTROLS Carrying children safely
Carrying children safely

Vehicle equipment
WARNING
This chapter describes all standard, country- Hot vehicle can have fatal consequences,
specific and optional equipment available for in particular for children or pets. There is a
the model range. It may therefore describe danger of injury or danger to life. Do not
equipment and functions which are not avail- leave anyone unsupervised in the vehicle, es-
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the pecially children or pets.
evant functions and systems. Please comply WARNING
using the corresponding functions and sys- Child restraint systems and their parts can
tems. get very hot when exposed to direct sun-
light. Contact with hot parts can cause burns.
There is a danger of injury. Do not expose
Important considerations the child restraint system to direct sunlight;
cover the child restraint system if necessary.
If required, allow the child restraint system to
Safety information cool down before transporting a child. Do not
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
WARNING
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle Children on the rear seat
themselves or other road users, for example General
Accident research has shown that the safest
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. place for children is on the rear seat.
▷ Releasing the parking brake. Wherever possible, children younger than
▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. 12 years old or shorter than 150 cm, 5 ft should
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. be transported only on the rear seats in child
restraint systems appropriate for their age,
weight and stature. Children aged 12 years and
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not older must be secured with a seat belt once a
leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve- suitable child restraint system is no longer an
hicle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehi- option due to their age, weight or stature.
140
Carrying children safely CONTROLS
Safety information PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light is

illuminated.
WARNING
Children shorter than 150 cm, 5 ft cannot
wear the seat belt correctly without using ad- Fitting child restraint
ditional child restraint systems. The protec- systems
tive effect of the seat belts may be restricted
or may even fail completely if the seat belts
are worn incorrectly. If a seat belt is not worn General
correctly, additional injuries can be caused, Please comply with the operating and safety
for example in the event of an accident, brak- instructions provided by the child restraint sys-
ing or avoidance manoeuvre. There is a dan- tem manufacturer when selecting, attaching
ger of injury or danger to life. Children shorter and using child restraint systems.
than 150 cm, 5 ft must be secured in suitable
child restraint systems. Safety information
Not for Australia:Children on the WARNING

front passenger seat If child restraint systems and their attach-
ment systems have been damaged or sub-
General jected to stresses in an accident, their pro-
tective effect may be restricted or may fail
When using a rearward-facing child restraint
completely. A child might not be adequately
system on the front passenger seat, make sure
restrained, for example in the event of an
that the front passenger airbag is deactivated.
accident, braking or avoidance manoeuvre.
Airbags on the front passenger side can only
There is a danger of injury or danger to life.
be deactivated with the key switch for front
passenger airbags. If it is not possible to deac- Do not continue to use child restraint systems
tivate the front passenger airbag, do not carry which are damaged or have been subjected
children in rearward-facing child restraint sys- to stresses in an accident.
tems on the front passenger seat. If attachment systems have been damaged
For further information: or subjected to stresses in an accident, have
them checked and replaced by an authorised
Key switch for front passenger airbag, see
Service Partner or another qualified Service
page 204.
Partner or a specialist workshop.
Safety information
WARNING
DANGER
If the seat is not set properly or the child
If triggered, an active front passenger airbag seat has been installed incorrectly, the child
can fatally injure a child in a child restraint restraint system may have restricted or no
system which is mounted facing backwards. stability at all. There is a danger of injury
There is a danger to life. Make sure that the or danger to life. Make sure that the child
front passenger airbag is deactivated and the restraint system rests firmly against the seat
backrest. Wherever possible, adapt the back-
141
rest angle of all relevant seat backrests and ted, do not install a rearward-facing child re-
adjust the seats correctly. Make sure that straint system.
the seats and their backrests are correctly For further information:
engaged or locked. If possible and if neces-
Key switch for front passenger airbag, see
sary, adjust the height of the head restraints
page 204.
or remove them.
Rearward-facing child restraint

For Australia: installation of child systems
restraint systems
Please note the following warning because DANGER
your vehicle has been equipped with a front If triggered, an active front passenger airbag
airbag for the front passenger seat that cannot can fatally injure a child in a child restraint
be deactivated: system which is mounted facing backwards.
It is not recommended to use rear- There is a danger to life. Make sure that the
ward-facing child restraint systems on front passenger airbag is deactivated and the
the front passenger seat. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light is
illuminated.
Extreme hazard
Do not use rearward-facing child restraint
systems on a seat protected by an airbag in
front of it.
Not for Australia:On the front

passenger seat
Deactivating the airbag Follow the note on the sun visor on the pas-
senger's side.
Never use a rearward-facing child restraint on
DANGER
a seat protected by an active front airbag, as
If triggered, an active front passenger airbag death or serious injury to the child can occur.
can fatally injure a child in a child restraint
system which is mounted facing backwards.
There is a danger to life. Make sure that the Seat position and height
front passenger airbag is deactivated and the After installing a universal child restraint sys-
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light is tem, move the front passenger seat as far
illuminated. back as it will go and adjust it to the high-
est position. This seat position and height pro-
Before installing a rearward-facing child re- vides the best possible belt routing and protec-
straint system on the front passenger seat, tion in the event of an accident.
make sure that the front passenger airbag is If the upper attachment point of the seat belt is
deactivated. If the airbag cannot be deactiva- in front of the child seat's seat belt guide, care-
fully move the front passenger seat forwards
142
until the best possible seat belt guide is ach- Safety information
ieved.
Backrest width WARNING
With adjustable backrest width: before fitting If the child restraint system lower anchors are
a child restraint system on the front passen- not engaged correctly, the protective effect of
ger seat, fully open the backrest width. Do not the child restraint system will be restricted.
change the backrest width from this point on There is a danger of injury or danger to life.
and do not retrieve a seat position from the Make sure the lower anchor points have en-
memory. gaged correctly and the child restraint system
rests firmly against the backrest.
ISOFIX child safety seat

fasteners WARNING
The mounts for the lower anchors and the
attachment points for child restraint systems
General are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
Please comply with the operating and safety tems only. If other objects are attached, the
instructions provided by the child restraint sys- mounts or attachment points can be dam-
tem manufacturer when selecting, attaching aged. There is a danger of injury or material
and using ISOFIX child restraint systems. damage. Only attach child restraint systems
to the corresponding mounts for the lower
Suitable ISOFIX child restraint anchors or the attachment points.
systems
Only certain ISOFIX child restraint systems are Position
permitted for use on the designated seats. The
associated size class and size category are
Icon Meaning
denoted by a letter or ISO reference on a plate
on the child seat. The corresponding icon shows
For further information: the fixtures for the lower ISO-
FIX anchors.
Suitable seats for child restraint systems, see
page 145.
Fixtures for lower ISOFIX anchors
General
Note the following when attaching child re-
straint systems with integrated strap to the
lower ISOFIX anchors:
The total weight of the child and child restraint
system must not exceed 33 kg, 73 lbs.
143
Icon Meaning
If this icon is seen in the vehi-

cle, the vehicle has also been
approved in accordance with
i-Size. The icon shows the
mounts for the system's lower
anchors. The lower anchors
meet the European i-Size re-
quirements.
The fixtures for the lower ISOFIX anchors are
located behind the marked covers. The corresponding icon shows
the top tether eyelet.
Before fitting ISOFIX child restraint

systems
Pull the seat belt away from the area of the
child seat mountings.
Fixtures for the upper
Fitting ISOFIX child restraint retaining strap
systems
1. Install child restraint system, see the manu- General
facturer's instructions.
When attaching child restraint systems to the
2. Make sure that both ISOFIX anchors are
upper attachment points, observe the informa-
engaged correctly.
tion, operating and safety instructions of the
child restraint system manufacturer.
i-Size child restraint systems
Safety information
General
i-Size is a regulation for child restraint sys-
tems, which is used for the approval of child WARNING
restraint systems. If the upper retaining strap is used incorrectly
on the child restraint system, the protective
effect will be reduced. There is a danger of
injury. Make sure that the upper retaining
strap is not twisted and is not routed to the
upper attachment point over sharp edges.
WARNING
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
protective effect of the child restraint system
will be restricted or lost. The rear seat back-
rest may fold forward in certain situations, for
example in the event of braking manoeuvre
144
or an accident. There is a danger of injury or retaining strap of ISOFIX child restraint sys-
danger to life. Make sure that the rear seat tems.
backrests are locked.
Routing the retaining strap

WARNING
The mounts for the lower anchors and the
attachment points for child restraint systems
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a danger of injury or material
damage. Only attach child restraint systems
to the corresponding mounts for the lower
anchors or the attachment points. 1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook of the upper retaining strap
Attachment points
4 Attachment point
Icon Meaning 5 Parcel shelf
The corresponding icon shows 6 Seat backrest

the top tether eyelet. 7 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap

to the attachment point
1. Open the cover of the attachment point.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the mounts or along both sides of the head
restraint to the attachment point.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
attachment point.
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.
Depending on vehicle equipment, there are
two or three attachment points for the upper
Suitable seats for child restraint systems

General
The legal provisions determining which child may vary from country to country. Please com-
seat is permitted for which age and body size ply with the relevant national legal provisions.
145
Additional information is available from an au- Seats for child restraint systems, see
thorised Service Partner or another qualified page 451.
For detailed information about using child re-
straint systems:
Seats and child restraint systems

The following section provides information on
which child restraint system is suitable for
which seat in the vehicle.
Left-hand drive vehicles, seats:
Seat Airbag, front Mounting

passenger
3 a) ON only for-
ward-facing
child restraint
system
OFF only
rearward fac-
ing child re-
straint sys-
tem
4, 6 – b)
e)
146

passenger
5 – c, d)
a) Move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go and adjust it to the highest position.
Then adjust the angle of the backrest to achieve the best possible belt routing.
b) When using child restraint systems on the rear seats, adjust the longitudinal direction of the
front seat if necessary and, if possible and necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint of the
rear seat.
c) Only use the outer seats if the seat belt buckles are easily accessible.
d) The seat is not suitable for child restraint systems with a support stand.
e) Depending on the equipment or national-market version.
Right-hand drive vehicle, seats:

passenger
1 a) ON only for-
ward-facing
child restraint
system
OFF only
rearward fac-
ing child re-
straint sys-
tem
4, 6 – b)
e)
147

passenger
5 – c, d)
a) Move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go and adjust it to the highest position.
Then adjust the angle of the backrest to achieve the best possible belt routing.
b) When using child restraint systems on the rear seats, adjust the longitudinal direction of the
front seat if necessary and, if possible and necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint of the
rear seat.
c) Only use the outer seats if the seat belt buckles are easily accessible.
d) The seat is not suitable for child restraint systems with a support stand.
e) Depending on the equipment or national-market version.
Icon Meaning Icon Meaning
Not suitable for child restraint systems. Suitable for ISOFIX child re-
straint systems.
Suitable for Universal-category child restraint sys- Suitable for ISOFIX and i-
tems approved for use in this weight group. Size child restraint systems.
Suitable for child restraint systems in the Semi- Suitable for child restraint
Universal category if the vehicle and the seat loca- systems with an upper re-
tion are listed in the list of vehicle types from the taining strap.
manufacturer of the child restraint system.
Recommended child seats For Australia:Child restraint

systems
Please comply with the operating and safety
instructions provided by the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer when selecting, attaching General
and using child restraint systems. In accordance with ADR 34/03, provisions
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends have been made to allow installation of a child
the following child restraint systems: restraint system at each rear seat position.
▷ Maxi-Cosi CabrioFix. The anchoring hooks which belong to the up-
per restraining strap of the child restraint sys-
▷ Maxi-Cosi EasyFix Base.
tem - AS 1754, can be applied immediately to
▷ Römer TRIFIX 2. the relevant mount.
▷ Römer KIDFIX series. Please refer strictly to the installation instruc-
tions supplied with the child restraint system.
148
Each seat position is fitted with a head re- Attachment points

straint.
Icon Meaning
Safety information
The corresponding icon shows
the top tether eyelet.
WARNING
Anchorages for child restraint systems are
designed to withstand only those loads im-
posed by correctly fitted child restraint sys-
tems. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for
attaching other items or equipment to the ve-
hicle. After using and removing child restraint
systems, fold away the anchor brackets if
necessary.
WARNING
Depending on the equipment, there are two
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
outer attachment points or three other attach-
protective effect of the child restraint system
ment points for child restraint systems with
will be restricted or lost. The rear seat back-
tether straps.
rest may fold forward in certain situations, for
example in the event of braking manoeuvre
or an accident. There is a danger of injury or Routing the retaining strap
danger to life. Make sure that the rear seat
backrests are locked.
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is used incorrectly
on the child restraint system, the protective
effect will be reduced. There is a danger of
injury. Make sure that the upper retaining
strap is not twisted and is not routed to the
1 Direction of travel
upper attachment point over sharp edges.
2 Head restraint
3 Hook of the upper retaining strap
4 Attachment point
5 Parcel shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap
149
Attaching the upper retaining strap For further information:

to the attachment point Safety switch, see page 118.
1. Open the cover of the attachment point.
2. Push the head restraint up or remove it.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint mounts.
On the middle seat, guide the strap over
the head restraint as needed.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
attachment point.
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.
Securing doors and

windows in the rear
General
In certain situations, for example when carry-
ing children, it may be advisable to secure the
rear doors and windows.
Doors
Push up the locking lever on the rear doors.
The respective door can now only be opened

from the outside.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's door.
Various functions are disabled and cannot be

operated in the rear.
150
Driving CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle equipment Automatic Start/Stop
function
the model range. It may therefore describe Principle
equipment and functions which are not avail- The Automatic Start/Stop function helps you
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the to save fuel. It does this by switching off the
optional equipment selected or the national- engine when the vehicle stops, for example
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- in congestion or at traffic lights. Drive-ready
evant functions and systems. Please comply state remains switched on. For driving off, the
with the relevant laws and regulations when engine starts automatically.
tems.
Coasting, see page 366.
Start/Stop button General

Each time the engine is started via the Start/
Principle Stop button, the Automatic Start/Stop function
is switched to standby. The function is activa-
Drive-ready state is switched on ted from a speed of around 5 km/h, 3 mph.
and off by pressing the Start/
Depending on the selected drive mode, the
Stop button.
system is activated or deactivated automati-
Steptronic transmission: drive- cally.
ready state is switched on by
pressing the Start/Stop button while the brake
Engine shutdown
is depressed.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches Operating requirements
drive-ready state off again and standby state
is switched on. Steptronic transmission
For further information: The engine is automatically shut down when
stationary when the following conditions are
▷ Drive-ready state, see page 44.
met:
▷ Standby state, see page 44.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position D.
Driving off ▷ Brake pedal remains pressed while the ve-

hicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is kept
1. Switch on drive-ready state. stationary by Automatic Hold.
2. Select the drive position. ▷ Driver's seat belt fastened or driver's door
3. Release the parking brake. closed.
4. Drive off.
151
CONTROLS Driving
Steptronic transmission: manual Total time for switched-off engine

engine shutdown ECO PRO drive mode: depend-
If the engine was not switched off automati- ing on the equipment, the total
cally when the vehicle came to a stop, it can be engine shutdown time due to
switched off manually: the Automatic Start/Stop func-
▷ Rapidly press the brake pedal from the cur- tion is displayed during an auto-
rent position. matic engine shutdown.
▷ Engage selector lever in position P. The total time can be reset via the trip data.
If all the operating requirements have been For further information:

met, the engine is stopped.
ECO PRO, see page 362.
Air conditioning when the vehicle is Functional limitations

parked
The engine is not shut down automatically in
The amount of air of the air conditioning is the following situations:
reduced when the engine is not running.
▷ On a steep downhill gradient.
Displays in the instrument cluster ▷ Brake not pressed firmly enough.
▷ High outside temperature and operation of
General the automatic air conditioning.
Full Black Panel Display: ▷ Interior not heated or cooled to the desired
The display in the instrument temperature.
cluster indicates that the Au- ▷ Where there is a risk of condensation when
tomatic Start/Stop function is the automatic air conditioning is switched
ready for automatic engine start. on.
▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem-
Instrument cluster without extended function- perature.
ality: ▷ Engine cooling is required.
The display in the instrument ▷ Sharp steering wheel angle or steering op-
cluster indicates that the Au- eration.
tomatic Start/Stop function is ▷ Vehicle battery charge state very low.
ready for automatic engine start.
▷ At high altitudes.
▷ The bonnet is unlocked.
The display indicates that the
▷ Park Assist is activated.
preconditions for an automatic
engine shutdown are not met. ▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in
position N or R.
▷ After reversing.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
152
Driving CONTROLS
Engine start When changing from selector lever position

D to N or R.
Operating requirements ▷ Steptronic transmission:
When changing from selector lever position
Steptronic transmission P to N, D, or R.
For driving off, the engine starts automatically ▷ In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-
under the following conditions: tery.
▷ By releasing the brake pedal. ▷ When starting an oil level measurement.
▷ With Automatic Hold activated: press the
accelerator pedal. Without mild hybrid technology:
Automatic Start/Stop additional
Driving off function
After starting the engine, accelerate as normal.
market version, the vehicle has various sen-
Safety function sors to record the traffic situation. This enables
After an automatic shut down, the engine will the Automatic Start/Stop function to adapt to
not restart automatically if one of the following various traffic situations and, where necessary,
conditions is met: behave in an anticipatory manner.
▷ Driver's seat belt unfastened and driver's For example, in the following situations:
door open. ▷ A situation is detected in which the duration
▷ Bonnet has been unlocked. of the stop is likely to be very short. The
Several indicator lights illuminate for various engine is not switched off automatically.
lengths of time. Depending on the situation, a message is
shown on the control display.
The engine can only be started using the Start/
Stop button. ▷ A situation is detected in which the vehicle
should drive off immediately. The stopped
System limits engine is started automatically.
Even if you do not want to drive off, the en- The function may be restricted if the navigation
gine restarts automatically in the following sit- data is invalid, outdated or not available, for
uations: example.
▷ In case of excessive warming of the interior

when the air conditioning function is turned
Manually deactivating/activating the
on. system
▷ In case of excessive cooling of the interior
when the heating is turned on. Principle
▷ Where there is a risk of condensation when The engine is not switched off automatically.
the automatic air conditioning is turned on. During an automatic engine shutdown, the en-
▷ Without mild hybrid technology: in one gine is started.
steering operation.
▷ Steptronic transmission:
153
CONTROLS Driving
Without mild hybrid technology: via ▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.

button ▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged.
Automatic deactivation
General
In certain situations the Automatic Start/Stop
function is deactivated automatically for safety
Press the key. reasons, for example if the absence of the
driver is detected.
Steptronic transmission: via selector Malfunction

lever position The Automatic Start/Stop function no longer
The Automatic Start/Stop function is also de- shuts down the engine automatically. A Check
activated in selector lever position M/S. Control message is shown. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked by
Via Driving Experience Control an authorised Service Partner or another quali-
The Automatic Start/Stop function is also de- fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
activated in the SPORT drive mode of Driving
Experience Control.
Driving Experience Control
Without Mild hybrid technology:
display Principle
▷ LED illuminates: Automatic Start/Stop Driving Experience Control influences the driv-
function is deactivated. ing dynamics characteristics of the vehicle.
▷ The LED is extinguished: Automatic Start/ Various drive modes allow the vehicle to be
Stop function is activated. adapted to suit the situation.
Parking the vehicle during General

automatic engine shutdown The following systems are influenced, for ex-
ample:
General ▷ Engine characteristics.
During an automatic engine shutdown, the ve- ▷ Steptronic transmission.
hicle can be parked safely, for example in order
▷ Adaptive suspension.
to exit it.
▷ Adaptive Drive.
Steptronic transmission ▷ Active Roll Stabilisation.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. ▷ Adaptive M suspension.
▷ Adaptive M suspension Professional
154
Driving CONTROLS
▷ Integral Active Steering. Drive modes in detail

▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise Control. COMFORT
▷ Backrest width for comfort seats.
Principle
The COMFORT or ECO PRO drive mode is,
The COMFORT drive mode is a balanced
depending on the equipment, automatically
setting between sporty and consumption-opti-
selected when drive-ready state is switched
mised driving.
on.
Switching on
Overview
Press the button repeatedly until
COMFORT is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
SPORT
Principle
The SPORT drive mode is a dynamic setting
for greater agility with an optimised suspen-
sion.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Switching on
The selected drive mode is
shown in the instrument cluster. Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
Drive modes
Principle
Button Drive mode Configuration Individual settings can be made in the SPORT
SPORT INDIVIDUAL INDIVIDUAL drive mode in order to adapt driv-
ing dynamics characteristics.
SPORT
PLUS
Configuring
COMFORT 1. "CAR"
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL 2. "Settings"
3. "Driving mode"
ADAPTIVE
4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
The COMFORT or ECO PRO drive mode is, 5. Select the desired setting.
depending on the equipment, automatically To reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to default set-
selected when drive-ready state is switched ting:
on.
155
CONTROLS Driving
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD". To reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the default

setting:
SPORT PLUS "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
Principle ADAPTIVE
The SPORT PLUS drive mode is a dynamic
setting for maximum agility with an adapted Principle
drivetrain. The ADAPTIVE drive mode is a balanced drive
mode with a setting that automatically adapts
Switching on to the driving situation and driving style.
Press the button repeatedly until Using the navigation system, upcoming route
SPORT PLUS is displayed in the in- stages are taken into account.
strument cluster.
Switching on
ECO PRO Press the key. ADAPTIVE is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Principle
The ECO PRO drive mode provides a con- INDIVIDUAL configuration
sumption-optimised setting.
General
Switching on
The most recent custom configuration is acti-
Press the button repeatedly until ECO vated when the drive mode is called up again.
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster. Activating the drive mode
configuration
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL Press the button of the desired drive mode
several times.
Principle
Individual settings can be made in the ECO
PRO INDIVIDUAL drive mode in order to sup- Parking brake
port a fuel-efficient driving style.
The engine control and comfort functions, for Principle
example the air conditioning output, are adap- The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-
ted. cle from rolling away when it is parked.
Configuring
Safety information
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
WARNING
3. "Driving mode"
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before
5. Select the desired setting. leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
156
Driving CONTROLS
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi- Applying the parking brake
cle is secured against rolling away:
▷ Apply the parking brake. When the vehicle is stationary
▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb Pull the switch.
The LED is illuminated.
or downhill gradient, for example with a The indicator light in the instrument
chock. cluster is illuminated red. The parking
brake is engaged.
WARNING
While driving
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger General
themselves or other road users, for example
The parking brake can be used as an emer-
gency braking function while driving:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Pull and hold the switch. The vehicle
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
brakes hard for as long as the switch is
▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. pulled.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated red, a signal
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not sounds and the brake lights illuminate.
leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-
cle key with you and lock the vehicle. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is
stationary.
Overview With Emergency Stop Assistant

Briefly press the switch to activate the
emergency stop function.

Emergency Stop Assistant, see page 234.
Release the parking brake
Releasing the parking brake manually

Parking brake 1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Steptronic transmission: press the

switch with the brake applied or the selec-
tor lever in position P.
157
CONTROLS Driving
The parking brake is released. ▷ Apply the parking brake.

Releasing the parking brake on uphill or downhill gradient.
automatically ▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on uphill
The parking brake is automatically released on or downhill gradient, for example with a
when you drive off. chock.
Steptronic transmission: Automatic WARNING

Hold Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
Principle themselves or other road users, for example
Automatic Hold provides assistance by auto-
matically applying and releasing the brake, for ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
example in stop-and-go traffic. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
The vehicle is held automatically when at a ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
standstill. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
On upward gradients, it prevents the vehicle ▷ Operating vehicle equipment.
from rolling back when driving off.
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
leave children or pets unsupervised in the ve-
General
The parking brake is automatically applied in cle key with you and lock the vehicle.
the following conditions:
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ When the driver's door is opened while the NOTICE
vehicle is stationary. Automatic Hold applies the parking brake
▷ If the moving vehicle is brought to a stand- when the vehicle is stationary and will pre-
still with the parking brake. vent the vehicle from rolling in car washes.
There is a risk of material damage. Deacti-
Safety information vate Automatic Hold before driving into the
car wash.
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can start moving and Overview
rolling away.
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi-
cle is secured against rolling away:
158
Driving CONTROLS
Automatic Hold Deactivating operational readiness

Press the key.
Activating the Automatic Hold function The LED is extinguished.
1. Switch on drive-ready state. The indicator light extinguishes.

The LED is illuminated. Automatic Hold is deactivated.
The indicator light illuminates green. If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
also depress the brake when deactivating.
Automatic Hold is ready to operate.
When the vehicle is restarted, the last Malfunction
selected setting is retained.
If the parking brake has failed or malfunc-
tioned, secure the vehicle to prevent it from
Automatic Hold holds the vehicle rolling away before leaving the vehicle.
The function is activated and the driver's door A Check Control message is shown.
is closed.
After getting out, secure the vehicle to prevent
Once the brake has been applied, the it from rolling away, for example with a chock.
vehicle is secured from rolling away
once the indicator light lights up green. After an open circuit
To restore parking brake operability after an
Driving off open circuit:
To drive off, press the accelerator pedal. 1. Switch on standby state.
The brake is released automatically and the
parking brake indicator light is extinguished. 2. Pull the switch with the brake applied
or the selector lever in position P and then
Automatic activation of the parking press it.
brake The procedure can take a few seconds. Any
The parking brake is applied automatically if sounds that occur are normal.
drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle The indicator light extinguishes as
is exited while Automatic Hold is holding the soon as the parking brake is opera-
vehicle. tional again.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
Turn indicators
The parking brake is not applied automatically
if drive-ready state was switched off while the
vehicle was rolling to a stop. Automatic Hold is Turn indicator in exterior mirror
switched off. To ensure that the indicator lamps in the ex-
terior mirrors can be seen, do not fold in the
exterior mirrors while driving and while the turn
indicators or hazard warning lights are operat-
ing.
159
CONTROLS Driving
Indicating
▷ High-beam headlight on, arrow 1.

The high-beam headlight is illuminated
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
when the low-beam headlight is switched
on.
One-touch signalling ▷ High-beam headlight off/headlight flasher,
Briefly tap the lever up or down. arrow 2.
The duration of the one-touch signalling can
be set.
1. "CAR"
Wiper system
2. "Settings"
Safety information
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "One-touch indicator"
WARNING
If the windscreen wipers start moving when
Indicating a turn briefly they are folded away from the windscreen,
parts of the body may become trapped or the
Press the lever as far as the resistance point vehicle may be damaged. There is a danger
and hold it there for as long as you wish to of injury or material damage. Make sure that
indicate a turn. the vehicle is switched off when the wipers
are folded away from the windscreen, and
that the windscreen wipers are in contact
High-beam headlight, with the windscreen when switching on.
headlight flasher
Press the lever forwards or pull it back. NOTICE
The wiper blades can wear out or become
damaged prematurely when wiping on dry
glass for longer periods of time. The wiper
motor may overheat. There is a risk of mate-
rial damage. Do not use the wipers when the
glass is dry.
160
Driving CONTROLS
Switching off the wiper system and

NOTICE flick wiping
If the wipers are frozen to the windscreen,
switching them on may cause the wiper
blades to tear off and the wiper motor to
overheat. There is a risk of material damage.
Defrost the windscreen before switching on
the windscreen wipers.
Switching on the wiper system

Press the lever down.
▷ To switch off: press lever downwards until
position 0 is reached.
▷ To flick wipe: press the lever downwards
from position 0.
The lever returns to position 0 when re-
leased.
Press the lever upwards to the desired posi- Rain sensor

tion.
▷ Rest position of the windscreen wipers, po- Principle
sition 0. The rain sensor automatically controls the
▷ Rain sensor, position 1. wiper operation depending on the rain inten-
sity.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wip- General
ers switch to intermittent operation.
The sensor is mounted on the windscreen, di-
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3. rectly in front of the interior mirror.
When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wip-
ers switch to normal speed. Safety information
If a journey is interrupted with the wiper sys-
tem switched on: when the journey is resumed,
NOTICE
the windscreen wipers continue operating at
the previous level. In car washes, the wipers may inadvertently
start moving if the rain sensor is activated.
There is a risk of material damage. Deacti-
vate the rain sensor in car washes.
161
CONTROLS Driving
Activating the rain sensor Window washer system
Safety information
WARNING
At low temperatures, the washer fluid can
freeze onto the windscreen and restrict visi-
bility. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the washer systems if there is no possibility
of the washer fluid freezing. Use antifreeze
Press the lever upwards once from position 0, additive if required.
arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. NOTICE
If there is frost, wiping may not start. If the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
washer pump cannot operate as intended.
There is a risk of material damage. Do not
Deactivating the rain sensor
use the washer system with the washer fluid
Press the lever back to position 0. reservoir empty.
Adjusting the sensitivity of the rain

sensor Cleaning the windscreen
Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the sensitivity Pull the lever.
of the rain sensor. The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-
▷ Upwards: high sensitivity of the rain sensor. screen and the windscreen wipers are turned
▷ Downwards: low sensitivity of the rain sen- on briefly.
sor.
Windscreen washer jets
The windscreen washer jets are automatically
heated when standby state is switched on.
162
Driving CONTROLS
Windscreen wipers fold-out position Folding out the windscreen wipers

1. Switch on standby state.
Principle 2. Press the wiper lever down and hold until
The wipers can be folded out from the wind- the windscreen wipers stop in an approxi-
screen in the fold-out position. This is neces- mately vertical position.
sary for example when replacing the wiper
blades or to keep them away from the wind-
screen when there is frost.
Safety information
WARNING
If the windscreen wipers start moving when
they are folded away from the windscreen,
parts of the body may become trapped or the 3. Lift the windscreen wipers completely away
vehicle may be damaged. There is a danger from the windscreen.
of injury or material damage. Make sure that
the vehicle is switched off when the wipers
are folded away from the windscreen, and
that the windscreen wipers are in contact
with the windscreen when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windscreen,
switching them on may cause the wiper
blades to tear off and the wiper motor to Folding down the windscreen wipers
overheat. There is a risk of material damage. 1. Fold the windscreen wipers fully down onto
Defrost the windscreen before switching on the windscreen.
the windscreen wipers.
2. Switch on standby state and press and
hold the wiper lever down again.
The windscreen wipers move back to the
rest position and are operational once
again.
Principle
The Steptronic transmission combines the
functions of an automatic transmission with
the option of changing gear manually if re-
quired.
163
CONTROLS Driving
Safety information ▷ After switching off drive-ready state when

selector lever position R, D or M/S is en-
gaged.
WARNING
▷ After switching off standby state when se-
An unsecured vehicle can start moving and lector lever position N is engaged.
▷ While the vehicle is stationary and selector
lever position D, M/S or R is engaged, the
rolling away by, for example, applying the
driver's seat belt is unfastened, the driver's
parking brake.
door is opened and the brake is not de-
pressed.
Selector lever positions Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that selector
lever position P is engaged. The vehicle could
D Drive position otherwise start to move. Also apply the parking
brake.
Selector lever position for all normal driving.
All gears for driving forwards are selected au- For further information:
tomatically. Parking brake, see page 156.
R Reverse gear Engaging selector lever positions

Only engage selector lever position R when the
vehicle is stationary. General
Apply the brake until ready to drive off, other-
N Neutral wise the vehicle will move when drive position
In selector lever position N, the vehicle can be or reverse gear is selected.
pushed or can roll without drivetrain, for exam-
ple in car washes. Operating requirements
The selector lever will only move from posi-
P Park tion P to another selector lever position if drive-
ready state is switched on and the brake is
General pressed.
Selector lever position once the vehicle is It may not be possible to move out of selector
parked, for example. In selector lever po- lever position P until all technical conditions
sition P, the transmission blocks individual are met.
wheels.
Only engage selector lever position P when the Engaging selector lever position D, N,
vehicle is stationary. R
A selector lever lock prevents the following in-
P is engaged automatically correct operation:
Selector lever position P is automatically en- ▷ Inadvertent shifting to selector lever posi-
gaged in situations such as the following: tion R.
▷ Inadvertent change from selector lever po-
sition P to another selector lever position.
164
Driving CONTROLS
1. Fasten the driver's seat belt. Rolling or pushing the vehicle

2. Press and hold the button to cancel the se-
lector lever lock. General
In some situations, the vehicle may need to roll
a short distance without drivetrain, for example
in a conveyor car wash, or when being pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
NOTICE
The selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when standby state is switched off.
3. Briefly tap the selector lever in the desired The wheels are locked. There is a risk of
direction, beyond a resistance point if re- material damage. Do not switch off standby
quired. The selector lever returns to the state if the vehicle is to roll, e.g. in conveyor
centre position when released. car washes.
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing

the brake.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold.
Automatic Hold, see page 158.
4. Press the brake.
5. Operate the selector lever lock and engage
selector lever position N.
Engaging selector lever position P 6. Switch off drive-ready state.
Standby state then remains switched on
and a Check Control message is shown.
The vehicle can now roll.
Selector lever position P is automatically en-
gaged after approximately 35 minutes.
If there is a fault, it may not be possible to
change the selector lever position.
Unlock the parking lock electronically if neces-
sary.
Press button P.
Unlocking the parking lock electronically, see
page 167.
165
CONTROLS Driving
Kickdown Activating manual mode

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum per- 1. Press the selector lever from selector lever
formance. position D to the left, arrow 1.
Press the accelerator pedal down beyond the
regular full-throttle position; some resistance
will be felt.
Sport programme M/S
Principle
In the Sport programme, the gear shift points
and gear shift times are configured for more
sporty driving. For example, the transmission 2. Press the selector lever forwards or pull it
shifts up later and the gearshift times are backwards, arrows 2.
shorter. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
shifted.
Activating the Sport programme
The gear selected is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for example M1.
Shifting gears
▷ To shift down: push the selector lever for-
wards.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever back-
wards.
In certain situations, the transmission contin-
ues to shift automatically, for example when
Press the selector lever out of selector lever
rotational speed limits are reached.
position D to the left.
The gear selected is displayed in the instru- Steptronic sport transmission:
ment cluster, for example S1. preventing automatic upshift in
The Sport programme of the transmission is manual mode M/S
activated.
Depending on the motorisation: when SPORT
drive mode is selected, the Steptronic sport
Ending Sport programme transmission does not automatically shift up
Press the selector lever to the right. in M/S manual mode when certain rotational
speed limits are reached.
D is shown in the instrument cluster.
In addition, there is no downshift for kickdown.
Manual mode M/S For further information:
SPORT, see page 155.
Principle
The gears can be changed manually in manual Ending manual mode
mode. Press the selector lever to the right.
166
Driving CONTROLS
D is shown in the instrument cluster. Shifting gears
Shift paddles
Principle
Shift paddles enable you to change gear
quickly without having to remove your hands
from the steering wheel.
General
▷ To shift up: pull the right shift paddle.
Gearshift
▷ To shift down: pull the left shift paddle.
Gear shifting is only carried out at the appro-
priate rotational speed and vehicle speed. ▷ To change down to the lowest possible
gear: pull and hold the left shift paddle.
Short-term manual mode The gear selected appears briefly in the instru-
In selector lever position D, operating a shift ment cluster, followed by the gear currently in
paddle causes the system to switch to manual use.
mode temporarily.
The transmission reverts to automatic mode Displays in the instrument cluster
from manual mode after a certain period of
The selector lever position is
time of moderate driving without acceleration
displayed, for example P.
or gear shifts using the shift paddles.
It is possible to change to automatic mode:
▷ Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is
shown in the instrument cluster.
▷ While pulling and holding the right shift Unlocking the parking lock
paddle, pull the left shift paddle. electronically
Permanent manual mode General
In selector lever position S, operating a shift Unlock the transmission lock electronically, e.g.
paddle causes the system to switch perma- to manoeuvre the vehicle out of a danger area
nently to manual mode. in the event of a fault.
Before unlocking the parking lock, apply the
Steptronic sport transmission
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll-
With the appropriate transmission variant, op- ing away.
erating the kickdown and the left shift paddle
The actions required to unlock the transmis-
at the same time allows you to change down
sion are different in vehicles equipped with
to the lowest possible gear. This is not possi-
mild hybrid technology and the associated ve-
ble in short-term manual mode.
hicle battery.
Vehicle battery, see page 418.
167
CONTROLS Driving
Without mild hybrid technology: A Check Control message is shown.

engaging selector lever position N
Unlocking is possible if the starter is able crank
the engine.
1. Apply the brake and keep it applied.

2. Press and hold the Start/Stop button. The
starter must be heard to start turning.
3. With your free hand, press the button on
the selector lever, arrow 1, press the selec-
tor lever to selector lever position N and 4. Release the Start/Stop button and selector
hold it there, arrow N, until selector lever lever.
position N is displayed in the instrument
cluster. 5. Release the brake.
A Check Control message is shown. 6. Manoeuvre the vehicle out of danger and
then secure it against rolling away.
Tow-starting/towing away, see page 428.
Launch Control
Principle
When the ambient conditions are dry, Launch
Control permits optimised acceleration on a
4. Release the Start/Stop button and selector road surface that offers plenty of grip.
lever.
5. Release the brake as soon as the starter General
stops. Use of Launch Control causes premature com-
6. Manoeuvre the vehicle out of danger and ponent wear, as the function subjects the vehi-
then secure it against rolling away. cle to very high stresses and loads.
For further information: Do not use Launch Control when running in.
Tow-starting/towing away, see page 428. When driving off with Launch Control, do not
turn the steering wheel.
With mild hybrid technology: engaging For further information:
selector lever position N Running in, see page 348.
1. Apply the brake and keep it applied.
2. Press and hold the Start/Stop button.
Launch Control is available when the engine
3. With your free hand, press the button on
is at operating temperature. The engine is at
the selector lever, arrow 1, press the selec-
operating temperature after an uninterrupted
tor lever to selector lever position N and
journey of at least 10 km, 6 miles.
hold it there, arrow N, until selector lever
position N is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
168
Driving CONTROLS
Driving off with Launch Control

1. Switch on drive-ready state.

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the DSC OFF indicator light is
illuminated.
3. Engage selector lever position S.
4. Press the brake firmly with the left foot.
5. Press the accelerator pedal down beyond
the resistance at the full-throttle position
and hold, kickdown.
A destination flag is shown in the instru-
ment cluster.
6. The engine speed for pulling away is adjus-
ted. Wait briefly until the engine speed is
constant. Keep the accelerator pedal in this
position.
7. Release the brake within 3 seconds of the
destination flag illuminating.
The vehicle accelerates.
Upshifts are automatic as long as the desti-
nation flag is displayed and the accelerator
pedal is not released.
Using again during a journey

Once Launch Control has been used, the
transmission requires approximately 5 minutes
to cool down before Launch Control can be
used again. Launch Control adapts to the am-
bient conditions when used again.
After using Launch Control

To support driving stability, re-activate Dy-
namic Stability Control as soon as possible.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
169
CONTROLS Displays
Displays
Vehicle equipment Full Black Panel Display:Overview

using the corresponding functions and sys- 1 Fuel level indicator 183
tems. Range 187
2 Speedometer
Instrument cluster 3 Central display area 171

Navigation display
4 Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten-
General
tion Camera
Depending on the equipment, the switching of
5 Revolution counter 183
displays in the instrument cluster can be deac-
tivated via iDrive. Selection lists 189
The displays in the instrument cluster can Widgets 173
sometimes differ from the illustrations in the Trip odometer, see Trip data 189
Owner's Handbook. Shift Lights 185
ECO PRO displays 362
Safety information
Power display 184
Status of Driving Experience Control 154
WARNING
Gear indicator 163
If the displays in the instrument cluster fail,
the vehicle must not be used. There is a risk 6 Engine temperature 186
of accident or material damage. Immediately 7 Outside temperature 186
park the vehicle safely. If drive-ready state is 8 Check Control 175
switched off and on again, the malfunction
9 Speed Limit Assist 262
may rectified and it is possible to continue
driving. If the malfunction cannot be rectified, Speed Limit Info 246
have the system checked by an authorised Time 67
170
Displays CONTROLS
Instrument cluster without extended ▷ Navigation displays such as the map view
functionality:Overview or, if route guidance is active, a route pre-
view with route guidance instructions.
▷ Displays showing service requirements.
▷ Assisted Driving View. Information about
the driver assistance systems appears in
an animated vehicle environment.
Some displays in the central display area can
be configured individually.
The displays may vary depending on the
equipment and national-market version.
1 Fuel level indicator 183
2 Speedometer Drive mode view
3 Check Control 175
Principle
Widgets 174
Depending on the equipment and if the drive
Service requirements 187 mode view is activated, the displays in the in-
Trip odometer, see Trip data 189 strument cluster are adapted to the drive mode
Navigation display in question when Driving Experience Control is
used to change programmes.
Shift Lights 185
Range 187 Activating/deactivating
4 Revolution counter 183 1. "CAR"
Power display 184 2. "Settings"
5 Engine temperature 186 3. "Displays"
6 Outside temperature 186 4. "Driving mode view"
Gear indicator
Status of Driving Experience Control 154 Settings
Time 67 Individual displays can be configured sepa-
7 Speed Limit Info 246 rately.
1. "CAR"
Central display area 2. "Settings"
Depending on the equipment and setting, the 3. "Displays"
following is displayed in the central display 4. "Instrument cluster"
area of the instrument cluster: 5. Select the desired setting.
171
CONTROLS Displays
Assisted Driving View Temporary display

1. "CAR"
Principle 2. "Settings"
Depending on the equipment and if driver as- 3. "Displays"
sistance is active, information about the driver 4. "Instrument cluster"
assistance systems appears in an animated 5. "Display Assisted Driving View when driver
vehicle depiction. assistance is active"
General Display
Depending on the setting, Assisted Driving
View can be displayed in the instrument cluster
permanently or temporarily when driver assis-
tance is active.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa- An example: the indicator and warning lights
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot for Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function
respond independently and appropriately in and for Lane Change Assistant indicate a lane
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci- change to the adjacent lane. At the same time,
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic the move into the adjacent lane is shown as an
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be animation in the Assisted Driving View.
ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa- System limits
tion warrants it. The detection capability of the system is
limited. The system may indicate something
wrong.
Settings
Only objects detected by the system are taken
into account.
Permanent display
1. "CAR"
▷ Cameras, see page 39.
2. "Settings"
▷ Radar sensors, see page 40.
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument cluster"
5. "Central display area"
6. "Assisted Driving View"
172
Displays CONTROLS
Full Black Panel Display: G-Meter

widgets The G-Meter shows the longitudinal and lat-
eral forces acting on the vehicle occupants
during a journey.
Principle
Displays for particular functions can be shown Efficiency display
The following displays can be selected: Principle
▷ Current entertainment source, for example Information on the driving style and consump-
radio. tion can be shown as a widget in the instru-
ment cluster, taking the form of a consumption
▷ Torque and power.
display, for example.
▷ G-Meter.
▷ Trip data. General
▷ Efficiency display. The information shown varies depending on
the activated drive mode:
Selecting
Drive Display
mode
COMFORT Average consumption.

SPORT Current consumption.
Energy recuperation.
ECO PRO ECO PRO bonus range.

The distance covered in the
coasting driving condition.
Press the button on the turn indicator lever re- Current consumption.
peatedly until the desired widget is selected.
Average consumption
Display Average consumption indicates the fuel con-
sumption over a specific distance.
Current consumption
The display of the current consumption allows
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.
for driving economically and in an environmen-
tally friendly manner.
Energy recuperation
Energy recuperation involves converting the ki-
netic energy of the vehicle into electrical en-
ergy in coasting overrun mode. The vehicle
173
CONTROLS Displays
battery is partially charged and fuel consump- Selecting

tion can be lowered.
ECO PRO bonus range

In ECO PRO drive mode, the ECO PRO bonus
range shows how the range is increased by
adopting a fuel-efficient driving style.
Instrument cluster without

extended functionality: Press the button on the turn indicator lever re-
widgets peatedly until the desired widget is selected.
Principle Configuring widgets

Displays for particular functions can be shown Some widgets can be configured individually.
1. "CAR"
▷ Distance covered.
2. "Settings"
▷ Consumption display.
3. "Displays"
▷ Current consumption and average con-
sumption.
5. "Configure widgets"
▷ Digital speed.
▷ Navigation data.
When route guidance is activated in the
Information in detail
navigation system.
▷ Driver assistance systems. Distance covered
▷ Compass display for the direction of travel. Depending on the setting for displaying trip
▷ Current entertainment source, for example data, the total distance driven and the route
radio. covered are displayed in the widget for the dis-
tance covered.
Consumption display
Principle
Energy recuperation involves converting the ki-
netic energy of the vehicle into electrical en-
ergy in coasting overrun mode. The vehicle
battery is partially charged and fuel consump-
tion can be lowered.
The current consumption indicates the current
fuel consumption. It is possible to check the
174
Displays CONTROLS
economy and environmental compatibility of Display

your driving style.
General
The energy recovery and current consumption
can be displayed in the form of a bar display.
Display
▷ Arrival time, arrow 1.

▷ Distance to destination, arrow 2.
Compass
General
▷ Energy recuperation, arrow 1. The compass shows the currect direction of
travel.
▷ Average consumption, arrow 2.
▷ Current consumption, arrow 3. Display
Current consumption and average

consumption
Depending on the setting for displaying trip
data, the current consumption and average
consumption are displayed in the widget.
Navigation data
General
The expected arrival time and remaining dis-
tance to the destination are displayed if a des-
Check Control
tination was entered in the navigation system
before the start of a journey. Principle
Check Control monitors vehicle functions and
alerts you to any faults in the monitored sys-
tems.
General
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and, if
applicable, in the Head-up display.
175
CONTROLS Displays
An acoustic signal may also be output and a Display

text message shown on the control display.
Check Control
Hiding Check Control messages
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or saved.
Text messages
Text messages and an icon in the instrument
cluster explain what a Check Control message
means and what the indicator and warning
lights signify.
Press the button on the turn indicator lever. Supplementary text messages
Additional information, for example the cause
of the fault and any action required, can be
Continuous display
called up via Check Control.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
If the message is urgent, the supplementary
permanently and remain until the fault has
text is shown in the control display automati-
been repaired. If a number of malfunctions
cally.
have occurred at the same time, the messages
are displayed in succession. It is possible to select additional assistance de-
pending on the Check Control message.
The messages can be hidden for approxi-
mately 8 seconds. Afterwards they are dis- 1. "CAR"
played again automatically. 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control messages"
Temporary display
4. Select the required text message.
Some Check Control messages are automati-
cally hidden after approximately 20 seconds. 5. Select the desired setting.
The Check Control messages remain stored
and can be displayed again. Messages displayed at the end of the
journey
Displaying saved Check Control Certain messages displayed when driving are
messages displayed again when drive-ready state is
switched off.
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control messages" Indicator and warning lights
4. Select the required text message.
Principle
Indicator and warning lights in the instrument
cluster show the status of some functions in
the vehicle and indicate any malfunctions in
monitored systems.
176
Displays CONTROLS
General To release the parking brake, see page 157.

Indicator and warning lights can illuminate in a
variety of combinations and colours. Brake system
When switching on drive-ready state, the func- Brake system faulty. Continue driving
tionality of some lights is checked and they at moderate speed.
illuminate briefly.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by an authorised Service Partner or another
Red lights qualified Service Partner or a specialist work-
shop.
Seat belt warning
Indicator light illuminates in the When equipped with the Emergency
following situations:
Stop Assistant
▷ The driver's side seat belt is not fas-
tened. Emergency Stop Assistant activated.
▷ Depending on the national-market version: For further information:

passenger seat belt is not fastened. Emergency Stop Assistant, see
▷ Depending on the national-market version: page 234.
objects are detected on the front passenger
seat. Risk of collision
▷ The seat belt on the corresponding rear Check that indicator light is illuminated
seat is not fastened. or flashes in conjunction with an acous-
Check whether the seat belt has been fastened tic signal if a collision is imminent.
correctly. For further information:
▷ Crossroads Warning with city braking func-
Rear seat belt warning: seat detection tion, see page 214.
Seat belt on the corresponding rear ▷ Pedestrian Warning with city braking func-
seat is not fastened. tion, see page 217.
Airbag system Collision Warning with braking function

Airbag system and seat belt tensioners Indicator light illuminates: advance
may be faulty. warning. Brake and increase the dis-
tance.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by an authorised Service Partner or another Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal
qualified Service Partner or a specialist work- sounds: acute warning. Brake and take avoid-
shop. ance manoeuvre if necessary.
Parking brake Collision Warning with braking function, see

page 209.
The parking brake is engaged.
177
CONTROLS Displays
Crossroads Warning: vehicle detected Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go

from the right function
Indicator light lights up: advance warn- Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
ing in the event of a risk of collision with signal sounds: brake and take avoid-
a crossing vehicle from the right. ance manoeuvre, if necessary.
Indicator light flashes and a signal sounds: For further information:
acute warning in the event of an immediate Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
risk of collision. see page 253.
Crossroads Warning with city braking function, Steering and Lane Control Assistant
see page 214.
Depending on the equipment and na-
tional-market version: steering wheel
Crossroads Warning: vehicle detected icon flashes red or illuminates in red.
from left A signal sounds: the system is switched off.
Indicator light lights up: advance warn- For further information:
ing in the event of a risk of collision with
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see
a crossing vehicle from the left.
page 266.
Indicator light flashes and a signal sounds:
acute warning in the event of an immediate
risk of collision. Drive power
For further information: Reduced drive power due to overhea-
Crossroads Warning with city braking function, ted drivetrain.
see page 214. For further information:
Pedestrian Warning with city braking
function Yellow lights
Indicator light is illuminated and an
acoustic signal sounds: imminent colli- Steering and Lane Control Assistant
sion with a detected pedestrian or a Indicator light illuminates and an
cyclist. acoustic signal may sound: a system
Take action yourself immediately by braking or interruption is imminent.
swerving. Indicator light flashing: lane boundary has
For further information: been driven over.
Pedestrian Warning with city braking function, For further information:
see page 217. Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see
page 266.
178
Displays CONTROLS
Anti-lock Braking System Tyre Pressure Monitor

Braking force assistance may be faulty. Indicator light illuminates: the Tyre
Avoid sudden braking. Bear in mind Pressure Monitor is reporting a low tyre
that stopping distances will be longer. inflation pressure or a flat tyre. Note
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an the information in the Check Control message.
authorised Service Partner or another qualified Indicator light flashes and then illuminates
Service Partner or a specialist workshop. continuously: the system is unable to detect
flat tyres or tyre pressure losses.
Dynamic Stability Control ▷ Fault due to systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: the system is auto-
Indicator light flashes: Dynamic Stabil- matically reactivated upon leaving the field
ity Control controls the drive and brake of interference.
forces. The vehicle is being stabilised.
▷ For tyres with special approval: the Tyre
Decrease speed and adjust driving style to the
Pressure Monitor was unable to complete
road conditions.
the reset. Reset the system again.
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic Stability
▷ Wheel without wheel electronics is fitted: if
Control is deactivated.
necessary have it checked by an authorised
Have the system checked immediately by an Service Partner or another qualified Service
authorised Service Partner or another qualified Partner or a specialist workshop.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
For further information: an authorised Service Partner or another
Dynamic Stability Control, see page 241. qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
Dynamic Stability Control deactivated For further information:
or Dynamic Traction Control activated Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 383.
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated

or Dynamic Traction Control is activa- Steering system
ted.
The steering system may be faulty.
Have the system checked by an au-
▷ Dynamic Stability Control, see page 241. thorised Service Partner or another
▷ Dynamic Traction Control, see page 243. qualified Service Partner or a specialist work-
shop.
Flat tyre monitor

Engine warning light
The Flat Tyre Monitor reports tyre
pressure loss in a tyre. Engine malfunction.
Reduce your speed and carefully stop Have the vehicle checked by an author-
the vehicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden ised Service Partner or another quali-
steering manoeuvres. fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
For further information: For further information:
Flat Tyre Monitor, see page 390. Socket for on-board diagnosis, see page 415.
179
CONTROLS Displays
Collision warning restricted or failed Rear fog light

Depending on the equipment and na- Rear fog light is switched on.
tional-market version: functional limita- For further information:
tion detected, e.g. due to low sun or
Rear fog light, see page 199.
system failure. It is possible to continue driv-
ing. Where applicable, observe the information
from Check Control messages. Green lights
▷ Collision Warning with braking function, see Rear seats: seat belt fastened
page 209. Seat belt on the corresponding rear
▷ Crossroads Warning with city braking func- seat is fastened.
tion, see page 214.
▷ Pedestrian Warning with city braking func- Rear seats: seat detection
tion, see page 217.
Seat belt on the corresponding rear
seat is fastened.
Collision warning switched off
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version: the system is
Turn indicators
switched off. The turn indicator is switched on.
For further information: If the indicator light flashes more rap-
▷ Collision Warning with braking function, see idly than usual, a turn indicator bulb
page 209. has failed.
▷ Crossroads Warning with city braking func- For further information:
tion, see page 214. Turn indicators, see page 159.
▷ Pedestrian Warning with city braking func-
tion, see page 217. Side lights
The side lights are switched on.
Lane Departure Warning
Depending on equipment and national- Side lights/low-beam headlight, see
market version: page 195.
Indicator light lights up: functional limi-
tation detected, e.g. due to low sun or system
failure. It is possible to continue driving. Where
Low-beam headlight
applicable, observe the information from Check The low-beam headlight is switched
Control messages. on.
Indicator light flashes: a warning is issued For further information:
actively. The system does not carry out any Side lights/low-beam headlight, see page 195.
steering interventions.
Lane Departure Warning, see page 219.
180
Displays CONTROLS
Lane Departure Warning Manual Speed Limiter

Depending on equipment and national- Indicator light illuminates: the system is
market version: switched on.
Indicator light illuminates: the system Indicator light flashes: set speed limit is
is switched on. A lane boundary has been de- exceeded.
tected on at least one side of the vehicle and For further information:
the system is ready to intervene. Warnings are
Manual Speed Limiter, see page 249.
issued.
Indicator light flashes: a warning is issued ac-
tively. If necessary, the system performs a Depending on the equipment: Cruise
steering intervention. Control
For further information: The system is active.
Lane Departure Warning, see page 219. For further information:
Driver assistance systems, Cruise Con-
High-beam Assistant trol, see page 246.
High-beam Assistant is switched on.

The high-beam headlight is switched Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
on and off automatically according to function switched on
traffic situation. The system is switched on.
For further information: For further information:
High-beam Assistant, see page 198. Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function, see page 253.
Automatic Hold: vehicle is held
automatically Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
Steptronic transmission: Automatic function: vehicle in front
Hold is activated. The vehicle is held Indicator light illuminates: the system is
automatically when at a standstill. switched on. Vehicle in front has been
For further information: detected.
Driving, see page 151. Indicator light flashes: vehicle in front has
driven off.
Automatic Hold: vehicle secured For further information:

against rolling away Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
see page 253.
Steptronic transmission: after the brake
is applied, the vehicle is prevented from
rolling away. Speed Limit Assist activated
For further information: Depending on vehicle equipment, the
Driving, see page 151. indicator light illuminates together with
the icon for the Cruise Control System:
Speed Limit Assist is enabled and detected
181
CONTROLS Displays
speed limits can be applied manually for the Lane Change Assistant: functional
displayed system. requirements not met
For further information: Depending on the national-market ver-
Speed Limit Assist, see page 262. sion:
Grey arrow symbol for lane-changing:
Speed Limit Assist: applying speed lane change not possible; operating require-
limit ments not met.
The detected speed limit can be ap-
plied with the SET button. As soon as Lane Change Assistant, see page 272.
the speed limit has been adopted, a
green tick is displayed. Assisted Driving Plus
The system is active.
Speed Limit Assist, see page 262.
Assisted Driving Plus, see page 271.
Steering and Lane Control Assistant
The system is helping the driver keep
Blue lights
the vehicle in driving lane.
For further information: High-beam headlight
The high-beam headlight has been
page 266.
switched on.
Lane Change Assistant: lane change in
High-beam headlight, see page 160.
progress
Green arrow symbol for lane-chang-
Drive power
ing: the system is carrying out a lane
change. Reduced drive power due to cold drive-
For further information: train.
Lane Change Assistant, see page 272. For further information:

Lane Change Assistant Lane: lane

change not possible Grey lights
Grey line for lane boundary on the ap-
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
propriate side: the system has detected
the lane change request. Lane change function
not currently possible. Indicator light illuminates: the system is
For further information: interrupted.
Lane Change Assistant, see page 272. Indicator light flashes: the prerequisites
for operation of the system are no longer being
met or the system has been deactivated.
182
Displays CONTROLS
For further information: Fuel level indicator

Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
see page 253.
Principle
The current filling level of the fuel tank is dis-
Steering and Lane Control Assistant played.
Indicator light illuminates: the system is
ready. General
For further information: The vehicle inclination may cause the display
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see to fluctuate.
page 266. For further information:
Refuelling, see page 370.
Assisted Driving Plus
Display
Indicator light illuminates: the system is
interrupted. Full Black Panel Display:
For further information: An arrow next to the fuel pump
Assisted Driving Plus, see page 271. symbol indicates the vehicle
side on which the fuel filler flap
is located.
Lane Departure Warning The current range is displayed
Depending on equipment and national- as a numerical value.
market version:
Instrument cluster without extended function-
Indicator light lights up: the system is
ality:
switched off or automatically deactivated, e.g.
because DSC OFF is activated. An arrow next to the fuel pump
Indicator light flashes: a warning is issued symbol indicates the vehicle
actively. The system does not carry out any side on which the fuel filler flap
steering interventions. is located.

Lane Departure Warning, see page 219.
Revolution counter
White lights
General
Assisted Driving Plus It is vital to avoid rotational speeds in the red
Indicator light illuminates: the system is warning zone. In this zone, the fuel supply is
ready. interrupted to protect the engine.
For further information: Depending on vehicle equipment, the revolu-

tion counter can also be shown on the Head-
Assisted Driving Plus, see page 271. up Display.
183
CONTROLS Displays
Full Black Panel Display:Activating/ If the setting for the drive mode view is activa-
deactivating ted, the activated power display is only shown
in the COMFORT drive mode.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Display
3. "Displays"
5. "Engine display"
6. "Rev counter"
If the setting for the drive mode view is acti-
vated, the activated revolution counter is only
shown in the COMFORT or SPORT drive
mode.
To display the revolution counter on the Head-
Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the
up display, enable the Sport displays on the
energy recuperation achieved when rolling to a
Head-up display.
stop or or when decelerating, CHARGE.
Reduced speed range Needle in the area of arrow 2: drive power as a

percentage, POWER.
The available speed range may be reduced
due certain factors, example a cold drivetrain.
The revolution counter display is automatically Drive power
adjusted depending on the available speed The available drive power may be reduced due
range. to certain factors, for example a cold engine.
The range for POWER is adjusted automati-
cally depending on the available drive power.
Full Black Panel Display: Icons in the power display indicate if the drive
Power display power has been reduced.
Example Description
Principle icon
The power display shows the available drive
Reduced drive power due to
power as a percentage.
cold drivetrain.
Activating/deactivating Reduced drive power due to

1. "CAR" overheated drivetrain.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
5. "Engine display"
6. "Power meter"
184
Displays CONTROLS
Shift Lights Display
Principle
Shift Lights in the instrument cluster indicate
the maximum upshift point at which the opti-
mal acceleration can be achieved.
General
market version, the Shift Lights are active in M
Full Black Panel Display.
manual mode of the Steptronic sport transmis-
sion and with the manual transmission.
The Shift Lights can be displayed either on the
instrument cluster or on the Head-up Display.
▷ Depending on the equipment, SPORT or
where applicable SPORT PLUS transmis-
sion mode is activated.
▷ To display the shift lights on the Head-up
Display, enable the Sport displays on the Instrument cluster without extended function-
Head-up Display. ality.
Switching on/switching off Information on the driving style

Steptronic sport transmission: ▷ The current rotational speed is shown by
1. If necessary, select SPORT or SPORT the revolution counter.
PLUS drive mode. ▷ Arrow 1: fields successively lighting up
To do this, press Driving Experience Con- yellow indicate the increase in rotational
trol. speed.
2. Activate the transmission's manual mode ▷ Arrow 2: fields successively lighting up
M. orange indicate an optimum moment to
change gear.
▷ Arrow 3: the field lights up red. Latest point
to upshift.
When the maximum engine speed is reached,
the entire display flashes red and the fuel sup-
ply is limited to protect the engine.
185
CONTROLS Displays
Standby state and drive- tational speed and vehicle

speed.
ready state ▷ Normal operating temperature: the needle
is in the middle or the bottom half of the
Full Black Panel Display: temperature display.
OFF in the instrument cluster in- ▷ Hot engine: the needle is located in the
dicates that drive-ready state is high-temperature range. A Check Control
switched off and standby state message is also displayed.
is switched on.
ality:
The letters READY in the instru-
ment cluster indicate that the ▷ Cold engine: the LEDs on the
drive-ready state is turned on display indicate a low tem-
and the Auto Start/Stop function perature value. Drive at mod-
is ready to start the engine auto- erate rotational speed and
matically. vehicle speed.
▷ Normal operating temperature: the LEDs
Instrument cluster without extended function- on the display indicate a moderate temper-
ality: ature value.
OFF in the revolution counter ▷ Hot engine: the LEDs on the display indi-
indicates that the drive-ready cate a high temperature value. A Check
state is switched off and the Control message is also displayed.
standby state is switched on.
The letters READY in the instru- For further information:
ment cluster indicate that the drive-ready state Coolant level, see page 411.
is turned on and the Auto Start/Stop function is
ready to start the engine automatically.
Outside temperature
Vehicle operating condition, see page 43. General
If the display drops to +3 ℃/+37 ℉ or lower, a
Engine temperature signal sounds.
Display There is an increased risk of black ice.
Full Black Panel Display:
Safety information
▷ Cold engine: the needle is lo-
cated in the low temperature
range. Drive at moderate ro- WARNING
Even at temperatures above +3 ℃, 37 ℉
there may be an increased risk of black ice,
for example on bridges or on shaded sec-
tions of road. There is a risk of accident. At
186
Displays CONTROLS
low temperatures, adjust driving style to the Instrument cluster without extended function-
weather conditions. ality:
The current range is displayed
as a number between the
Range speedometer and the revolution
counter.
Principle
The range shows what distance can still be
covered with the amount of fuel currently in the Service requirements
tank.
Principle
General
The function shows the current service require-
The estimated range available with the re- ments and related maintenance jobs.
maining fuel is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
General
A Check Control message is displayed briefly if
After switching on drive-ready state, the next
the remaining range is low. A small remaining
service appointment or the distance remaining
range means that the engine functions are not
until your next servicing is displayed briefly on
always ensured if a sporty driving style is em-
the instrument cluster.
ployed, e.g. when cornering fast.
The current service requirements can be read
If the range drops below approximately 50 km,
out from the vehicle key by a service advisor.
30 miles the Check Control message is dis-
played continuously. Some information on service requirements can
also be shown on the BMW display key.
Safety information
Display
NOTICE Detailed information on service
If the range drops below 50 km, approx. requirements
30 miles, the engine may no longer be sup- More detailed information on the maintenance
plied with sufficient fuel. The engine functions work required can be displayed on the control
are no longer ensured. There is a risk of ma- display.
terial damage. Refuel in good time.
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
Display 3. "Service requirements"
Maintenance routines and any statutory in-
The current range is displayed spections required are displayed.
as a number next to the fuel 4. Select an entry to display more detailed in-
level indicator. formation.
187
CONTROLS Displays
Icons Displays
1. "CAR"
Icons Description
2. "Vehicle status"
No service is currently needed. 3. "Service requirements"
Essential maintenance routines and any
statutory inspections required are dis-
Maintenance or a statutory inspec-
played.
tion is due soon.
4. "Service history"
Service interval has been exceeded. 5. Select an entry to display more detailed in-
formation.
Icons
Entering deadlines
Enter deadlines for statutory vehicle inspec- Icons Description
tions. Green: maintenance has been
Ensure that the date and time are set correctly carried out on time.
in the vehicle.
Yellow: maintenance has been
1. "CAR"
carried out later than sched-
2. "Vehicle status" uled.
3. "Service requirements"
Maintenance has not been car-
4. "Vehicle inspection" ried out.
5. "Date:"
Optimum shift indicator
Service history
Principle Principle
Completed maintenance work can be dis- The optimum shift indicator recommends the
played on the control display. gear that best suits the current driving situa-
tion. The use of the optimal gear supports an
General efficient driving style.
Have maintenance work carried out by an au-

thorised Service Partner or another qualified
General
Service Partner or a specialist workshop. The Depending on the equipment and the national-
maintenance work carried out is entered in the market version, the optimum shift indicator is
vehicle data. The function is available as soon active in M manual mode of the Steptronic
as a maintenance visit has been logged in the transmission and with the manual transmis-
vehicle data. sion.
188
Displays CONTROLS
Steptronic transmission: displays Displaying and using the list

Information on up or down shifting is displayed The lists can be displayed and operated using
in the instrument cluster. the buttons on the steering wheel.
For vehicles without optimum shift indicator, Button Function
the gear engaged is shown.
Changing the entertainment
Example Description source.
Most efficient gear is engaged. Press the button again to
close the list currently dis-
played.
Shift to a more efficient gear.
To display the last calls list.
Turn the knurled wheel to se-

lect the desired setting.
Selection lists Press the knurled wheel to
confirm the setting.
Principle The list of the current en-
The instrument cluster or the Head-up display tertainment source can be
can show lists for certain functions and can be displayed in the instrument
used for operation where applicable. cluster again by turning the
▷ Entertainment source. knurled wheel.
▷ Current audio source.

▷ Recent calls list. Trip data
If applicable, the relevant menu is opened on
Principle
Display The display of trip data provides various infor-
mation about the trip, e.g. the trip distance.
General
The trip data can be shown on the control dis-
play and in the instrument cluster.
The values can be displayed and reset accord-
ing to different intervals; for example, after re-
fuelling.
Depending on the equipment, the list in the Display on the control display
instrument cluster may differ from the figure.
Overview
Depending on the set interval and drive mode,
the following information is displayed:
189
CONTROLS Displays
▷ Set interval for displaying the trip data. Configuring the trip data display
▷ Average fuel consumption as a function of The intervals for displaying the trip data in the
the set interval. instrument cluster and on the control display
▷ Average speed. can be configured.
▷ Total time engine is switched off by the Au- 1. "CAR"
tomatic Start/Stop function.
2. "Driving information"
▷ The distance covered in the coasting driv-
3. "Journey data"
ing condition.
4. "Values since"
▷ Consumption history as a graph.
5. Select the desired setting:
Displays ▷ "Start of journey ( )": the values are re-
1. "CAR" set automatically if the vehicle is at a
standstill for approximately four hours.
▷ "Refuelling ( )": the values are reset au-
3. "Journey data" tomatically after refuelling with a signifi-
cant amount of fuel.
Consumption history
▷ "Factory": Average consumption since
The consumption history shows the average factory delivery.
consumption in a graph as a function of the
The values since leaving the factory are
route covered and the drive mode.
displayed.
Display in the instrument cluster ▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last
manual reset are displayed. The values
Depending on the equipment, information on can be reset at any time.
the distance covered can be displayed as a
widget in the instrument cluster.
Resetting average values manually
The following information is displayed:
The following interval can be reset manually at
▷ Total distance driven any time: "Individual ( )".
▷ Set interval for displaying the trip data. Via the button on the turn indicator lever:
▷ Distance covered, depending on the set in-
1. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
terval.
repeatedly until the widget for the trip data
▷ Average speed. is selected.
Select and configure widgets in the instrument
cluster.
Widgets, see page 173.
ality:
Widgets, see page 174.
2. Press and hold the button on the turn indi-

cator lever.
190
Displays CONTROLS
Via iDrive: For further information:
1. "CAR" Widgets, see page 173.
3. "Journey data" Vehicle status
4. "Values since"
5. "Reset individual" General
The average values and counters are reset. The status of some systems can be displayed
Once the average values and counters have and actions performed on them.
been reset, the following interval is automati-
cally set: "Individual ( )". Calling up the vehicle status
1. "CAR"
Sport displays 2. "Vehicle status"
Principle Overview of information shown

The sport displays primarily assist a sporty Icons Description
driving style.
"Flat Tyre Monitor": Status of
Display on the control display the Flat Tyre Monitor, see
page 390.
Overview "Tyre Pressure Monitor": sta-
The following information is displayed: tus of the Tyre Pressure Mon-
▷ Charging pressure. itor, see page 383.
▷ Engine oil temperature. "Engine oil level": Electronic oil

▷ G-Meter. measurement, see page 408.
▷ Torque. "Check Control messages": to

▷ Power. display saved Check Control
messages, see page 175.
Displays "Service requirements": to dis-
1. "CAR" play service requirements, see
2. "Driving information" page 187.
3. "Sport displays" "AdBlue": BMW Diesel

with BluePerformance, see
Full Black Panel Display: Display in page 404.
the instrument cluster
The sport displays can be shown as widgets in
The following widgets can be selected:
▷ Widget for torque and performance.
▷ Widget for G-Meter.
191
CONTROLS Displays
BMW Head-up display ▷ Driver assistance systems.

▷ Sport displays.
Principle Some of this information is only shown briefly

when needed.
The Head-up display projects important infor-
mation in the driver's field of view, for example
Selecting displays in the Head-up
the speed.
display
General 1. "CAR"
Follow the instructions on cleaning the head- 2. "Settings"

up display in the Care chapter. 3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
Overview 5. Select the desired setting.
Adjusting the brightness

The brightness adapts automatically to the
ambient brightness.
The default setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
The protective glass of the head-up display is
located at the marked position.
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright-
Switching on/off ness is obtained.
1. "CAR" 7. Press the Controller.
2. "Settings" The brightness of the Head-up display can
3. "Displays" also be adjusted via the instrument lighting if
4. "Head-up display" the low-beam headlight is switched on.
Adjusting the height
Display 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Overview 3. "Displays"
The following information is displayed in the 4. "Head-up display"
Head-up display:
5. "Height"
▷ Speed.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height
▷ Navigation instructions. is obtained.
▷ Check Control messages. 7. Press the Controller.
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.
192
Displays CONTROLS
The height of the Head-up Display can be Visibility of the display

saved with the memory function. The visibility of the information shown on
the Head-up display can be affected by the
Adjusting the rotation following:
The Head-up display view can be rotated. ▷ Seat position.
1. "CAR" ▷ Objects on the protective glass of the head-
2. "Settings" up display.
3. "Displays" ▷ Dust or dirt on the protective glass of the

head-up display.
▷ Dirt on the inside or outside of the wind-
5. "Rotation"
screen.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarisation filters.
is reached.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Adverse lighting conditions.
Additional settings If the image is distorted, have the default set-
1. "CAR" tings checked by an authorised Service Partner
or another qualified Service Partner or a spe-
2. "Settings" cialist workshop.
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display" Special windscreen
5. Select the desired setting: The windscreen is an integral part of the sys-
▷ "Speed Assistant": call up settings for tem.
speed assistance. The shape and coating of the special wind-
▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set screen enable the system to function.
whether the selection lists are displayed In the event of damage, have the special wind-
in the instrument cluster or in the Head- screen replaced by an authorised Service Part-
up display. ner or another qualified Service Partner or a
▷ "Sport displays": specialist workshop.
▷ "Off": the sport displays are not
shown in the Head-up display.
▷ "In SPORT mode": the sport displays
are only shown in the SPORT drive
mode.
▷ "Always": the sport displays are per-
manently shown in the Head-up dis-
play.
▷ "Reduced height": if not all the informa-
tion is within the driver's field of view,
the information can be displayed in the
lower part of the Head-up display.
193
CONTROLS Lights
Lights
Vehicle equipment Icon Function
Side lights.
Automatic driving lights control.
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the Adaptive lighting functions.
Low-beam headlight.
Instrument lighting.
tems.
Parking light, right.

Lights and lighting
Parking light, left.
Switches in the vehicle
Automatic driving lights

control
Principle
Depending on ambient brightness, the system
switches the low-beam headlight on or off au-
The light switch is located next to the steering tomatically, for example in a tunnel, at twilight
wheel. and in rain or snow.
Icon Function
General
Rear fog light. The headlights may also be switched on when
the sun is low against a blue sky.
Lights off. Activating

Automatic driving lights control. Switch position: ,
Daytime driving lights. The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
illuminated when the low-beam headlight is
switched on.
194
Lights CONTROLS
System limits Parking light

The automatic driving lights control is no sub- When parking the vehicle, it is possible to
stitute for using your own judgement to assess switch on a parking light on one side.
the light conditions.
Button Function
The sensors are unable to recognise fog or
hazy weather, for example. In such situations, Parking light, right on/off.
switch on the lights manually.
Parking light, left on/off.
Side lights, low-beam

headlights, and parking
lights Welcome light
General Principle
With the welcome light, the exterior lights are
Switch position: , ,
automatically turned on for a limited time when
If the driver's door is opened when drive-ready approaching or unlocking the vehicle.
state is switched off, the exterior lights are
switched off automatically after a given time.
General
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
Side lights
lights of the vehicle can be individually adjus-
ted.
Switching on
Switch position: Activating/deactivating welcome
The indicator light in the instrument light
cluster is illuminated. 1. "CAR"
The vehicle is illuminated all round. 2. "Settings"
Do not leave the side lights on for extended 3. "Exterior lighting"

periods of time, as this could drain the vehicle 4. Depending on the equipment, select the
battery and it may no longer be possible to desired setting:
switch on drive-ready state. ▷ "Welcome and goodbye"
When the vehicle is unlocked, individual
Low-beam headlight lighting functions are switched on for a
limited time.
Switching on
Switch position:
The low-beam headlight illuminates if drive- Home lights
ready state is switched on.
The indicator light in the instrument Principle
cluster is illuminated. With the home lights, the exterior lights are
automatically turned on for a limited time after
195
CONTROLS Lights
leaving the vehicle in order to illuminate the

area around the vehicle.
Dynamic ECO light function
Switching on the home lights General

After switching off drive-ready state, press the The brightness of the low-beam headlight is
turn indicator lever forwards briefly. reduced, depending on the speed and distance
from the vehicle in front.
Setting the duration
Activating
1. "CAR"
Switch position:
2. "Settings"
Activate ECO PRO drive mode.
4. "Home lights"
ECO PRO, see page 156.
6. "OK"
Adaptive lighting functions
Daytime driving lights
Principle
Adaptive lighting functions makes it possible to
General illuminate the road responsively.
Switch position:
▷ , General
The daytime driving lights illuminate when The adaptive lighting functions consist of one
drive-ready state is switched on. system or multiple systems, depending on the
The indicator light in the instrument equipment:
cluster is illuminated when the rear ▷ Adaptive Headlights.
daytime driving lights are switched on. ▷ Variable light distribution.
▷ Cornering light.
Activating/deactivating daytime ▷ Roundabout light.
driving lights
In some countries, daytime driving lights are Activating
compulsory, in which case the daytime driving Switch position:
lights cannot be deactivated at the front. The adaptive lighting functions are active
1. "CAR" when drive-ready state is switched on.
2. "Settings"
4. Depending on national-market version:
"Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving
lights rear"
196
Lights CONTROLS
Adaptive Headlights Urban lights

The light beam from the low-beam headlight is
extended at the sides.
General
The laser high-beam headlight follows the
Motorway beam pattern
road ahead in response to the steering wheel
angle and other parameters. The range of the low-beam headlight is in-
creased.
Depending on the equipment: if the headlights
are converted, the availability of the Adaptive
Headlights may be restricted.
Cornering light
Left-hand/right-hand traffic, see page 199. Principle
When turning off or on tight bends, for example
Anticipatory Adaptive Headlights hairpin bends, up to a certain speed, a corner-
The beams are adapted to the direction of ing light is added to illuminate the inside area
travel ahead even before entering or leaving of the bend.
a bend.
General
S-bend lights The cornering light is switched on automati-
The beams are kept as straight as possible cally depending on the steering wheel angle or,
when driving around S-bends. where applicable, activation of the turn indica-
tors.
Hairpin lights When reversing, the cornering light is activa-
The cornering light is also switched on before ted automatically as appropriate, irrespective
entering hairpin bends. of the steering wheel angle.
Variable light distribution Roundabout light

Principle Shortly before driving onto a roundabout, the
cornering light is activated on both sides. The
The variable light distribution enables better edge of the road is illuminated more effec-
illumination of the road. tively. Shortly before leaving a roundabout, the
cornering light is switched off again on both
General sides.
The light distribution is automatically adapted
to the speed.
If equipment includes a navigation system, the
Adaptive headlight range
light distribution is automatically adapted de- control
pending on the navigation data and speed.
Adaptive headlight range control compensates
for acceleration and braking manoeuvres and
vehicle load conditions to prevent oncoming
vehicles from being dazzled.
197
CONTROLS Lights
High-beam Assistant Activating High-beam Assistant
Principle
High-beam Assistant detects other road users
in good time and activates or deactivates the
high-beam according to traffic situation.
General
High-beam Assistant ensures that the high-
beam headlight is switched on when the traffic
Switch position:
situation allows. The system does not switch
on the high-beam headlight at low speed Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
range.
The indicator light in the instrument
The system responds to the lights of oncoming cluster is illuminated when the low-
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to beam headlight is switched on.
ambient lighting, for example in built-up areas.
The high-beam headlight can be switched on The system will switch automatically between
and off manually at any time. low-beam headlight and high-beam headlight.
If equipped with Selective Beam, the high- The blue indicator light in the instru-
beam headlight is not switched off for oncom- ment cluster illuminates if the high-
ing vehicles or vehicles driving ahead of you. beam headlight is switched on by the
Instead, the system masks only those areas system.
of the beam which would otherwise dazzle on-
coming traffic or traffic driving ahead. In this The High-beam Assistant is deactivated by
case, the blue indicator light continues to illu- switching the high-beams on and off manually.
minate. To reactivate High-beam Assistant, press the
Depending on the equipment: if the headlights button on the turn indicator lever.
have been converted, High-beam Assistant
may only function to a restricted extent. Deactivating High-beam Assistant
Left-hand/right-hand traffic, see page 199.
Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
198
Lights CONTROLS
System limits Depending on the national-market version, ad-

ditional information may be found on the laser
High-beam Assistant cannot replace the driv-
sign on the headlight.
er's own judgement as to when to use the
high-beam headlight. Therefore activate the
dipped headlights manually if the situation re-
quires it.
Fog light
In the following situations, the system will not
operate or its operation will be restricted and Rear fog light
your intervention may be required:
▷ In extremely adverse weather conditions
such as fog or heavy precipitation. The low-beam headlight must be switched on
before the rear fog light can be activated.
▷ When detecting poorly lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horse riders or car-
riages and when trains or ships are close to
Switching the rear fog light on/off
the road, or when animals are crossing the Press the key.
road.
▷ On tight bends, on steep brows or hollows The yellow indicator light in the instru-
of hills, when there is crossing traffic or if ment cluster illuminates when the rear
the view of oncoming vehicles on a motor- fog light is switched on.
way is partly obstructed.
▷ In poorly lit towns or where there are highly If the automatic driving lights control has been
reflective signs. activated, the low-beam headlight switches
on automatically when the rear fog light is
▷ If the area of windscreen in front of the in-
switched on.
terior mirror is covered with condensation,
dirt, stickers, labels, etc.
Guiding fog light
Laser high-beam headlight Principle

When required, the light distribution of the low-
beam headlight is adapted to the foggy condi-
Principle
tions depending on speed.
The headlight range of the high-beam head-
light is increased and provides better illumina- Operating requirements
tion of the road.
▷ Automatic driving lights control is active.
General ▷ Rear fog light is switched on.
The high-beam laser light is integrated into the
headlight and is emitted there. Left-hand/right-hand traffic
When the high-beam headlight is switched
on, the laser high-beam in the headlight is
switched on automatically in addition to LED
General
high-beam headlight from a speed of approxi- When driving in countries where vehicles drive
mately 60 km/h, 37 mph. on the opposite side of the road to your vehi-
199
CONTROLS Lights
cle's country of registration, you will need to Overview

prevent the dazzling effect of your headlights.
Buttons in the vehicle
Converting the headlights
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Right/left-hand traffic"
Depending on the national-market version,
the parking brake must be applied.
Interior lights
System limits
The availability of the High-beam Assistant
Reading lights
might be restricted.
The availability of the adaptive lighting func-
tions might be restricted.
Switching interior lights on/off
Press the key.
Instrument lighting
To switch off permanently: press and hold the
Operating requirements button for approximately 3 seconds.
The brightness can only be adjusted when The interior lights in the rear can be switched
the side lights or the low-beam headlight is on and off independently. The button is loca-
switched on. ted on the headliner in the rear.
Adjusting the brightness Switching reading lights on/off

The brightness can be adjusted Press the key.
using the knurled wheel.
Depending on the equipment, there are read-
ing lights located at the front and in the rear
beside the interior lights.
Interior lighting Ambient lighting

General General
Depending on the equipment, the interior Depending on the equipment, the lighting for
lights, the footwell lights, door entry lighting, some of the interior lights can be adjusted.
ambient lighting and loudspeaker lighting are
controlled automatically.
200
Lights CONTROLS
Activating/deactivating ambient Bowers & Wilkins Diamond

light Surround Sound System
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Principle
3. "Interior lighting"
Some loudspeakers in the vehicle are illumina-
4. "Ambient light" ted. The brightness can be set individually.
Turning ambient lighting on/off General

The ambient lighting is switched on when the When the loudspeakers are muted, the loud-
vehicle is unlocked and switched off when the speaker lighting turns off.
vehicle is locked.
If the ambient lighting was deactivated using Activating/deactivating loudspeaker
iDrive, it is not switched on when the vehicle is lighting
unlocked.
1. "CAR"
Selecting the colour 2. "Settings"
1. "CAR" 3. "Interior lighting"
2. "Settings" 4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
Turning loudspeaker lighting on/off
4. "Colour"
The loudspeaker lighting is switched on when
5. Select the desired setting. the vehicle is unlocked and switched off when
the vehicle is locked.
Adjusting the brightness
1. "CAR" Adjusting the brightness
2. "Settings" 1. "CAR"
3. "Interior lighting" 2. "Settings"
4. "Brightness" 3. "Interior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting. 4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
5. "Brightness"
Dimmed during the journey 6. Select the desired setting.
The lighting in the interior is dimmed for cer-
tain lights during journeys in the dark.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Dimmed for night driving"
201
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
tems.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags protect the driver and front pas- In a side-on crash, the side airbag protects the
senger in the event of a head-on collision side of the body in the chest and pelvic area.
where the protection of the seat belts alone
would no longer be sufficient.
202
Safety CONTROLS
Head airbag ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit-

ting correctly, i.e. with their feet and legs in
The head airbag protects the head in the event
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.
of a side-on crash.
▷ Make sure that vehicle occupants keep
Knee airbag their head away from the side airbag.
Depending on the national-market version: ▷ Do not place any other persons, pets or ob-
jects between the airbags and occupants.
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event
of a head-on collision. ▷ Keep the dashboard and windscreen area
on the passenger's side clear, for example
do not attach adhesive foil or covers and
Protective effect do not fit brackets for navigation device or
mobile phone, for example.
General
▷ Do not glue the airbag covers and do not
Airbags are not activated in every collision sit- cover or modify them in any way.
uation, for example, in minor accidents.
▷ Do not use the front airbag cover on the
passenger's side as a tray.
Information for optimum airbag
protective effect ▷ Do not install seat covers, cushions or other
objects on the front seats if they are not
specifically designed for use on seats with
WARNING integral side airbags.
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy- ▷ Do not hang items of clothing, for example
ment area of the airbag is restricted, the air- coats or jackets, over the backrests.
bag system cannot provide the intended level ▷ Do not modify individual components of the
of protection or may cause additional injuries system or its wiring. This also applies to the
when it deploys. There is a danger of injury or covers of the steering wheel, the dashboard
danger to life. Observe the following for opti- and seats.
mum protective effect of the airbag system.
▷ Do not dismantle the airbag system.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. Even if all this information is observed, injuries
resulting from contact with the airbag cannot
▷ Always grip the steering wheel at the steer-
be entirely ruled out in every situation.
ing wheel rim. Place your hands in the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to mini- The noise caused by the deployment of an
mise the risk of injury to hands or arms airbag may lead to temporary hearing loss in
when the airbag deploys. vehicle occupants sensitive to noise.
▷ Adjust the seat and steering wheel so the
driver can reach over the steering wheel di-
agonally. Select the settings so that, when
reaching over, the shoulders stay in contact
with the backrest and the upper body stays
as far away from the steering wheel as
possible.
203
CONTROLS Safety
Operational readiness of the airbag Adjusting the front seat position

system To maintain the accuracy of the seat position,
calibrate the electric front seats as soon as
Safety information a corresponding message is displayed on the
control display.
WARNING For further information:
Individual components of the airbag system Seats, see page 123.

may be hot after airbag deployment. There
is a danger of injury. Do not touch individual
components.
Key switch for front
passenger airbag
WARNING Principle
Work carried out incorrectly can cause the When using a rear-facing child restraint system
airbag system to fail, malfunction or deploy on the front passenger seat, the front passen-
accidentally. If there is a malfunction, the air- ger airbag can be deactivated using the key
bag system might not deploy as intended switch for the front passenger airbag.
in an accident, even if the impact is of the
appropriate severity. There is a danger of in- General
jury or danger to life. Have the airbag system
The availability of the function depends on the
tested, repaired or removed and disposed of
vehicle equipment and country.
by an authorised Service Partner or another
qualified Service Partner or a specialist work- The front passenger airbag can be deactivated
shop. and reactivated with the integrated key from
the vehicle key.
Display in the instrument cluster Overview

When drive-ready state is switched on,
the warning light in the instrument
cluster illuminates briefly to indicate
that the entire airbag system and the seat belt
tensioners are operational.
Malfunction
▷ The warning light does not illu-
minate after drive-ready state is
The key switch for front passenger airbag is
switched on.
located on the outside of the dashboard.
▷ The warning light is permanently illumina-
ted.
Have the system checked.
204
Safety CONTROLS
Deactivating the front passenger 1. Insert the key and press inwards where
airbag necessary.
2. With the key pressed inwards, turn the
switch to the ON position as far as it will go.
Once the stop position has been reached,
remove the key.
3. Make sure that the key switch is in the end
position so that the airbag is activated.
The front passenger airbag is reactivated and
deploys in appropriate situations.
1. Insert the key and press inwards where Front passenger airbag indicator
necessary. light
2. With the key pressed inwards, turn the The indicator light for the front passenger air-
switch to the OFF position as far as it bag in the headliner shows the operating sta-
will go. Once the stop position has been tus of the front passenger airbag.
reached, remove the key.
After switching on drive-ready state, the light
3. Make sure that the key switch is in the end illuminates briefly and then shows whether the
position so that the airbag is deactivated. airbag is activated or deactivated.
The front passenger airbag is deactivated. The
Display Function
driver airbag remains active.
If a rearward-facing child restraint system is If the front passenger airbag
removed from the front passenger seat, reacti- is activated, the indicator light
vate the front passenger airbag so that it can illuminates for a short period
deploy as intended in the event of an accident. and then extinguishes.
The airbag status is shown by the indicator
light on the headliner. When the front passenger air-
bag is deactivated, the indica-
Activating the front passenger tor light remains illuminated.
airbag
Active pedestrian protection

Principle
The active pedestrian protection raises the
bonnet if the front of the vehicle collides with
a pedestrian.
205
CONTROLS Safety
General Service Partner or another qualified Service

When triggered, the pedestrian protection cre-
ates deformation space underneath the bon-
net in readiness for the subsequent head
impact. Sensors underneath the bumper are WARNING
used for detection. If the system has been triggered or is dam-
The system’s gas pressure springs are only aged, its functionality will be restricted or it
approved for a certain period of time. Check may no longer work at all. There is a danger
the gas pressure springs during maintenance of injury or danger to life.
and replace them as necessary. If the system has been triggered or is dam-
aged, have it checked and replaced at an au-
Safety information thorised Service Partner or another qualified
WARNING
The system may trigger inadvertently if con-
NOTICE
tact is made with individual components of
the hinges and bonnet locks. There is a dan- Opening the bonnet when the pedestrian
ger of injury or material damage. Do not protection has triggered may damage the
touch individual components of the hinges bonnet or the pedestrian protection. There is
and bonnet locks. a risk of material damage. Do not open the
bonnet after the Check Control message is
displayed. Have it checked by an authorised
WARNING
Modifications to the pedestrian protection
can lead to a failure, a malfunction or acci-
dental triggering of the pedestrian protection System limits
system. There is a danger of injury or danger
The active pedestrian protection is only
to life. Do not modify the pedestrian protec-
triggered at speeds between approximately
tion, its individual components or its wiring.
30 km/h, 18 mph and 55 km/h, 34 mph.
Do not dismantle the system.
For safety reasons, the system may also trig-
ger in rare instances where impact with a pe-
destrian cannot be excluded beyond all doubt,
WARNING for example in the following situations:
Work carried out incorrectly can lead to a ▷ Collision with objects such as a skip or a
failure, malfunction or accidental triggering of boundary post.
the system. If there is a malfunction, the sys-
▷ Collision with animals.
tem might not trigger as intended in an acci-
dent, even if the impact is of the appropriate ▷ Stone impact.
severity. There is a danger of injury or danger ▷ Driving into a snow drift.
to life. Have the system tested, repaired or
removed and disposed of by an authorised
206
Safety CONTROLS
Malfunction Safety information

The system has been triggered or is WARNING
faulty. The system does not relieve you of your per-
Immediately drive at moderate speed to an au- sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
thorised Service Partner or another qualified tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
Service Partner or a specialist workshop to respond independently and appropriately in
have the system checked and repaired. all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
Intelligent Safety ready to take over steering and braking at
any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
Principle
Intelligent Safety enables the driver assistance
systems to be operated centrally. WARNING
Displays and warnings do not relieve you
General of your personal responsibility. System limits
Depending on the equipment, Intelligent can mean that warnings or system respon-
Safety consists of one or more systems which ses are not issued or are issued too late, in-
can help to avoid the risk of a collision. correctly or for no reason. There is a risk of
▷ Collision Warning with braking function, see accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
page 209. conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
▷ Evasion Assistant, see page 212.
▷ Crossroads Warning with city braking func-
tion, see page 214.
WARNING
▷ Pedestrian Warning with city braking func-
When tow-starting or towing away with acti-
tion, see page 217.
vated Intelligent Safety Systems or activated
▷ Lane Departure Warning, see page 219. Cruise Control, individual functions may mal-
▷ Lane Change Warning, see page 223. function. There is a risk of accident. Turn off
▷ Side collision warning, see page 226. all Intelligent Safety Systems and Cruise Con-
trol before tow-starting or towing away.
▷ Rear Collision Prevention, see page 228.
▷ Road Priority Warning, see page 229.
▷ Wrong-way Warning, see page 232.
207
CONTROLS Safety
Overview Display
Button in the vehicle Button Status
Button illuminates green: all Intelli-

gent Safety Systems are switched
on.
Button illuminates orange: some

Intelligent Safety Systems are
switched off or are currently not
available.
Button does not illuminate: all Intel-

ligent Safety Systems are switched
Intelligent Safety
off.
Settings Switching Intelligent Safety Systems

The following settings can be selected for the on/off
Intelligent Safety Systems:
▷ "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems are
General
switched on. Basic settings are activated Depending on the equipment and national-
for the sub-functions, for example the set- market version, the Intelligent Safety Systems
ting for warning time. can be operated via the button or via iDrive.
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Sys- Some Intelligent Safety Systems are automati-
tems are switched on according to the indi- cally active at the start of each journey. Some
vidual settings. Intelligent Safety Systems are activated de-
pending on their last setting.
▷ "Configure INDIVIDUAL": The Intelligent
Safety Systems can be configured individu-
ally. The custom settings are activated and Operation via button
saved. As soon as a setting is changed in Press the key.
the menu, all settings in the menu are acti- The menu for the Intelligent Safety
vated. Systems is shown.
▷ "ALL OFF": All Intelligent Safety Systems If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched
are switched off. off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": Configure intelligent
safety systems individually if required.
Press the button repeatedly. The set-

ting switches between the following:
▷ "ALL ON"
▷ "INDIVIDUAL"
Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot be
switched off individually.
208
Safety CONTROLS
Press and hold the button. and brake interventions are output less fre-
"ALL OFF": The menu is selected. All quently.
Intelligent Safety Systems are switched off. Depending on equipment, the Driver Attention
Camera in the instrument cluster monitors
the driver's gaze behaviour. The system also
Operation via iDrive
checks for impaired visibility conditions. The
Press the key. gaze behaviour and visibility conditions also
The menu for the Intelligent Safety affect the point at which the warnings are is-
Systems is shown. sued.
▷ "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems are

switched on. The setting is automatically
Safety information
selected each time the menu is opened.
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": Individual settings can be WARNING
made on the control display. The system does not relieve you of your per-
▷ "ALL OFF": When the vehicle is stationary, sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
off. Some systems must be confirmed on respond independently and appropriately in
the control display one after the other to all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
switch off. dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
Collision Warning with any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
tion warrants it.
braking function
Principle WARNING
The Collision Warning warns of a possible risk Displays and warnings do not relieve you
of collision and may brake independently. If an of your personal responsibility. System limits
accident cannot be avoided, the system helps can mean that warnings or system respon-
to reduce the collision speed. ses are not issued or are issued too late, in-
correctly or for no reason. There is a risk of
General accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
From speeds of approximately 5 km/h, 3 mph,
the system provides a two-stage warning of
any possible risk of collision with vehicles. The WARNING
timing of these warnings may vary depending When tow-starting or towing away with acti-
on the current driving situation. vated Intelligent Safety Systems or activated
The driver’s own driving behaviour is taken Cruise Control, individual functions may mal-
into account in the responses of the system. function. There is a risk of accident. Turn off
If an active driving style is detected, warnings all Intelligent Safety Systems and Cruise Con-
trol before tow-starting or towing away.
209
CONTROLS Safety
Sensors Display in the instrument cluster

The system is controlled using the following
sensors: Icon Status
▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. Depending on equipment and na-
▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor. tional-market version:
For further information: The icon lights up yellow: functional
limitation detected, e.g. due to low
Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39.
sun or system failure. It is possible
to continue driving. Where applicable,
Switching the Collision Warning observe the information from Check
on/off Control messages.
Switching on the system automatically Depending on equipment and na-

tional-market version:
The system is automatically activated at the
start of each journey. The icon lights up yellow: the system
is turned off.
Switching the system on/off manually
Depending on the equipment and national- Warning with braking function
market version, the Intelligent Safety Systems
can be operated via the button or via iDrive. Display
Observe the settings, display and op- If there is a risk of collision with a detected
eration in the Intelligent Safety chap- vehicle, a warning icon is shown in the in-
ter. strument cluster and, where applicable, in the
Head-up display.
Intelligent Safety, see page 207. Icon Measure
Icon illuminates red: advance warn-

Setting the warning time ing.
1. "CAR" Brake and increase the distance.
2. "Settings" Icon flashes red and an acoustic sig-

3. "Driver assistance" nal sounds: acute warning.
4. "Safety and warnings" Brake and take avoidance manoeu-

vre if necessary.
5. "Front-collision warning"
Advance warning
▷ "Early"
An advance warning is given for example if
▷ "Medium" there is an impending risk of collision or the
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are dis- distance from the vehicle ahead is very short.
played. The driver must intervene personally when an
advance warning is given.
210
Safety CONTROLS
Acute warning with brake function System limits

An acute warning is given when the vehicle is
approaching another object at a high differen- Safety information
tial speed and there is an immediate risk of
collision.
WARNING
Actively intervene in the event of an acute
Due to system limitations, the system may
warning, e.g. brake. Depending on the driv-
not respond at all, or may respond too late,
ing situation and the vehicle's equipment, the
incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of
acute warning may be supported by a brief
accident or material damage. Observe the in-
brakes jolt.
formation on the system limits and intervene
If the warning time setting is "Late", the brakes actively if necessary.
jolt does not occur.
If necessary, the system can also assist by au-
tomatically performing a brake intervention if Detection range
there is a risk of collision.
An acute warning can be triggered even with-
out a previous advance warning.
Brake intervention
The warning prompts the driver to intervene
personally. When the brake pedal is pressed
quickly and hard, the maximum brake force of
the vehicle is used.
The system can also assist by automatically The detection capability of the system is limi-
performing a brake intervention if there is a risk ted.
of collision. Only objects detected by the system are taken
At low speeds, the vehicle can be braked to a into account.
standstill.
For this reason, the system may fail to respond
City braking function: brake intervention takes or only respond after a delay.
place at up to approx. 80 km/h, 50 mph.
For example the following might not be detec-
With radar sensor: brake intervention takes ted:
place at up to approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph.
▷ Slow driving vehicle in front being ap-
At speeds above approx. 210 km/h, 130 mph, proached at high speed.
brake intervention takes the form of a brakes
▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or decelerating
jolt. There is no automatic deceleration.
heavily.
A brake intervention can be discontinued either
▷ Vehicles with unusual rear design.
by pressing the accelerator pedal sufficiently or
by active steering wheel movement. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead.
Upper speed limit

The system is temporarily disabled at speeds
over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph. As soon as
211
CONTROLS Safety
the speed drops below this value again, the Safety information
system is activated.
System limits of the sensors WARNING
For further information: The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
▷ Radar sensors, see page 40. respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
Functional limitations dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
The system may have restricted functionality conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
in situations such as the following: ready to take over steering and braking at
▷ In tight bends.
tion warrants it.
▷ When driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for example DSC
OFF.
WARNING
▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine
using the Start/Stop button. Displays and warnings do not relieve you
of your personal responsibility. System limits
can mean that warnings or system respon-
Sensitivity of the warnings
ses are not issued or are issued too late, in-
The higher the sensitivity of the warning set- correctly or for no reason. There is a risk of
tings, for example the warning time, the more accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
warnings are displayed. As a result, there may conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
also be an increased number of premature or intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
unjustified warnings and responses.
Sensors
Evasion Assistant The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
Principle ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen.
The Evasion Assistant supports the driver in ▷ Front radar sensor.
certain situations when there is a need to
avoid something, for example people or obsta- ▷ Side radar sensors, front.
cles that appear suddenly. ▷ Side radar sensors, rear.
General Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39.
The system issues warnings and intervenes to
provide support if there is a possibility to take Operating requirements
an avoidance manoeuvre to the side. Sensors
▷ Pedestrian warning with braking function is
monitor and detect the space around the vehi-
switched on.
cle. The system uses a detected free space for
avoidance by safely supporting the avoidance
manoeuvre carried out by the driver with auto-
matic steering movements.
212
Safety CONTROLS
Pedestrian Warning with city braking func- The driver must intervene personally when an
tion, see page 217. acute warning is given. The system provides
▷ Collision Warning with braking function is support for the driver's avoidance manoeuvres
switched on. if there is a risk of collision.
Collision Warning with braking function, see An acute warning can be triggered even with-
page 209. out a previous advance warning.
▷ The sensors detect adequate space around

the vehicle.
System limits
Switching the Evasion Assistant Safety information

on/off
The system is automatically activated at the WARNING
start of each journey. Due to system limitations, the system may
Warning with avoidance assistance incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of
Display in the instrument cluster formation on the system limits and intervene
actively if necessary.
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle or person, a warning symbol is shown
in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Detection range
display.
Icon Measure
Icon illuminates red: advance warn-

ing.
Brake and increase the distance.
Icon flashes red and an acoustic sig-

nal sounds: acute warning for obsta-
cles.
Brake and take avoidance manoeu- The detection capability of the system is limi-
vre if necessary. ted.
Icon flashes red and an acoustic sig- Only objects detected by the system are taken
nal sounds: acute warning for people. into account.
Brake and take avoidance manoeu- For this reason, the system may fail to respond
vre if necessary. or only respond after a delay.
Acute warning with avoidance ted:
assistance ▷ Slow driving vehicle in front being ap-
If the vehicle approaches another object at a proached at high speed.
high differential speed, an acute warning is ▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or decelerating
displayed if there is an immediate risk of colli- heavily.
sion.
213
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Vehicles with unusual rear design. From speeds of approximately 10 km/h,

▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead. 6 mph, the system provides a two-stage warn-
ing of any possible risk of collision with vehi-
System limits of the sensors cles. The timing of these warnings may vary
depending on the current driving situation.
The Driver Attention Camera in the instrument
▷ Cameras, see page 39. cluster monitors the driver's gaze behaviour.
▷ Radar sensors, see page 40. The system also checks for impaired visibility
conditions. The gaze behaviour and visibility
Functional limitations conditions also affect the point at which the
The system may have restricted functionality warnings are issued.
in situations such as the following:
▷ In tight bends.
Safety information
▷ When driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for example DSC WARNING
OFF. The system does not relieve you of your per-
▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
using the Start/Stop button. tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
respond independently and appropriately in
Crossroads Warning with dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
city braking function conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
Principle tion warrants it.
Crossroads Warning helps to avoid accidents
with crossing traffic at road junctions and
crossroads. If an accident cannot be avoided, WARNING
the system helps to reduce the collision speed.
The system warns of the risk of collision at of your personal responsibility. System limits
speeds that are common in towns and cities can mean that warnings or system respon-
and brakes automatically if necessary. ses are not issued or are issued too late, in-
General accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de- conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
tection range. intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
Vehicles that cross the vehicle's direction of
travel can be detected by the system as soon
as these vehicles enter the detection range of WARNING
the system. When tow-starting or towing away with acti-
A warning is given at road junctions and cross- vated Intelligent Safety Systems or activated
roads if there is a risk of collision with crossing Cruise Control, individual functions may mal-
traffic. function. There is a risk of accident. Turn off
214
Safety CONTROLS
all Intelligent Safety Systems and Cruise Con- ▷ "Early"

trol before tow-starting or towing away. ▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are dis-
played.
Sensors
Display in the instrument cluster
sensors:
▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. Icon Status
▷ Front radar sensor.
Depending on equipment and na-
▷ Side radar sensors, front. tional-market version:
For further information: The icon lights up yellow: functional
Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39. limitation detected, e.g. due to low
Switching the Crossroads Warning to continue driving. Where applicable,
on/off observe the information from Check
Control messages.
Switching on the system automatically Depending on equipment and na-
The system is automatically activated at the tional-market version:
start of each journey. The icon lights up yellow: the system
is turned off.
Depending on the equipment and national- Warning with braking function
can be operated via the button or via iDrive. Display
Observe the settings, display and op- If there is a risk of collision with a detected
eration in the Intelligent Safety chap- vehicle, a warning icon is shown in the in-
ter. strument cluster and, where applicable, in the
For further information: Head-up display.
Intelligent Safety, see page 207.
Setting the warning time

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
5. "Front-collision warning"
215
CONTROLS Safety
Icon Meaning Brake intervention

The warning prompts the driver to intervene
The icon lights up red: advance warn-
personally.
ing in the event of a risk of collision
with a crossing vehicle from the right. The system can also assist by automatically
performing a brake intervention if there is a risk
The icon flashes red and a signal
of collision.
sounds: acute warning in the event of
an immediate risk of collision. The vehicle can be braked to a standstill.
The icon lights up red: advance warn-
by pressing the accelerator pedal sufficiently or
by active steering wheel movement.
with a crossing vehicle from the left.
Object detection may be restricted. Take into
account the detection range limits and the
functional limitations.
an immediate risk of collision.
The icon lights up red: advance warn- System limits

with the vehicle from an undetectable Safety information
direction of travel.
WARNING
an immediate risk of collision. Due to system limitations, the system may
Advance warning
An advance warning is displayed, for example formation on the system limits and intervene
if there is an impending risk of collision with a actively if necessary.
crossing vehicle.
Intervene in the event of an advance warning,
e.g. brake. Upper speed limit
The system responds to crossing vehicles
Acute warning with brake function when your own speed is below approx.
An acute warning is displayed if there is an im- 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph.
minent risk of collision with a crossing vehicle.
In the event of an acute warning, brake and
if necessary take an avoidance manoeuvre.
Where required, the system can assist by au-
tomatically performing a brake intervention if
there is a risk of collision.
An acute warning can be triggered even with-
out a previous advance warning.
216
Safety CONTROLS
Detection range warnings are displayed. As a result, there may

also be an increased number of premature or
unjustified warnings and responses.
Pedestrian Warning with city

braking function
Principle
The pedestrian warning warns of the risk
The detection capability of the system is limi- of collision with pedestrians and cyclists at
ted. speeds that are common in towns and cities
For this reason, the system may fail to respond and brakes automatically if necessary. If an ac-
or only respond after a delay. cident cannot be avoided, the system helps to
reduce the collision speed.
ted: General
▷ Crossing vehicles concealed by buildings, Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
for example. tection range.
▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or decelerating At speeds above approx. 5 km/h, 3 mph, the
heavily. system warns of the possible risk of collision
▷ Crossing two-wheeled vehicles. with pedestrians and cyclists.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual side appearance.
Safety information
System limits of the sensors
For further information: WARNING
▷ Cameras, see page 39. The system does not relieve you of your per-
▷ Radar sensors, see page 40. sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
Functional limitations respond independently and appropriately in
The system may have restricted functionality
▷ In tight bends. ready to take over steering and braking at
▷ When driving stability control systems are any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
limited or deactivated, for example DSC tion warrants it.
OFF.
using the Start/Stop button. WARNING
Sensitivity of the warnings of your personal responsibility. System limits
The higher the sensitivity of the warning set- can mean that warnings or system respon-
tings, for example the warning time, the more ses are not issued or are issued too late, in-
217
CONTROLS Safety
correctly or for no reason. There is a risk of sons in the extended zone if they are moving
accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic towards the central zone.
Switching the Pedestrian Warning
on/off
WARNING
Switching on the system automatically
The system is automatically activated at the
start of each journey.
Cruise Control, individual functions may mal-
function. There is a risk of accident. Turn off
all Intelligent Safety Systems and Cruise Con-
trol before tow-starting or towing away. Depending on the equipment and national-
can be operated via the button or via iDrive.
Sensors Observe the settings, display and op-
The system is controlled using the following eration in the Intelligent Safety chap-
sensors: ter.
▷ Cameras behind the windscreen. For further information:
▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor. Intelligent Safety, see page 207.
Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39. Display in the instrument cluster
Detection range Icon Status

The icon lights up yellow: functional
limitation detected, e.g. due to low
observe the information from Check
Control messages.

The detection range in front of the vehicle con-
sists of two parts:
The icon lights up yellow: the system
▷ Central zone, arrow 1, directly in front of the
is turned off.
vehicle.
▷ Extended zone, arrows 2, to the right and
left of the central area. Warning with braking function
There is a risk of collision if persons are in the
Display
central zone. A warning is only given of per-
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
person or cyclist, a warning symbol is shown in
218
Safety CONTROLS
the instrument cluster and, where applicable, Upper speed limit

in the Head-up display. The system responds to pedestrians and cy-
Icon Meaning clists when your own speed is below approx.
80 km/h, approx. 50 mph.
Icon illuminates red and an acoustic
signal sounds. Detection range
The detection capability of the system is limi-
Alternatively, depending on the
ted.
equipment, a red warning triangle il-
luminates in the instrument cluster. As a result, the system may fail to give warn-
ings or may give warnings late.
Take action yourself immediately by braking or For example the following might not be detec-
swerving. ted:
▷ Partially concealed pedestrians.
Brake intervention ▷ Pedestrians who are not detected as such
The warning prompts the driver to intervene due to the viewing angle or contour.
personally. When the brake pedal is pressed ▷ Pedestrians outside the detection range.
quickly and hard, the maximum brake force of
▷ Pedestrians shorter than approximately
the vehicle is used.
80 cm, 32 in.
In addition, the system can assist with a brake
intervention if there is the risk of collision. System limits of the sensors
At low speeds, the vehicle can be braked to a
standstill.
by pressing the accelerator pedal sufficiently or ▷ Radar sensors, see page 40.
by active steering wheel movement.
Functional limitations
System limits The system may have restricted functionality
or may not be available at all in situations such
Safety information as the following:
▷ If driving stability control systems are deac-
tivated, for example DSC OFF.
WARNING
accident or material damage. Observe the in- Lane Departure Warning
Principle
The Lane Departure Warning issues a warning
if the vehicle leaves the road or its driving lane.
219
CONTROLS Safety
General Sensors
This camera-based system warns once a min- The system is controlled by cameras behind
imum speed has been reached. the windscreen.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is For further information:
displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39.
Systems.
Warnings are issued in the form of a steering Operating requirements
wheel vibration.
The lane marking must be detected by the
The system does not issue a warning if the camera in order for the Lane Departure Warn-
driver indicates in the corresponding direction ing to be active.
before leaving the driving lane.
Depending on the equipment, if a lane boun- Turning the Lane Departure
dary is crossed in the speed range up to Warning on/off
210 km/h, approx. 130 mph, the system may
respond with a brief active steering interven- Switching on the system automatically
tion in addition to the steering wheel vibration.
The system thereby helps to keep the vehicle Depending on the national-market version, the
in the driving lane. system is automatically active after every driv-
ing off.
Safety information
WARNING market version, the Intelligent Safety Systems
The system does not relieve you of your per- can be operated via the button or via iDrive.
sonal responsibility to assess the layout of Observe the settings, display and op-
the road and the traffic situation. There is a eration in the Intelligent Safety chap-
risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to ter.
the traffic conditions. Observe the traffic sit-
uation and intervene actively if the situation For further information:
warrants it. In the event of a warning, do Intelligent Safety, see page 207.
not move the steering wheel unnecessarily
abruptly.
Setting the Lane Departure Warning
Setting the warning time

WARNING
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
can mean that warnings or system respon- 3. "Driver assistance"
ses are not issued or are issued too late, in- 4. "Safety and warnings"
correctly or for no reason. There is a risk of 5. "Lane departure warning"
accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
intervene actively if the situation warrants it. ▷ "Early"
▷ "Medium"
220
Safety CONTROLS
▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup- Icon Meaning

pressed depending on the situation,
for instance when purposely driving over The icon lights up green: the system
driving lane lines in curves or with dy- is turned on. A lane boundary has
namic overtaking without turn indicator. been detected on at least one side of
the vehicle and the system is ready to
▷ "Off": no warnings are given.
intervene. Warnings are issued.
Adjusting the strength of the steering The icon flashes green: a warning is
wheel vibration actively issued. If necessary, the sys-
1. "CAR" tem performs a steering intervention.
2. "Settings" The icon lights up yellow: functional

3. "Driver assistance" limitation detected, e.g. due to low
4. "Feedback via steering wheel"
5. "Vibration intensity" observe the information from Check
6. Select the desired setting. Control messages.
The setting is adopted for all Intelligent Safety The icon flashes yellow: a warning is
Systems. actively issued. The system does not
carry out any steering interventions.
Turning steering intervention on/off The icon lights up grey: the system
Steering intervention can be switched on and is switched off or automatically deac-
off separately for Lane Change Warning or tivated, e.g. because DSC OFF is ac-
Lane Departure Warning. tivated.
1. "CAR" The icon flashes grey: a warning is
2. "Settings" actively issued. The system does not
carry out any steering interventions.
5. "Lane departure warning" market version, information from the system
6. "Steering intervention" in Assisted Driving View is displayed on the
Depending on the national-market version, instrument cluster.
steering intervention is automatically active For further information:
whenever you drive off. Assisted Driving View, see page 172.
Display in the instrument cluster Warning function

market version, different system statuses are When leaving the driving lane
displayed in the instrument cluster. If the vehicle leaves the driving lane and a
lane boundary is detected, the steering wheel
vibrates depending on the steering wheel vi-
bration setting.
221
CONTROLS Safety
If the turn indicator is switched on in the corre- The warning signal and Check Control mes-
sponding direction before changing lanes, no sage urge the driver to pay more attention to
warning is issued. the driving lane.
Steering intervention In trailer operation

Depending on the equipment and national- There is no steering intervention when the
market version: if a lane boundary is crossed trailer socket is occupied or when the trailer
in the speed range up to 210 km/h, approx. operation is activated, for example when oper-
130 mph, the system may respond with a ating with a trailer or bicycle carrier.
brief active steering intervention in addition to
the steering wheel vibration. The steering in- Cancellation of the warning
tervention helps to keep the vehicle in the driv- The warning is cancelled in situations such as
ing lane. Steering intervention can be felt at the the following:
steering wheel, and can be overridden man-
ually at any time. With active steering interven- ▷ Automatically after a few seconds.
tion, the display flashes in the instrument clus- ▷ On returning to the correct lane.
ter. ▷ If the vehicle is accelerating rapidly or brak-
For example, steering intervention is sup- ing heavily.
pressed in the following situations: ▷ If the hazard warning lights are switched
▷ If the vehicle is accelerating rapidly or brak- on.
ing heavily. ▷ On indicating.
▷ On indicating. ▷ When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat-
▷ If the hazard warning lights are switched ing the driving stability.
on. ▷ While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
▷ In driving situations with high driving dy- ▷ Directly after a steering intervention by the
namics. vehicle systems.
▷ When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat- ▷ With manual steering intervention.
ing the driving stability.
▷ Possibly when another driver assistance
▷ Directly after a steering intervention by the system is activated.
vehicle systems.
▷ Lane boundaries are not detected.
▷ When actively weaving back to your own
▷ When the system limits are reached.
lane after overtaking.
Warning signal
System limits
Depending on the equipment, if the system Safety information
performs an active steering intervention multi-
ple times within 3 minutes without the driver
touching the steering wheel, an acoustic warn- WARNING
ing is emitted. A short warning signal sounds Due to system limitations, the system may
on the second steering intervention. A longer not respond at all, or may respond too late,
warning signal sounds from the third steering incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of
intervention onwards. accident or material damage. Observe the in-
A Check Control message is also displayed.
222
Safety CONTROLS
formation on the system limits and intervene General


in situations such as the following: The system is operational after a minimum
▷ When there are missing, worn, poorly visi- speed has been reached and uses radar sen-
ble, merging/separating or ambiguous lane sors to monitor the area behind and adjacent
boundaries, for example, in areas where to the vehicle.
there are roadworks. The minimum speed is country-specific and is
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety
snow, ice, dirt or water. Systems.
▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads. The system indicates when vehicles are in the
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white. blind spot, arrow 1, or are approaching from
the rear in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The light
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by
in the exterior mirror illuminates at a dimmed
objects.
level.
▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle
In the above situations, the system issues a
ahead.
warning before a lane change with the turn in-
▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine dicator activated. The light in the exterior mir-
using the Start/Stop button. ror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.
functionality is restricted. Vehicles with side collision warning: at speeds
of up to 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph, the sys-
tem can respond with a brief active steering
Lane Change Warning intervention and thus assist with returning the
vehicle to its driving lane. The steering inter-
vention is performed if a minimum speed has
Principle been reached. This minimum speed is shown
Lane Change Warning detects vehicles in the on the control display in the steering interven-
blind spot, or if vehicles are approaching from tion menu.
behind in the adjacent lane.
The light in the exterior mirror warns the driver Safety information
in different increments.
WARNING
223
CONTROLS Safety
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci- Adjusting the Lane Change Warning
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be Setting the warning time
1. "CAR"
tion warrants it. 2. "Settings"
WARNING 5. "Lane change warning"
Displays and warnings do not relieve you 6. Select the desired setting.
can mean that warnings or system respon- Adjusting the strength of the steering
wheel vibration
accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic 1. "CAR"
conditions. Observe the traffic situation and 2. "Settings"
intervene actively if the situation warrants it. 3. "Driver assistance"
4. "Feedback via steering wheel"
Sensors 5. "Vibration intensity"
The system is controlled using the following 6. Select the desired setting.
sensors: The setting is adopted for all Intelligent Safety
▷ Side radar sensors, rear. Systems.
▷ For vehicles with steering intervention:
cameras behind the windscreen.
Vehicles with steering intervention:
switching steering intervention on/off
Steering intervention can be switched on and
off separately for Lane Change Warning or
Lane Departure Warning.
Turning the Lane Change Warning
on/off 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching the system on/off manually 3. "Driver assistance"
Depending on the equipment and national- 4. "Safety and warnings"
market version, the Intelligent Safety Systems 5. "Lane change warning"
6. "Steering intervention"
Observe the settings, display and op-
eration in the Intelligent Safety chap- Displays in the instrument cluster
ter.
For further information: market version, information from the system
Intelligent Safety, see page 207. in Assisted Driving View is displayed on the
instrument cluster.
224
Safety CONTROLS
Assisted Driving View, see page 172. System limits
Warning function Safety information
Light in the exterior mirror

WARNING
Upper speed limit

The system is temporarily disabled at speeds
Advance warning over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph.
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indi- The system is activated again at speeds under
cates when vehicles are in the blind spot or are approx. 250 km/h, approx. 155 mph.
approaching from the rear.
Acute warning
If the turn indicator is activated while a vehi-
cle is in the critical area, the steering wheel vi-
brates briefly and the light in the exterior mirror ▷ For vehicles with steering intervention:
flashes brightly. cameras, see page 39.
The warning is terminated when the other ve-
hicle has left the critical area or the turn indica- Functional limitations
tor has been deactivated. The system may have restricted functionality
Vehicles with steering intervention ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
If there is no response to the steering wheel much faster than your own.
vibrations and a lane boundary is crossed at ▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads.
speeds of up to 210 km/h, 130 mph, the sys-
▷ The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
tem responds if necessary with a brief active
for instance by stickers.
steering intervention. The steering intervention
helps to return the vehicle to its driving lane. In vehicles with steering intervention, the inter-
Steering intervention can be felt at the steering vention may be restricted in situations such as
wheel, and can be overridden manually at any the following:
time. ▷ When there are missing, worn, poorly visi-
ble, merging/separating or ambiguous lane
Flashing of light boundaries, for example, in areas where
there are roadworks.
A flashing light when the vehicle is unlocked
indicates that the system is performing a self- ▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
test. snow, ice, dirt or water.
225
CONTROLS Safety
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white. General

objects.
▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle
ahead.
▷ If the camera is impaired.
functionality is restricted.
Radar sensors monitor the area adjacent to
The system cannot be switched on when the
the vehicle from a minimum speed up to ap-
trailer socket is occupied or when the trailer
proximately , 210 km/h, approx. 130 mph.
operation is activated, for example when oper-
ating with a trailer or bicycle carrier. A Check The minimum speed is country-specific and is
Control message is shown. displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety
Systems.
Warning displays If another vehicle is detected adjacent to the
Depending on the selected setting for warn- vehicle – and there is a risk of a side collision –
ings, for example the warning time, it is pos- the system helps the driver to avoid a collision.
sible that more or fewer warnings will be For this purpose, the system issues a warning
displayed. As a result, there may also be an in- in the form of a flashing LED on the exterior
creased number of premature warnings about mirror and steering wheel vibrations. The sys-
critical situations. tem may perform an active steering interven-
tion.
Side collision warning Safety information
Principle WARNING
The side collision warning helps to avoid an
imminent side collision.
tion warrants it.
226
Safety CONTROLS
Set Side Collision Warning

WARNING
Displays and warnings do not relieve you Adjusting the strength of the steering
of your personal responsibility. System limits wheel vibration
can mean that warnings or system respon- 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic 3. "Driver assistance"
conditions. Observe the traffic situation and 4. "Feedback via steering wheel"
intervene actively if the situation warrants it. 5. "Vibration intensity"
Sensors The setting is adopted for all Intelligent Safety
Systems.
sensors:
▷ Side radar sensors, front.
market version, information from the system
▷ Side radar sensors, rear. in Assisted Driving View is displayed on the
For further information: instrument cluster.
Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39. For further information:
Assisted Driving View, see page 172.
The camera behind the windscreen detects the Warning function
position of the lane boundaries.
The lane boundaries must be detected by the Light in the exterior mirror
camera in order for the side collision warning
with steering intervention to be active.
Turning the side-collision warning

on/off

Acute warning
Observe the settings, display and op-
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the
eration in the Intelligent Safety chap-
exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel
ter.
starts vibrating.
A Check Control message is displayed at the
Intelligent Safety, see page 207. same time.
227
CONTROLS Safety
An active steering intervention may be per- ▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle
formed to avoid a collision and to keep the ahead.
vehicle safely within its driving lane. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine
Steering intervention can be felt at the steering using the Start/Stop button.
wheel, and can be overridden manually at any A Check Control message may be displayed if
time. functionality is restricted.
The system cannot be switched on when the
System limits trailer socket is occupied or when the trailer
operation is activated, for example when oper-
Safety information ating with a trailer or bicycle carrier. A Check
Control message is shown.
WARNING
Due to system limitations, the system may Rear Collision Prevention
accident or material damage. Observe the in- Principle
formation on the system limits and intervene Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
actively if necessary. market version, Rear Collision Prevention can
respond to vehicles approaching from behind.
System limits of the sensors General

▷ The speed of the approaching vehicle is
much faster than your own speed.
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-
▷ In tight corners or on narrow roads.
hicle.
▷ When there are missing, worn, poorly visi-
If a vehicle is approaching from behind at a
ble, merging/separating or ambiguous lane
relevant speed, the system can respond as fol-
boundaries, for example, in areas where
lows:
there are roadworks.
▷ The hazard warning lights are switched on
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
if appropriate.
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ PreCrash functions are triggered if appro-
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white.
priate.
objects.
228
Safety CONTROLS
Safety information System limits

WARNING
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa- ▷ Radar sensors, see page 40.
respond independently and appropriately in Functional limitations
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci- The system may have restricted functionality
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic in the following situations:
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be ▷ The speed of the approaching vehicle is
ready to take over steering and braking at much faster than your own speed.
tion warrants it. ▷ The speed of the approaching vehicle is
very slow.
WARNING Road Priority Warning

of your personal responsibility. System limits Principle
can mean that warnings or system respon-
ses are not issued or are issued too late, in- The Road Priority Warning provides support
correctly or for no reason. There is a risk of in situations where road signs or traffic lights
accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic indicate that the driver must give way.
intervene actively if the situation warrants it. General
The system uses a camera to evaluate the
road signs and light signal systems.
Sensors The navigation system forwards information
The system is controlled via radar sensors at regarding the road layout to the system.
the side in the rear.
A warning is given if a right-of-way is about to
For further information: be violated in the following traffic situations, for
Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39. example:
▷ At a road junction.
Switching Rear Collision Prevention ▷ At a T-junction.
on/off ▷ On an entry slip road slip road.
The system is automatically activated at the ▷ At a roundabout.
start of each journey.
▷ In the event of a red traffic light.
The system is deactivated in the following sit-
uations: Starting from a variable minimum speed, the
system issues warnings from and up to ap-
▷ When reversing. proximately 75 km/h, approx. 47 mph.
▷ If the trailer socket is occupied or trailer op-
eration is activated, for example when op-
erating with a trailer or bicycle carrier.
229
CONTROLS Safety
Safety information Turning the Road Priority Warning

on/off
WARNING
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa- Depending on the equipment and national-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot market version, the Intelligent Safety Systems
respond independently and appropriately in can be operated via the button or via iDrive.
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci- Observe the settings, display and op-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic eration in the Intelligent Safety chap-
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be ter.
ready to take over steering and braking at For further information:
tion warrants it. Intelligent Safety, see page 207.
Set Road Priority Warning

WARNING
Displays and warnings do not relieve you Setting the warning time
of your personal responsibility. System limits 1. "CAR"
can mean that warnings or system respon- 2. "Settings"
accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic 4. "Safety and warnings"
conditions. Observe the traffic situation and 5. "Give way warning"
intervene actively if the situation warrants it. 6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Early"
Sensors ▷ "Medium"
The system is controlled by cameras behind ▷ "Late": only acute warnings are dis-
the windscreen. played.
For further information: ▷ "Off": no warnings are displayed.
Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39. The selected setting is saved and adopted for
the next journey.
The road priority situation must be unambig-
Warning function
uously directed by road signs or light signal
systems. General
The system warns in two stages:
▷ Advance warning: visually by means of a
warning icon in the instrument cluster.
▷ Acute warning: visually by means of a
warning icon in the instrument cluster and
with an additional acoustic signal.
230
Safety CONTROLS
The timing of the warnings may vary depend- Icon Meaning

ing on the current driving situation and the set
warning time. Give way.
The following road signs are taken into ac-
count for the Road Priority Warning:
Signs Meaning
Give way signs: Stop.

These signs trigger an ad-
vance warning.
Stop signs. Red traffic light.

These signs trigger an
advance warning and an
acute warning.
Red traffic lights trigger an

When an advance warning is issued, intervene
advance warning and an
as appropriate for the situation; for example,
acute warning.
by braking.
Acute warning
Advance warning If there is an imminent risk that road priority
is about to be ignored, a signal sounds and
If there is a risk that road priority is about to be
one of the following icons appears in the in-
ignored, one of the following icons appears in
strument cluster:
the instrument cluster:
Icon Meaning
Stop.
Red traffic light.
When an acute warning is issued, immediately

intervene as appropriate for the situation; for
example, by braking.
231
CONTROLS Safety
Display in the Head-up display ▷ With road signs that do not correspond to
Depending on the equipment, the warning is the standard.
displayed in the Head-up display at the same ▷ If road signs are detected that apply to a
time as in the instrument cluster. merging or parallel road.
▷ If the road signs or road layouts are specific
System limits to one country.
▷ At road junctions with flashing light signal
Safety information systems.
WARNING using the Start/Stop button.
Due to system limitations, the system may ▷ In the case of navigation data that is inva-
not respond at all, or may respond too late, lid, outdated or not available.
incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of ▷ The system may not be available or may
accident or material damage. Observe the in- only be available to a limited extent is some
formation on the system limits and intervene countries.
Wrong-way Warning
No Warning
The system provides no warning in situations Principle
such as the following:
The Wrong-way Warning issues a warning if
▷ In road priority situations without “Give
the driver is about to drive the wrong way, for
Way” signs, “Stop” signs or red light signal
example on motorways, roundabouts and one-
systems.
way streets.
▷ At road junctions with relevant traffic lights
that illuminate yellow or green. General
Depending on the equipment, the system will
check the traffic situation based on navigation
For further information: data and road signs.
▷ Cameras, see page 39. The system will take into account road signs
such as the following:
Function limitation ▷ No entry.
▷ Roundabout.
▷ Direction arrows: keep right/left signs.
▷ If road signs or light signal systems are un-
clear.
▷ If road signs or light signal systems are fully
or partially concealed or soiled.
▷ If road signs or light signal systems are dif-
ficult to read or rotated.
▷ If road signs or light signal systems are too
small or too large.
232
Safety CONTROLS
Safety information Switching the system off manually

WARNING
If all Intelligent Safety Systems are switched
off together, the Wrong-way Warning is also
switched off.
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci- Observe the settings, display and op-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic eration in the Intelligent Safety chap-
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be ter.
ready to take over steering and braking at For further information:
Intelligent Safety, see page 207.
tion warrants it.
Warning function
WARNING A warning is shown in the instrument
Displays and warnings do not relieve you cluster and, where applicable, in the
of your personal responsibility. System limits Head-up display and an acoustic signal
can mean that warnings or system respon- sounds as soon as a motorway, roundabout or
ses are not issued or are issued too late, in- one-way street is entered in the wrong direc-
correctly or for no reason. There is a risk of tion of travel.
accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
System limits
Safety information
Sensors
The system is controlled by cameras behind WARNING
the windscreen. Due to system limitations, the system may
For further information: not respond at all, or may respond too late,
Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39. incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of
Operating requirements formation on the system limits and intervene
The road layout ahead must be unambigu-
ously indicated by road signs.
No Warning
Turning Wrong-way Warning on/off The system provides no warning if the road
layout is not indicated by road signs, for exam-
Switching on the system automatically ple.
The Wrong-way Warning is automatically acti-
vated at the start of each journey.
233
CONTROLS Safety
System limits of the sensors If the system is activated, the vehicle is

For further information: brought to a standstill within its own lane by
means of lane tracking.
market version, the system may have a lane
change function.
The system may have restricted functionality,
With lane change function: on motorways or
or give no Wrong-way Warning at all, in situa-
similar roads, the system steers the vehicle to
tions such as the following:
the hard shoulder if possible. On other roads
▷ If the road signs are ambiguous. or in heavy traffic, the vehicle is brought to a
▷ If the road signs are fully or partially cov- standstill in the road it is currently in.
ered or soiled.
▷ If the road signs are poorly visible or twis- Overview
ted.
▷ If the road signs are too small or too large.
▷ With road signs that do not correspond to
the standard.
▷ If road signs are detected that apply to a
merging or parallel road.
▷ If the road signs or road layouts are specific
to one country.
using the Start/Stop button. Parking brake
▷ In the case of navigation data that is inva-

lid, outdated or not available.
▷ It may not be possible to use the system in
▷ The Emergency Stop Assistant can be acti-
all countries.
vated at speeds of approx. 10 km/h, approx.
6 mph up to approx. 250 km/h, approx.
When equipped with the 155 mph.
Emergency Stop Assistant ▷ With lane change function: lane changes

are performed if the traffic situation allows.
Principle Activating the Emergency Stop

If the driver is no longer capable of driving, the Assistant
Emergency Stop Assistant helps to bring the
Briefly pull the parking brake switch to
vehicle safely to a standstill.
activate the Emergency Stop Assistant.
▷ With lane change function: when the switch
General
is released, an automatic lane change is
The Emergency Stop Assistant is not activated triggered if necessary.
automatically. The system can only be activa-
▷ The system takes over vehicle control for a
ted manually by the vehicle occupants.
maximum of 2 minutes.
234
Safety CONTROLS
▷ The hazard warning lights are switched on. Icon Status

▷ An emergency call is triggered.
The icon lights up green: when the
lane boundary is detected, the sys-
Cancelling the Emergency Stop tem keeps the vehicle in the lane.
Assistant The icon lights up grey: tracking tem-
At any time during the process, the driver can porarily interrupted.
cancel the Emergency Stop Assistant function
by actively taking control of the vehicle. The icon lights up yellow: the lane
For example, the system is cancelled in the boundary has been crossed.
following situations: If lane boundaries are detected, the
▷ When the steering wheel is turned. system keeps the vehicle in the lane.
▷ On indicating. The steering wheel icon lights up yel-
▷ When the accelerator pedal is pressed. low: hands not touching the steering
wheel. System remains active.
▷ When the hazard warning lights are
switched off. The steering wheel icon lights up
▷ When the emergency call is cancelled. red and a signal sounds: hands not
▷ When the selector lever position is changed touching the steering wheel. Interrup-
while at a standstill. tion of lane tracking is imminent.
▷ The parking brake switch is pressed. The icon lights up red and a signal
sounds: tracking is switched off.
When the vehicle is at a standstill
As soon as the vehicle is at a standstill, the
System limits
system configures the following settings:
Only use the system if the driver is no longer
▷ The vehicle is secured to prevent it from
able to operate the vehicle.
rolling away.
The system cannot replace the abilities of a
▷ The interior lights are switched on.
driver who is capable of driving.
▷ The central locking system is unlocked.
Displays in the instrument cluster Dynamic brake lights

Icon Status Principle
The icon illuminates red: Emergency The brake lights flash to warn road users be-
Stop Assistant activated. hind the vehicle that emergency braking is be-
ing performed.
Without lane change function:
235
CONTROLS Safety
General The cameras of the driver assistance systems

are used for recording, e.g. Panorama View.
In addition, the following journey parameters
are saved:
▷ Date.
▷ Time.
▷ Speed.
▷ GPS coordinates.
Data protection
▷ Normal braking: brake lights illuminate.
The reliability of the recording and the use of
▷ Heavy braking: brake lights flash.
video recordings depend on the legal regula-
Shortly before the vehicle comes to a standstill, tions in the country where the system is to be
the hazard warning lights are activated. used. The user is responsible for the use of the
To switch off the hazard warning lights: system and for complying with the provisions
▷ Accelerate. that apply in each case.
▷ Press the hazard warning lights button. Before using for the first time, the vehicle man-
ufacturer recommends checking that there are
no legal or official restrictions on using the sys-
tem in the state or country in question. Addi-
BMW Drive Recorder tionally, the legality of using the system should
be checked at regular intervals, especially if the
Principle vehicle frequently crosses borders.
The BMW Drive Recorder saves short video Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed
recordings of the vehicle surroundings in order of the system. Information about the system
to document the traffic situation, for example. must also be provided if the vehicle is passed
on to anyone else.
General
Video recordings can be saved in different
ways: ▷ Standby state or drive-ready state is
switched on.
▷ Automatic saving of recordings.
▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
The function makes it possible to document
the accident with the correspondingly set ▷ Privacy Policy has been accepted.
recording type. ▷ Recording type was selected.
▷ Manual saving of recordings. ▷ Recording duration was selected.
The function makes it possible to document
traffic situations with the correspondingly
set recording type.
The system saves recordings up to 20 sec-
onds before and after the save function was
triggered.
236
Safety CONTROLS
Activating/deactivating the BMW brake applied or with the selector lever in posi-
Drive Recorder tion P.
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated 1. "Apps"

before using the recording function for the first 2. "Drive Recorder"
time.
3. "Saved recordings"
1. "Apps" 4. Select the desired recording.
2. "Drive Recorder" 5. Select the desired setting.
3. Accept data protection policy. If the cameras switched during the recording,
4. "Settings" it is possible to select different sections of the
5. "Recording allowed" video.

Settings
Recording functions Recording type
Automatic recording 1. "Apps"
The recording is automatically saved when the 2. "Drive Recorder"

vehicle sensors detect an accident. 3. "Settings"
4. "RECORDING TYPE"
Manual recording 5. Select the desired setting.
Using the button

Recording duration
Press and hold the button. 1. "Apps"
2. "Drive Recorder"
Via iDrive 3. "Settings"
1. "Apps" 4. Select the desired setting.
2. "Drive Recorder"
Cameras
3. "Start recording"
1. "Apps"
To cancel the recording: "Cancel".
2. "Drive Recorder"
The recording can also be started using the
widget on the control display. 3. "Settings"
4. "Camera selection"
Playing and managing recordings 5. Select the desired camera.
Saved video recordings can be played, expor- In the event of an accident, the system
ted and deleted. switches to "All" cameras automatically.
For your own safety, the video recording is If driver assistance systems are active, their
only shown on the control display if the speed camera views are automatically selected.
is below approximately 3 km/h, 2 mph. In the
case of some national-market versions, the
video recording is only shown with the parking
237
CONTROLS Safety
System limits conditions. Observe the traffic situation and

In the event of a serious accident, recordings
may not be saved if, for example, the damage
to the vehicle is too extensive or the power
Function
supply was interrupted.
If fastened, the driver's and front passenger's
seat belt strap is automatically tensioned once
Active Protection when driving off.
In critical accident situations, the following indi-
Principle vidual functions become active as required:
In critical situations, Active Protection prepares ▷ Automatic pre-tensioning of the front seat
the passengers and the vehicle for a potential belts.
imminent accident. ▷ The windows are automatically closed. The
windows remain open by a gap.
General ▷ Automatic closure of the glass sunroof. The
Depending on the equipment and the national- sun protection is also closed.
market version, Active Protection consists of ▷ Depending on the equipment: automatic
different PreCrash functions. positioning of the backrest of the front pas-
The system detects critical driving situations senger seat.
which could potentially lead to an accident. If the critical driving situation passes without
Such critical driving situations include: an accident occurring, the tension in the front
▷ Full braking. seat belts is slackened again.
▷ Severe understeering. If the belt tension does not slacken automati-

cally, stop the vehicle and unfasten the seat
▷ Severe oversteering.
belt by pressing the red button on the seat
Certain functions of some systems installed in belt buckle. Fasten the seat belt again before
the vehicle can – within the system limits – continuing driving.
cause Active Protection to trigger:
All other systems can be restored to the de-
▷ Collision Warning with braking function: au- sired setting.
tomatic brake intervention.
▷ Collision Warning with braking function:
brake power assistance. PostCrash – iBrake
▷ Rear Collision Prevention: detects impend-
ing rear collisions. Principle
In certain accident situations, PostCrash iBrake
Safety information can automatically bring the vehicle to a stand-
still without the driver having to intervene.
WARNING
General
sonal responsibility. System limits may mean PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of an-
that critical situations are not detected relia- other collision and its consequences.
bly or in good time. There is a risk of acci-
238
Safety CONTROLS
At a standstill alert. Adapt your driving style to the traffic

conditions.
Once the vehicle has come to a halt, the brake
is released automatically.
Function
Decelerating the vehicle harder
The system is switched on every time drive-
In certain situations, it may be necessary to ready state is switched on.
bring the vehicle to a standstill more quickly
Once the journey has started, the system
than is possible with automatic braking.
adapts to the driver so that any decrease in
To do so, brake quickly and firmly. This will attention or fatigue can be detected.
briefly increase the brake pressure to a higher
This process takes into account the following
level than that achieved with the automatic
criteria, for example:
brake function. Automatic braking is interrup-
ted. ▷ Personal driving style, for example steering.
▷ Driving conditions, for example time of day,
Cancelling automatic braking duration of journey.
In certain situations, it may be necessary to ▷ Depending on the equipment: attentive-
cancel automatic braking, for example if avoid- ness of the driver through the Driver Atten-
ance manoeuvre is required. tion Camera.
Cancel automatic braking: The system is active from approx. 65 km/h,
▷ By depressing the brake pedal. 40 mph and can also display a recommenda-
tion to take a break.
▷ By depressing the accelerator pedal.
Break recommendation
Attentiveness Assistant
Setting break recommendations
Break recommendation can also be switched
Principle
on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
The Attentiveness Assistant can detect de-
creasing attentiveness or the onset of fatigue 1. "CAR"
in the driver on long monotonous journeys, 2. "Settings"
for example on motorways. The system rec- 3. "General settings"
ommends taking a break.
4. "Attentiveness Assistant"
Safety information 5. Select the desired setting.
Display
WARNING
If the driver shows signs of decreasing atten-
The system does not relieve you of your per- tiveness or of fatigue, a note is shown on the
sonal responsibility to assess your physical control display with the recommendation to
condition correctly. Increasing inattention or take a break.
fatigue might not be detected, or may not be
The following settings can be selected during
detected in good time. There is a risk of acci-
the display.
dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and
239
CONTROLS Safety
The system is reset approximately 45 minutes

after the vehicle is stopped. A break recom-
mendation can only be displayed again after
this time has elapsed.
System limits
The function of the system may be restricted. If
the function is restricted, no warning or a false
warning is issued. The system may have re-
stricted functionality in the following situations:
▷ If the time is set incorrectly.
▷ When the speed is predominantly below
approx. 65 km/h, 40 mph.
▷ If a sporty driving style is adopted, for ex-
ample sharp acceleration or fast cornering.
▷ In active driving situations, for example fre-
quent lane changes.
▷ In poor road condition.
▷ In strong crosswinds.
240
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle equipment sponds even faster in critical situations when
braking.
Drive-off assistant
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the Principle
optional equipment selected or the national- The drive-off assistant provides support when
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- driving off on upward gradients.
with the relevant laws and regulations when Driving off
tems. 1. Stop the vehicle by depressing the brake
pedal.
2. Release the brake pedal and drive off with-
Anti-lock Braking System out delay.
After the brake pedal is released, the vehicle is
The Anti-lock Braking System prevents the held in place for approximately 2 seconds.
wheels from locking during braking.
Depending on the vehicle's load or in trailer
Steering control is retained even during full operation, the vehicle may roll backwards a lit-
braking, which enhances active road safety. tle.
The Anti-lock Braking System is ready when- To prevent the vehicle from rolling back when
ever you start the engine. driving off, use the parking brake.
Brake Assist 1. Shortly before driving off, pull and re-

lease the switch.
When the brake pedal is pressed quickly, The parking brake is engaged.
Brake Assist automatically provides the max- 2. To drive off, press the accelerator pedal
imum possible braking force assistance. This with sufficient force.
keeps the stopping distance as short as pos-
sible in full braking situations. This takes full
advantage of the Anti-lock Braking System. Dynamic Stability Control
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
during full braking. Principle
The Dynamic Stability Control helps to keep
Adaptive brake assist the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
drive power and by brake intervention on indi-
vidual wheels.
The Adaptive Brake Assist, together with Ac-
tive Cruise Control, ensures that the brake re-
241
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
General Overview
Dynamic Stability Control detects, for exam-
ple, the following unstable driving conditions: Button in the vehicle
▷ Loss of traction at the rear which can lead
to oversteering.
▷ Loss of grip at the front wheels which can
lead to understeering.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per- DSC OFF
Deactivating/activating Dynamic
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic Stability Control
ready to take over steering and braking at General
any time, and actively intervene if the situa- Driving stability when accelerating and corner-
tion warrants it. ing is restricted if Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated.
To support driving stability, re-activate Dy-
WARNING namic Stability Control as soon as possible.
When driving with a roof load, for example
with a roof rack, the higher centre of grav- Deactivating the system
ity can mean that driving safety is no lon- Hold the button down until DSC OFF
ger guaranteed in critical driving situations. is displayed in the instrument cluster
There is a risk of accident or material dam- and the DSC OFF indicator light is illu-
age. Driving with roof load only with activated minated.
Dynamic Stability Control.
To activate the system

Press the key.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light are extinguished.
Display
In the instrument cluster

If Dynamic Stability Control is disabled, DSC
OFF is displayed on the instrument cluster.
242
Indicator and warning lights Overview

Indicator light is illuminated: Dynamic
Stability Control is deactivated. Button in the vehicle
Indicator light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-

ity Control controls the drive and brake
forces.
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic Stability
Control is deactivated.
Automatic programme change

Depending on the national-market version and
DSC OFF
situation, Dynamic Stability Control can be au-
tomatically activated by the Intelligent Safety
Systems.
Activating/deactivating Dynamic
Traction Control
Dynamic Traction Control
To activate the system
Principle Press the key.
Dynamic Traction Control is a drive-optimised TRACTION is displayed in the instru-
variant of Dynamic Stability Control. ment cluster and the DSC OFF indicator light is
In special road conditions, for example on un- illuminated.
cleared, snow-covered roads or on loose sur-
faces, the system ensures maximum drive, but Deactivating the system
with restricted driving stability.
Press the button again.
General TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-
tor light are extinguished.
Maximum traction is provided when Dynamic
Traction Control is activated. Driving stability is
restricted when accelerating and cornering. Display
Activating Dynamic Traction Control briefly
may be useful in the following situations: Display in the instrument cluster
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, If Dynamic Traction Control is enabled, TRAC-
snow-covered roads. TION is displayed on the instrument cluster.
▷ When driving off in deep snow or on a loose
surface. Indicator and warning lights
▷ When driving with snow chains. Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic
Traction Control is activated.
243
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Automatic programme change Integral Active Steering

In certain situations, Dynamic Stability Control
is activated automatically:
Principle
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function
The Integral Active Steering increases agility
is enabled.
and enables more direct steering behaviour.
▷ When the Intelligent Safety Systems are
braking the vehicle. General
▷ In the event of a flat tyre. Integral Active Steering is a combination of a
variable steering ratio and rear-wheel steering.
BMW xDrive The variable steering ratio increases the steer-

ing wheel angle when manoeuvring, thereby
making the steering more direct. The rear-
Principle wheel steering increases manoeuvrability at
BMW xDrive is the vehicle's all-wheel drive low speeds by turning the rear wheels slightly
system. The interaction of BMW xDrive and in the opposite direction to the front wheels.
other suspension control systems, for exam- At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned
ple, Dynamic Stability Control, further optimi- in the same direction as the front wheels.
ses traction and driving dynamics. The resulting benefits include smoother lane
changes.
General In critical driving situations, for example over-
BMW xDrive distributes the driving power var- steering, Integral Active Steering can stabilise
iably to the front and rear axles according to the vehicle through selective steering of the
the driving situation and road condition. rear wheels before the driver intervenes.
Power distribution to all four wheels can be
changed from traction-based to sport-based Setting
via Driving Experience Control. The system offers various settings.
Efficient4x4 reduces consumption by deploy-
Drive mode Integral Active Steering
ing all-wheel drive as required.
COMFORT Comfortable, for optimum
ECO PRO travel comfort.
M Sport differential
SPORT Dynamic, for greater agil-
The M Sport differential actively and steplessly ity.
locks the rear axle differential according to the
driving situation. It prevents a single rear wheel The different settings are assigned to the dif-
from spinning and increases the drive of the ferent drive modes of Driving Experience Con-
wheel by providing greater road grip, depend- trol.
ing on the situation. This significantly improves For further information:
vehicle traction and driving dynamics.
Driving Experience Control, see page 154.
It is the driver's responsibility to adopt a driving
style that is appropriate to the situation.
244
Operation with snow chains

To ensure that the wheels can move as
required when using snow chains, the rear-
wheel steering function of the Integral Active
Steering must be switched off when snow
chains are fitted.
Rear-wheel steering with snow chains, see
page 383.
Malfunction
If a malfunction occurs, the steering wheel will
need to be turned further at low speeds and at
high speed range the vehicle will respond more
sensitively to steering wheel movements.
There is no longer Integral Active Steering
support in critical driving situations.
Drive cautiously and think well ahead.
Have the system checked by an authorised
245
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Driver assistance systems

Vehicle equipment count in the speed limit evaluation, but are not
displayed in the instrument cluster.
This chapter describes all standard, country- If a navigation system is installed, the system
specific and optional equipment available for takes the information saved in the navigation
the model range. It may therefore describe system into account where applicable and also
equipment and functions which are not avail- displays the speed limits for sections of road
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the with no road signs.
optional equipment selected or the national- Information on the current map version can be
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- found under Map update in the chapter Navi-
evant functions and systems. Please comply gation system.
with the relevant laws and regulations when If a navigation system is not installed, the sys-
using the corresponding functions and system has certain technical limitations. Only road
tems. signs with speed limits are detected and dis-
played. Speed limits when driving into built-up
areas and due to motorway signs, for example,
Speed Limit Display with are not displayed. Speed limits with text-based
no-overtaking indicator supplementary signs are always shown.
Speed limits for trailer operation are displayed
Speed Limit Info when the trailer socket is occupied or when the
trailer operation has been activated via iDrive.
Principle For further information:
Speed Limit Info shows the currently applica- Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain-
ble speed limit in the instrument cluster and, ment, Communication, see page 6.
if applicable, the Head-up display, as well as Trailer operation, see page 355.
supplementary signs where necessary; for ex-
ample, in wet conditions. No-overtaking indicator
General Principle
The camera located near the interior mirror de- Overtaking restriction signs and end of restric-
tects road signs at the edge of the road as well tion signs which have been detected by the
as variable overhead signs. camera are indicated by corresponding icons
Road signs with supplementary signs, for ex- in the instrument cluster and, if applicable, the
ample wet road conditions, are taken into Head-up display.
account and compared with the vehicle's on-
board data, for example the windscreen wiper General
signal. The road sign and associated supple-
The system considers overtaking restrictions
mentary signs are then displayed in the instru-
and ends of restrictions that are indicated by
ment cluster and the Head-up display, if appli-
means of road signs.
cable, or ignored, depending on the situation.
Some supplementary signs are taken into ac- It will not display anything in the following sit-
uations:
246
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
▷ In countries where overtaking restrictions Activating

are primarily shown by road markings. 1. "CAR"
▷ On routes without road signs. 2. "Settings"
▷ In the case of railway crossings, lane mark- 3. "Driver assistance"
ings and other situations which indicate
an overtaking restriction but which are not 4. If necessary, "Driving"
signposted to this effect. 5. "Speed Assistant"
Overtaking restrictions for trailer operation are 6. "Speed limits"
not shown. 7. "Show current limit"
Depending on the equipment, an additional
icon with distance information may indicate the Display
end of the no-overtaking zone.
General
Safety information Depending on national-market equipment,
supplementary signs and overtaking restric-
WARNING tions are displayed together with Speed Limit
Info.
Speed Limit Info
Icon Description
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic Present speed limit.
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be If no navigation system
ready to take over steering and braking at is installed, the road
any time, and actively intervene if the situa- sign is greyed out after
tion warrants it. turning off or on longer
sections of road.
Overview No data for the current

speed limit available.
Sensors The displays may
The system is controlled by cameras behind vary depending on the
the windscreen. equipment.
Depending on the
Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39. equipment, Speed Limit
Info is not available.
Displaying Speed Limit Info
The display flashes if the detected speed limit
General has been exceeded.
Depending on the equipment, Speed Limit Info
is displayed permanently in the instrument
cluster or via iDrive.
247
No-overtaking indicator data protection menu for the navigation sys-

tem:
Icon Description ▷ "Learning map"
No overtaking. ▷ "Map update"
▷ Data protection, see page 72.
End of overtaking re-
▷ Speed Limit Assist, see page 262.
striction.
Settings
Supplementary signs 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Icons Description
Speed limit with time limit. 4. If necessary, "Driving"
The speed limit only applies in 5. "Speed Assistant"
wet conditions. 6. Select the desired setting.
The speed limit only applies in The warning given when a speed limit is ex-
snow. ceeded may depend on the Speed Limit Assist
settings.
The speed limit only applies in
fog. For further information:
Speed Limit Assist, see page 262.
The speed limit applies for the
exit junction on the left.
System limits
The speed limit applies for the
exit junction on the right. System limits of the sensors
The speed limit only applies For further information:
when towing a trailer. ▷ Cameras, see page 39.
Speed limit with undetected
supplementary sign. Functional limitations
Functionality may be restricted or incorrect in-
formation may be displayed in some situations
Speed Limit Display with Anticipatory
such as:
Indicator
▷ When road signs are fully or partially con-
cealed by objects, stickers or paint.
market version, an additional icon with dis-
tance information may indicate that a change ▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle
in speed limit is ahead. The Anticipatory Indi- ahead.
cator must be activated for Speed Limit Assist. ▷ In the case of navigation data that is inva-
Temporary speed limits may also be dis- lid, outdated or not available.
played, for example at construction sites. ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys-
Temporary speed limits can only be displayed tem.
if the following services are selected in the
248
▷ If there are navigation discrepancies, for ex- Operation

ample due to changes in road layout.
▷ If there are electronic road signs. Switching on
▷ When overtaking buses or trucks with road Press the button on the steering
sign stickers. wheel.
▷ When the road signs do not correspond to
the standard. The current speed is adopted as the speed
limit.
▷ If road signs are detected that apply to a
parallel road. When switching on at a standstill or driving
at low speed, 30 km/h, 20 mph is set as the
▷ If the road signs or road layouts are specific speed limit.
to one country.
The speedometer marker is set to the appro-
priate speed.
Manual Speed Limiter When switching on the speed limit, Dynamic
Stability Control may be switched on and the
drive mode switched to COMFORT.
Principle
The system can be used to set a speed limit so Switching off
that speed restrictions are not exceeded.
wheel.
General
The system allows speeds of 30 km/h, 20 mph The system switches off automatically in situa-
and above to be set as a speed limit. Below tions such as the following:
the set speed limit, the vehicle can be driven ▷ When switching the engine off.
without restriction.
▷ When switching on Cruise Control.
Overview ▷ When activating some programmes using

Driving Experience Control.
Buttons on the steering wheel The displays goes out.
Button Function Interrupting

The system is interrupted in reverse gear or
System on/off.
when rolling backwards at idle.
To store the current speed. Changing the speed limit

Speed Limit Assist: to accept the
suggested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
To change the speed limit.
249
Press the rocker switch repeatedly up or down Acoustic warning

until the desired speed limit is set. ▷ A warning sounds if you inadvertently ex-
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to ceed the set speed limit.
the resistance point, the speed limit is in- ▷ If the speed limit is reduced to below the
creased or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph. current speed during the journey, the signal
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be- sounds after a little time.
yond the resistance point, the speed limit ▷ No signal sounds if you intentionally exceed
changes to the next multiple of 10 km/h the speed limit by fully pressing the acceler-
on the km/h display or the next multiple of ator pedal.
5 mph on the mph display in the speedom-
eter.
If the set speed limit is reached or unintention-
ally exceeded, for example when driving down- Display in the speedometer
hill, there is no active brake intervention.
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
If you set a speed during the journey which speedometer displays the status of the sys-
is below the current speed, the vehicle deceler- tem.
ates to the set speed limit.
▷ Green marker: system is ac-
The current speed can also be stored by
tive.
pressing the button:
▷ Grey mark: the system is in-
Press the button on the steering terrupted.
wheel.
▷ No marker: system is
switched off.
Exceeding of speed limit
The system gives a warning if the current Indicator light
speed exceeds the set speed limit.
▷ Indicator light illuminates: the sys-
You can intentionally exceed the speed limit.
tem is switched on.
To intentionally exceed the set speed limit,
▷ Indicator light flashes: set speed
press the accelerator pedal all the way down.
limit is exceeded.
The limit automatically becomes active again
▷ Grey indicator light: the system is interrup-
as soon as the current speed falls below the
ted.
set speed limit.
Warning when the speed limit is

exceeded
Cruise Control
Visual warning Principle

If the speed limit is exceeded: the in- Cruise Control allows a set speed to be speci-
dicator light in the instrument cluster fied using the buttons on the steering wheel.
flashes for as long as the set speed The set speed is then maintained by the sys-
limit is exceeded. tem. It does this by automatically accelerating
and braking the vehicle as necessary.
250
General
The system can be activated from 30 km/h, WARNING
20 mph. The set speed may be set incorrectly by mis-
Depending on the vehicle setting, the charac- take or called up accidentally. There is a risk
teristics of Cruise Control may change in cer- of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
tain areas, for example acceleration in ECO conditions. Observe the traffic situation and
PRO drive mode is less pronounced. intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
Safety information
WARNING
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of your per- Cruise Control, individual functions may mal-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa- function. There is a risk of accident. Turn off
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot all Intelligent Safety Systems and Cruise Con-
respond independently and appropriately in trol before tow-starting or towing away.
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be Overview
any time, and actively intervene if the situa- Buttons on the steering wheel
tion warrants it.
Button Function
Cruise Control on/off.

WARNING
The risk of accident may increase if the sys-
tem is used in certain situations, such as:
▷ On stretches of road with many corners
and bends. To resume Cruise Control with last
▷ In heavy traffic. setting.
▷ If the road is icy, if there is fog or snow, To interrupt Cruise Control.

in wet conditions or on a loose road sur-
face. To store the current speed.
There is a risk of accident or material dam- Speed Limit Assist: to accept the
age. Only use the system if it is possible to suggested speed manually.
drive at a constant speed.
Rocker switch:
To set the speed.
251
Switching Cruise Control on/off Setting the speed
Switching on Maintaining and saving the speed

Depending on the equipment, press
the corresponding button on the
steering wheel.
The indicator lights are illuminated in the in-

strument cluster and the marker in the speed-
ometer is positioned at the current speed.
Cruise Control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as the set speed.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will While the system is interrupted, press the
be turned on. rocker switch up or down once.
When the system is switched on, the current
Switching off speed is maintained and stored as the set
speed.
Depending on the equipment, press
the corresponding button on the The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
steering wheel. ometer.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
The displays goes out. The stored set speed is
deleted. The speed can also be stored by pressing the
button.
To interrupt Cruise Control Press the key.
Interrupting manually
Press the button while the system is Changing the speed
activated.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
▷ When braking manually.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever posi-
tion D is disengaged.
▷ When Dynamic Traction Control is enabled Press the rocker switch repeatedly up or down
or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled. until the set speed is set.
▷ When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat- If the system is active, the displayed speed is
ing the driving stability. stored and the vehicle adjusts to the stored
speed when the road is clear.
252
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the ▷ Green marker: system is ac-
resistance point, the set speed is increased tive, the marker shows the
or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph. set speed.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past ▷ Grey marker: system is inter-
the resistance point, the set speed changes rupted; the marker shows the
by 10 in the km/h display or 5 in the mph stored speed.
display in the speedometer. ▷ No marker: system is switched off.
The maximum speed which can be set de-
pends on the vehicle.
Indicator light
▷ When the rocker switch is pressed to the
resistance point and then held there: the ▷ Green indicator light: the system is
vehicle accelerates or decelerates without active.
the need to press the accelerator pedal. ▷ Grey indicator light: the system is
When the rocker switch is released, the ve- interrupted.
hicle maintains the final speed. Pressing ▷ No indicator light: the system is switched
beyond the resistance point accelerates the off.
vehicle more rapidly.
Displays in the Head-up display

Some information from the system can also be
If Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be re-
shown in the Head-up display.
sumed by calling up the stored speed.
Before calling up the stored speed, make sure The icon is displayed when the selec-
that the difference between the current speed ted set speed has been reached.
and the stored speed is not too great. Other-
wise, unwanted vehicle deceleration or accel-
System limits
eration may occur.
The set speed is also maintained when driving
With the system interrupted, press the downhill. The vehicle may not achieve the set
button. speed on uphill gradients if there is not enough
drive power.
Cruise Control is resumed with the stored val-
ues. In ECO PRO drive mode, it is possible that the
vehicle will drive faster or slower than the set
In the following instances, the stored speed
speed setting in some situations, for example
value is deleted and therefore cannot be called
on downhill or uphill gradients.
up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function
Display in the speedometer Principle

Depending on the equipment, a mark in the Active Cruise Control allows the driver to spec-
speedometer displays the status of the sys- ify a set speed and a desired distance from
tem.
253
the vehicle in front, using the buttons on the

steering wheel. WARNING
General roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before
When the road ahead is clear, the system leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against
maintains the set speed. The vehicle acceler- rolling away.
ates or brakes automatically. Observe the following to ensure that the vehi-
If there is a vehicle driving in front, the sys- cle is secured against rolling away:
tem adapts the speed of your vehicle in order ▷ Apply the parking brake.
to maintain the set distance from the vehicle
ahead. The speed is adapted as far as the
given situation allows.
The distance can be set in several stages and
or downhill gradient, for example with a
for safety reasons is dependent on the respec-
chock.
tive speed.
If the vehicle ahead brakes to a standstill and
drives off again shortly afterwards, the system
WARNING
is able to comprehend this as far as given con-
ditions allow. The set speed may be set incorrectly by mis-
take or called up accidentally. There is a risk
Depending on the vehicle setting, the charac-
of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
teristics of Cruise Control may change in cer-
tain areas, for example acceleration in ECO
PRO drive mode is less pronounced.
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of accident if the difference in
WARNING speed relative to other vehicles is too great.
The system does not relieve you of your per- This may occur, for example, in the following
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa- situations:
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot ▷ When quickly approaching a slowly mov-
respond independently and appropriately in ing vehicle.
▷ If another vehicle suddenly veers into the
vehicle's own driving lane.
ready to take over steering and braking at ▷ When quickly approaching stationary ve-
any time, and actively intervene if the situa- hicles.
tion warrants it. There is a danger of injury or danger to life.
Observe the traffic situation and intervene
actively if the situation warrants it.
254
Button Function
WARNING
To increase the distance.
vated Intelligent Safety Systems or activated To switch distance control on/off.
Cruise Control, individual functions may mal- To reduce the distance.
function. There is a risk of accident. Turn off
To switch distance control on/off.
all Intelligent Safety Systems and Cruise Con-
trol before tow-starting or towing away. Rocker switch:
To set the speed.
Overview
Sensors
Buttons on the steering wheel The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
Button Function ▷ Cameras behind the windscreen.
With Steering and Lane Control As- ▷ Front radar sensor.
sistant: For further information:
Cruise Control on/off. Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39.
With Steering and Lane Control As-
sistant: Use
To select the function. The system can be used to optimum effect on
well-constructed roads.
Without Steering and Lane Control
The minimum adjustable speed is 30 km/h.
Assistant:
20 mph.
Cruise Control on/off.
The maximum speed which can be set is limi-
To store the current speed. ted and depends on the vehicle and its equip-
Speed Limit Assist: to accept the ment, for example.
suggested speed manually. Higher set speeds can be selected by switch-
ing to Cruise Control without Distance Control.
With Steering and Lane Control As-
The system can also be activated when the
sistant:
vehicle is at a standstill.
To interrupt Cruise Control.
To resume Cruise Control with last Switching Cruise Control on/off and
setting.
interrupting
Assistant: With Steering and Lane Control
To resume Cruise Control with last Assistant: Assisted Driving Mode
setting.
General
Assistant: The button is used to switch the set
function on and off.
To interrupt Cruise Control.
255
The button is used to set the primary Switching off

function. When switching off with the vehicle at a stand-
still, depress the brake at the same time.
Setting the function Press the button on the steering wheel:
When the system is active, press the With Steering and Lane Control Assis-
button repeatedly until the desired tant.
function is selected in the toolbar. The
Assisted Driving Mode toolbar is shown at the Without Steering and Lane Control As-
bottom of the instrument cluster. sistant.
Icon Function The displays goes out. The stored set speed is
deleted.
Cruise Control with distance control.
Interrupting manually
With the system active, press the button on the
Depending on the equipment, Cruise
steering wheel:
Control with distance control and
Steering and Lane Control Assistant. With Steering and Lane Control Assis-
tant.
Without Steering and Lane Control As-

sistant.
The selected function is shown in green.
If interrupting the system when the vehicle is
Switching on at a standstill, depress the brake at the same
time.
With Steering and Lane Control Assistant:
Interrupting automatically
1. Press the button on the steering
The system is interrupted automatically in the
wheel.
2. Set Cruise Control if necessary. ▷ When braking manually.
Without Steering and Lane Control Assistant: ▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ When Dynamic Traction Control is enabled
or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
wheel.
▷ When Dynamic Stability Control is regulat-
The indicator lights are illuminated in the in- ing the driving stability.
strument cluster and the marker in the speed- ▷ When the vehicle is stationary, the seat
ometer is positioned at the current speed. belt is unfastened and the driver's door is
Cruise Control is active. The current speed is opened.
maintained and stored as the set speed. ▷ The system has not detected any objects
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will for an extended period, for example, on a
be turned on. road with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
256
▷ The detection range of the radar is im- Changing the speed

paired, for example, by contamination or
heavy precipitation.
▷ After an extended stationary period, if the
vehicle was decelerated to a standstill by
the system.
Setting the speed
Maintaining and saving the speed

Press the rocker switch repeatedly up or down
until the set speed is set.
If the system is active, the displayed speed is

stored and the vehicle adjusts to the stored
speed when the road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
resistance point, the set speed is increased
or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph.
While the system is interrupted, press the ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
rocker switch up or down once. The system is the resistance point, the set speed changes
activated. by 10 in the km/h display or 5 in the mph
display in the speedometer.
The current speed is maintained and stored as To repeat an action, hold the rocker switch in
the set speed. the relevant position.
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
ometer. Adjusting the distance
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on. Safety information
The speed can also be stored by pressing the
button.
WARNING
Press the key. The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility. System limits may mean
that deceleration is performed too late. There
is a risk of accident or material damage. Pay
close attention to the traffic situation at all
times. Adapt the distance to suit traffic and
weather conditions and comply with the pre-
scribed safe distance by braking if necessary.
257
Reducing the distance Without Steering and Lane Control As-

sistant.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set. Cruise Control is resumed with the stored val-
ues.
The selected distance is displayed in the in-
strument cluster. In the following instances, the stored speed
value is deleted and therefore cannot be called
Increasing the distance up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set. ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
The selected distance is displayed in the in- Switching between Cruise Control
strument cluster. with/without distance control
Adapting the distance automatically Safety information
market version: the system can be configured
so that the distance to the vehicle in front is WARNING
adapted automatically. The system takes into The system will not respond to traffic travel-
account the traffic situation and ambient con- ling in front of you, but instead maintains the
ditions, e.g. poor visibility. stored speed. There is a risk of accident or
material damage. Adjust the set speed to the
1. "CAR"
traffic conditions and brake if necessary.
2. "Settings"
Switching the Cruise Control mode
4. If necessary, "Driving"
To switch Cruise Control without distance con-
5. "Speed Assistant"
trol on and off:
6. "Adjust distance acc. to situation"
▷ Press and hold the button.
If Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be re- ▷ Press and hold the button.
sumed by calling up the stored speed. With Steering and Lane Control Assistant: to
Before calling up the stored speed, make sure switch on distance control:
that the difference between the current speed Press the key.
and the stored speed is not too great. Other-
wise, unwanted vehicle deceleration or accel-
Without Steering and Lane Control Assistant:
eration may occur.
to switch on distance control:
With the system interrupted, press the button
on the steering wheel: ▷ Press the button.
With Steering and Lane Control Assis-
tant. ▷ Press the button.
After switching, a Check Control message is
then displayed.
258
Displays in the instrument cluster Icon Description
Distance 4.
General
Depending on the equipment, the displays in
the instrument cluster may vary.
Display in the speedometer

No display of distance control
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
because the accelerator pedal
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
is being pressed.
tem.
▷ Green marker: system is ac-
tive, the marker shows the
set speed. Detected vehicle
▷ Grey marker: system is inter-
rupted; the marker shows the Icon Description
stored speed.
Green icon:
▷ No marker: system is switched off.
Vehicle ahead detected.
Vehicle distance
The selected distance to the vehicle ahead is
displayed.
When the distance to the detected vehicle in-
Icon Description creases, the vehicle icon in the distance display
moves away.
Distance 1.
If necessary, drive off yourself, for example by
pressing the accelerator pedal or rocker switch.
Indicator and warning lights

Distance 2.
Icon Description
White vehicle symbol:

No display of distance control be-
cause the accelerator pedal is being
Distance 3. pressed.
Corresponds to approximately Green icon:
half of the value of the km/h Vehicle ahead detected.
display, expressed in metres.
Selected when the system is The vehicle symbol goes out if no ve-
switched on for the first time. hicle in front is detected.
Vehicle symbol flashes green:
Preceding vehicle has driven off.
259
Icon Description Icon Description
Grey icon: Vehicle icon and distance bar

System interrupted. flash red and an acoustic sig-
nal sounds:
Icon flashes grey: Brake and take avoidance ma-
The requirements for system opera- noeuvre if necessary.
tion are no longer being met.
System interrupted.
The system has been deactivated
but will continue to brake until you
actively take over by depressing the
brake or accelerator pedal.
Vehicle symbol flashes red and an

acoustic signal sounds: Assisted Driving View
Brake and take avoidance manoeu- Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
vre if necessary. market version, the information from the sys-
tem in Assisted Driving View is displayed in the
central display area of the instrument cluster.
Alternative displays
Icon Description Assisted Driving View, see page 172.
Green indicator light: the sys-
tem is active. Displays in the Head-up display
No indicator light: the system is
Set speed
switched off.
Some information from the system can also be
Vehicle icon flashes: shown in the Head-up display.
The requirements for system The icon is displayed when the selec-
operation are no longer being ted set speed has been reached.
met.
The system has been deacti-
vated but will continue to brake Distance information
until you actively take over by The icon is shown if your vehicle is too
depressing the brake or accel- close to the vehicle ahead.
erator pedal.
The distance information is active under the
following circumstances:
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up display selected.
Head-up display, see page 192.
▷ Distance too close.
▷ Speed above approximately 70 km/h,
40 mph.
260
Preventing overtaking Detection range

This function helps to prevent inadvertent
overtaking on motorways.
market version, the system can be configured
to prevent overtaking in the slower driving
lane.
The setting applies to speeds over
80 km/h/50 mph.
When the set speed is significantly higher than
the speed in the adjacent lane, passing or The system's detection capability and auto-
overtaking may still be possible even if the matic braking capacity are limited.
function is switched on. For example, two-wheel vehicles may not be
At speeds below 80 km/h, 50 mph, vehicles detected.
on motorways are only overtaken with an ad-
justed differential speed. Deceleration
The driver can overtake or accelerate at any The system does not decelerate in the
time by pressing the accelerator pedal. following situations:
Switching the function on/off: ▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow road
1. "CAR" users.
2. "Settings" ▷ Depending on the equipment and national-

market version at red traffic lights.
▷ For crossing traffic.
▷ For oncoming vehicles.
6. ▷ "Avoid overtaking at the left side" Vehicles cutting in
▷ "Avoid overtaking on the right"
System limits

If another vehicle suddenly cuts in front of you,

the system might not be able to restore the se-
lected distance automatically. In some circum-
stances, it may also not be possible to restore
the selected distance if you are driving signifi-
cantly faster than vehicles in front, for example
when rapidly approaching a lorry. If a vehicle
261
is clearly detected in front of you, the system ▷ On steep upward gradients.

prompts you to intervene by braking, and if ▷ Before bumps or rises in the road.
necessary by taking avoidance manoeuvre.
▷ When towing a heavy trailer.
In such cases, press the accelerator pedal.
Cornering
Weather
In adverse weather and lighting conditions,
system functionality may be limited as follows:
▷ Impaired detection of vehicles.
▷ Brief interruptions when vehicles have al-
ready been detected.
Pay attention when driving and respond to the
prevailing traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for example by braking, steering
If the set speed is too high for cornering, it will
or taking avoidance manoeuvre.
be reduced slightly in the bend. However, since
bends may not be anticipated in advance,
moderate your speed when cornering. Drive power
The system has a restricted detection range. The set speed is also maintained when driving
Situations can arise on tight bends where a downhill. The vehicle may not achieve the set
vehicle driving in front will not be detected or speed on uphill gradients if there is not enough
will be detected very late. drive power.
In ECO PRO drive mode, it is possible that the
vehicle will drive faster or slower than the set
speed setting in some situations, for example
on downhill or uphill gradients.
Speed Limit Assist

Principle
Speed Limit Assist helps the driver to observe
When your vehicle is approaching a bend, the speed limits. A suggested speed can be adop-
curvature may cause the system to respond ted.
temporarily to vehicles in the other lane. If the
system responds by decelerating the vehicle,
General
you may compensate for this by accelerating
briefly. When the accelerator pedal is released When the systems in the vehicle, for example
again, the system will resume control of the Speed Limit Info, detect a change in the speed
vehicle's speed. limit, it is possible to adopt this new speed
value for the following systems:
Driving off
The vehicle cannot drive off automatically in
some situations, for example:
262
▷ Manual Speed Limiter. Overview

▷ Cruise Control.
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func- Buttons on the steering wheel
tion.
Button Function
The speed value is proposed as a new set
speed for adopting. The relevant system must To accept the suggested speed
be activated for the speed value to be adopted. manually.
Depending on the equipment, destination sys- Traffic light detection: to accept de-
tem and national-market version, the value tected traffic lights manually.
may be applied automatically.
Rocker switch:
Traffic light detection: Speed Limit Assist con-
trols the speed when the vehicle approaches To set the speed; see Cruise Con-
red traffic lights. trol.
Safety information Switching Speed Limit Assist on/off

1. "CAR"
WARNING 2. "Settings"
The system does not relieve you of your per- 3. "Driver assistance"
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa- 4. If necessary, "Driving"
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci- 6. "Speed limits"
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic 7. Select the desired setting:
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be ▷ "Adjust automatically": depending on
ready to take over steering and braking at the equipment: detected speed limits
any time, and actively intervene if the situa- are applied automatically.
tion warrants it.
Traffic light detection: detected traffic
lights are accepted automatically if pos-
sible.
WARNING ▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limits
The set speed may be set incorrectly by mis- can be applied manually.
take or called up accidentally. There is a risk Traffic light detection: detected traffic
of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic lights can be accepted manually.
intervene actively if the situation warrants it. ▷ "Show anticipation": Depending on the
national-market version: current and up-
coming speed limits are displayed on
the instrument cluster without being ap-
plied.
263
▷ "Show current limit": current speed lim- Stop&Go function or for the Manual Speed
its are displayed without being applied Limiter.
After an automatic adoption, the but-
▷ "Off": depending on the national-market ton can be pressed to switch back to
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed the last set value of the set speed.
Limit Assist will be turned off.
Other proactive comfort functions – the Traffic light detection: detected traffic lights are
Route-ahead Assistant, for example – accepted automatically if possible.
may be switched off.
Manual adoption
Displays in the instrument cluster A detected speed limit can be applied man-
A message is displayed in the instrument clus- ually for the active driver assistance system.
ter when the system and a driver assistance Traffic light detection: detected traffic lights
system are activated. can be accepted manually.
Icon Function When the SET icon is illuminated,

press the button.
Depending on the equipment, the
indicator light illuminates green, to-
gether with the icon for a Cruise Con- Speed adjustment
trol System:
Speed Limit Assist is active and de- Principle
tected speed limits can be adopted It is possible to set whether the speed limit will
manually for the displayed system. be adopted exactly, or with a tolerance.
Detected change in speed limit de-

General
tected with immediate effect.
A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an
Remaining distance display shown
additional speed adaptation for speed limits up
alongside the icon indicates there
to 60 km/h, 40 mph can be set up.
might be a change in the speed limit
up ahead. The additional speed adjustment for speeds
up to 60 km/h, 40 mph can be activated or
Indicator light is illuminated green: deactivated.
the detected speed limit can be
adopted with the SET button. Setting the speed adjustment
Traffic light detection: the detected 1. "CAR"
traffic lights can be accepted with the
2. "Settings"
SET button.
A green tick is displayed once it has
been adopted. 4. If necessary, "Driving"
Automatic adoption 6. Perform the desired setting:
Depending on vehicle equipment, any speed
limit detected in Automatic mode is automati-
cally applied for the Active Cruise Control with
264
▷ "Adjust speed limits": to set a speed If necessary, the system also uses the Driver
adjustment tolerance that will affect all Attention Camera and the information that has
speeds. been saved in the navigation system.
▷ "2nd adjustment up to": to activate or Detected red traffic lights are displayed in the
deactivate additional speed adjustment. instrument cluster and, depending on the set-
▷ "Adjust speed limits": with activated ad- ting, can be taken into account by Speed Limit
ditional speed adjustment, set the toler- Assist either manually or automatically during
ance for speed limits up to 60 km/h, the journey.
40 mph.
Overview
Adjusting to the route
Sensors
Principle The system is controlled by cameras behind
the windscreen.
system can be configured so that the vehicle For further information:
automatically adapts the speed to the route. Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39.
For example, the speed is reduced in the
following situations if necessary: Operating requirements
▷ Before turning off. ▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function
▷ Before a roundabout. is enabled.
▷ Before a bend. ▷ Speed up to approx. 80 km/h, 50 mph.

▷ The function must be available in the coun-
Adjusting try in which the vehicle is being driven.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Driving"
6. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust
speed to route" 5. "Speed Assistant"
6. "Consider traffic lights"
Traffic light detection
Additional settings
Principle 1. "CAR"
Speed Limit Assist controls the speed when 2. "Settings"
the vehicle approaches red traffic lights. 3. "Driver assistance"
4. "Driving"
General
5. "Traffic light recognition"
The camera near the interior mirror is used to
detect red traffic lights. 6. Select the desired settings:
▷ "Display traffic light phases": when the
vehicle is stopped at traffic lights, the
265
detected phase of the lights can be dis- ▷ If the position of the vehicle cannot be
played in the instrument cluster. clearly determined by the navigation sys-
▷ "Drive off reminder": when the drive tem.
off reminder is activated, a visual and, ▷ In wintry road conditions.
where applicable, an acoustic note is The traffic light detection system may have re-
provided as soon as the traffic light stricted functionality in situations such as the
turns to green and it is possible to con- following:
tinue driving.
▷ Traffic lights are obscured, for example by
other vehicles.
▷ At a road junction with multiple lanes where
Icon Meaning there are several sets of traffic lights.
Red traffic light detected.
▷ Limits of the Speed Limit Information sys-
As soon as a green tick is displayed tem, see page 248.
after adoption, the vehicle brakes to a
standstill. ▷ System limits of the sensors, see page 39.
Green traffic light detected.

Steering and Lane Control
Grey traffic light: the system is interrup- Assistant
ted.
If the grey traffic light is displayed with Principle
a red cross, it cannot be offered for ac-
The Steering and Lane Control Assistant helps
ceptance.
to keep the vehicle in driving lane. It does
this by performing supporting steering wheel
System limits movements, for example when cornering.
Speed Limit Assist is based on the Speed
Limit Info system. General
Take into account the Speed Limit Info system Depending on the speed, the system orien-
limits. tates itself using the lane markings and vehi-
Depending on the national-market version, up- cles driving in front.
coming speed limits may not be available for Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
application or they may only be available to a the steering wheel is being touched.
certain extent, for instance speed information
from the navigation system. Safety information
Cruise Control without distance control: de-
pending on the system, it may not be possible
WARNING
to adopt speed limits automatically.
Speed limits ahead can only be applied for Ac-
tive Cruise Control.
The system does not respond at all or re- respond independently and appropriately in
sponds only to a limited extent on the route all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
ahead in the following situations for example: dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
266
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be ▷ Cruise Control with distance control active.
ready to take over steering and braking at ▷ Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.
▷ Collision Warning active.
tion warrants it.
▷ Pedestrian warning active.
▷ Side collision warning active.
Overview
Switching on/off
Buttons on the steering wheel
Assisted Driving Mode
Button Function
Steering and Lane Control Assistant General

with traffic jam assistant on/off. The button is used to switch the set
function on and off.
To set the function.
The button is used to set the primary
function.
Sensors
Setting the function
sensors:
When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired
▷ Front radar sensor. function is selected in the toolbar. The
▷ Side radar sensors, front. Assisted Driving Mode toolbar is shown at the
▷ Side radar sensors, rear. bottom of the instrument cluster.
Icon Function
Cruise Control with distance control.
▷ Speed under 210 km/h/130 mph.
Depending on the equipment, Cruise
▷ The lane width is sufficiently wide. Control with distance control and
▷ Above 70 km/h, 43 mph: lane demarca- Steering and Lane Control Assistant.
tions are detected on both sides.
▷ Below 70 km/h, 43 mph: lane markings on
both sides or a vehicle driving in front is/are
detected.
The selected function is shown in green.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
▷ Sufficient corner radius.
▷ Driving in the centre of the driving lane.
▷ Turn indicator switched off.
▷ The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
267
Switching on ▷ If a lane boundary is not detected for a cer-

tain period of time and no vehicle is driving
1. Press the button on the steering in front.
wheel. ▷ Active Cruise Control is interrupted.
▷ The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-
2. Adjust the Steering and Lane Con- tened.
trol Assistant if necessary.
Steering wheel icon illuminates grey.
Steering wheel icon illuminates grey.
System is on standby and does not
System is on standby and does not make any steering wheel movement.
make any steering wheel movement.
The system activates automatically when all
The system activates automatically when all operating requirements are met.
operating requirements are met.
Steering wheel icon illuminates green. Displays in the instrument cluster
The system is active.
Icon Description
When the system is switched on, the Pedes-
trian Warning with city braking function and the Steering wheel icon grey:
side-collision warning are active. System on standby.
Switching off Steering wheel icon green:

System is activated.
wheel. The system is helping the driver keep
the vehicle in driving lane.
The display is no longer illuminated.
Yellow flashing steering wheel icon:
The system does not perfom any supporting
steering wheel movements. Lane marking driven over.
The steering wheel vibrates where
Interrupting automatically applicable.
The system interrupts the supporting steering Yellow steering wheel icon and an
movements automatically, for example in the acoustic signal, if applicable:
following situations: System interruption is imminent.
▷ At a speed above 210 km/h/130 mph.
Depending on the equipment and na-
▷ When the steering wheel is released. tional-market version: steering wheel
▷ When braking manually. icon flashes red or illuminates in red.
▷ When the steering wheel is turned sharply. A signal sounds:
▷ When the vehicle leaves its own driving System is switching off.
lane.
▷ When the turn indicator is activated.
▷ When the driving lane is too narrow.
268
Icon Description Icon Description
Steering wheel icon yellow: Yellow steering wheel icon and

Hands are not around the steering an acoustic signal, if applica-
wheel. System remains active. ble:
System interruption is immi-
Red steering wheel icon, acoustic sig-
nent.
nal:
Hands are not around the steering Depending on the equipment
wheel. System interruption is immi- and national-market version:
nent. steering wheel icon flashes red
or illuminates in red. A signal
The system reduces the speed to a
sounds:
standstill if applicable.
System is switching off.
The system may possibly not per-
form any supporting steering wheel Green steering wheel icon and
movements. lane marking icon:
The system is helping the
Depending on vehicle equipment and national- driver keep the vehicle in driv-
market version, the information from the sys- ing lane.
central display area of the instrument cluster. Steering wheel icon yellow:
For further information: Hands are not around the

steering wheel. System re-
Assisted Driving View, see page 172. mains active.
Alternative displays Red steering wheel icon,

Depending on the equipment, the displays in acoustic signal:
the instrument cluster may vary and are shown Hands are not around the
as follows: steering wheel. System inter-
Icon Description ruption is imminent.
The system may possibly not
Steering wheel icon grey:
perform any supporting steer-
System on standby. ing wheel movements.
Steering wheel icon green: If Cruise Control is active, the
system may reduce the speed.
System is activated.
Depending on the equipment,

steering wheel icon flashes yel-
low:
Lane marking driven over.
The steering wheel vibrates
where applicable.
269
Displays on the steering wheel formation on the system limits and intervene

Hands on the steering wheel

The two LEDs above the keypads are illumina- In the following situations, contact between the
ted in the same way as the displays in the driver's hands and the steering wheel is not
instrument cluster: detected by the sensors:
▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent. ▷ Driving when wearing gloves.
▷ Red: system is deactivated. ▷ Covers on the steering wheel.
The steering wheel displays can be switched Narrow driving lanes

on/off if required.
The system cannot be activated or used use-
1. "CAR" fully when driving in narrow driving lanes, for
2. "Settings" example in the following situations:
3. "Driver assistance" ▷ At road works.
4. "Feedback via steering wheel" ▷ Depending on the equipment, if emergency
lanes are being formed.
5. "Lighting elements"
▷ In built-up areas.
Displays in the Head-up display
Weather
All the system information can also be dis-
played in the Head-up display. In adverse weather and lighting conditions,
system functionality may be limited as follows:
System limits ▷ Impaired detection of vehicles and lane
markings.
General ▷ Brief interruptions when vehicles have al-
The system cannot be activated or used use- ready been detected.
fully in certain situations. Pay attention when driving and respond to the
prevailing traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
Safety information vene actively, for example by braking, steering
or taking avoidance manoeuvre.
WARNING
270
Assisted Driving Plus ▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or

cyclists.
▷ The lane width is sufficiently wide.
Principle
▷ Lane markings and a vehicle ahead are de-
Assisted Driving Plus helps the driver to control tected.
the vehicle in traffic queues.
▷ Speed below approx. 60 km/h/40 mph.
The supporting steering wheel movements
take place without the driver actively steering. ▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-
ment cluster detects that the driver is look-
ing at the traffic situation.
General
The system uses the sensors of the Steering
try in which the vehicle is being driven.
and Lane Control Assistant.
Switching on
Safety information
As soon as all of the operating require-
ments have been met, Assisted Driving
WARNING Plus is displayed as an additional icon
The system does not relieve you of your per- in the toolbar. The toolbar is shown at
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa- the bottom of the instrument cluster.
respond independently and appropriately in Select Assisted Driving Plus with the
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci- button on the steering wheel.
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic The icon for Assisted Driving Plus is shown in
conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be green.
Two green LEDs are illuminated on the steer-
ing wheel.
tion warrants it.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
The information for the Steering and Lane shown in green.
Control Assistant also applies. The system starts to help the driver to control
For further information: the vehicle.

page 266. Displays in the instrument cluster
Operating requirements Icon Description

▷ Operating requirements of the Steering and Green indicator light: the system is
Lane Control Assistant are met. active.
Operating requirements, see page 267.
▷ The Steering and Lane Control Assistant is White indicator light: the system is
active. ready.
▷ The function is only available on certain
Grey indicator light: the system is in-
types of road, for example motorways.
terrupted.
271
Alternative displays Lane Change Assistant

the instrument cluster may vary and are shown
Principle
as follows:
The Lane Change Assistant also assists when
Icon Description changing lanes on multi-lane roads.
Green indicator light: the system is
active. General
and Lane Control Assistant.
Displays on the steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
The two LEDs above the keypads are illumina- conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
ted in the same way as the displays in the ready to take over steering and braking at
instrument cluster: any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
▷ Green: the system is active. tion warrants it.
▷ Yellow: the system has been interrupted.
The information for the Steering and Lane
▷ Red: the system is deactivated.
Control Assistant also applies.
System limits Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see
page 266.
General
The system limits for the Steering and Lane Operating requirements
Control Assistant apply.
▷ Operating requirements of the Steering and
For further information: Lane Control Assistant are met.
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see Operating requirements, see page 267.
page 266.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy-
clists and with physical barriers separating
Driver Attention Camera oncoming vehicles, for example crash barri-
The limits of the Driver Attention Camera sys- ers.
tem apply.
▷ Lane markings detected.
▷ Maximum speed 180 km/h, 110 mph.
Driver Attention Camera, see page 68.
272
▷ The minimum speed is country-specific. Displays in the instrument cluster

try in which the vehicle is being driven. Icon Description
Green steering wheel icon.

Switching lane change assistance
Green arrow icon for lane change.
on/off
The system carries out a lane
1. "CAR"
change.
2. "Settings"
Grey line for lane marking on the ap-
propriate side.
5. "Steering Assistant"
The system has detected the lane
6. "Lane Change Assistant" change request. Lane change not
currently possible.
Changing driving lane
Depending on the national-market
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits a version:
lane change.
2. Press the turn indicator lever in the desired
Grey arrow icon for lane change.
direction as far as the resistance point for
indicating briefly. Lane change not possible; operating
requirements not met.
After a short period, a supporting steering
wheel movement in the desired direction is
noticeable. Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the information from the sys-
central display area of the instrument cluster.
Alternative displays
the instrument cluster may vary and are shown
After the lane change, the system helps the as follows:
driver keep the vehicle in lane.
Cancelling a lane change

The lane change can be cancelled by steering
in the opposite direction.
273
Icon Description roads with the formation of an emergency

lane.
As soon as the system detects a traffic queue,
Grey line for lane marking on a Check Control message is shown on the con-
the appropriate side. trol display. Depending on the situation, the
Green arrow icon for lane vehicle will be steered to the right or left within
change. the current driving lane in order to form an
emergency lane.
The system carries out a lane
change.
General
Grey line for lane marking on and Lane Control Assistant.
the appropriate side.
No arrow icon for lane change Safety information
on the display.
The system has detected the
WARNING
lane change request. Lane
change not currently possible. The system does not relieve you of your per-
Depending on the national- tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
market version: respond independently and appropriately in
Green steering wheel icon. all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
Grey line for lane marking on dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
the appropriate side. conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
Grey arrow icon for lane any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
change. tion warrants it.
Lane change not possible; op-
erating requirements not met. The information for the Steering and Lane
Control Assistant also applies.
System limits For further information:
The system limits for the Steering and Lane Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see
Control Assistant apply. page 266.
page 266. ▷ Steering and Lane Control Assistant is acti-
vated.
▷ Traffic queue detected.
Emergency Lane Assistant ▷ Driving on a motorway or a similar road.
▷ Lane boundary detected.
Principle
The Emergency Lane Assistant can assist in try in which the vehicle is being driven.
traffic queues on motorways or motorway-like
274
Activating/deactivating Safety information

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" WARNING
3. "Driver assistance" The system does not relieve you of your per-
4. "Driving" sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
5. "Steering Assistant"
6. "Emergency Corridor Assistant" all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
Displays in the instrument cluster conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
Depending on vehicle equipment and national- ready to take over steering and braking at
market version, information from the system any time, and actively intervene if the situa-
in Assisted Driving View is displayed on the tion warrants it.
instrument cluster.
The information for the Active Cruise Control
and the Steering and Lane Control Assistant
Assisted Driving View, see page 172. also applies.
System limits
▷ Active Cruise Control, see page 253.
The system limits for the Steering and Lane
Control Assistant apply. ▷ Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see
page 266.
Steering and Lane Control Assistant, see Operating requirements
page 266.
▷ Active Cruise Control is activated.
▷ Driving on a motorway or a similar road.
Lane change with active ▷ A lane boundary is detected on the side of
route guidance the desired lane change.
▷ Navigation system: route guidance is acti-
vated.
Principle
▷ The adjustment to route is turned on.
This system assists the driver when a lane
change is needed in order to reach a destina- ▷ The function must be available in the coun-
tion. try in which the vehicle is being driven.
General Changing driving lane

The system uses the sensors of the Steering 1. One or more lane changes are required in
and Lane Control Assistant. order to reach a destination.
The system prepares for this lane change.
To do this, the system identifies a suitable
275
gap in the flow of traffic in the adjacent System limits

lane.
The system limits for the Active Cruise Control
2. When a gap has been found, the speed is and the Steering and Lane Control Assistant
adapted so the vehicle stays level with the apply.
gap.
3. A lane change suggestion is displayed with
a Check Control message. Park assistance systems
When the Steering and Lane Control As-
sistant is active, a steering intervention to General
steer the vehicle towards the target driving The parking assistance systems include differ-
lane may be performed. ent individual systems. The individual systems
4. If the traffic situation permits a lane change, provide support with assistance functions, sen-
the driver can steer the vehicle into the ad- sors and different camera views when parking,
jacent lane. manoeuvring or driving in reverse.
If the vehicle is equipped with the Lane For further information:
Change Assistant: once the Check Control ▷ Park Distance Control, see page 276.
message has been displayed, the Lane
Change Assistant can be started by operat- ▷ Active Park Distance Control, see page 280.
ing the turn indicator. ▷ Lateral Parking Aid, see page 281.
▷ Reversing Assist Camera without Surround
Display in the instrument cluster View, see page 282.
▷ Park Assist, see page 285.
Icon Function
▷ Park Assist, leaving parking space, see
The proposed lane change is dis- page 289.
played and a green tick indicates that ▷ Reversing Assistant, see page 290.
the function is active.
▷ Remote Control Parking, see page 292.
▷ Surround View with Reversing Assist Cam-
era, see page 296.
market version, information from the system
in Assisted Driving View is displayed on the ▷ Panorama View, see page 301.
instrument cluster. ▷ Crossing-traffic Warning, see page 303.
For further information: ▷ Remote 3D View, see page 305.
Switching on adjustment to route Park Distance Control

1. "CAR"
Principle
2. "Settings"
Park Distance Control assists with parking. Ob-
stacles in front of or behind the vehicle are
4. If necessary, "Driving" signalled by acoustic and visual warnings.
5. "Speed Assistant" Depending on vehicle equipment, obstacles
6. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust detected by the side ultrasonic sensors may be
speed to route" reported by the Lateral Parking Aid.
276
General Overview
The range of the system is approximately 2 m,
6 ft, depending on the obstacle and environ- Button in the vehicle
mental factors.
An acoustic warning is given when the vehicle
is approx. 70 cm, 27 in away from an object
and a collision is imminent.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is given sooner, at a distance of ap-
prox. 1.50 m, 5 ft.
Safety information
Park Assist button
WARNING
Sensors
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot The system is controlled using the following
respond independently and appropriately in sensors:
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci- ▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic ers.
conditions. In addition, look directly to check ▷ Depending on the equipment: side ultra-
the traffic situation and the vehicle surround- sonic sensors.
ings and intervene actively where appropri-
ate.
WARNING
Switching on/off
Approaching at high speed when Park Dis- Switching on automatically
tance Control is activated may result in late
warnings due to the physical conditions. The system switches on automatically in the
There is a danger of injury or material dam- following situations:
age. Avoid approaching an object at speed. ▷ With the engine running, when selector
Avoid driving off at speed while Park Dis- lever position R is engaged.
tance Control is not yet activated. ▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
approaching detected obstacles, if the
speed is less than approximately 4 km/h,
approx. 2.5 mph. The distance from the
obstacle at which the system activates de-
pends on the individual situation.
277
Automatic switch-on on detection of obstacles The shorter the distance to an object, the
can be enabled and disabled. shorter the intervals of the intermittent tone
become.
1. "CAR"
A continuous tone sounds if the distance to
2. "Settings"
a detected object is less than approximately
3. "Driver assistance" 20 cm, 8 in.
4. "Parking and manoeuvring" An alternating continuous tone sounds if there
5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC activation" are objects in front and behind the vehicle at
6. "Automatic PDC activation" the same time and at a distance of less than
approximately 20 cm, 8 in.
Depending on the equipment, an appropriate
camera view is also switched on. Steptronic transmission: the intermittent tone
and the continuous tone are switched off when
selector lever position P is engaged.
Automatic deactivation when moving
forwards Depending on the version, the intermittent
tone is switched off after a short time with the
The system switches off once a certain dis-
vehicle at a standstill.
tance or speed is exceeded.
If an object approaches when the vehicle is
Switch on the system again if necessary.
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.
Switching on/off manually Volume control

Press the Park Assist button. The volume of the Park Distance Control
acoustic signal can be adjusted.
▷ On: the LED is illuminated.
1. "CAR"
▷ Off: the LED is extinguished.
2. "Settings"
The image from the Reversing Assist Camera
is shown when reverse gear is engaged and
the Park Assist button is pressed. 4. "Parking and manoeuvring"
Depending on the equipment, the system can- 5. "Volume PDC signal"

not be switched off manually when reverse 6. Set the desired value.
gear is engaged.
Warning
Acoustic signals
General
An intermittent tone indicates that the vehicle
is approaching an object. For example, if an
object is identified to the front left of the vehi-
cle, the acoustic signal is emitted from the front
left loudspeaker.
278
Visual warning System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The vehicle's approach to an object is shown actively if necessary.
on the control display. Objects further away
are shown before an acoustic signal is given.
Trailer operation
The display appears as soon as Park Distance
With a trailer or when the trailer socket is occu-
Control is activated.
pied, the rear functions of Park Distance Con-
The detection range of the sensors is shown in trol are switched off.
green, yellow and red if obstacles are detected
Depending on the equipment, the detection
within the range.
range of the sensors is shown dark on the con-
Driving lane lines are displayed for better esti- trol display.
mation of the space requirement.
If the Reversing Assist Camera image is rear functions of Park Distance Control remain
shown, it is possible to change over to Park switched on when the trailer operation is acti-
Distance Control or, if necessary, to another vated.
view with obstacle markings:
Depending on the national-market ver-
1. If necessary, press the Controller to the left. sion, an icon is displayed.
2. For example "Parking sensors"
Crossing-traffic Warning: depending on vehicle
equipment, the Park Distance Control display
also warns of vehicles approaching from the For further information:
side at the front and rear.
Activating trailer operation, see page 358.
Crossing-traffic Warning, see page 303. System limits of the sensors
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, see page 41.
Limits of ultrasound measurement

The physical limits of ultrasound measurement
may be reached when detecting objects in sit-
uations involving the following, for example:
279
▷ Obstacles and people at the edge of the cle. To approach, lightly depress the accelera-
driving lane. tor pedal and release it again.
▷ Low objects already indicated, for example If the accelerator pedal is depressed for longer,
kerbs, may enter the sensors' blind areas the vehicle pulls away. Manual braking is pos-
before or after a continuous tone is given. sible at any time.
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of
False alarms Park Distance Control and Park Assist.
If the system is approaching its limits, false
alarms may occur. Safety information
To reduce false alarms, for example in con-
veyor car washes, switch off automatic activa-
WARNING
tion of Park Distance Control when obstacles
are detected if necessary. The system does not relieve you of your per-
Malfunction
A white icon is shown and the detec- all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
tion range of the sensors is shown in dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
dark colour on the control display. conditions. In addition, look directly to check
the traffic situation and the vehicle surround-
A Check Control message is shown. ings and intervene actively where appropri-
Park Distance Control failure. Have the system ate.
checked by an authorised Service Partner or
another qualified Service Partner or a specialist The safety information for Park Distance Con-
workshop. trol and Park Assist also applies.
Active Park Distance Control ▷ Park Distance Control, see page 276.
Principle
Temporary switch-off
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-
tiates emergency braking if there is an immi- The Park Distance Control brake function can
nent risk of collision. be temporarily turned off:
Confirm the message on the control display.
General If the journey is continued in these environ-
Due to the system limits, a collision cannot be mental conditions, no further emergency brak-
prevented under all circumstances. ing is performed.
The function is available at speeds below
walking speed when reversing or rolling back. Settings
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the It is possible to set which areas of the vehicle
brake intervention. are protected by the system.
After emergency braking to a stop, it is possi- 1. "CAR"

ble to continue a slow approach to the obsta- 2. "Settings"
280
3. "Driver assistance" ▷ Park Distance Control, see page 276.

4. "Parking and manoeuvring" ▷ Park Assist, see page 285.
5. "Active PDC emergency interv."
Display
System limits
The system limits of Park Distance Control and
Park Assist apply.
The system cannot be used in situations such
as the following:
▷ When driving with a trailer.
If necessary, deactivate the system via iDrive
where applicable. Obstacle markings are displayed at the sides
of the vehicle to protect the vehicle's flanks.
Lateral Parking Aid ▷ Coloured markings: warning that obstacles

have been detected.
▷ Grey markings, hatched surface: no obsta-
Principle cles have been detected.
The Lateral Parking Aid warns about obstacles ▷ No markings, black surface: the area adja-
at the side of the vehicle. cent to the vehicle has not yet been detec-
ted.
General
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of
Park Distance Control and Park Assist.
Lateral Parking Aid limits
The system only shows stationary obstacles
Safety information that were previously detected by the sensors
when driving past.
The system does not detect whether an ob-
WARNING stacle subsequently moves. The markings are
The system does not relieve you of your per- shown in black after a certain time when the
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa- vehicle is stationary. The area next to the vehi-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot cle needs to be scanned again.
respond independently and appropriately in The Lateral Parking Aid is not available when
all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci- the trailer socket is occupied or when the trailer
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic operation is activated.
conditions. In addition, look directly to check
The system limits of Park Distance Control and
Park Assist also apply.
ate.
The safety information for Park Distance Con-

trol and Park Assist also applies.
281
Without Surround View: Sensors

Reversing Assist Camera The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
Principle
The Reversing Assist Camera assists in re-
verse parking and manoeuvring. It does this
by showing an image of the area behind the
vehicle on the control display. Switching on/off
Assistance functions, for example auxiliary
lines, can also be shown on the display.
Switching on automatically
The system automatically switches on when
Safety information selector lever position R is engaged while the
engine is running.
WARNING Automatic deactivation when moving

The system does not relieve you of your per- forwards
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa- The system switches off once a certain dis-
tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot tance or speed is exceeded.
Switch on the system again if necessary.
the traffic situation and the vehicle surround- switching on/off manually
ings and intervene actively where appropri- Press the Park Assist button.
ate.
▷ On: the LED is illuminated.
Overview ▷ Off: the LED is extinguished.
The parking assistance functions are shown
Depending on the equipment: button in on the control display.
the vehicle
Switching the view via iDrive
If the Reversing Assist Camera view is not dis-
played, change the view via iDrive:
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the side.
2. "Rear view camera"
The image from the Reversing Assist Camera
is shown.
Park Assist button
282
Operating requirements Driving lane lines

▷ The boot lid is completely closed.
▷ Keep the detection range of the camera
clear. Projecting loads, rear luggage racks,
or trailers can restrict the detection range of
the camera.
Display on the control display
Toolbars
Assistance functions can be activated man- The driving lane lines help in estimating the
ually using the toolbars on the sides of the space requirement when parking and manoeu-
control display. vring on a level road surface.
The driving lane lines are continuously adap-
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the right. ted to the steering wheel movements depend-
2. With the appropriate equipment: ing on the steering wheel angle.
"Camera picture"
3. ▷ "Parking guide lines". Turning circle lines
Driving lane lines and turning circle lines
are shown.
▷ "Obstacle mark.".
Depending on vehicle equipment, the
obstacles detected by Park Distance
Control are displayed with markings.
Zoom to the trailer tow hitch:
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the left.
2. "Tow hitch". The turning circle lines can only be shown in
A zoomed-in image of the trailer tow hitch the camera image together with driving lane
is displayed. lines.
A number of assistance functions can be active The turning circle lines show the trajectory of
simultaneously. the smallest possible turning circle on a level
road surface.
Parking assistance lines Once the steering wheel has been turned be-
yond a certain angle, only one turning circle
General line is displayed.
Additional assistance functions can be shown
in the camera image on the control display.
A number of assistance functions can be active
simultaneously.
283
Parking with the help of driving lane and A docking line dependent on the steering
turning circle lines wheel angle assists with lining up the trailer
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning tow hitch with the trailer.
circle line is within the boundaries of the When zooming in, remember that the view
parking space. might no longer show certain obstacles.
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the green
driving lane line covers the corresponding Setting the brightness and contrast
turning circle line.
With Reversing Assist Camera switched on:
Obstacle marking 1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the right.
2. "Camera picture"
System limits

Depending on vehicle equipment, obstacles
behind the vehicle are detected by the Park Deactivated camera
Distance Control sensors. If the camera is deactivated, for example when
Obstacle markings can be shown in the image the boot lid is opened, the camera image is
from the Reversing Assist Camera. shown hatched in grey.
The colour grading of the obstacle markers is

Detection of objects
the same as the Park Distance Control mark-
ers. The system cannot detect very low obstacles
and higher, protruding objects such as ledges.
Depending on vehicle equipment, some assis-
Zoom to trailer tow hitch
tance functions also take account of Park Dis-
To assist with connecting up a trailer, it is pos- tance Control data.
sible to zoom in on the area around the trailer
Note the information in the chapter on Park
tow hitch.
Distance Control.
The objects shown in the control display may
be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance to objects based on the display.
Two static circle segments show the distance

between the trailer and the trailer tow hitch.
284
Park Assist ▷ Steering.

▷ Accelerating and braking.
Principle ▷ Changing gear.

The parking manoeuvre takes place automati-
cally.
Safety information
WARNING
Park Assist supports the driver in the following respond independently and appropriately in
situations: all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
▷ When parking sideways parallel to the road: dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
parallel parking. conditions. In addition, look directly to check
▷ When reverse parking transverse to the
road, bay parking. The system lines up with
ate.
the centre of the parking space.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
leaving parallel parking spaces
WARNING
General When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as-
sistance system cannot react correctly if its
Operation sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of
accident or material damage. Do not use
Operation of Park Assist is divided into three
the assistance system in trailer operation or
steps:
when using the trailer tow hitch, for example
▷ Switching on and activating. with a bicycle carrier.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
The status of the system and the actions re- NOTICE
quired are shown on the control display. The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
Ultrasonic sensors measure parking spaces on kerbs. There is a risk of material damage.
both sides of the vehicle. Observe the traffic situation and intervene
Park Assist calculates the ideal parking line
trol also applies.
and takes over the following functions during
a parking manoeuvre: For further information:
Park Distance Control, see page 276.
285
Overview ▷ Minimum length of gap between two ob-

jects: own vehicle length plus approxi-
Button in the vehicle mately 0.8 m, 2.6 ft.
▷ Minimum depth: approximately 1.5 m, 5 ft.
Bay parking:
▷ Minimum width of gap: own vehicle width
plus approximately 0.7 m, 2.3 ft.
▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length.
Drivers must estimate the depth of bay
parking spaces themselves. Due to techni-
cal limits, the system is only able to gauge
the depth of bay parking spaces approxi-
Park Assist button mately.
For parking manoeuvre

Sensors ▷ Doors and boot lid are closed.
The system is controlled using the following Steptronic transmission:
sensors:
▷ Driver's seat belt is fastened.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
Switching on with the button
▷ Side ultrasonic sensors.
Press the Park Assist button.
The LED is illuminated.
The current status of the parking space search
Operating requirements is displayed on the control display.
Park Assist is automatically activated.
For measuring parking spaces
▷ Driving forwards in a straight line up to a Switching on with reverse gear
maximum speed of approximately 35 km/h, 1. Engage reverse gear.
22 mph.
The current status of the parking space
▷ Maximum distance from the row of parked search is displayed on the control display.
vehicles: 1.5 m, 5 ft.
2. Activate if necessary: "Park Assist"
Suitable parking space

Switching on via iDrive
General:
The rear-view camera display or Park Distance
▷ Gap behind an object which is at least Control view must be enabled.
0.5 m, 1.7 ft long.
▷ Gap between two objects, each at least 1. Tilt the Controller to the right.
0.5 m, 1.7 ft long. 2. Activate Park Assist on the control display:
Parallel parking: "Park Assist"
286
Display on the control display ▷ Parking manoeuvre active. The system

takes control of the steering.
System is activated/deactivated ▷ The parking space search is active when-
ever the vehicle is driving forwards at low
Icon Meaning speed, even if the system is deactivated. If
the system is deactivated, the displays on
Grey: system is not available. the control display may be shown in grey.
White: system is available but not
activated. Switching the acoustic signal for
System is activated. suitable parking spaces on/off
1. "CAR"
Parking space search is active.
2. "Settings"
Parking manoeuvre is active. The
system takes control of the steer-
ing. 4. "Parking and manoeuvring"
5. "Park Assist"
Parking space search and system 6. "Alert if parking space detected"
status
Acoustic signals of Park Distance
Control
Depending on the national-market version, an
intermittent tone of the Park Distance Control
PDC will sound during an automatic parking
manoeuvre.
A continuous tone sounds if the distance to
a detected object is less than approximately
20 cm, 8 in.
▷ Park Assist is activated and parking
space search is active. Parking with Park Assist
▷ The control display shows suitable parking
spaces along the edge of the road next to Parking
the vehicle icon. When Park Assist is active, 1. Switch on and activate Park Assist.
suitable parking spaces are highlighted and
For this, engage reverse gear or press the
an acoustic signal sounds.
Park Assist button and activate the system
▷ When bay or parallel parking spaces are on the control display if necessary.
clearly detected, the system automatically
Park Assist is activated.
selects the appropriate parking method.
A selection menu is displayed for parking 2. Drive past the line of parked vehicles at
spaces that are large enough for both par- a speed up to approximately 35 km/h,
allel and bay parking. In this case, select 22 mph and at a maximum distance of
the desired parking method manually. 1.5 m, 5 ft.
287
The status of the parking space search and ▷ If you switch to other functions on the con-
possible parking spaces are shown on the trol display.
control display. ▷ The turn indicator is turned on opposite to
3. To confirm the suggested parking space for the desired parking side.
the parking manoeuvre: select the parking Steptronic transmission:
space on the control display.
▷ If the boot lid is open.
The system takes control of the steering.
▷ If doors are open.
▷ If the parking brake is applied.
play.
▷ If you accelerate.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed for
When parking manoeuvre is complete, se-
longer while the vehicle is stationary.
lector lever position P is engaged.
▷ When the driver's seat belt is unfastened.
Completion of parking manoeuvre is indica-
ted on the control display. A Check Control message is shown.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec-
essary. Resuming
You may be able to resume a cancelled park-
Cancelling manually ing manoeuvre.
You can cancel Park Assist at any time: To do this, reactivate Park Assist and follow
the instructions on the control display.
▷ Press the Park Assist button.
Switching off
▷ "Park Assist": select the icon on the
control display. The system can be switched off manually:
Press the Park Assist button.
Cancelling automatically
The system automatically cancels in the
following situations: System limits
▷ If the driver grips the steering wheel or
steers the vehicle. Safety information
▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces,
if necessary. WARNING
▷ If it encounters objects that are difficult to Due to system limitations, the system may
negotiate, for example kerbs. not respond at all, or may respond too late,
▷ If objects appear suddenly. incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of
▷ Park Distance Control indicates insufficient accident or material damage. Observe the in-
distances. formation on the system limits and intervene
▷ When a maximum number of parking
moves or the parking time is exceeded.
No parking assistance
Park Assist does not provide assistance in the
288
▷ In tight bends. Leaving parking space with

▷ In trailer operation.
Park Assist
▷ With parking spaces which are marked by
lines on the floor only. The system orients
itself on objects. Principle
▷ In angled parking spaces. The system makes it easier to exit from paral-
lel parking spaces.
General
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, see page 41.
Functional limitations Park Assist calculates the optimum line to take
when driving out of the space and takes over
The system may have restricted functionality the following functions during the manoeuvre:
▷ Steering.
▷ On uneven road surfaces, for example
gravel roads. ▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ On slippery surfaces. ▷ Changing gear.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill gradients. The vehicle manoeuvres automatically until it

is in a position where the driver can drive out of
▷ If leaves have collected or snow has drifted the parking space without any further steering
or been piled up in the parking space. wheel movements.
▷ If the emergency spare wheel has been fit-
ted. Safety information
▷ If an already measured parking space
changes.
WARNING
▷ If there are ditches or sudden drops, for ex-
ample at a quayside.
▷ In some cases, parking spaces may be de- tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
tected that are not suitable or suitable park- respond independently and appropriately in
ing spaces may not be detected. all traffic situations. There is a risk of acci-
Malfunction conditions. In addition, look directly to check
A Check Control message is shown. the traffic situation and the vehicle surround-
Park Assist has failed. Have the system
ate.
checked by an authorised Service Partner or
another qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
WARNING
When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as-
sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of
289
the assistance system in trailer operation or Park Assist is switched off automatically.
with a bicycle carrier. System limits
The parking function may be temporarily un-
available in certain ambient conditions. The
system limits of Park Distance Control and
For further information: Park Assist continue to apply.
▷ Park Distance Control, see page 276.
Reversing Assistant
▷ The vehicle has been parked manually and
Principle
objects are detected in front of and behind The Reversing Assistant supports the driver
the vehicle. The distance to a detected kerb when reversing, for example when driving out
is at least 15 cm, approx. 6 in. of tight or blind parking spaces or narrow
roads.
▷ The vehicle has been parked using Park
Assist and an object is detected in front of The vehicle saves the driving movements for
the vehicle. the last distance covered. The vehicle is then
able to reverse along this saved distance cov-
▷ The parking space is at least 0.8 m, 2.6 ft
ered with automated steering.
longer than the vehicle.
▷ The vehicle has been reverse parked.
General
The system takes over the steering when re-
Leaving parking space
versing along the saved stretch.
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
The driver is responsible for operating the ac-
2. Steptronic transmission: celerator pedal and the brake.
When the vehicle is stationary, press the The Reversing Assistant uses the operating el-
Park Assist button or engage reverse gear ements and sensors of Park Distance Control
to switch on Park Assist. and Park Assist.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right as applicable For further information:
and activate Park Assist on the control dis-
▷ Park Distance Control, see page 276.
play: "Park Assist"
4. On the control display, confirm the required
direction for leaving the parking space.
Safety information
play.
Steptronic transmission: WARNING
The system takes over the manoeuvre. A The system does not relieve you of your per-
message is displayed at the end of the ma- sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
noeuvre. tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
6. Make sure that it is safe to leave a parking
space with the given traffic situation, and
drive off as usual.
290
conditions. In addition, look directly to check When reversing, pay attention to the vehi-
the traffic situation and the vehicle surround- cle surroundings and, if you encounter an
ings and intervene actively where appropri- obstacle, stop immediately and take over
ate. control of the vehicle. Pay attention to the
information on Park Distance Control.
6. Stop when you reach normal road traffic
WARNING at the latest and take over control of the
vehicle, for example by engaging a forward
When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as-
gear.
sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of At the end of the saved distance travelled,
accident or material damage. Do not use a signal sounds and a message appears
the assistance system in trailer operation or prompting you to take over control of the
when using the trailer tow hitch, for example vehicle.
with a bicycle carrier.
Cancelling the Reversing Assistant
The safety information for Park Distance Con- manually
The assisted reversing by the Reversing Assis-
For further information: tant can be cancelled manually:
▷ Park Distance Control, see page 276. ▷ Via the touchscreen: "Reversing
▷ Park Assist, see page 285. Assistant"
▷ Press the key.
▷ To save the distance covered, drive for-
wards without interruption. Cancelling the Reversing Assistant
▷ A maximum of 50 metres, approx. 55 yards automatically
are stored. The system automatically cancels in situations
▷ To store the distance covered, do not drive such as the following:
faster than 36 km/h, approx. 22 mph. ▷ If the driver grips the steering wheel or
▷ Dynamic Stability Control is activated. steers the vehicle.
▷ When a forward gear is engaged.
Reversing with automated steering ▷ When drive control systems or driver assis-
1. When the vehicle is stationary and drive- tance systems are activated or intervening.
ready state is switched on, engage reverse ▷ If the vehicle is stationary for several mi-
gear or press the Park Assist button. nutes.
2. Tilt the Controller to the right. ▷ The vehicle leaves the saved driving lane
3. "Reversing Assistant" when reversing, for example at the maxi-
The system takes control of the steering. mum steering wheel angle.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis- ▷ The display on the control display is hidden
play as applicable. by messages, for example due to incoming
calls.
5. Take your hands off the steering wheel
and carefully drive off using the accelerator
pedal and brake.
291
System limits General

▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you The following are components of the system:
encounter an obstacle, stop immediately ▷ Park Assist.
and take over control of the vehicle.
▷ BMW display key.
▷ The maximum speed when driving in re-
▷ Park Distance Control.
verse is limited to approx. 9 km/h, approx.
6 mph. The vehicle can be moved by approximately
2 times its length using the BMW display key.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warn-
The speed is approx. 1.8 km/h, 1.1 mph.
ing is issued and the function may be can-
celled. Button on the BMW display key: so the
vehicle can move, the button on the side of
▷ After driving a stored distance covered with
the BMW display key must be pressed contin-
major steering-wheel angles, the function
uously for the duration of the parking manoeu-
of the system will be restricted for the re-
vre. In the event of obstacles, release the but-
turn trip.
ton to stop the vehicle manually. The vehicle
▷ The system limits of Park Distance Control stops with emergency braking in this case.
and Park Assist also apply.
If the ultrasonic sensors detect obstacles in
Various factors can cause the vehicle to devi- the parking space, or the end of the parking
ate sideways when reversing along the saved space, the system stops the vehicle automati-
distance covered. These factors include, for cally where necessary.
example:
The driving lights are switched on for the dura-
▷ If the steering wheel is moved with the ve- tion of the process.
hicle stationary while the distance covered
is being saved.
Safety information
▷ The speed is not adapted to the distance
covered in question.
WARNING
▷ Specific road conditions, for example gradi-
ents or slopes. The system does not relieve you of your per-
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic sit-
uation and parking situation correctly. Due
Remote Control Parking to system limits, it cannot respond independ-
ently in a reasonable way in all situations.
There is a risk of accident. Observe the traffic
Principle situation and parking situation and intervene
In suitable forward parking spaces, for exam- actively if the situation warrants it.
ple a garage, it is possible to park forwards
and drive out in reverse using remote control.
The driver controls the parking manoeuvre
WARNING
from outside under his/her own responsibility
using the BMW display key. Unauthorised persons, for example children,
could move the vehicle using the BMW dis-
In the event of obstacles, stop the vehicle
play key without anyone being in the vehi-
manually.
cle. There is a risk of accident. Protect the
BMW display key against unauthorised use.
292
Cameras and ultrasonic sensors

WARNING ▷ Do not cover the sensors, for example with
When the trailer tow hitch is in use, the as- stickers.
sistance system cannot react correctly if its ▷ Keep sensors clean and clear, and clean
sensors are obstructed. There is a risk of them if necessary.
▷ Keep camera lenses clean and clear, and
the assistance system in trailer operation or
clean them if necessary.
with a bicycle carrier.
Suitable parking space
NOTICE
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto
kerbs. There is a risk of material damage.
Observe the traffic situation and intervene
Overview
▷ It is possible to park forwards, centrally and
Sensors straight in the parking space.
The system is controlled using the following ▷ Width of parking space: own vehicle width
sensors: without exterior mirrors plus approximately
0.4 m, 1.3 ft on each side, arrow 1.
▷ Front camera.
▷ Distance from the parking space, max. 2 m,
6.5 ft, arrow 2.
▷ To move the vehicle with remote control,
▷ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump- the driver must hold the BMW display key
ers. within the wireless range, arrow 3, outside
▷ Side ultrasonic sensors. the vehicle.
Further information: sensors in the vehicle, see Maximum distance from vehicle approx.
page 39. 1.5 m, approx. 5 ft to approx. 3 m, approx.
10 ft.
Operating requirements ▷ Maximum uphill or downhill gradient 5 %.
▷ No duplex garages.
General
There are no occupants in the vehicle during
the parking manoeuvre.
Driver interventions in the vehicle's interior –
steering, for example – will cancel the function.
293
Parking forwards "ENGINE STOP": tap the button.

▷ The parking brake is applied.
Parking ▷ The engine is switched off.
When parking forwards, the system may carry Lock the vehicle with the BMW display key.
out minor steering corrections.
1. Drive forwards as straight and centrally as Cancelling, interrupting, resuming the

possible towards the parking space and parking manoeuvre
stop with a distance of at most 2 m, approx. To cancel or interrupt the parking manoeuvre:
6.5 ft.
Release the button. The vehicle stops with
2. Engage selector lever position P and apply emergency braking.
parking brake. Switch off drive-ready state
To resume the parking manoeuvre:
and the engine with the Start/Stop button.
Alternatively, the engine can continue to Press the button again. Follow any text
run. messages that are displayed.
3. All the occupants leave the vehicle. Close

the doors.
Reversing out of a parking space
4. If necessary, switch on the display on the
Leaving parking space
BMW display key and unlock the display
lock. When reversing, the vehicle drives straight
backwards without steering.
On the BMW display key, switch into menu:
"R/C parking" 1. If necessary, switch on the display on the
BMW display key, see page 92. BMW display key and unlock the display
lock.
5. Keep the button on the side of the BMW
display key pressed for the duration of the BMW display key, see page 92.
parking manoeuvre. 2. Unlock the vehicle.
6. Wait until operational readiness is shown 3. On the BMW display key, switch into menu:
on the display. Follow any text messages "R/C parking"
that are displayed. 4. Keep the button on the side of the BMW
7. "ENGINE START": tap the button to start display key pressed while leaving parking
the engine if necessary. space.
8. To start the parking manoeuvre: touch the 5. Wait until operational readiness is shown
arrow icon for driving forwards on the dis- on the display. Follow any text messages
play. that are displayed.
Press and hold the button: the vehicle 6. "ENGINE START": tap the button. The en-
moves for as long as the button is pressed. gine starts.
In the event of obstacles in the driving area, 7. To start leaving parking space: touch the
release the button to stop the vehicle. arrow icon for reversing on the display.
For manoeuvring: touch the arrow icon for Press and hold the button: the vehicle
reversing. moves for as long as the button is pressed.
9. When the parking manoeuvre is complete, In the event of obstacles in the driving area,
release the button on the side of the release the button to stop the vehicle.
BMW display key. The vehicle stops.
294
8. Once the vehicle is out of the parking No parking assistance

space: release the button on the side of the Park Assist does not provide assistance in the
BMW display key. The vehicle stops. following situations:
9. Get in using your BMW display key and ▷ On sharp bends.
drive off as normal.
▷ In trailer operation.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be switched
off using the BMW display key: ▷ In angled parking spaces.
"ENGINE STOP": tap the button. ▷ At very high or very low outside tempera-
tures.
▷ The parking brake is applied.
▷ The engine is switched off. System limits of the sensors
If necessary, lock the vehicle with the For further information:
BMW display key.
Cancelling, interrupting, resuming the ▷ Ultrasonic sensors, see page 41.

parking manoeuvre
To cancel or interrupt the parking manoeuvre:
Release the button. The vehicle stops with in situations such as the following:
emergency braking.
▷ On uneven road surfaces, for example
To resume the parking manoeuvre: gravel roads.
Press the button again. Follow any text ▷ On slippery surfaces.
messages that are displayed.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill gradients.
Messages on the BMW display key ▷ If leaves have collected or snow has drifted
or been piled up in the parking space.
The icon indicates that there are sys-
▷ If the emergency spare wheel has been fit-
tem messages.
ted.
▷ If an already measured parking space
System limits changes.
▷ If there are ditches or sudden drops, for ex-
Safety information ample at a quayside.
▷ In some cases, parking spaces may be de-
WARNING tected that are not suitable or suitable park-
ing spaces may not be detected.
incorrectly or for no reason. There is a risk of Functional limitations due to radio
accident or material damage. Observe the in- interference
formation on the system limits and intervene Radio interference may impair Remote Control
actively if necessary. Parking with the BMW display key.
Malfunction, see page 96.
295
Limits of ultrasound measurement Safety information

The physical limits of ultrasound measurement
may be reached when detecting objects.
WARNING
The ultrasound measurement limits of Park
Distance Control apply.
For further information: tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
Park Distance Control, see page 276. respond independently and appropriately in
Surround View conditions. In addition, look directly to check
Principle ate.
Surround View uses various vehicle cam-
eras, for example the rear-view camera and
front camera, to assist with parking and ma- Overview
noeuvring. Depending on the view, the vehicle
surroundings or a partial area are displayed on Buttons in the vehicle
the Control Display.
General
Several cameras capture the area from various
selectable perspectives.
The following camera perspectives can be dis-
played:
▷ The automatic camera perspective auto-
matically shows the appropriate perspec-
tive according to the respective driving sit- Park Assist button
uation.
▷ The rear-view camera shows the area be-
Panorama View
hind the vehicle.
▷ The right and left side view shows the
areas to the side of the vehicle. Sensors
▷ The free camera perspective, which can be The system is controlled using the following
moved via iDrive, shows set perspectives in sensors:
a circular area.
▷ Front camera.
▷ Panorama View shows crossing traffic, de-
pending on the gear currently engaged. ▷ Exterior mirror cameras.
296
Switching on/off 3 Flank view

4 Automatic camera perspective
Switching on automatically
5 Freely movable camera perspective
The system automatically switches on when
6 Toolbar, right
selector lever position R is engaged while the
engine is running. 7 Reversing Assist Camera
The camera perspective appropriate for the 8 Selection window
current driving situation is shown.
For further information: Toolbar, left
Park Distance Control, switching on/off, see It is possible to select various views directly
page 277. using iDrive and the toolbar on the left. To do
this, tilt the Controller to the left if necessary.
Switching on/off manually ▷ "Parking": around the vehicle.
Press the Park Assist button. ▷ "3D view": free camera.
▷ "Tow hitch".
▷ On: the LED is illuminated. ▷ "Car wash".
▷ Off: the LED is extinguished.
Depending on the equipment, the Reversing Flank view
Assist Camera cannot be switched off when Flank view can be selected for the right or left
reverse gear is engaged. side of vehicle.
This view displays the area at the side to as-
Automatic deactivation when moving sist with positioning the vehicle at the kerb or
forwards alongside any other obstacles.
The system switches off once a certain dis- Flank view looks from the rear to the front. If
tance or speed is exceeded. there is a hazard, it automatically focuses on
Switch on the system again if necessary. possible obstacles.
Display on the control display Automatic camera perspective

The automatic camera perspective displays
Overview a steering angle-dependent view looking to-
wards the vehicle's direction of travel.
This perspective adapts to the current driving
situation.
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
switches to a fixed display of the area in front
of or behind the bumper or, if necessary, to a
flank view.
Freely movable camera perspective

1 Toolbar, left If the movable camera perspective is selected,
2 Camera image a circular path is shown on the control display.
297
By turning the Controller or using the touch Driving lane lines

function, defined perspectives along the circu-
lar path can be selected.
The current perspective is identified by a cam-
era icon.
To exit the function, tilt the Controller to the
side and select a different camera view.
Toolbar, right
Assistance functions can be activated and set-
tings made using iDrive and the toolbar on the The driving lane lines help in estimating the
right. To do this, tilt the Controller to the right if space requirement when parking and manoeu-
necessary. vring on a level road surface.
▷ "Park Assist". The driving lane lines are continuously adap-
▷ "Reversing Assistant". ted to the steering wheel movements depend-
ing on the steering wheel angle.
▷ "Camera picture":
▷ "Brightness".
Turning circle lines
▷ "Contrast".
▷ "Parking guide lines".
▷ "Obstacle mark.".
▷ "Settings": to perform settings, for ex-
ample to use the activation points with
Panorama View.
Reversing Assist Camera

The Reversing Assist Camera assists in re-
verse parking and manoeuvring. It does this The turning circle lines can only be shown in
by showing an image of the area behind the the camera image together with driving lane
vehicle on the control display. lines.
The turning circle lines show the trajectory of
Selection window the smallest possible turning circle on a level
In the selection window, the individual camera road surface.
perspectives can be selected using iDrive. Once the steering wheel has been turned be-
yond a certain angle, only one turning circle
Parking assistance lines line is displayed.
General
Additional assistance functions can be shown
in the camera image on the control display.
A number of assistance functions can be active
simultaneously.
298
Parking with the help of driving lane and Zoom to trailer tow hitch
turning circle lines To assist with connecting up a trailer, it is pos-
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning sible to zoom in on the area around the trailer
circle line is within the boundaries of the tow hitch.
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the green
driving lane line covers the corresponding
turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
Two static circle segments show the distance

between the trailer and the trailer tow hitch.
A docking line dependent on the steering
wheel angle assists with lining up the trailer
tow hitch with the trailer.
When zooming in, remember that the view
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by might no longer show certain obstacles.
the Park Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markers can be shown in the camera
Lateral Parking Aid
image.
The colour grading of the obstacle markers is Principle
the same as the Park Distance Control mark-
The Lateral Parking Aid is automatically dis-
ers.
played when the automatic camera perspec-
tive is switched on. This feature shows obsta-
Washing bay view cles located near the vehicle.
Display
The washing bay view provides assistance

when driving into washing bays by displaying
the vehicle's own tyre tracks. Obstacle markings are displayed at the sides
of the vehicle to protect the vehicle's flanks.
299
▷ No markings: no obstacles have been de- Limits of the display

tected. For technical reasons, the display of the vehi-
▷ Coloured markings: warning that obstacles cle surroundings is distorted.
have been detected. Even if the icons for the door opening angles
on the control display are not covering any
Lateral Parking Aid limits other objects, bear in mind the following when
parking beside other objects:
The system only shows stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by the sensors The perspective means that protruding objects
when driving past. located higher up may be closer than they ap-
pear on the control display.
The system does not detect whether an ob-
stacle subsequently moves. Consequently, the
markings will no longer be shown on the dis- Setting the brightness and contrast
play after the vehicle has been stationary for a When Surround View or Panorama View is
while. The area next to the vehicle needs to be switched on, it is possible to adjust the bright-
scanned again. ness and contrast.
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the right.

Door opening angle
2. "Camera picture"
Principle 3. Select the desired setting.
If obstacle marking is activated, Surround View
shows any stationary obstacles that are re- Functional limitations
stricting the opening angle of the doors. The system can only be used to a restricted
The system does not issue warnings about ap- extent in the following situations:
proaching road users. ▷ In poor light conditions.
▷ If the cameras are dirty.
Display
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the boot lid open.
▷ With the exterior mirrors folded in.
Areas with grey hatching with an icon in the
camera image identify areas that are currently
not shown, for example an open door.
System limits
Steptronic transmission: the maximum door System limits of the sensors

opening angles are displayed when the selec- For further information:
tor lever is in position P. Once the vehicle
moves off, the parking assistance lines are dis-
played instead of the opening angles.
Non-visible areas
Due to the angle of view, the area under the
vehicle cannot be seen by the cameras.
300
Detection of objects and rear cameras scan the side area around
The system cannot detect very low obstacles vehicle.
and higher, protruding objects such as ledges. Yellow lines on the display image indicate the
Some assistance functions also take account front and rear ends of the vehicle.
of Park Distance Control data. The camera image is subject to varying levels
Note the information in the chapter on Park of distortion in some areas and is thus not suit-
Distance Control. able for estimating distances.
The objects shown in the control display may Depending on the equipment, the function can
be closer than they appear. Do not estimate only be used when a forward gear is engaged.
the distance to objects based on the display. For further information:
For further information: Surround View, see page 296.
Park Distance Control, see page 276.
Safety information
Malfunction
Failure of one camera is shown on the control WARNING
display. The system does not relieve you of your per-
A yellow icon is shown and the de- sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
tection range of the failed camera is tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
shown in black on the control display. respond independently and appropriately in
Panorama View the traffic situation and the vehicle surround-
Principle ate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Panorama View provides the driver with an ad-

vance view of crossing traffic at blind exits and
road junctions.
General
Panorama View
Road users hidden by obstacles at the side
may not be seen from the driver's seat until
very late. To provide a better view, the front
301
Sensors 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.

The system is controlled using the following 4. "Activation point"
sensors: The current position is shown.
▷ Front camera. 5. "Save activation point"
▷ Depending on the equipment: Reversing Activation points are stored with one of the
Assist Camera. following where possible:
For further information: ▷ Location.
Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39. ▷ Location and street.
▷ GPS coordinates.
Press the button with the engine running. Using activation points
Use of activation points can be switched on
The image from the relevant camera is dis- and off.
played, depending on the direction of travel.
▷ "Front": image from the front camera. 1. Press the button.
▷ "Rear": image from the rear camera. 2. Tilt the Controller to the right.
Depending on the equipment, the Crossing- 3. "Settings"
traffic Warning can warn about approaching 4. "Panorama View, GPS-based"
vehicles by means of radar sensors.
5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically
For further information: when set activation points are reached."
Crossing-traffic Warning, see page 303.
Displaying activation points
With navigation system: activation
points 1. Press the button.
Principle 3. "Manage points"
Locations where you wish Panorama View to A list of all activation points is shown.
switch on automatically can be saved as acti-
vation points, provided that a GPS signal is Renaming or deleting activation points
being received.
General
Up to ten activation points can be saved.
3. "Manage points"
Activation points can be used for the front
A list of all activation points is shown.
camera when driving forward.
4. Select an activation point if necessary.
Saving activation points 5. Select the desired setting.
1. Drive to the location at which the system is
to be switched on, and stop. Functional limitations
The functional limitations of Surround View ap-
2. Press the button. ply.
302
For further information: Safety information

Surround View, see page 296.
WARNING
System limits
The system limits of Surround View apply. sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa-
For further information: tion correctly. Due to system limits, it cannot
Surround View, see page 296. respond independently and appropriately in
Crossing-traffic Warning conditions. Observe the traffic situation, be
Principle tion warrants it.
At blind exits or when leaving bay parking
spaces, the Crossing-traffic Warning detects
other road users approaching from the side Overview
earlier than is possible from the driver's seat.
Button in the vehicle
General
Park Assist button

Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
The system indicates when other road users Sensors
are approaching. The system is controlled using the following
sensors:
Depending on the equipment, the area in front
of the vehicle is also monitored. For this pur- ▷ Side radar sensors, rear.
pose, two further radar sensors are located in ▷ Depending on the equipment: side radar
the front bumper. sensors, front.
303
Switching on/off Warning
Activating/deactivating the system General

The control display shows the corresponding
With the button image, an acoustic signal sounds, if necessary,
and the light in the exterior mirror flashes.
1. Press the Park Assist button.
2. Tilt the Controller to the right. Light in the exterior mirror
3. "Settings"
4. "Crossing-traffic Warning"
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Parking and manoeuvring" The light in the exterior mirror flashes if other
5. "Crossing-traffic Warning" vehicles are detected by the rear sensors when
the vehicle is reversing.
Switching on automatically Display in the Park Distance Control

If the system was activated on the control dis- view
play, it is switched on automatically as soon
as Park Distance Control or Panorama View is
active and a gear is engaged.
The system is switched on at the rear when
reverse gear is engaged.
Depending on the equipment, the system is
switched on at the front when a forward gear is
engaged.
Switching off automatically In the Park Distance Control view, the relevant
The system switches off automatically in the boundary area flashes red if the sensors detect
following situations: vehicles.
▷ If walking speed is exceeded.
▷ When a certain distance is exceeded.
▷ When Park Assist is actively parking the ve-
hicle.
304
Display in the camera view Remote 3D View

Principle
With the appropriate equipment, the BMW app
and the images from the Surround View cam-
eras enable the vehicle surroundings to be dis-
played on a mobile device.
The function shows a view of the current situa-
tion.
The relevant boundary area, arrow 1, in the

camera view flashes red if the sensors detect
Sensors
vehicles. The system is controlled using the following
Yellow lines, arrow 2, indicate the bumper of sensors:
your vehicle. ▷ Front camera.
Acoustic warning ▷ Reversing Assist Camera.
In addition to the visual display, a warning sig- For further information:
nal sounds when your own vehicle is moving in Sensors in the vehicle, see page 39.
the corresponding direction.
System limits ▷ Data transfer must be activated.
System limits of the sensors Data protection, see page 72.
For further information: ▷ The BMW app must be installed on the mo-
bile device.
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: a driver profile
with an existing ConnectedDrive account
must be activated.
Driver profiles, see page 73.
▷ In tight bends.
Switching the function on/off
▷ Crossing objects are moving at a very slow
or a very fast speed. Switching on/off with other functions
▷ Other objects that hide cross traffic are in 1. "CAR"
the capture range of the sensors.
2. "Settings"
If the trailer socket is occupied or when the
trailer operation is activated, for example when
operating with a trailer or a bicycle carrier, 4. "Data privacy"
Crossing-traffic Warning is not available for the 5. Select the desired setting.
area behind the vehicle.
305
Switching on/off individually
Pre-adjustment
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Select services individually"
6. "My BMW app & customer portal"
7. "Remote 3D View"
Switching on/off
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Individual selection"

or may not be available at all in situations such
as the following:
▷ With a door or the boot lid open. Areas that
the system is not able to record are shown
dark on the display.
▷ If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually.
▷ When other camera functions are being run
in the vehicle.
▷ The vehicle moves faster than at walking
speed.
▷ It may not be possible to use the function in
all countries.
▷ For reasons related to data protection, the
function can only be run three times in two
hours.
306
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment Setting
The system offers various shock absorber set-
This chapter describes all standard, country- tings, from comfortable travel to sporty driving.
specific and optional equipment available for The shock absorbers are adjusted depending
the model range. It may therefore describe on the road condition and driving style as well
equipment and functions which are not avail- as, depending on the equipment, the selected
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the drive mode.
evant functions and systems. Please comply Driving Experience Control, see page 154.
tems. Adaptive Drive
Principle
Suspension components Adaptive Drive is an actively controlled sus-
pension. The system increases driving comfort
The chassis and suspension components have
at the same time as minimising cornering roll
been optimised for the vehicle and its appli-
tendency.
cation range, thus ensuring the best possible
driving experience.
General
Information available from the navigation sys-
Adaptive suspension tem or the driving style analysis, for example,
is used for the active control.
Principle In particular in the ADAPTIVE drive mode, this
information influences control of the adaptive
The adaptive suspension is an intelligent con-
suspension and control of the Active Dynamic
trollable suspension.
Drive. This increases both the agility and com-
The suspension reduces body movements fort of the vehicle further.
with a sporty driving style or on an uneven
The function may be restricted if the navigation
road.
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for
example.
General
The intelligent control of the suspension in-
creases the driving dynamics and driving com- Active Roll Stabilisation
fort depending on the road condition and driv-
ing style.
Principle
Active roll stabilisation reduces the roll ten-
dency that occurs when cornering at high
307
CONTROLS Driving comfort
speed or in the event of a sudden avoidance

manoeuvres.
Adaptive M suspension
Professional
General
The side incline of the vehicle is compensated Principle
by continual adjustments on the front and rear Adaptive M suspension Professional is an ac-
axle. Thus, the vehicle is constantly stabilised. tively controlled sport suspension. The system
Agility and driving comfort are increased in all increases driving comfort at the same time as
driving conditions. minimising cornering roll tendency.
Adaptive M suspension Professional contains
Setting the following systems:
The system offers various settings, from com- ▷ Lowered sport suspension.
fortable travel to sporty driving. ▷ Adaptive suspension.
The settings are assigned to the different drive ▷ Active Roll Stabilisation.
modes of Driving Experience Control.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
Driving Experience Control, see page 154. General
Information available from the navigation sys-
Adaptive M suspension tem or the driving style analysis, for example,
is used for the active control.
This information influences the control of the
Principle following systems, particularly in the ADAP-
The adaptive M suspension is an intelligent, TIVE drive mode:
controllable sport suspension. ▷ Adaptive suspension.
The suspension reduces body movements ▷ Active Roll Stabilisation.
with a sporty driving style or on an uneven
▷ Integral Active Steering.
road.
This increases the agility and comfort of the
General vehicle further.
The intelligent control of the suspension in- The function may be restricted if the navigation
creases the driving dynamics and driving com- data is invalid, outdated or not available, for
fort depending on the road condition and driv- example.
ing style.
Setting
Engine sound
The system offers various shock absorber set- Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
tings, from comfortable travel to sporty driving. market version, the sound of the engine can be
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending configured if necessary.
on the selected drive mode as well as the road
1. "CAR"
condition and driving style.
2. "Settings"
Driving Experience Control, see page 154.
308
Driving comfort CONTROLS
4. "Engine sound"
309
CONTROLS Air conditioning
Air conditioning
Vehicle equipment ▷ Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
▷ Microbial particles, viruses, and allergens
This chapter describes all standard, country- are filtered.
specific and optional equipment available for The vehicle manufacturer recommends having
the model range. It may therefore describe the interior filter replaced when the vehicle is
equipment and functions which are not avail- serviced.
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- Automatic air conditioning
Overview
tems.
Buttons in the vehicle
Air quality
General
The air quality in the interior is improved by the
following components:
▷ Emissions-tested interior.
▷ Interior filter.
▷ Climate control system for regulating tem-
perature, amount of air and air recirculation Air conditioning functions
function.
Button Function
▷ Pre-cooling.
▷ Physical Air Treatment Technology. Temperature.
▷ Fragrancing.
▷ Automatic air recirculation control.
Interior filter
Air conditioning function.
The interior filter cleans the incoming outside
air or the circulated inside air in air recirculation
mode. Maximum cooling.
▷ Dust and pollen are filtered out from the AUTO programme.
inflowing outside air.
▷ Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
310
Air conditioning CONTROLS
Button Function Switching air conditioning functions

on/off
Air recirculation function.
Switching on
Press one of the following buttons:
▷ Air conditioning function.
Air distribution, manual. ▷ Maximum cooling.
▷ AUTO programme.
SYNC programme. ▷ Air recirculation function.
▷ Right side of the button for manual amount
Defrost function. of air.
▷ Air distribution, manual.
Rear window heating. ▷ Windscreen defrost.
▷ Fragrancing.
Active seat ventilation, see
page 139. Switching off
Seat heating, see page 138. If automatic air conditioning with extended
functionality is equipped:
To go to the air conditioning Complete system:

menu. ▷ Button on the driver's side:
For the following settings, for Hold down the left side of the but-
example: upper body tempera- ton until the automatic air condi-
ture adjustment, pre-cooling. tioning switches off.
▷ Button on the passenger's side:
Individual functions – for example, tempera- Press and hold left side button.
ture – can also be operated using spoken com-
mands.
Temperature
Calling up the air conditioning menu
Press the key. Principle
The automatic air conditioning cools or heats
The air conditioning menu is displayed. to the set temperature and then keeps the
temperature constant.
All the air conditioning functions that can ad-
justed via iDrive can be called up via the air
conditioning menu, for example upper body Adjusting the temperature
temperature adjustment, pre-cooling. Turn the wheel clockwise or
anti-clockwise: to reduce or in-
crease temperature.
311
Avoid switching between different temperature The LED is illuminated when the air condition-
settings in rapid succession. The automatic air ing function is switched on.
conditioning may not have sufficient time to
adjust to the set temperature. Depending on the weather conditions, the
windscreen and the side windows may mist
over for a short time after switching on drive-
Ventilation temperature
ready state.
General The air conditioning function is switched on
automatically in the AUTO programme.
The temperature of the ventilation in the upper
body area can be adjusted. Cooling produces condensation, which then
exits underneath the vehicle.
The ventilation air flow in the upper body area
provides noticeable heating or cooling depend-
ing on the set temperature.
Maximum cooling
The set interior temperature for driver and
Principle
front passenger is not changed by this.
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
Adjusting the ventilation temperature system is set to lowest temperature, optimum
amount of air and the air recirculation function.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Operating requirements
3. "Climate comfort" The function is available at an outside tem-
4. "Heating/ventilation" perature above approximately 0 ℃/32 ℉ and
5. "Temperature adjustment" when drive-ready state is switched on.
6. Set the desired temperature.

Switching maximum cooling on/off
The temperature is adjusted on an individual
basis, for example towards the blue for colder Press the key.
and towards the red for warmer. The LED is illuminated when maxi-
mum cooling is switched on.
Air conditioning function The air flows from the air vents for the upper
body area. Therefore open the air vents.
Principle
The amount of air can be adapted when the
The air in the interior is cooled and dried and programme is active on the driver's side.
then heated again depending on the tempera-
ture setting.
AUTO programme
Principle
The interior can only be cooled when drive-
The AUTO programme cools, ventilates or
ready state is switched on.
heats the interior automatically.
Switching the air conditioning function The amount of air, air distribution and temper-
on/off ature are regulated automatically depending
on the interior temperature, the selected tem-
Press the key. perature setting and the selected intensity set-
ting.
312
Switching the AUTO programme When the system is deactivated, outside air
on/off flows into the interior continuously.
Press the key. Continuous use of the air recirculation function

worsens air quality inside the vehicle interior
The LED in the button is illuminated and increases condensation on the windows.
when the AUTO programme is switched on.
If there is condensation, switch off air recircula-
Depending on the selected settings and exter- tion function or remove the condensation.
nal influences, the air is directed towards the
windscreen, the side windows, the upper body Switching automatic air recirculation
and into the footwell. control on/off
Point the side air vents at the side windows. 1. "CAR"
The air conditioning function is switched on in 2. "Settings"
the AUTO programme. 3. "Climate comfort"
A condensation sensor also controls the pro- 4. "Air quality"
gramme so that window condensation is avoi-
ded as much as possible. 5. "Automatic air recirculation"
The AUTO programme is automatically

switched off when the air distribution is adjus-
Air recirculation function
ted manually.
Principle
Adjusting the intensity of amount of air If the air outside the vehicle has an unpleasant
odour or contains pollutants, the supply of out-
The intensity can be adjusted when the AUTO
side air into the interior of the vehicle can be
programme is active. This changes the auto-
shut off. The interior air is then recirculated.
matic control for the amount of air.
When the air recirculation function is switched
Press left or right side of button: to off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle interior.
reduce or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display Switching the air recirculation function
for automatic air conditioning. on/off
Press the key.
Automatic air recirculation control The LED in the button is illuminated
when the air recirculation function is switched
Principle on.
Automatic air recirculation control detects pol-
lutants in the outside air. The supply of outside The air recirculation function automatically
air is shut off and the interior air is recirculated. switches off after a given time depending on
the ambient conditions, to avoid condensation.
General Continuous use of the air recirculation function
When the system is activated, a sensor detects worsens air quality inside the vehicle interior
pollutants in the outside air and automatically and increases condensation on the windows.
controls the closing off of the outside air sup- If there is condensation, switch off air recircula-
ply. tion function or remove the condensation.
313
Amount of air, manual SYNC programme
Principle Principle
The amount of air for air conditioning can be The SYNC programme can be used to transfer
set manually. settings on the driver's side to the passenger's
side and to the rear.
Adjusting the amount of air manually
Switching the SYNC programme on/off
Press left or right side of button: to
reduce or increase amount of air. Press the key.
The LED in the button is illuminated
The selected amount of air is shown on the
when the SYNC programme is switched on.
display for automatic air conditioning.
To protect the vehicle battery, the amount of Depending on the equipment, the following
air of the automatic air conditioning is reduced settings on the driver's side can be transferred
if necessary. to the passenger's side and to the rear:
▷ Temperature.
Adjusting the air distribution ▷ Amount of air.
manually ▷ Air distribution.
Principle ▷ AUTO programme.
The air distribution for air conditioning can be The programme is switched off automatically if
set manually. settings are changed on the passenger's side
or in the rear passenger compartment.
Adjusting the air distribution manually
Defrost function
Press the button repeatedly. Select
the desired setting: Principle
▷ Windows, upper body area and footwell. Ice and condensation are quickly removed
▷ Upper body area and footwell. from the windscreen and the front side win-
dows.
▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell. Switching the defrost function on/off
▷ Windows: only on the driver's side. Press the key.
▷ Windows and upper body area. The LED in the button is illuminated
▷ Upper body area. when the system is switched on.
The selected air distribution setting is shown
The amount of air can be adjusted manually
on the climate display.
when the system is switched on.
If there is condensation, switch on the AUTO
programme or the air conditioning function.
Ensure that air can flow towards the wind-
screen.
314
Rear window heating Ventilation at front
Principle
The rear window is quickly cleared of ice and
condensation.
The function is available when drive-ready
state is switched on.
Switching the rear window heating ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
on/off arrows 1.
Press the key. The LED is illumina- ▷ Knurled wheel for steplessly opening and
ted when the rear window heating is closing the air vents, arrows 2.
switched on.
The rear window heating switches off auto- Ventilation in the rear, centre
matically after a while.
Ventilation
Principle
The direction of the air flows can be set indi-
vidually for direct or indirect ventilation.
Adjusting the ventilation ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrows 1.
General ▷ Knurled wheel for steplessly opening and
Open the air vents and position them in a way closing the air vents, arrows 2.
that ensures effective climate control.
Direct ventilation
Aim the air flow directly at the vehicle occu-
pants. The air flow has a noticeable heating
or cooling effect, depending on the set temper-
ature.
Indirect ventilation
Do not aim the air flow directly at the vehicle
occupants. The vehicle interior is cooled or
heated indirectly depending on the set temper-
ature.
315
Ventilation in the rear, side Button Function
AUTO programme.

Air distribution, manual.
Switching air conditioning functions

▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
on/off
▷ Knurled wheel for steplessly opening and Operating requirements
closing the air vents, arrow 2.
The automatic rear air-conditioning system is
not operational if the automatic air condition-
ing is switched off or the following function is
Automatic rear air- active: defrost the windows and remove con-
conditioning system densation.
Switching on/off via iDrive

Overview
1. "CAR"
Buttons in the vehicle 2. "Settings"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Rear climate control"
Switching on using the button

Press one of the following buttons:
▷ Maximum cooling.
▷ AUTO programme.
▷ Right side of the button for manual amount
Air conditioning functions of air.
▷ Air distribution, manual.
Button Function
Temperature. Switching off using the button

Press and hold left side button.
Maximum cooling.
316
Temperature Switching the AUTO programme

on/off
Principle Press the key.
The automatic air conditioning cools or heats The LED in the button is illuminated
to the set temperature and then keeps the when the AUTO programme is switched on.
temperature constant.
Depending on the selected settings and exter-
Adjusting the temperature nal influences, the air is directed towards the
upper body and into the footwell.
Turn the wheel clockwise or
anti-clockwise: to reduce or in-
crease temperature. Adjusting the intensity of amount of air
When AUTO programme is switched on, auto-
matic control of the intensity can be changed:
Avoid switching between different temperature Press left or right side of button re-
settings in rapid succession. The automatic air peatedly: to reduce or increase inten-
conditioning may not have sufficient time to sity.
adjust to the set temperature.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
Maximum cooling for automatic air conditioning.
Principle Amount of air, manual

When drive-ready state is switched on, the
Principle
system is set to lowest temperature, optimum
amount of air and the air recirculation function. The amount of air for air conditioning can be
set manually.
General
The function is available at an outside tem-
perature above approximately 0 ℃/32 ℉ and To be able to adjust the amount of air man-
when drive-ready state is switched on. ually, first switch off the AUTO programme.
Switching maximum cooling on/off Adjusting the amount of air manually

Press the key. Press left or right side of button re-
peatedly: reduce or increase amount
The LED in the button is illuminated
of air.
when maximum cooling is switched on.
The selected amount of air is shown on the
The air flows from the air vents for the upper
climate display.
body area. Therefore open the air vents.
AUTO programme
Principle
The amount of air, air distribution and temper-
ature are automatically regulated.
317
Adjusting the air distribution Safety information

manually
DANGER
Principle
A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ven-
The air distribution for air conditioning can be tilation can allow harmful exhaust fumes to
set manually. enter the vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain
pollutants which are colourless and odour-
Adjusting the air distribution manually less. In enclosed spaces, exhaust fumes can
Press the button repeatedly. Select also build up outside the vehicle. There is
the desired setting: a danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe
clear and ensure sufficient ventilation. Do
▷ Upper body area. not switch on the pre-heating in enclosed
▷ Upper body area and footwell. spaces, for example closed garages.
▷ Footwell.
WARNING
Pre-cooling/pre-heating When the pre-heating is operating, high tem-
peratures can be generated under the body,
Principle for example because of the exhaust system.
If flammable materials come into contact with
The system consists of pre-cooling and pre-
hot parts of the exhaust system, these mate-
heating. It allows the temperature of the inte-
rials may ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make
rior to be adjusted before the journey starts.
sure that no flammable materials, for exam-
The interior is ventilated or heated depending
ple leaves, grass, gas, petrol, oil or other
on the set temperature and ambient temper-
flammable objects, can come into contact
ature. When doing so, the system uses any
with vehicle parts when the pre-heating is
available residual heat from the engine or the
operating. Switch off the pre-heating before
vehicle's fuel for generating heat.
refuelling.
General
The system can be switched on and off directly Operating requirements
or for a preselected departure time. ▷ The vehicle is in rest state or standby state
The switch-on time is calculated based on the and not in drive-ready state.
outside temperature. The system will switch ▷ The vehicle battery must be sufficiently
on in good time before the preselected depar- charged.
ture time.
When activated, the pre-cooling/pre-heat-
If outside temperatures are below 0 ℃, 32 ℉, ing uses power from the vehicle battery. As
water vapour condenses and exits underneath a result, the maximum operating time is re-
the vehicle. stricted to protect the vehicle battery. After
the engine is started or after driving a short
distance, the system will be available again.
▷ Pre-heating: the fuel tank capacity is suffi-
cient.
318
If the fuel tank capacity is low and the ve- Via iDrive
hicle is parked on a slant, the pre-heating
function may be restricted. Switching on
▷ Ensure that the date and time are set cor- 1. "CAR"
rectly in the vehicle. 2. "Settings"
▷ Open the ventilation air vents to allow the 3. "Climate comfort"
air to enter the passenger compartment.
4. "Pre-heating/ventilation"
Switching on/off directly 5. "Start now"
General Using the BMW display key

The system can be switched on or off in vari-
Switching on
ous ways.
1. Switch on the display of the BMW Display
The system switches off automatically after a
key.
while. It continues to run for a short time after it
has been switched off. 2. "Preconditioning setting"
3. Tap the icon or the icon.
Using the button 4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
General
If the vehicle is in standby state, the pre-cool- Switching off
ing can be switched on or off via the buttons of
the automatic air conditioning.
key.
Switching on 2. "Preconditioning setting"
Press any button, except: 3. Tap the icon or the icon.
▷ Rear window heating. 4. "Stop"
▷ Left side of amount of air button.

Display
▷ Seat heating.
The icon on the automatic air conditioning
▷ Active seat ventilation. signals that the system is switched on.
▷ SYNC programme. REST is shown on the climate display. The
▷ MENU. residual heat of the engine is being used.
Switching off Departure time

Press and hold left side button.
Principle
The system switches off after leaving and lock- To ensure a pleasant interior temperature in
ing the vehicle. the vehicle at the start of the journey, it is pos-
sible to set different departure times.
▷ One-off departure time: the time can be set.
319
The system is activated once. Activating the departure time

▷ Departure time with day of the week: the
time and day of the week can be set. Operating requirements
The system is switched on before the set If a departure time is to influence activation of
departure time on the required days of the the pre-heating/pre-cooling, the relevant de-
week. parture time must be activated first.
Preselection of departure time is done in two
Via iDrive
stages:
1. "CAR"
▷ Set the departure times.
2. "Settings"
▷ Activate the departure time.
At least 10 minutes should pass between
setting/activating the departure time and the 4. "Pre-heating/ventilation"
scheduled departure time, so the climate con- 5. "Departure plan"
trol has enough time to work. 6. Activate the required departure time.
Setting the departure time Using the BMW display key

Via iDrive
key.
1. "CAR"
2. "Preconditioning setting"
2. "Settings"
3. Tap the icon or the icon.
4. Tap the icon.
4. "Pre-heating/ventilation"
5. Activate the required departure time.
5. "Departure plan"
6. Select the required departure time. Display
7. Set the departure time. The icon on the climate display signals
8. Select the day of the week if necessary. that a departure time has been activated.
9. "OK"
Using the BMW display key

Pre-conditioning via Remote
1. Switch on the display of the BMW Display Engine Start
key.
2. "Preconditioning setting" Principle
3. Tap the icon or the icon. Pre-conditioning cools or warms the interior to
4. Select the required departure time. a comfortable temperature before the start of
a journey. The system does this by automati-
5. Set the departure time. cally cooling, ventilating or heating depending
6. Select the day of the week if necessary. on the internal, external and set desired tem-
7. "OK" perature. Any snow and ice can be removed
more easily.
The system starts the engine automatically for
this purpose and lets it run for a limited time.
320
Safety information ▷ Ensure that the date and time are set cor-
rectly in the vehicle.
▷ Ventilation air vents are open.
DANGER
A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ven- Enabling automatic engine start
pollute the area around the vehicle or enter it. Automatic engine start must be enabled once
The exhaust fumes contain pollutants which before using the system for the first time. This
are colourless and odourless. In enclosed enables the engine to switch on automatically
spaces or spaces with inadequate ventilation, in order to control the interior climate.
the exhaust fumes can also build up outside Via iDrive:
the vehicle. There is a danger to life. Keep the
1. "CAR"
exhaust pipe clear and ensure sufficient ven-
tilation. Do not switch on the pre-conditioning 2. "Settings"
in enclosed or poorly ventilated spaces, for 3. "Climate comfort"
example closed garages. 4. "Aux. climate control/ventil."
5. "Remote Engine Start"
6. "Engine start for climate control"
WARNING
7. Confirm the disclaimer.
When the pre-conditioning is operating, high
temperatures can be generated under the
body, for example because of the exhaust
Switching on/off directly
system. If flammable materials come into
contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, General
these materials may ignite. There is a risk The system switches off automatically after
of fire. Make sure that no flammable materi- approx. 15 minutes.
als, for example leaves, grass, gas, petrol, oil For safety reasons, the system can only be
or other flammable objects, can come into switched on twice in succession. The system
contact with vehicle parts when the pre-con- will be available again once the drive-ready
ditioning is operating. state has been activated and deactivated
again.
Operating requirements Switching on via iDrive

▷ Vehicle is in rest state or standby state and 1. "CAR"
not in drive-ready state.
2. "Settings"
▷ Battery must be sufficiently charged.
▷ For safety reasons, the system can only be
switched on twice in succession. The sys- 4. "Aux. climate control/ventil."
tem will be available again once the drive- 5. "Start now"
ready state has been activated and deacti-
vated again. Switching on/off using the vehicle key
▷ Fuel tank capacity is sufficient. The system can be switched on and off using
▷ Bonnet is closed. the vehicle key.
321
Press the vehicle key button three times The system is switched on as a one-off.
within 1 second. ▷ Departure time with day of the week: the
After the vehicle key is pressed, it will take scheduled departure time and day of the
around 3 seconds for the engine to switch on. week can be set.
Preselection of departure time is done in two
To switch the system off, press the button
stages:
again three times.
▷ Set the departure times.
Switching on using the BMW display ▷ Activate the departure time.
key The system is switched on around 10 minutes
1. Switch on the display of the BMW Display before the set departure time and remains on
key. for up to around 5 minutes after the set depar-
2. "Preconditioning setting" ture time.
3. Tap the icon. At least 10 minutes should pass between

setting/activating the departure time and the
4. "Activate now" scheduled departure time, so the climate con-
5. "Start" trol has enough time to work.
For safety reasons, the system can only be
Switching off using the BMW display switched on once. The system will be available
key again once the drive-ready state has been ac-
1. Switch on the display of the BMW Display tivated and deactivated again.
key. Observe the information regarding the inten-
2. "Preconditioning setting" ded use of the vehicle.
3. Tap the icon. For further information:
4. "Stop" Your own safety, see page 9.
Switching off using the Start/Stop Adjusting the departure time via iDrive
button 1. "CAR"
The system can be switched off directly: press 2. "Settings"
the Start/Stop button without depressing the 3. "Climate comfort"
brake pedal.
4. "Aux. climate control/ventil."
Switching on via the departure time 5. "Departure plan"
6. Select the required departure time.
General 7. Set the departure time.
To ensure a pleasant interior temperature in 8. Select the day of the week if necessary.
the vehicle at the start of the journey, it is pos-
sible to set scheduled departure times in the Adjusting the departure time using the
system. BMW display key
▷ One-off departure time: the scheduled de- 1. Switch on the display of the BMW Display
parture time can be set. key.
322
3. Tap the icon. The side lights remain switched on while the
4. Select the required departure time. system is switched on.
5. Set the departure time.

6. Select the day of the week if necessary. Ambient Air Package
7. "OK"
Principle
Activating the departure time via iDrive
With the Ambient Air Package, the interior air is
1. "CAR" cleaned and perfumed with selected fragran-
2. "Settings" ces.
4. "Aux. climate control/ventil."
General
5. "Departure plan" It is possible to choose between two fra-
grances in the vehicle. Additional fragrances
6. Activate the required departure time. are possible by exchanging the fragrance car-
tridges.
Activating the departure time using the
The following criteria can influence fragrance
BMW display key perception inside the vehicle interior:
▷ Settings of the automatic air conditioning.
key.
▷ Temperature and air humidity.
▷ Time of day and season.
3. Tap the icon.
▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occupants,
4. Activate the desired departure time:
for example fatigue.
Tap the icon.
BMW recommends using genuine BMW fra-
grance cartridges.
Display
Genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not
In the instrument cluster: refillable, and must be replaced by new fra-
The engine runs for the purpose grance cartridges after they are used up.
of operating the pre-condition-
ing. The vehicle is not ready to Safety information
drive.
, The icon on the automatic air condi- WARNING

tioning signals that a departure time has been Refilled BMW fragrance cartridges may emit
activated. harmful substances, and cause malfunctions
The icon flashes when the Remote Engine and damage to the system. There is a dan-
Start is switched on. ger of injury or material damage. Do not refill
fragrance cartridges; once they are used up,
Vehicle acknowledgement signals replace them with new fragrance cartridges.
The system switch-on is acknowledged by two

flashes.
323
Ioniser It is possible to choose between two fragran-

ces.
Principle 1. "CAR"
The ioniser cleans the interior air by removing 2. "Settings"
suspended particles and improves the air qual-
ity.
4. "Fragrance"
Switching the ioniser on/off 5. Select the desired fragrance.
1. "CAR"
Switching fragrancing on/off, setting
2. "Settings"
the intensity
1. "CAR"
4. "Air quality"
2. "Settings"
5. "Ionisation"
Fragrancing 4. "Fragrance"
5. "Level"
General 6. Select the desired setting.
Fragrancing is done at intervals to avoid famili-
arisation. Display
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle enable Illustrations on the control display show the
you to switch between fragrances. current filling level of the fragrance cartridges.
The fragrance cartridges are located in the 1. "CAR"
glove compartment.
2. "Settings"
To ensure a pleasant interior fragrance in the
vehicle at the start of the journey, fragrancing
can be started before you set off. The system 4. "Fragrance"
is automatically switched on with pre-cooling if When an empty fragrance cartridge is dis-
fragrancing was switched on at the end of the played, the cartridge still contains a fluid carry-
last journey. ing the fragrance. However, it is not sufficient
for fragrancing.
Operating requirements A Check Control message is displayed once
▷ The fragrance cartridges are adequately fil- when the fragrance cartridges have been used
led. up.
▷ The interior temperature is between +5 ℃,
41 ℉ and +40 ℃, 104 ℉. Insert fragrance cartridges (left-hand
▷ Open the ventilation air vents to allow the drive vehicle)
fragrance to enter the passenger compart- The fragrance cartridges are located in the
ment. glove compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
Selecting the fragrance
The interior is perfumed with the selected fra-
grance.
324
Glove compartment on the passenger's 5. Position the fragrance cartridge so the chip
side, see page 337. points away from the cartridge bracket.
2. Press the underside of the cartridge
bracket.
The cartridge holder slides downwards.
6. Slide the fragrance cartridge into the car-

tridge holder at a slight angle without ap-
plying pressure. The fragrance cartridge
is correctly positioned when the cartridge
3. Remove the cover of the new fragrance
holder can be closed.
cartridge. Grip the top of the cover to slide it
off the fragrance cartridge.
7. Push the cartridge holder upwards until it

engages.
4. Attach the removed cover to the rear side
of the fragrance cartridge. Make sure that no objects press against
the cartridge holder from underneath, oth-
erwise the function of the Ambient Air
Package could be impaired.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Inserting fragrance cartridges (right-

hand drive vehicle)
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment.
Glove compartment on the passenger's
side, see page 337.
2. Press on the cartridge holder.
325
The cartridge holder slides out. 5. Position the fragrance cartridge so the chip
points away from the cartridge bracket.
3. Remove the cover of the new fragrance

cartridge. Grip the top of the cover to slide it 6. Insert the fragrance cartridge into the car-
off the fragrance cartridge. tridge bracket without forcing it. The car-
tridge can be felt to engage slightly when
inserted.
4. Then attach the removed cover to the rear

side of the fragrance cartridge.
7. To close, push in the cartridge holder until it
engages.
Make sure that no objects press against
the cartridge holder from the side, other-
wise the function of the system could be
impaired.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing fragrance cartridges (left-

hand drive vehicle)
glove compartment.
Glove compartment on the passenger's
side, see page 337.
2. Press the underside of the cartridge
bracket.
326
The cartridge holder slides downwards. Glove compartment on the passenger's

side, see page 337.
2. Press on the cartridge holder.
The cartridge holder slides out.
3. Pull the required fragrance cartridge out of

the bracket.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance
displayed on the control display. 3. Pull the required fragrance cartridge out of
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra- the bracket.
grance displayed on the control display. Fragrance cartridge 1: first fragrance dis-
played on the control display.
Fragrance cartridge 2: second fragrance
4. Pull the required fragrance cartridge out of

the bracket.
4. Pull the fragrance cartridge to be removed

out of the holder.
Removing fragrance cartridges (right-

hand drive vehicle)
glove compartment.
327
Recycling
Empty fragrance cartridges can be
handed over for recycling at an author-
ised Service Partner or another quali-
328
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment

Parts of the body can be trapped when oper-
ating radio-controlled systems, for example
a garage door, with the integrated universal
remote control. There is a danger of injury
or material damage. During programming
and operation, make sure that the movement
range of the system concerned is kept clear.
Also follow the safety notes supplied with the
hand-held transmitter.
tems.
Integrated universal remote Compatibility

control This icon on the packaging or in the
operating instructions of the system to
be operated indicates that the system
Principle is generally compatible with the integrated uni-
The integrated universal remote control in the versal remote control.
interior mirror can be used to operate up to A list of compatible hand-held transmitters is
3 functions of radio-controlled systems; for ex- available on the Internet: www.homelink.com
ample, garage door drives, barriers or lighting
systems. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
General The integrated universal remote control does
The integrated universal remote control repla- not support the frequency band 27 MHz to
ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. 40 MHz.
To use the opener, the buttons on the interior
mirror must be programmed with the desired
functions. The hand-held transmitter of the rel-
evant system is needed for programming.
If you sell the vehicle, delete the saved func-
tions beforehand for your own safety.
If possible, do not attach the aerial of the
radio-controlled system, for example the ga-
rage door drive, near to metallic objects; this is
to ensure optimum functioning.
329
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Operating elements on the interior 5. Press and hold the button of the desired
mirror function on the hand-held transmitter.
6. ▷ The LED is illuminated green: program-
ming is complete.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes rapidly: programming
is not complete.
Press and hold the button on the inte-
rior mirror for 2 seconds, then release.
Repeat this process three times to com-
plete programming.
▷ Buttons, arrow 1. If the integrated universal remote con-
▷ LED, arrow 2. trol is still not operational, continue from
Special instruction for alternating-code
▷ Hand-held transmitter arrow 3; required for
radio systems.
programming.
▷ The LED does not flash green after
60 seconds: programming could not be
Programming completed.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
General
To programme other functions on other but-
The battery in the hand-held transmitter must tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
be fully charged during programming to en-
sure the integrated universal remote control
will have the optimum range.
radio systems
1. Switch on standby state. If the radio-controlled system cannot be op-
2. Initial operation: erated after repeated programming, check
Simultaneously press and hold the two whether the system to be operated is equip-
outer buttons on the interior mirror for ap- ped with an alternating-code radio system.
proximately 10 seconds until the LED on To do so, consult the operating instructions for
the interior mirror flashes green rapidly. All the system.
current programming for the buttons on the For systems with an alternating-code radio
interior mirror is deleted. system, the integrated universal remote con-
3. On the interior mirror, press the button you trol and the system must also be synchron-
wish to programme. The LED on the inte- ised.
rior mirror flashes orange slowly. Information on synchronisation can be found
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys- in the operating instructions of the system you
tem you wish to operate approximately 2.5 wish to set.
to 30 cm, 1 to 12 in away from the buttons To make synchronisation easier, enlist the as-
on the interior mirror. The distance required sistance of a second person.
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
330
Synchronise integrated universal remote con- Repeat this process three times to com-
trol with system: plete programming.
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the If the integrated universal remote con-
radio remote-controlled system. trol is still not operational, continue from
2. Programme the corresponding button on
radio systems.
the interior mirror as described.
▷ The LED does not flash green after
3. Locate and press the synchronisation but-
60 seconds: programming could not be
ton on the system being set, for example
completed.
on the garage door. The next step must
be carried out within approximately 30 sec- Repeat steps 3 to 6.
onds. If the programming process is not complete,
4. Hold down the programmed button on the the previous programming will be retained.
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release. Repeat this step as nee- Operation
ded up to three times to end synchronisa-
tion. When synchronisation is completed,
WARNING
the programmed function is performed.
Parts of the body can be trapped when oper-
Reprogramming individual buttons ating radio-controlled systems, for example
a garage door, with the integrated universal
1. Switch on standby state. remote control. There is a danger of injury
2. On the interior mirror, press and hold the or material damage. During programming
button being programmed. and operation, make sure that the movement
3. After approximately 20 seconds, when the range of the system concerned is kept clear.
LED on the interior mirror starts to flash Also follow the safety notes supplied with the
orange, release the button. hand-held transmitter.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the sys-
The system, for example the garage door, can
tem you wish to operate approximately 2.5
be operated using the button on the interior
to 30 cm, 1 to 12 in away from the buttons
mirror when driving readiness or standby state
on the interior mirror. The distance required
is switched on. To do this, press and hold the
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
button within the reception range of the sys-
5. Press and hold the button of the desired tem until the function is triggered. The LED
function on the hand-held transmitter. on the interior mirror illuminates continuously
6. The LED can illuminate in various ways. while the radio signal is being transmitted.
▷ The LED is illuminated green: program-
ming is complete. Deleting saved functions
Release the button. All saved functions are deleted. It is not possi-
▷ The LED flashes rapidly: the hand-held ble to delete functions individually.
transmitter has been detected, but pro- Simultaneously press and hold the two outer
gramming is not complete. buttons on the interior mirror for approximately
Press and hold the button on the inte- 10 seconds until the LED flashes green rapidly.
rior mirror for 2 seconds, then release.
331
Sun visor Safety information
Glare protection WARNING

Fold the sun visor downwards or upwards. Devices and cables, for example portable
navigation devices, that are located in the de-
Protection from glare at the side ployment range of the airbags may impede
airbag deployment or be thrown around the
Folding out vehicle interior when the airbag is deployed.
There is a danger of injury. Make sure that
1. Fold down the sun visor. devices and cables are not in the deployment
2. Detach the sun visor from its holder and range of the airbags.
pivot it sideways to the side window.
Folding in NOTICE
To close the sun visor, proceed in reverse or-
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
der.
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the
vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V
Vanity mirror electrical system. There is a risk of material
A vanity mirror is located behind a cover in the damage. Only connect battery chargers for
sun visor. The mirror light switches on when the vehicle battery to the starting aid termi-
the cover is opened. nals in the engine compartment.
Sockets NOTICE
If metallic objects fall into the socket, they can
Principle cause a short circuit. There is a risk of mate-
The socket can be used for electronic devi- rial damage. After using the socket, re-fit the
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is cigarette lighter or socket cover.
switched on.
General Front centre console

The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 V.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Slide the cover forwards until it engages.
332
USB port
General
Please comply with the notes on connecting
mobile devices to the USB port in the chapter
on USB connections.
USB connections, see page 85.
The socket is located between the cup holders.
Pull off the cover. In the centre armrest
Rear centre console
There is a USB port in the centre armrest.

Properties:
There is a socket in the centre console. ▷ USB port type C.
Pull off the cover. ▷ For charging mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
Inside the luggage compartment
Steptronic transmission: in the
centre console
NOTICE
Objects in the storage compartment, for ex-
ample large USB connectors, can block or
damage the cover on opening and closing.
There is a risk of material damage. When
There is a socket on the right side of the lug- opening and closing, make sure that the
gage compartment. Open the cover. movement range of the cover is kept clear.
333
▷ USB port type C.

▷ For charging mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: maximum 3 A per port.
Wireless charging tray

Principle
Slide the cover forwards until it engages. The wireless charging tray allows wireless
charging of mobile phones and other mobile
devices certified according to the Qi standard.
General
When inserting the device to be charged, make
sure that there are no objects between the de-
vice to be charged and the wireless charging
tray.
The charging process is indicated by the
There is a USB port in the centre console. charge indicator on the control display.
Properties: Safety information

▷ USB port type A.
▷ For charging mobile devices and transfer- WARNING
ring data.
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
▷ Charge current: maximum 1.5 A. wireless charging tray, any metal objects lo-
cated between the device and the tray can
In the rear centre console become very hot. If storage media or elec-
tronic cards, for example smart cards, cards
with magnetic strips or cards for transmit-
ting signals, are placed between the device
and the tray, their function may be impaired.
There is a danger of injury or material dam-
age. When charging mobile devices, make
sure there are no objects between the device
and the tray.
There are two USB ports in the rear centre Overview

console.
Dock in the centre console:
Properties:
334
LED displays
Col- Meaning
our
Blue The mobile phone is charging.

The blue LED stays illuminated once
the inserted Qi-compatible mobile
phone is fully charged.
1 LED Or- The mobile phone is not charging.
2 Dock surface ange The mobile phone may be exposed
to excessively high temperature or
Operating requirements there may be foreign bodies in the
charging cradle.
▷ The device to be charged must have been
certified according to the Qi standard. Red The mobile phone is not charging.
▷ Standby state is switched on. Contact an authorised Service Part-
▷ A potential parking manoeuvre must be ner or another qualified Service Part-
completed using Remote Control Parking. ner or a specialist workshop.
▷ The maximum size for a mobile phone is

approximately 154.5 x 80 x 18 mm, 6.06 x Forgotten phone warning
3.1 x 0.7 in.
▷ Protective sleeves and covers must be suit- General
able for wireless charging. A warning can be issued if a mobile phone with
▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located Qi certification has been left in the wireless
in the middle of the dock. The display of the charging tray when exiting the vehicle.
mobile phone faces upwards. The forgotten phone warning is shown in the
instrument cluster.
Inserting the mobile phone
1. Open the cover of the dock.
Enabling/disabling the forgotten
warning
2. Place the mobile phone in the centre of the
dock with the display facing upwards. 1. "CAR"
3. Close the cover of the dock. 2. "Settings"

4. "Wireless charging tray"
5. "Activate reminder"
System limits
The charging current may be reduced or
charging may be temporarily interrupted in the
wireless charging tray in the following situa-
tions:
335
▷ Due to excessive temperatures of the tray

and mobile phone.
▷ When there are objects between the mobile
phone and wireless charging tray.
▷ By protective sleeves and covers that ex-
ceed a thickness of 2 mm, 0.07 in.
▷ By protective sleeves and covers made
of unsuitable material, e.g. with magnetic
parts.
▷ By add-on parts on the mobile phone, e.g.
holders.
▷ By settings on the mobile phone, for ex-
ample for charging. Follow the relevant in-
structions on the control display and in the
instructions for the mobile phone, if applica-
ble.
336
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment Glove compartment
equipment and functions which are not avail- WARNING
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the The glove compartment protrudes into the
optional equipment selected or the national- interior when it is open. Objects in the glove
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- compartment may be thrown into the interior
evant functions and systems. Please comply during the journey, for example in the event
with the relevant laws and regulations when of an accident or when braking or taking
using the corresponding functions and sys- avoidance manoeuvre. There is a danger of
tems. injury. Immediately close the glove compart-
ment after using it.
Storage facilities
Opening the glove compartment
General
The vehicle interior contains multiple storage
compartments for stowing objects.
Safety information
WARNING
Devices connected to the vehicle with a ca-
ble, e.g. mobile phones, or loose objects can
Pull the handle.
be thrown around the interior while driving,
e.g. in the event of an accident, or when The lighting in the glove compartment comes
braking or performing evasive manoeuvres. on.
There is a danger of injury. Secure devices
connected to the vehicle with a cable or loose Locking the glove compartment
objects.
The glove compartment can be locked with
an integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
NOTICE
After the glove compartment has been locked,
Anti-slip mats can damage the instrument the vehicle key can be handed over without the
panel. There is a risk of material damage. Do integrated key, for example if the car is being
not use anti-slip mats. parked by a valet service.
337
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Integrated key, see page 102. Safety information
Fold-down compartment WARNING

Breakable objects, for example glass bottles
Safety information or glasses, may get broken in the event of an
accident or when braking or taking avoidance
manoeuvre. Splinters may scatter throughout
WARNING the interior. There is a danger of injury or ma-
The fold-down compartment protrudes into terial damage. Do not use breakable objects
the interior when open. Objects in the fold- during a journey. Only stow breakable objects
down compartment may be thrown into the in closed storage compartments.
interior while driving, for example in the event
of an accident or when braking or performing
avoidance manoeuvres. There is a danger of
injury. Immediately close the fold-down com-
Storage compartment in the
partment after use. centre console
Opening the storage compartment
Opening the fold-down
compartment
Pull the handle.

Closing the storage compartment
Tap the handle strip on the cover. The cover
closes.
Storage compartments in
the doors
Storage compartment in the
General rear of the centre console
There are storage compartments in the doors.
There is either one storage compartment or
there are two storage compartments in back of
the centre console.
338
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Front centre armrest Opening the cup holder
General
There is a storage compartment in the centre
armrest between the seats.
Opening the storage compartment
Press the key.

Press the lid down until it engages. There are two cup holders in the centre con-
sole.
Cup holder front

Closing the cup holder
Safety information Tap the handle strip on the cover. The cover
closes.
WARNING
Unsuitable containers placed in the cup hold- Cup holder rear
ers may damage the cup holders or be flung
into the interior, for example in the event of Safety information
an accident or when braking or taking avoid-
ance manoeuvre. Spilt liquids can distract the
driver from the traffic situation and lead to WARNING
an accident. Hot beverages may damage the Unsuitable containers placed in the cup hold-
cup holders or cause scalding. There is a ers may damage the cup holders or be flung
danger of injury or material damage. Do not into the interior, for example in the event of
force objects into the cup holder. Use light- an accident or when braking or taking avoid-
weight, sealable and shatterproof containers. ance manoeuvre. Spilt liquids can distract the
Do not transport hot drinks. driver from the traffic situation and lead to
an accident. Hot beverages may damage the
cup holders or cause scalding. There is a
danger of injury or material damage. Do not
339
CONTROLS Storage compartments
force objects into the cup holder. Use light-

weight, sealable and shatterproof containers.
Coat hooks
Do not transport hot drinks.
General
The coat hooks are located in the grab handles
NOTICE in the rear and on the body pillar in the rear.
If the cup holder is open, the centre armrest
cannot be folded back. There is a risk of ma- Safety information
terial damage. Press back the covers before
folding up the centre armrest. WARNING
Items of clothing on the coat hooks can im-
pair visibility when driving. There is a risk
Opening and closing the cup holder
of accident. Hang items of clothing from the
coat hooks in such a way that they do not
General
obstruct visibility when driving.
The cup holder can be adapted to fit three
sizes.
WARNING
Opening the cup holder
Incorrect use of the coat hooks can present
a danger, for example if objects are thrown
around as a result of braking or avoidance
manoeuvres. There is a danger of injury or
material damage. Only hang lightweight ob-
jects, for example items of clothing, on the
coat hooks.
Fold the centre armrest forwards.

Press the button and fold out the cup holder
fully.
Downsizing the cup holder

To make it smaller, the cup holder can be fol-
ded in 2 steps.
Enlarging the cup holder

To enlarge a reduced cup holder again, first
fold it in completely. Then fold the cup holder
out again fully.
Closing the cup holder

Fold in the cup holder fully until it engages.
340
Luggage compartment CONTROLS
Luggage compartment
Vehicle equipment
WARNING
This chapter describes all standard, country- Devices connected to the vehicle with a ca-
specific and optional equipment available for ble, e.g. mobile phones, or loose objects can
the model range. It may therefore describe be thrown around the interior while driving,
equipment and functions which are not avail- e.g. in the event of an accident, or when
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the braking or performing evasive manoeuvres.
optional equipment selected or the national- There is a danger of injury. Secure devices
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- connected to the vehicle with a cable or loose
evant functions and systems. Please comply objects.
tems. WARNING
Incorrectly stowed objects may slip or be
Loading thrown into the interior, for example in the
event of an accident or when braking or tak-
ing avoidance manoeuvre. Vehicle occupants
Safety information could be struck and injured. There is a dan-
ger of injury. Stow and secure objects and the
load correctly.
WARNING
A high total weight can make the tyres over-
heat, causing internal damage and a sudden
tyre pressure loss. Handling characteristics NOTICE
may be adversely affected, for example re- Liquids in the luggage compartment may
duced directional stability, longer stopping cause damage. There is a risk of material
distance and altered steering characteristics. damage. Ensure that no liquids leak out into
There is a risk of accident. Please comply the luggage compartment.
with the permitted load index of the tyre, and
do not exceed the permitted total weight.
Stowing and securing loads in the
vehicle
WARNING ▷ Wrap protective material around any sharp
If the permitted total weight and the permit- corners and edges on the load.
ted axle loads are exceeded, the operational ▷ Heavy loads: stow as far forward as possi-
safety of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed. ble, low down and directly behind the rear
There is a risk of accident. Do not exceed seat backrests.
the permitted total weight and permitted axle ▷ Very heavy loads: stow as far forward as
loads. possible, low down and directly behind the
rear seat backrests. If there are no passen-
341
CONTROLS Luggage compartment
gers on the rear seat, insert both outer seat

belts into the respective opposite buckles.
Multifunction hook
▷ Fold down the rear seat backrests com-
pletely to stow large loads.
General
▷ Do not stack loads above the upper edge of There is a multifunction hook on the left-hand
the backrests. side in the luggage compartment.
▷ Secure load-securing equipment to the

Safety information
lashing eyes in the luggage compartment.
▷ Small and lightweight load: secure with ten-
sioning straps or, depending on the equip- WARNING
ment, a luggage compartment net or re- Incorrect use of the multifunction hook may
taining straps. present a danger, for example if objects are
▷ Large and heavy loads: secure with lashing flung around when performing braking and
straps. avoidance manoeuvres. There is a danger of
injury or material damage. Only hang light-
weight objects from the multifunction hooks.
Lashing eyes in the luggage Only transport heavy luggage in the luggage
compartment compartment if suitably secured.
General Folding down the multifunction

Load-securing equipment, for example lashing hook
straps, tensioning straps, retaining straps or
luggage compartment nets, must be secured
to the lashing eyes in the luggage compart-
ment.
Lashing eyes
Press on the multifunction hook and turn it un-

til it engages.
Net
Four lashing eyes are located in the luggage Smaller objects can be stowed in the net on
compartment for securing loads. the left-hand side.
342
Side storage compartment, Opening the storage compartment

right
There is a storage compartment on the right
side of the luggage compartment.
Side storage compartment,

left
Fold up the luggage compartment floor.
General
There is a storage compartment on the left
side of the luggage compartment.
Press the luggage compartment floor down-
Opening the storage compartment wards.
Through-loading system
Principle
The luggage compartment can be enlarged by
folding down the rear seat backrests.
General
Pull the handle. The rear seat backrest is split 40–20–40. The
rear seat backrests on each side and the cen-
tre section can be folded down individually.
With emergency The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the luggage compartment. The centre
spare wheel: storage section can be folded down separately from
compartment under the the rear.
luggage compartment floor
Safety information
General
WARNING
There is a storage compartment under the lug-
gage compartment floor. Risk of entrapment when folding down the
rear seat backrest. There is a danger of injury
or material damage. Before folding down,
rear seat backrest and the head restraint is
clear.
343
Folding down the rear seat backrest

WARNING from the luggage compartment
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse- 1. Unlock the belt lock of the centre seat belt
cured load may be flung into the interior, in the rear passenger compartment with
for example in the event of an accident or the seat belt tongue of another seat belt.
when braking or taking avoidance manoeu-
2. Insert the seat belt tongue at the end of the
vre. There is a danger of injury. Make sure
seat belt into the designated mounting on
that the rear seat backrest is locked after it
the parcel shelf.
has been folded back.
WARNING
If the seat is not set properly or the child
seat has been installed incorrectly, the child
restraint system may have restricted or no
stability at all. There is a danger of injury
or danger to life. Make sure that the child
restraint system rests firmly against the seat
backrest. Wherever possible, adapt the back- 3. Push the respective head restraint as far
rest angle of all relevant seat backrests and down as possible.
adjust the seats correctly. Make sure that 4. Pull the corresponding lever in the lug-
the seats and their backrests are correctly gage compartment to unlock the rear seat
engaged or locked. If possible and if neces- backrest. The unlocked rear seat backrest
sary, adjust the height of the head restraints moves slightly to the front.
or remove them.
NOTICE
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
down the rear seat backrest. There is a risk of
material damage. When folding down, make
sure that the movement range of the rear
seat backrest, including the head restraint, is
kept clear. 5. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
344
Folding back the rear seat backrest Taking out the emergency spare
1. Fold back the rear seat backrest into the wheel and storage elements
seat position and engage. 1. To remove the luggage compartment floor,
2. Remove seat belt tongue from the mount pull it up directly behind the rear seat
on the parcel shelf. backrests.
3. Put seat belt tongue into the belt lock of
the centre safety belt. The seat belt tongue
must be heard to engage.
Folding down the middle section

1. Fold down the middle head restraint.
2. Pull the lever and fold the centre section
forwards.
2. Open tensioning strap.

3. Remove tool holder.
With emergency spare

wheel: enlarging the 4. Remove emergency spare wheel from the
luggage compartment storage tray.
5. Release the tensioning strap from the lash-
ing eyes.
Principle
6. Remove the storage compartment.
The emergency spare wheel and associated
components can be removed temporarily to in-
crease the luggage compartment space.
345
7. Remove the storage tray.
8. Insert the luggage compartment floor.
Inserting the emergency spare

wheel and storage elements
Proceed in reverse order to insert the emer-
gency spare wheel and storage elements.
346
347
DRIVING HINTS Driving precautions
Driving precautions
Vehicle equipment Engine, transmission and
differential
specific and optional equipment available for Up to 2000 km, 1200 miles
the model range. It may therefore describe Do not exceed the maximum rotational speed
equipment and functions which are not avail- and vehicle speed:
▷ With petrol engines,4500 rpm and
160 km/h, 100 mph.
evant functions and systems. Please comply ▷ With diesel engine,3500 rpm and 150 km/h,
with the relevant laws and regulations when 93 mph.
using the corresponding functions and sys- Generally avoid kickdown and driving under full
tems. load.
From 2000 km, 1200 miles onwards

Running-in instructions Rotational speed and vehicle speed can be
gradually increased.
General
Moving parts need to adjust to each other. Tyres
The following notes will help to maximise the Due to the manufacturing process, new tyres
vehicle's lifetime and efficiency. do not achieve their full road grip immediately.
Do not use Launch Control when running in. Drive moderately for the first 300 km,
200 miles.
Safety information
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads must be run in
WARNING
to avoid effects that can lead to brake noise.
New parts and components can cause safety Drive moderately for the first 500 km, approx.
and driver assistance systems to respond 300 miles.
with a delay. There is a risk of accident. After
new parts have been installed or if the vehi-
After fitting new parts
cle is new, drive moderately and take action
promptly if necessary. Please comply with Please comply with the running-in procedures
running-in procedures for the corresponding again if the components previously referred to
parts and components. are renewed.
348
Driving precautions DRIVING HINTS
General driving notes or apply underbody protection to them. Make

sure that when driving, idling or parking, no
flammable materials can come into contact
Closing the boot lid with hot vehicle parts.
Safety information
Exhaust gas particulate filter
WARNING
Principle
When open, the boot lid protrudes above the
The exhaust gas particulate filter traps soot
vehicle, and in the event of an accident, brak-
particles. The soot particles are burned at high
ing or avoidance manoeuvre, it can endanger
temperatures to clean the exhaust gas particu-
vehicle occupants and other road users, or
late filter as when required.
damage the vehicle. There is also a risk of
exhaust fumes entering the vehicle interior.
General
age. Do not drive with the boot lid open. The cleaning process takes a few minutes,
during which the following may occur:
▷ The engine may temporarily run a little
Driving with the boot lid open roughly.
If the vehicle still needs to be driven with the ▷ A slightly higher rotational speed may be
boot lid open: required to achieve the usual power output.
▷ Close all the windows and the glass sun- ▷ Fuel consumption may increase. The in-
roof. creased fuel consumption is shown as the
▷ Adjust the blower output to a high setting. mean value in the current consumption dis-
▷ Maintain a moderate speed. play.
▷ There may be a small amount of smoke
Hot exhaust system from the exhaust system, even after stop-
ping the engine.
▷ Noise, for example from radiator fan oper-
WARNING
ation, may be heard, even some minutes
High temperatures may occur under the vehi- after stopping the engine.
cle body during driving, for example because
It is normal for the radiator fan to keep running
of the exhaust system. Contact with the ex-
for several minutes, even after short journeys.
haust system may cause burns. There is a
danger of injury. Do not touch the hot ex-
Cleaning the exhaust gas particulate
haust system, including the exhaust pipe.
filter while driving
The diesel particulate filter has a self-clean-
ing feature. No further action is required, such
WARNING
as adjusting your driving style.
If flammable materials, for example leaves or
If, in addition to the self-cleaning function, the
grass, come into contact with hot parts of the
exhaust gas particulate filter needs to be ac-
exhaust system, these materials can catch
tively cleaned while driving, a Check Control
fire. There is a risk of fire and injury. Never
message is displayed. Proceed as follows the
remove the heat shields installed in this area
349
next time you drive outside of built-up areas vehicle can neither be steered, nor the brakes
for around 30 minutes. properly applied.
With diesel engine:
▷ Activate the Sport programme.
Driving through water
Steptronic transmission, see page 163.
General
▷ If possible, drive at a constant speed.
Please comply with the following when driving
through water:
Radio signals
▷ Deactivate the Automatic Start/Stop func-
tion.
WARNING ▷ Only drive through still water.
Certain vehicle functions may be affected by ▷ Only drive through water up to a max.
interference from high-frequency radio sig- depth of 25 cm, 9.8 in.
nals. Such signals are output from a series
▷ Drive through water at a walking speed of
of transmission systems, for example from
no more than 5 km/h, 3 mph.
air traffic beacons or relay stations for mobile
telecommunications.
Safety information
We recommend you consult your Service
Partner should you experience any difficul-
ties. NOTICE
Driving too quickly through excessively deep
water can cause water to enter the engine
Mobile radio in the vehicle compartment, electrical system or transmis-
sion. There is a risk of material damage.
When driving through water, do not exceed
WARNING
the maximum water depth and maximum
There is a possibility of reciprocal interfer- speed specified above.
ence between the vehicle electronics and
mobile radio devices. Radiation is generated
when mobile radio devices are transmitting. Safe braking
age. If possible, only use mobile radio devi- General
ces, for example mobile phones, inside the
vehicle if they are connected directly to an The vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Brak-
external aerial or personal eSIM in order to ing System as standard.
eliminate reciprocal interference and to divert Perform full braking in situations that require it.
the radiation away from the vehicle interior. The vehicle remains steerable. Steer as
smoothly as possible to avoid any obstacles.
A pulsing of the brake pedal and hydraulic reg-
Aquaplaning
ulating sounds indicate that the Anti-lock Brak-
On wet or slushy roads, a water wedge can ing System is functioning.
form between the tyres and the road.
In certain braking situations, the perforated
This phenomenon is known as aquaplaning brake discs can cause functional noise. How-
and can cause the tyre to lose contact partially ever, the functional noises have no effect on
or fully with the road surface, meaning that the
350
the efficiency and operational safety of the Safety information

brake.
WARNING
Objects in the movement range of the
pedals Even slight but continuous pressure on the
brake pedal can cause overheating, brake
wear or even brake system failure. There is
WARNING a risk of accident. Avoid excessive loads on
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the the brake.
pedal travel or block a pedal that has been
pressed. There is a risk of accident. Ensure
that items in the vehicle are stowed securely WARNING
and cannot get into the driver's footwell. Only
In idle or when the engine is switched off,
use floor mats that are suitable for the ve-
safety-relevant functions, for example engine
hicle and can be securely fastened to the
braking effect or steering and braking force
floor. Do not use loose floor mats, and do
assistance, are either restricted or not avail-
not place several floor mats on top of one an-
able at all. There is a risk of accident. Do not
other. Make sure that there is sufficient space
drive in idle or with the engine switched off.
for the pedals. Ensure that floor mats are se-
curely reattached after removal, for example
for cleaning. Corrosion of the brake disc
Corrosion of the brake discs and contamina-
Wet roads tion of the brake pads increase in the following
circumstances:
In wet weather, road salt exposure and in
heavy rain, apply the brakes lightly every few ▷ Low mileage.
kilometres/miles. ▷ Extended stationary periods when the vehi-
Ensure that you do not obstruct other road cle is not used.
users when doing so. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
The heat generated by braking dries the ▷ Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning
brake discs and brake pads and protects them agents.
against corrosion. During braking, corroded brake discs may
This helps to maintain braking power so that it cause juddering which usually cannot be elimi-
is available immediately when needed. nated.
Downhill gradient Condensation when vehicle is

parked
General
When the automatic air conditioning is oper-
When driving on long or steep downhill ating, condensation develops and exits under-
stretches, use the gear in which the least brak- neath the vehicle.
ing is required. Otherwise the brake system
can overheat and the braking effect is reduced.
Engine braking effect can be additionally in-
creased by manually shifting down, even into
first gear where required.
351
Pennant holder Safety information
Safety information
WARNING
When driving with a roof load, for example
NOTICE with a roof rack, the higher centre of grav-
When a pennant is attached, damage can be ity can mean that driving safety is no lon-
caused to the vehicle, to the pennant holder ger guaranteed in critical driving situations.
and to the pennant itself at high speeds. There is a risk of accident or material dam-
There is a risk of material damage. Do not age. Driving with roof load only with activated
exceed a speed of 130 km/h, 80 mph. Re- Dynamic Stability Control.
move the pennant before driving at high
speeds.
Roof strip with flaps
The mounting points are located on the roof
Overview strip above the doors.
The pennant holder is located on the side of Fold the cover outwards.
the vehicle.
Fitting
Fitting
Follow the installation instructions for the roof
1. Remove the protective cap. rack.
2. Insert the pennant horizontally. Make sure that there is sufficient space to raise
3. Rotate the pennant through 90° clockwise and open the glass sunroof.
to lock the pennant in place.
Magnetic roof luggage racks
Roof rack Due to the aluminium roof, magnetic roof lug-
gage racks cannot be used.
General Loading
Roof racks are available as optional accesso- A loaded roof rack alters the vehicle's road be-
ries. haviour and steering response by shifting its
centre of gravity.
Therefore when loading and driving, bear the
following in mind:
352
▷ Do not exceed the permitted roof and axle Loading

load or the permitted total weight.
▷ Make sure that there is sufficient space to
raise and open the glass sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load evenly.
▷ The roof load must not be spread over too
large an area.
▷ Place heavy items of luggage at the bot-
tom.
▷ Securely fasten the luggage, for example
with tensioning straps. The permitted total weight of the rear luggage
rack when loaded depends on how far its cen-
▷ Do not allow objects to protrude into the
tre of gravity is from the ball head.
swing range of the boot lid.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid driving off and ▷ If the centre of gravity is up to 30 cm, ap-
braking suddenly or fast cornering. prox. 11.8 in away from the ball head, the
total weight of the rear luggage rack must
not exceed 75 kg, 165 lbs.
Rear luggage rack ▷ If the centre of gravity is 60 cm, approx.
23.5 in from the ball head, the total weight
Principle of the rear luggage rack must not exceed
35 kg, 77 lbs.
The ball head of the trailer tow hitch can be
used as a mount for rear luggage racks, for ▷ Stow heavy loads as close as possible to
example bicycle carrier systems. the ball head.
▷ Fasten loads securely to the rear lug-
General gage rack and secure them against sliding
around.
Rear luggage racks which the manufacturer
has classified as suitable are available as op-
tional accessories. Before a journey
Bicycle carrier systems for up to three bicycles Before the start of a journey, check that the
can be used. rear lights on the rear luggage rack are work-
ing.
Fitting The maximum output of the rear luggage rack
rear lights must not exceed the values for
Follow the installation instructions for the rear
trailer rear lights.
luggage rack.
To prevent functional limitations and malfunc-
tions affecting driver assistance systems, acti-
vate trailer operation.
▷ Power consumption, see page 356.
▷ Activating trailer operation, see page 358.
353
Driving with a rear luggage rack

Loaded rear luggage racks change the driving
and steering behaviour of the vehicle by shift-
ing the centre of gravity.
Therefore when loading and driving, bear the
following in mind:
▷ Do not exceed the permitted axle load or
the permitted total weight.
▷ Drive smoothly and avoid driving off and
braking suddenly or fast cornering.
Driving on a racing track
WARNING
The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport
competitions or similar. There is a risk of
accident. Do not use the vehicle in M Sport
competitions or similar.
The higher mechanical and thermal loads in-

volved when driving on racing tracks lead to
increased wear. This wear is not covered by
the warranty.
Before and after driving on a racing track, have
the vehicle checked at an authorised Service
Partner or another qualified Service Partner or
a specialist workshop.
354
Trailer operation DRIVING HINTS
Trailer operation
Vehicle equipment junction with any towbar-mounted carrying de-
vice, such as, for example, a bicycle carrier.
This chapter describes all standard, country- As all BMW Group towbar assemblies are de-
specific and optional equipment available for signed, tested and approved as a single unit,
the model range. It may therefore describe the practice of modifying or replacing the BMW
equipment and functions which are not avail- supplied towball mount assembly is not ap-
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the proved. Use only the genuine BMW towball
optional equipment selected or the national- mount assembly.
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- BMW Group Australia does not recommend or
evant functions and systems. Please comply support the installation and use of a Weight
with the relevant laws and regulations when Distribution Hitch or Load Levelling Device on
using the corresponding functions and sys- any BMW Group vehicle. The use of such devi-
tems. ces may affect the vehicle's warranty status.
We recommend you consult your Authorised
BMW Dealer for any further advice or clarifica-
General tion.
The permitted trailer loads, axle loads, trailer

nose weights and permitted total weight rating Before a journey
are specified in the technical data.
Consult an authorised Service Partner or an-
Trailer nose weight
other qualified Service Partner or a special-
ist workshop about options for increasing the The trailer nose weight should not be less
loads. than the minimum trailer nose weight of 25 kg,
55 lb. Utilise the maximum trailer nose weight
The vehicle is equipped with reinforced springs
as far as possible.
on the rear axle and, depending on the vehicle
type, with a more powerful cooling system. The weight of the trailer tow hitch and the
trailer nose weight reduce the maximum load
of the towing vehicle. The trailer nose weight
For Australia: note increases the vehicle weight. Do not exceed
the permitted total weight of the towing vehi-
cle.
Towing
The Australian/New Zealand Standards AS Loading
4177.1-2004 Caravan and light trailer towing
Distribute the load as evenly as possible over
components – trailer tow hitches and tow-
the loading area.
ing brackets includes the following statement
which BMW Group Australia herewith adopts: Stow the load as low down as possible and as
FOR TRAILER TOWING ONLY. The trailer tow close as possible to the trailer axle. A low cen-
hitch supplied with your BMW vehicle should tre of trailer gravity makes the car/trailer com-
only be used for towing purposes, the trailer bination much more stable and safe to drive.
tow hitch assembly should not be used in con-
355
DRIVING HINTS Trailer operation
The permitted total weight of the trailer and Power consumption

the permitted trailer load of the vehicle must
not be exceeded. The lower value is the limit General
which should be adhered to.
Before the start of a journey, check the func-
tion of the trailer rear lights.
Tyre inflation pressure
When towing a caravan, only operate power
Check the vehicle's and the trailer's tyre infla- consumers briefly to avoid placing an exces-
tion pressures carefully. sive load on the vehicle battery.
On the vehicle, the tyre inflation pressure for
higher loads applies. Not Australia/New Zealand:Trailer
For the trailer, the regulations of the manufac- rear lights
turer apply. The power output of the trailer's rear lights
For further information: must not exceed the following values:
Tyre inflation pressure information, see ▷ Turn indicators: 42 watts per side.
page 372. ▷ Rear lights: 50 watts per side.
▷ Brake lights: 84 watts total.
Flat tyre monitor
▷ Rear fog lights: 42 watts total.
Initialise the flat tyre monitor after the tyre in-
flation pressure has been corrected or a trailer ▷ Reversing lights: 42 watts total.
has been attached or detached.
Australia/New Zealand:Trailer rear
lights
Flat Tyre Monitor, see page 390.
▷ Turn indicators: 54 watts per side.
Tyre Pressure Monitor ▷ Rear lights: 100 watts in total.
Reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor after the tyre ▷ Brake lights: 108 watts total.
inflation pressure has been corrected or a ▷ Reversing lights: 54 watts total.
trailer has been attached or detached.
Towing a trailer
Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 383.
Exterior mirrors General

Two exterior mirrors which bring both rear cor- When the trailer socket is occupied, some
ners of the trailer into your field of view are driver assistance systems are unavailable, or
required by law. Mirrors of this type are avail- available only to a restricted extent. A Check
able as optional accessories from an author- Control message is shown where applicable.
ised Service Partner or another qualified Serv- In order to avoid malfunctions, activate trailer
ice Partner or a specialist workshop. operation.
Activating trailer operation, see page 358.
356
Safety information To prevent the vehicle from rolling back when

driving off, use the parking brake.
WARNING
1. Shortly before driving off, pull and re-
Speeds in excess of approximately 80 km/h, lease the switch.
50 mph, can be enough to cause trailer snak-
The parking brake is engaged.
ing, depending on the type of trailer and the
load being carried. There is a risk of accident 2. To drive off, press the accelerator pedal
or material damage. with sufficient force.
Keep to an appropriate speed when towing a
trailer. If the trailer starts to snake, brake im- Downhill gradient
mediately and make the necessary steering On downward gradients, a car/trailer combina-
corrections as carefully as possible. tion tends to start snaking movement earlier.
Before the downhill gradient, shift down man-
ually to the next-lowest gear and drive down-
WARNING hill slowly.
The tyre inflation pressure must be adapted
because of the increased axle load in trailer High loads and high outside
operation. Driving with inadequate tyre infla- temperature
tion pressure can damage the tyres. There
is a risk of accident or material damage. Do
NOTICE
not exceed a speed of 100 km/h, 60 mph. In-
crease the tyre inflation pressure of the tow- On long journeys with high trailer loads, a
ing vehicle by 0.2 bar. Note the maximum high outside temperature and a low fuel tank
possible tyre inflation pressure stated on the capacity, the fuel system can overheat lead-
tyre. ing to reduced engine output. There is a risk
of material damage. Refuel in good time. On
long journeys with high trailer loads and a
Upward gradients high outside temperature, make sure that the
fuel tank is more than 1/4 full.
General
In the interest of safety and to avoid holding
up other traffic flow, do not attempt to climb Trailer Stability Control
upward gradients steeper than 12 % in trailer
operation.
Principle
If higher trailer loads have been subsequently
approved, the limit is 8%. Trailer Stability Control assists in intercepting
trailer snaking movements.
Driving off on upward gradients The system detects snaking movements and
The parking brake is automatically released promptly brakes the vehicle so that the vehicle
when the accelerator pedal is operated. speed falls to below the critical speed range
and the outfit is stabilised.
357
General Not for Australia:Trailer

The system can also activate in extreme driv-
ing situations when the trailer socket is occu-
tow hitch with electrically
pied without a trailer attached, for example adjustable ball head
when using a bicycle carrier with lighting.
General
Operating requirements The adjustable ball head is located on the un-
The system is operational from a speed of ap- derside of the vehicle.
proximately 65 km/h, 40 mph in trailer opera-
tion and with the trailer socket occupied. Safety information
System limits
WARNING
The system is unable to intervene or inter-
venes too late, in the following situations for If the ball head is not locked, unstable driving
example: conditions or accidents can result. There is a
risk of accident or material damage. Before
▷ If a trailer folds instantly, for example on
a journey with a trailer or load carrier, check
slippery or loose road surfaces.
that the ball head is correctly locked.
▷ If a trailer with a high centre of gravity tips
over before snaking movement is detected.
▷ If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated NOTICE
or has failed.
The trailer tow hitch is intended to be used
▷ If the power consumption of a trailer is too with a trailer. If the ball head of the trailer tow
low to be detected by the system, for ex- hitch has been swivelled out, it may become
ample due to LED rear lights. jammed if the vehicle is subsequently driven
without a trailer or load carrier. There is a
Activating trailer operation risk of material damage. Swivel the ball head
back in when driving without a trailer or load
carrier.
Principle
When driving with a trailer or load carrier and
the trailer socket is not occupied, some driver
Overview
assistance systems may only operate to a
limited extent or may malfunction. In order to
avoid malfunctions, activate trailer operation.
Activating
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Trailer mode" The button for swivelling the ball head in and
5. "Trailer mode" out is in the luggage compartment.
358
Operating requirements The LED in the button illuminates green

when the ball head has reached an end
The following requirements must be met in or-
position.
der to swivel the ball head:
▷ Vehicle is standing on level ground.
Interruption or reversal of the swivel
▷ The boot lid is open. movement
▷ The trailer socket is not occupied.
▷ Trailer operation is not activated. General
▷ The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged. The swivel movement is interrupted, might be
The LED in the button illuminates green if the reversed or is not performed if electrical cur-
system is operational. rent limits are exceeded, for example at very
low temperatures, or if mechanical resistance
is encountered. The LED in the button illumi-
Swivelling out the ball head nates red.
1. Open the luggage compartment.
2. Step out of the swing range of the ball head Repeating the swivel movement with
behind the vehicle. the engine running
1. Switch on drive-ready state via the Start/
3. Press the button in the luggage com- Stop button.
partment.
The ball head swivels out. The LED in the 2. Press the button in the luggage com-
button flashes in green. partment and hold it until the ball head has
4. Wait until the ball head has reached the moved completely in or out.
end position. If necessary, repeat the swivel movement with
The LED in the button illuminates green the button pressed and the engine running.
when the ball head has reached an end The LED in the button illuminates green when
position. the ball head has reached an end position.
If the ball head is not properly locked, the LED If the swivel movement is repeatedly interrup-
in the button lights up red. ted, contact an authorised Service Partner or
Swivelling the ball head back in workshop.
1. Disconnect the trailer or load carrier.
2. Remove any fittings for the track-stabilising
devices.
3. Remove the power supply connector for the
trailer and any adapter from the socket.
4. Press the button in the luggage com-

partment.
The ball head swivels inwards. The LED in
the button flashes in green.
5. Wait until the ball head has reached the
end position.
359
Trailer socket Rear luggage rack, see page 353.
The trailer socket is located on the trailer tow

hitch.
Fold down the cover.
Eye for securing cable
There is an eye on the trailer tow hitch for fas-

tening the trailer securing cable.
For increased safety when towing a trailer, at-

tach the trailer securing cable to the eye.
Check that the securing cable can move freely
and is not dragging on the ground.
Operating rear luggage

racks
The ball head of the trailer tow hitch can be
used as a mount for rear luggage racks, for
example bicycle carrier systems.
Note the information on rear luggage racks
when operating the rear luggage rack.
360
Saving fuel DRIVING HINTS
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment Close windows and the glass
sunroof
This chapter describes all standard, country- An open glass sunroof or open window increa-
specific and optional equipment available for ses drag and consequently fuel consumption.
equipment and functions which are not avail- Tyres
General
evant functions and systems. Please comply Tyres can have differing effects on consump-
with the relevant laws and regulations when tion figures. Consumption can be affected by
using the corresponding functions and sys- the tyre size, for example.
tems.
Check tyre inflation pressure regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tyre infla-
Reducing fuel consumption tion pressure at least twice a month and be-
fore setting off on a longer journey.
General Insufficient tyre inflation pressure increases
The vehicle has a wide range of technologies rolling resistance and consequently fuel con-
for reducing consumption and emissions. sumption and tyre wear.
The fuel consumption depends on various fac- Observe the correct tyre inflation pressure and
tors, for example driving style, road conditions, the ECO tyre inflation pressure where applica-
service or environmental factors. ble.
A number of measures, such as a moderate For further information:

driving style and regular maintenance, can in- Tyre inflation pressure information, see
fluence fuel consumption and reduce the bur- page 372.
den on the environment.
Drive off immediately
Remove unnecessary loads Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle at
Extra weight increases fuel consumption. a standstill, but instead set off straight away,
driving at moderate rotational speed.
Remove mounted parts after use This brings the cold engine up to operating
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof racks or rear temperature as quickly as possible.
carriers after use if they are no longer required.
Parts mounted on the vehicle can adversely
Think ahead
affect its aerodynamics and increase fuel con- Anticipating the road situation and adopting a
sumption. smooth driving style will reduce fuel consump-
tion.
Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily.
361
DRIVING HINTS Saving fuel
To do so, keep an appropriate distance from Switch these functions off if they are not re-
the vehicle ahead. quired.
The ECO PRO drive mode supports energy-
Avoid high rotational speeds saving use of comfort functions.
Driving at low rotational speed reduces fuel These functions are automatically deactivated
consumption and wear. wholly or partially.
Pay attention to the optimum shift indicator in
the vehicle, if fitted. Have maintenance work carried out
For optimum economy and service life, have
Make use of coasting overrun mode the vehicle serviced regularly. BMW recom-
When approaching a red traffic light, take your mends having maintenance work carried out
foot off the accelerator and allow the vehicle to by a BMW Service Partner.
roll to a stop. Please also comply with the BMW Mainte-
On downward stretches, take your foot off the nance System.
accelerator and allow the vehicle to roll.
The fuel supply is interrupted in coasting over-
run mode.
ECO PRO
Switch off the engine if stopping for Principle

longer periods ECO PRO supports an efficient driving style.
To achieve this, the engine control and comfort
Stopping the engine functions, for example the air conditioning out-
put, are adapted.
Switch off the engine if stopping the vehicle for
a longer period of time, for example at traffic Steptronic transmission: the engine is discon-
lights, railway crossings or in traffic jams. nected from the transmission in selector lever
position D when certain conditions are met.
Automatic Start/Stop function The vehicle rolls in idle to optimise consump-
tion. Selector lever position D remains en-
The Automatic Start/Stop function of the ve-
gaged.
hicle shuts off the engine automatically when
stationary. In addition, situational notes, ECO PRO tips,
can be displayed which help you to drive with
Switching the engine off and on again reduces
power efficiency.
fuel consumption and emissions compared
with a permanently running engine. Savings The extended range that is achieved by adopt-
can be made just by shutting down the engine ing these tips is shown in the instrument clus-
for a few seconds. ter as a bonus range.
Switch off functions which are not General

currently required The system comprises the following
EfficientDynamics functions and
Functions such as seat heating or rear window
EfficientDynamics displays:
heating require a great deal of energy and in-
crease fuel consumption, especially when driv- ▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
ing around town and in stop-and-go traffic. ▷ ECO PRO seat climate control.
362
▷ ECO PRO air conditioning. An ECO PRO tip is shown when the speed
▷ ECO PRO light and sight. of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ ECO PRO limit. ▷ "Notification at:"
▷ Route-ahead Assistant. Set the required speed for the ECO PRO
limit.
▷ Coasting drive state.
▷ Driving style analysis. Activating/deactivating ECO PRO
functions
Overview The following ECO PRO functions can be acti-
vated/deactivated:
▷ "ECO PRO seat heating"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO light and sight"
Coasting
When decelerating, the coasting function al-
lows the engine to be switched off or run at
idle for efficient consumption.
Button
ECO PRO seat climate control

Activating ECO PRO The output of the seat heating is reduced
when ECO PRO is activated.
Press the key. ECO PRO is displayed
in the instrument cluster. ECO PRO air conditioning
The climate control is adjusted.
Configuring ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL To achieve this, the set temperature is adjus-
ted slightly and the interior is heated or cooled
Via Driving Experience Control more slowly to reduce power consumption.
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" ECO PRO light and sight
The power output of the exterior mirror heating
Via iDrive and the rear window heating is reduced.
1. "CAR" Depending on the equipment, the dynamic
2. "Settings" ECO lighting function is activated additionally.
3. "Driving mode"
Resetting settings
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
To reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the default
5. Select the desired setting. setting:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
ECO PRO Limit
▷ "ECO PRO limit": to activate ECO PRO limit.
363
General
When activating the ECO PRO drive mode, the
display changes to a special display.
ECO PRO bonus range

It is possible to achieve a range
extension by adjusting the driv- A pointer in the consumption display provides
ing style. information about the current driving style:
The range extension can be dis- ▷ The current consumption in relation to the
played in the instrument cluster average consumption is displayed.
as a bonus range.
▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the
The bonus range is contained in the efficiency energy recuperation achieved when rolling
display. to a stop or when braking.
If the bonus range is shown in grey, the current ▷ Pointer in area arrow 2: display when accel-
driving style is inefficient. erating.
The display turns blue as soon as all the con- If the acceleration is inefficient, the area be-
ditions for consumption-optimised driving are tween average consumption and current con-
met. sumption is coloured red.
The intervals for resetting the bonus range de- The following information is also displayed,
pend on the trip data settings. depending on the situation:
▷ Depending on the equipment: the route
Consumption display covered in the coasting drive state.
Full Black Panel Display: ▷ The total time with the engine switched off
during automatic engine shutdown.
▷ A optimum shift indicator as recommenda-
tion to engage a more efficient gear.
General
Information about the current effectiveness of
the ECO PRO functions can be displayed as an
Instrument cluster without extended function- energy flow.
ality:
Displaying energy flow information
1. "CAR"
3. "Energy flow"
Following functions are displayed:
364
▷ Automatic Start/Stop function. 5. "Speed Assistant"

▷ Energy recuperation. 6. "Speed limits"
▷ Coasting. 7. "Show anticipation"
Route-ahead Assistant Speed Limit Assist, see page 262.
Display
Principle
The function helps to save fuel and supports Display in the instrument cluster
an anticipatory driving style. Using the naviga-
A note regarding a section of the route
tion data, certain sections of the route ahead
ahead is given as a recommendation to
can be detected early and information can be
allow the vehicle to roll.
shared with the driver.
An additional icon shows the detected section
General of the route:
The recognised sections of the route, such as Icon Section of the road in front
built-up areas or turn-offs ahead, for example,
require a reduction in speed. Speed limit or town entrance.
The note is also given even if the section of
the route ahead cannot yet be detected when
driving. Road junction or turn, exit from a fast
road.
The note is shown until the section of the route
is reached.
Corner.
If a note is given, vehicle speed can then be re-
duced in an efficient way by removing your foot
from the accelerator and allowing the vehicle Roundabout.
to roll until the section of road is reached.
Depending on the situation, the system also
independently uses the engine brake by inter-
rupting the coasting function. Display in the Head-up display
The anticipation note can also be shown
Operating requirements in the Head-up display.
▷ ECO PRO drive mode is activated.
▷ The function must be available in the coun- Display on the control display
try in which the vehicle is being driven.
A note is shown in the driving style analysis
display on the control display when there is an
Activating/deactivating appropriate section of route ahead.
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driving style analysis"
365
Using Route-ahead Assistant General

A section of the route ahead is shown: Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO drive
mode and the COMFORT drive mode.
1. Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. Coasting is automatically activated by calling
up the ECO PRO drive mode or COMFORT
2. Allow the vehicle to roll until you reach the
drive mode via Driving Experience Control and
section of road displayed.
cannot be deactivated.
3. Adjust the speed by braking as necessary.
An anticipatory driving style helps to use the
function frequently and supports the consump-
System limits tion-reducing effect of coasting.
The function is not available in the following
situations: Operating requirements
▷ The speed is below the minimum speed. The function is available in the speed range
▷ With a temporary and variable speed limit, from approx. 25 km/h, 16 mph to 160 km/h,
such as at road works. 100 mph.
▷ In the case of navigation data that is inva- The function is active if the following conditions
lid, outdated or not available. are met:
▷ If Cruise Control is active. ▷ System detects a calm and smooth driving
style.
▷ Accelerator pedal is not pressed or acceler-
Engine off coasting/coasting ator pedal is released.
▷ Brake pedal not pressed or only pressed
Principle lightly.
The engine is automatically disconnected from ▷ Selector lever in selector lever position D.
the transmission in selector lever position D ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
when certain conditions are met. The vehicle temperature.
continues to roll at idle to reduce consumption.
▷ System detects an appropriate distance to
Selector lever position D remains engaged.
vehicles in front.
This drive state is called coasting.
▷ The system does not detect any obstructive
On vehicles with mild hybrid technology, the
traffic situations or routes.
engine does not run at idle when coasting but
is instead switched off automatically, provided ▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func-
that certain conditions are met. When the en- tion, ACC, not activated.
gine is switched off, READY is shown in the
instrument cluster. The vehicle continues to roll Operation via shift paddles
without using any fuel. This vehicle condition is
called engine off coasting. Principle
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is The coasting drive state can be controlled us-
pressed, the engine is automatically connected ing the shift paddles.
again.
366
Activating/deactivating coasting via ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.

shift paddles ▷ Driving in the handling limit range or on
1. Pull the right-hand shift paddle to shift to steep uphill or downhill gradients.
the highest possible gear. ▷ Battery charge state temporally too low or
2. Operate the right-hand shift paddle again too high power requirement in the electrical
to activate the coasting drive state. system.
Operate the left-hand shift paddle to deacti- ▷ Trailer operation.
vate.
Display Driving style analysis

ECO PRO drive mode:Display in the Principle
instrument cluster The function helps you to develop a particu-
The route covered in the coasting drive larly efficient driving style and to save fuel.
state is displayed. It does this by analysing your driving style. The
evaluation is performed in various categories
Display on the control display and is shown on the control display.
The coasting drive state is shown in the energy Using this display, the individual driving style
flow display during the journey. can be adjusted to save fuel.
The route covered in the coasting drive state is
displayed in the trip data. General
The current trip is evaluated.
To support an efficient driving style, ECO PRO
tips are shown during the journey.
Adapting the driving style can increase the
range of the vehicle.
This gain in range is shown as a bonus range
on the instrument cluster and control display.
Blue colour: coasting drive state.
The function is available in ECO PRO drive
mode.
Displaying energy flow information
1. "CAR" Calling up the driving style analysis
2. "Driving information" 1. "CAR"
3. "Energy flow" 2. "Driving information"
3. "Driving style analysis"
System limits
The function is not available, if one of the Display on the control display
following conditions applies: The display of the driving style analysis shows
the efficiency of the driving style.
367
The more efficient the driving style, the more

bars are shown in colour and the faster the
bonus range increases.
Fewer bars are shown if the driving style is
inefficient.
368
369
MOBILITY Refuelling
Refuelling
This chapter describes all standard, country- NOTICE

If the range drops below 50 km, approx.
30 miles, the engine may no longer be sup-
plied with sufficient fuel. The engine functions
are no longer ensured. There is a risk of ma-
terial damage. Refuel in good time.
using the corresponding functions and sys- NOTICE
tems. Fuels are poisonous and aggressive sub-
stances. Overfilling the fuel tank can damage
the fuel system. If fuel comes into contact
Things to consider when with paintwork, it can damage it. The envi-
refuelling ronment is polluted. There is a risk of mate-
rial damage. Avoid overfilling.
General
Before refuelling, take note of the fuel grade
information. Fuel filler cap
On vehicles with diesel engine, the fuel filler
neck is designed for refuelling at diesel pumps. Opening
When topping up, hook the fuel pump noz- 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
zle fully into the filler pipe. Lifting the fuel edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
pump nozzle while topping up will cause the
following to happen:
▷ The supply is stopped too soon.
▷ Fuel vapour recovery is less effective.
The fuel tank is full when the fuel pump nozzle
cuts out for the first time.
Please comply with the safety regulations dis-
played at filling stations.
Fuel grade, see page 402.
370
Refuelling MOBILITY
2. Turn the fuel filler cap anticlockwise. Have the fuel filler flap unlocked by an author-
ised Service Partner or another qualified Serv-
ice Partner or a specialist workshop.

fuel filler flap.
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel filler cap may
become trapped and crushed when turning
the cap to close it. As a result, the cap may
not be closed properly. Fuel or fuel vapours
can leak out. There is a danger of injury or
material damage. Make sure that the retain-
ing strap does not get trapped and crushed
when closing the cap.
1. Fit the fuel filler cap and turn clockwise until

it is clearly heard to click into place.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
Emergency release
In certain situations, it may be necessary to
unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for example
if there is an electrical fault.
371
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
Wheels and tyres

Vehicle equipment Tyre inflation pressure information
This chapter describes all standard, country- On the body pillar

tems.
The tyre inflation pressure information is loca-
ted on the body pillar of the driver's door.
Tyre inflation pressure The tyre inflation pressures apply to all tyre
sizes and recommended tyre makes that have
been rated by the vehicle manufacturer as
General
suitable for the vehicle type concerned. The list
The tyre condition and tyre inflation pressure can also include tyre sizes that are only suita-
influence the following: ble in combination with specific equipment.
▷ Tyre service life. Information about approved wheels and tyres
▷ Driving safety. for the vehicle can be requested from an au-
▷ Driving comfort. thorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or specialist workshop.
▷ Fuel consumption.
The tyre inflation pressure appropriate for the
respective load conditions should be used. For
Safety information
example, if the vehicle is partially loaded, use
the tyre inflation pressure specified for a parti-
WARNING ally loaded vehicle.
A tyre with too little or no tyre inflation pres- When the vehicle is partially loaded, the low-
sure can heat up significantly and sustain est possible fuel consumption can be achieved
damage. Handling characteristics, for exam- with the ECO tyre inflation pressure.
ple steering and braking, will be impaired as
a result. There is a risk of accident. Check the
tyre inflation pressure regularly, for example
twice a month or before any long journey,
and correct as necessary.
372
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
For Australia/New Zealand Checking using tyre inflation pressure

information on the body pillar
WARNING 1. Determine the specified tyre inflation pres-
sures for the tyres installed on the vehicle.
The inflation pressures on the tyre label are
applicable only for tyre types explicitly men- 2. Check the tyre inflation pressure in all four
tioned on the label. Tyre inflation pressures tyres, using a pressure gauge, for example.
that may be covered by the label – by size, 3. Correct the tyre inflation pressure if the cur-
speed category and load rating/load index – rent tyre inflation pressure deviates from
but not explicitly mentioned on the label may the specified tyre inflation pressure.
be different. Please obtain adequate inflation 4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed
pressures in accordance with the tyre manu- onto the tyre valves.
facturer's specifications from your tyre dealer.
The tyre inflation pressure information on the
tyre pressure label on the body pillar only re-
On the control display lates to cold tyres or tyres at the same temper-
ature as the ambient temperature.
The current tyre inflation pressures and the
specified tyre inflation pressures for the instal- Only check the tyre inflation pressures when
led tyres can be displayed on the control dis- the tyres are cold, i.e.:
play. ▷ If the vehicle has been driven a distance of
To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the no more than 2 km, 1.25 miles.
tyre sizes must be stored in the system and ▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at
must have been set for the fitted tyres. least 2 hours after a journey.
The current tyre inflation pressure value is Regularly check the tyre inflation pressure of
shown on each tyre. the emergency spare wheel in the luggage
The specified tyre inflation pressure value is compartment and correct the pressure if nec-
located towards the bottom of the control dis- essary.
play.
Checking using the tyre inflation
Checking the tyre inflation pressure pressure information on the control
display
General 1. "CAR"
Tyres heat up while driving. The tyre inflation 2. "Vehicle status"
pressure increases with the temperature of the 3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"
tyre.
4. Check if the current tyre inflation pressures
Tyres have a natural, uniform tyre pressure match the specified tyre pressure value.
loss.
5. Correct the tyre inflation pressure if the cur-
The pressures displayed by some pressure rent tyre inflation pressure deviates from
gauges may be up to 0.1 bar too low. the specified tyre inflation pressure.
The current tyre inflation pressure display may
be restricted when the vehicle is stationary.
The tyre inflation pressure is updated after a
short drive.
373
After adjusting the tyre inflation Minimum tread depth

pressure
For Flat Tyre Monitor:
Reinitialise flat tyre monitor.
For the Tyre Pressure Monitor:
The corrected tyre inflation pressures are ap-
plied automatically. Make sure that the tyre
settings are correct.
For tyres that are not listed in the tyre inflation
pressure information on the control display, re-
There are wear indicators from the tyre manu-
set the Tyre Pressure Monitor.
facturer distributed over the tyre circumference
with a height of at least 1.6 mm, approx. 0.06
Speed code letter in, which serve as an indicator of tyre tread
wear.
Designation Maximum speed
The positions of the wear indicators are identi-
Q up to 160 km/h, 100 mph
fied on the tyre sidewall by TWI, Tread Wear
R up to 170 km/h, 106 mph Indicator.
Irrespective of the wear indicators, observe the
S up to 180 km/h, 112 mph
legal requirements on minimum tread depth.
T up to 190 km/h, 118 mph
H up to 210 km/h, 131 mph Tyre damages

F up to 240 km/h, 150 mph
W up to 270 km/h, 167 mph General

Inspect tyres regularly for damage, the pres-
Y up to 300 km/h, 186 mph
ence of foreign bodies and wear.
(Y) above 300 km/h, 186 mph Vehicle behaviour that may indicate tyre dam-
age or other faults:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
Tyre tread ▷ Unusual tyre or running noises.
▷ Unusual vehicle response, such as pro-
Summer tyres nounced pulling to the left or right.
The tyre tread depth should not be less than ▷ Uneven wear pattern, for example in-
3 mm, 0.12 in, otherwise there is a high risk of creased wear near the tyre shoulder.
aquaplaning.
Damage can be caused by situations such as
the following:
Winter tyres
▷ Driving over kerbs.
The tyre tread depth should not be less than
4 mm, 0.16 in, otherwise its suitability for win- ▷ Road damage.
ter use is restricted. ▷ Insufficient tyre inflation pressure.
374
▷ Overloading the vehicle. Designation Date of manufacture

▷ Incorrect tyre storage.
DOT … 3822 38th week of 2022
Safety information
Replacement of wheels and
WARNING
tyres
If the tyres are damaged, the tyre inflation
pressure may be reduced, causing you to
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of Fitting and balancing
accident. If you suspect tyre damage while Have the wheel fitted and balanced by an au-
you are driving, immediately reduce speed thorised Service Partner or another qualified
and bring the vehicle to a stop. Have the Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
wheels and tyres checked. To do so, care-
fully drive to an authorised Service Partner Permissible wheels and tyres
or another qualified Service Partner or a spe-
cialist workshop. If necessary, have the vehi- General
cle towed or transported there. Do not repair
The following are recommended and approved
damaged tyres. Have them replaced.
by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the ap-
proved wheels and tyres per vehicle type and
special equipment:
WARNING ▷ Wheel and tyre combinations.
Tyres can become damaged by driving ▷ Rim designs.
over obstacles, for example kerbs or dam-
aged road surfaces, at high speed. Larger ▷ Tyre sizes.
wheels have a smaller tyre cross-section. ▷ Tyre makes.
The smaller the tyre cross-section, the higher Information on the approved wheels and tyres
the risk of tyre damage. There is a risk of ac- for the vehicle, as well as the special equip-
cident and material damage. If possible, drive ment, can be obtained from an authorised
around obstacles or drive over them slowly Service Partner, another qualified Service Part-
and carefully. ner or a specialist workshop.
Safety information
Tyre age
WARNING
Recommendation Wheels and tyres that are not suitable for the
Irrespective of the tyre tread depth, change vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle. For
tyres after 6 years at the latest. example they could come into contact with
bodywork on account of their dimensional
tolerances, despite having the same nominal
Date of manufacture
size. There is a risk of accident. The man-
The date of manufacture of the tyre can be ufacturer of the vehicle recommends using
found on the tyre sidewall.
375
wheels and tyres that have been rated as New tyres

suitable for the vehicle type concerned.
Due to the manufacturing process, new tyres
do not achieve their full road grip immediately.
Drive moderately for the first 300 km,
WARNING 200 miles.
Mounted steel wheels can lead to technical
problems, for example wheel bolts may work Retreaded tyres
loose and brake discs may be damaged.
There is a risk of accident. Do not install steel
wheels. WARNING
Retreaded tyres may have different tyre car-
casses. Their durability may be restricted due
WARNING to their advanced age. There is a risk of
accident. The vehicle manufacturer advises
Incorrect wheel and tyre combinations will
against the use of retreaded tyres.
impair the vehicle's driving characteristics
and a variety of system functions, for exam-
ple the Anti-lock Braking System or Dynamic Winter tyres
Stability Control. There is a risk of accident.
To maintain good vehicle handling, always
General
fit tyres of the same make and tread pattern
to all wheels. The manufacturer of the vehi-
cle recommends using wheels and tyres that
have been rated as suitable for the vehicle
type concerned. After a tyre has been dam-
aged, refit the same wheel/tyre combination
as the original.
Recommended makes of tyre

Winter tyres are recommended if driving in
winter conditions.
The winter tyres can be identified by the
mountain and snowflake icon, as well as the
M+S marking on the tyre sidewall.
Although tyres known as all-season tyres with

M+S marking but without a mountain and
snowflake icon have better winter characteris-
tics than summer tyres, they do not normally
Certain makes of tyre are recommended by the
match the performance of winter tyres.
manufacturer of the vehicle for each tyre size.
The tyre brands can be identified by a star on
the tyre sidewall.
Maximum speed of winter tyres
If the vehicle is capable of maximum speed
higher than the speed permitted for the winter
376
tyres, a sign stating the permitted maximum Storage

speed for the tyres fitted must be displayed in ▷ Store wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and
the driver's field of view. The sign is available dark place when not in use.
from an authorised Service Partner or another
qualified Service Partner or a specialist work- ▷ Protect the tyres against contamination
shop. from oil, grease and solvents.
If winter tyres are fitted, observe and do ▷ Do not leave tyres in plastic bags.
not exceed the relevant permitted maximum ▷ Remove dirt from the wheels or tyres.
speed.
Changing from run-flat tyres Run-flat tyres

When changing from run-flat tyres to stand-
ard tyres, make sure that a emergency spare Principle
wheel or a flat tyre kit is available in the vehi- In the event of a complete tyre pressure loss,
cle. Additional information is available from an run-flat tyres enable you to continue driving,
authorised Service Partner or another qualified with certain restrictions.
General
Wheel change between axles The wheels are fitted with tyres which are self-
supporting to a limited degree. The wheels
WARNING may also have special rims.
Wheel change between axles on vehicles The reinforced sidewall means that the tyre
with different tyre sizes or rims on the front keeps the vehicle mobile to a degree, even if
and rear may cause tyre damage and dam- tyre inflation pressure has been lost.
age to the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Observe the notes on continuing driving with a
Do not swap wheels between axles on vehi- flat tyre.
cles with different tyre sizes or rims on the
front and rear. Safety information
Depending on the individual operating condi-
tions, the tyre tread wears differently on the WARNING
front and rear axles. To achieve even abrasion, A run-flat tyre with too little or no tyre infla-
the tyres can be swapped in pairs between the tion pressure will change the vehicle's han-
axles. Additional information is available from dling characteristics, for example there may
an authorised Service Partner or another quali- be reduced directional stability when braking,
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop. longer braking distances and different self-
After changing the wheels, check the tyre infla- steering properties. There is a risk of acci-
tion pressure and correct if necessary. dent. Drive with care and do not exceed a
speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph.
Storing tyres
Tyre inflation pressure

Do not exceed the maximum tyre inflation
pressure indicated on the tyre sidewall.
377
Tyre repair kit

WARNING
Continuing to drive with a flat tyre can cause
Principle
heavy trailers to start snaking. There is a risk
of accident or material damage. When driving With the tyre repair kit, minor tyre damage can
with a trailer and a flat tyre, do not exceed the be quickly sealed to allow the driver to con-
speed of 60 km/h, 35 mph. If the trailer starts tinue driving.
to snake, brake immediately and make the
necessary steering corrections as carefully as General
possible. ▷ The filled in tyre sealant encloses the dam-
age from the inside when it hardens.
▷ Please observe the notes on using the tyre
Label
repair kit which are on the compressor and
the tyre sealant bottle.
▷ The use of the tyre repair set can be inef-
fective in the event of tyre damage from a
size of approx. 4 mm, approx. 0.16 in.
▷ Foreign bodies that have penetrated the
tyre should remain inside the tyre. Only re-
move foreign objects if they are visibly pro-
truding from the tyre.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
The icon identifying run-flat tyres is a circle
tyre inflation pressure.
with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall.
Overview
Remedying flat tyre Storage
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle on a firm surface and as
far away from moving traffic as possible.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights.
▷ Apply the parking brake to prevent the vehi-
cle rolling away.
▷ Engage the steering wheel lock with the
wheels in the straight-ahead position.
Storage for the tyre repair set is provided in
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the the left storage compartment of the luggage
vehicle and guide them out of the danger compartment.
area, for example behind the crash barrier.
▷ Where required, set up the warning triangle
an appropriate distance away.
378
Tyre sealant bottle and filler hose ▷ Engage the steering wheel lock with the
wheels in the straight-ahead position.
▷ As soon as the traffic flow permits, have
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and guide them out of the danger area, for
example behind the crash barrier.
▷ If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or
hazard warning lamp at an appropriate dis-
tance.
▷ Remove the warning label for the maxi-
1 Tyre sealant bottle mum permissible speed from the compres-
sor and attach it in the visible area in the
2 Tyre sealant bottle outlet
vehicle interior.
3 Filler hose
▷ Remove the warning label from the tyre
4 Tyre sealant bottle connection sealant container and attach it to the wheel
5 Wheel valve connection rim.
Compressor Preparing the tyre repair kit

1. Insert the tyre sealant bottle into the mount
on the housing of the compressor.
1 Compressor
2 Tyre inflation pressure indicator
2. Turn the tyre sealant bottle clockwise by
3 Pressure reducing valve button 90° to the stop.
4 Tyre sealant bottle holder
5 Connector for socket
6 On/Off button
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle on a firm surface and as
far away from moving traffic as possible.
▷ Apply the parking brake.
379
3. Connect the filler hose to the outlet of the

tyre sealant bottle and turn clockwise by NOTICE
90° to the stop.
The compressor can overheat if operated for
too long. There is a risk of material damage.
Do not let the compressor run for longer than
10 minutes.
Filling with tyre sealant

1. Switch on the compressor with standby
state or drive-ready state switched on.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the wheel and to fill in the tyre sealant and reach a tyre
screw the connecting piece of the filler hose inflation pressure of 2.5 bar.
onto the valve. While the tyre is being filled with tyre seal-
ant, the tyre pressure can briefly reach ap-
prox. 6 bar. Do not turn off the compressor
in this phase.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert the

plug into the socket inside the vehicle inte-
rior.
2. Switch off compressor.
Filling with tyre sealant
Checking the tyre inflation pressure
Safety information Read the tyre pressure on the tyre inflation
pressure indicator of the compressor. The tyre
DANGER pressure must be at least 2.5 bar.
A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ven-
Tyre pressure too high
enter the vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain If the tyre pressure is too high, reduce the tyre
pollutants which are colourless and odour- pressure with the pressure reducing valve on
less. In enclosed spaces, exhaust fumes can the compressor.
also build up outside the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe clear Minimum tyre inflation pressure is not
and ensure sufficient ventilation. reached
Do not continue driving unless a minimum tyre
pressure of 2.5 bar is reached. Contact an au-
380
thorised Service Partner or another qualified 3. Unscrew the valve cap from the wheel and
Service Partner or a specialist workshop. screw the connecting piece of the hose
onto the valve.
Minimum tyre inflation pressure is
reached
1. Pull the connector out of the socket in the
vehicle interior.
2. Disconnect the hose from the tyre sealant
bottle and the valve on the wheel.
3. Screw on the valve cap.
4. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage com-
partment.
4. Insert the connector into the socket in the
5. Immediately drive for approximately vehicle interior.
10 km/5 miles to evenly distribute the tyre
sealant in the tyre. 5. Read the tyre pressure on the tyre inflation
pressure indicator of the compressor.
Do not exceed the permitted maximum
speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph. Do not continue driving unless a minimum
tyre pressure of 1.3 bar is displayed. Con-
If possible, do not drive slower than tact an authorised Service Partner or an-
20 km/h/12 mph. other qualified Service Partner or a special-
Tyre sealant may spray from the damaged ist workshop.
area during the initial wheel rotations. 6. Correct the tyre pressure to 2.5 bar.
▷ Increase tyre inflation pressure: with
Adjusting the tyre pressure standby or drive-ready state turned on,
1. Stop in a suitable area. turn on the compressor and let it run for
2. Connect the hose directly to the compres- a maximum of 10 minutes.
sor and turn clockwise by 90° until it audi- ▷ Reduce tyre pressure: press the pres-
bly engages. sure reducing valve button on the com-
pressor.
Removing and stowing the tyre

repair kit
1. Switch off compressor.
2. Pull the connector out of the socket in the
vehicle interior.
3. Disconnect the hose from the compressor
and the valve on the wheel.
4. Screw on the valve cap.
5. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage com-
partment.
381
Resuming a journey
Do not exceed the permitted maximum speed WARNING
of 80 km/h, 50 mph. Insufficiently tensioned snow chains can
Do not exceed a maximum distance travelled damage tyres and vehicle components.
of 200 km/125 miles. There is a risk of accident or material dam-
age. Ensure that snow chains are always ad-
Re-initialise the flat tyre monitor or reset the
equately tensioned. Re-tension them if nec-
Tyre Pressure Monitor.
essary in accordance with the snow chain
Have the punctured tyre and the tyre sealant manufacturer's instructions.
bottle of the tyre repair kit replaced as soon as
possible.
For further information: Fine-link snow chains
▷ Flat Tyre Monitor, see page 390. The vehicle manufacturer recommends using
fine-link snow chains. Certain fine-link snow
▷ Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 383.
chains have been tested, found safe for use
in traffic and rated as suitable by the manufac-
System limits turer of the vehicle.
Contact an authorised Service Partner or an-
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
other qualified Service Partner or a specialist
available from an authorised Service Partner or
workshop if you are unable to put the tyre back
in operation.
workshop.
When checking the tyre pressure: using seal-
ant can damage the wheel electronics. In this Use
case, have the electronics replaced at the next
Snow chains may only be used in pairs on the
opportunity.
rear wheels with tyres of the following sizes:
▷ 225/55 R 17.
Snow chains ▷ 245/45 R 18.
▷ 245/40 R 19.
Safety information The information on wheel size and rim offset is
located on the inside of the wheel.
WARNING The list can also include wheel/tyre sizes that
If snow chains are fitted to unsuitable tyres, are only suitable for certain models.
the snow chains can come into contact with Information about approved wheels and tyres
parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident for the vehicle can be requested from an au-
or material damage. Only fit snow chains on thorised Service Partner or another qualified
tyres which have been approved by the man- Service Partner or specialist workshop.
ufacturer as being suitable for snow chains. Observe the snow chain manufacturer's in-
structions.
Do not initialise the Flat Tyre Monitor when
using snow chains as incorrect values may be
displayed.
382
Do not reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor with speed for snow chains of 50 km/h, 30 mph,
snow chains fitted, as it may give incorrect is reached.
readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control as needed to opti- Tyre Pressure Monitor
mise propulsion.
Principle
Maximum speed with snow chains The Tyre Pressure Monitor monitors the tyre
When snow chains are fitted, do not exceed pressure and issues a warning if the tyre pres-
50 km/h, 30 mph. sure has dropped.
Rear-wheel steering with snow General

chains Sensors in the tyre valves measure the tyre
inflation pressure and tyre air temperature.
General Depending on the tyres detected or entered,
To ensure that the wheels can move as the system displays the specified nominal
required when using snow chains, the rear- pressures on the control display and compares
wheel steering function of the Integral Active them to the current tyre inflation pressures.
Steering must be switched off when snow If the vehicle is fitted with tyres which are not
chains are fitted. listed in the tyre inflation pressure information
on the vehicle, for example tyres with special
Safety information approval, the system must be actively reset.
The current tyre inflation pressures are then
accepted as the nominal pressures.
WARNING
When operating the system, please also com-
If the rear-wheel steering is activated while
ply with the information and notes in the chap-
snow chains are fitted, the snow chains may
ter on tyre inflation pressure.
come into contact with the vehicle bodywork.
There is a risk of accident or material dam- For further information:
age. Switch off the rear-wheel steering when Tyre inflation pressure, see page 372.
snow chains are fitted.
Safety information
Switching off the rear-wheel steering
The rear-wheel steering is switched off by se- WARNING
lecting the 'snow chains fitted' setting. The display showing the nominal pressures
does not replace the tyre inflation pressure
1. "CAR"
information on the vehicle. If incorrect data
2. "Settings" has been entered into the tyre settings, the
3. "General settings" specified tyre inflation pressures will also be
4. "Snow chains" incorrect. As a result, reliable message of a
tyre pressure loss can no longer be guaran-
5. "Snow chains fitted" teed. There is a danger of injury or material
The rear-wheel steering is switched on again damage. Make sure that the tyre sizes of the
automatically when the permitted maximum fitted tyres are displayed correctly and that
383
they match the specifications on the tyres 3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"

and in the tyre inflation pressure information. 4. "Tyre settings"
5. "Tyre selection"
Operating requirements 6. "Manual"
The following requirements must be met for 7. "Tyre type"
the system, otherwise reliable message of a 8. Select the tyre type mounted on the rear
tyre pressure loss is not ensured: axle.
▷ After every tyre or wheel change, the cor- For tyres with special approval:
rect specifications for the fitted tyres must
"Other tyres"
be entered in the tyre settings.
See the Performing a reset section for how
▷ The Tyre Pressure Monitor only becomes
to proceed.
active after driving for several minutes:
9. After selecting the tyre size, select the load
▷ After tyre/wheel change.
status of the vehicle.
▷ After a reset, For tyres with special ap-
10. "Save tyre settings"
proval.
The measurement of the current tyre inflation
▷ After changing the tyre setting.
pressure is started. The progress of the meas-
▷ For tyres with special approval: urement is shown.
▷ After every tyre or wheel change, the
system must be reset once the tyre in- Status display
flation pressure is correct.
▷ A reset must be carried out after the tyre Current status
inflation pressure has been adjusted to The status of the system, for example whether
a new value. the system is active, can be shown on the con-
▷ Wheels with wheel electronics. trol display.
1. "CAR"
Tyre settings
2. "Vehicle status"
General 3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"
The tyre sizes of the fitted tyres can be found The current status is displayed.
in the tyre inflation pressure information on the
vehicle or directly on the tyres. Current tyre inflation pressure
The tyre data does not have to be re-entered if The current tyre inflation pressure is displayed
the tyre inflation pressure is being corrected. for each tyre.
For summer and winter tyres, the tyre data last The current tyre inflation pressures can vary
entered for each type is saved. This means depending on vehicle operation or outside
that the settings can be selected again after a temperature.
tyre or wheel change.
Current tyre air temperature
Adjusting the settings Depending on the model, the current tyre air
1. "CAR" temperatures are shown.
2. "Vehicle status"
384
The current tyre air temperatures can change One to four wheels yellow
as a result of driving the vehicle or the outside There is a flat tyre or major tyre pressure loss
temperature. in the tyres shown.
Nominal pressure Wheels grey

The nominal pressure for the tyres on the front Tyre pressure losses might not be detected.
and rear axle is displayed.
Possible causes:
The stated nominal pressure takes account of
the temperature effects caused by vehicle op- ▷ Malfunction.
eration and the outside temperature. The ap- ▷ The tyre inflation pressure is being meas-
propriate nominal pressure is always displayed ured, after confirmation of the tyre settings.
irrespective of the weather conditions, tyre air ▷ For tyres with special approval: a system
temperatures and length of journey. reset is being performed.
The displayed nominal pressure may vary and
differ from the value stated in the tyre inflation For tyres with special approval:
pressure information on the body pillar of the performing a reset
driver's door. The tyre inflation pressure can
1. "CAR"
thus be corrected to the value of the displayed
nominal pressures. 2. "Vehicle status"
The nominal pressure is adjusted immediately 3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"
if the load status is changed in the tyre set- 4. Make sure that the tyre settings are correct.
tings. Tyre settings, see page 384.
5. Switch on drive-ready state but do not drive
Tyre statuses off.
General 6. Reset the tyre inflation pressure: "Perform

reset".
The status of the system and tyres is indicated
by the wheel colour and a message on the 7. Drive off.
control display. The wheels are shown grey and the following
Existing messages may not be deleted if the appears on the display: "Resetting tyre
nominal pressure is not reached when the tyre pressure…".
inflation pressure is corrected. After driving for several minutes, the set tyre
inflation pressures are accepted as the speci-
All wheels green fied tyre inflation pressures. The reset is com-
pleted automatically during the journey.
▷ The system is active and bases any warn-
ings on the nominal pressures. If the reset was successful, the wheels are
shown in green on the control display and the
▷ In the case of tyres with special approval:
following appears: "Reset successful."
the system is active and bases its warnings
on the tyre inflations pressures saved at the You can interrupt your journey at any time.
last reset. The reset resumes automatically when you
continue driving.
385
Messages: for tyres without special In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-
approval sage is shown on the control display.
Icon Possible cause

General
There has been a tyre pressure loss.
When a low tyre pressure is indicated, the Dy-
namic Stability Control may be turned on.
Safety information Measure

1. Reduce speed. Do not exceed a speed of
WARNING 130 km/h, 80 mph.
A damaged standard tyre with too little or no 2. At the next opportunity, for example at a
tyre inflation pressure impairs driving charac- filling station, check the tyre inflation pres-
teristics, for example steering and braking. sure in all four tyres and correct if neces-
Tyres with run-flat capabilities allow a limited sary.
level of stability to be maintained. There is a
risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the If there is a significant tyre pressure
vehicle is fitted with standard tyres. Comply loss
with the notes on run-flat tyres and continu-
ing driving with these tyres. Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
If a tyre inflation pressure check is
required In addition, an icon indicating which tyre is af-
fected is shown in a Check Control message on
Message the control display.
An icon with a Check Control message is
Icon Possible cause
Icon Possible cause There is a flat tyre or substantial tyre
pressure loss.
The tyre was not inflated properly, for
example insufficient air was added or
there was a natural, even tyre pres- Measure
sure loss. 1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the
vehicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden
Measure steering manoeuvres.
Check the tyre inflation pressure and adjust as 2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with
necessary. standard tyres or run-flat tyres.
The icon identifying run-flat tyres is a circle
If the tyre inflation pressure is too low with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall.
Run-flat tyres, see page 377.
Message
3. Follow the description of what to do when
A yellow warning light is illuminated in the vehicle gets a flat tyre.
386
What to do in the event of a flat tyre, see Icon Possible cause

page 388.
The tyre was not inflated properly,
Messages: for tyres with special for example insufficient air was
added.
approval
The system has detected a wheel
General change, but no reset has been per-
formed.
When a low tyre pressure is indicated, the Dy-
namic Stability Control may be turned on. The tyre inflation pressure has
dropped compared to the last reset.
Safety information No reset has been performed on
the system. System warning is
based on the tyre inflation pres-
WARNING sures saved during the last reset.
A damaged standard tyre with too little or no
tyre inflation pressure impairs driving charac- Measure
teristics, for example steering and braking.
1. Check the tyre inflation pressure and adjust
Tyres with run-flat capabilities allow a limited
as necessary.
level of stability to be maintained. There is a
risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the 2. Perform a system reset.
vehicle is fitted with standard tyres. Comply
with the notes on run-flat tyres and continu- If the tyre inflation pressure is too low
ing driving with these tyres.
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
If a tyre inflation pressure check is the instrument cluster.
required
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-
Message sage is shown on the control display.
An icon with a Check Control message is
Icon Possible cause
There has been a tyre pressure loss.
No reset has been performed on the
system. System warning is based
on the tyre inflation pressures saved
during the last reset.
Measure
1. Reduce speed. Do not exceed a speed of
130 km/h, 80 mph.
2. At the next opportunity, for example at a
filling station, check the tyre inflation pres-
387
sure in all four tyres and correct if neces- Check the tyre inflation pressure in all four
sary. tyres, for example using the tyre inflation
3. Perform a system reset. pressure indicator of a tyre repair kit.
For tyres with special approval: if all four
If there is a significant tyre pressure tyres are inflated to the correct tyre inflation
loss pressures, the Tyre Pressure Monitor might
not have been reset. Perform a reset.
Message If no tyre damage can be found, contact
A yellow warning light is illuminated in an authorised Service Partner or another
the instrument cluster. qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
In addition, an icon indicating which tyre is af- 2. Repair the flat tyre, for example using a tyre
fected is shown in a Check Control message on repair kit or by changing the wheel.
the control display. The use of tyre sealant, for example a tyre
Icon Possible cause repair kit, can damage the wheel electronics.
Have the electronics replaced at the next op-
There is a flat tyre or substantial tyre portunity.
pressure loss.
No reset has been performed on the Run-flat tyres
system. System warning is based
on the tyre inflation pressures saved Safety information
during the last reset.
WARNING
Measure
A run-flat tyre with too little or no tyre infla-
1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the tion pressure will change the vehicle's han-
vehicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden dling characteristics, for example there may
steering manoeuvres. be reduced directional stability when braking,
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with longer braking distances and different self-
standard tyres or run-flat tyres. steering properties. There is a risk of acci-
The icon identifying run-flat tyres is a circle dent. Drive with care and do not exceed a
with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall. speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph.
3. Follow the description of what to do when
the vehicle gets a flat tyre. WARNING
What to do in the event of a flat tyre, see Continuing to drive with a flat tyre can cause
page 388. heavy trailers to start snaking. There is a risk
of accident or material damage. When driving
with a trailer and a flat tyre, do not exceed the
What to do in the event of a flat tyre speed of 60 km/h, 35 mph. If the trailer starts
Standard tyres necessary steering corrections as carefully as
1. Identify the damaged tyre. possible.
388
Maximum speed Reduce your speed and stop the vehicle. Parts
If a tyre is damaged you can continue driv- of the tyre may detach, which might lead to an
ing, but do not exceed a maximum speed of accident.
80 km/h, 50 mph. Do not continue driving, but instead contact an
authorised Service Partner or another qualified
Continuing driving with a flat tyre Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
Observe the following if you continue driving
with a flat tyre: System limits
1. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steering
Temperature
manoeuvres.
The tyre inflation pressure depends on the
2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h,
temperature of the tyre.
50 mph.
The tyre inflation pressure increases as the
3. At the next opportunity, check the tyre infla-
tyre air temperature increases, for example
tion pressure in all four tyres.
while driving or when exposed to sunlight.
Possible driving distance with a deflated tyre The tyre inflation pressure decreases when the
tyre air temperature drops.
The possible driving distance varies depending
on the load and stresses the vehicle is subjec- Due to the given warning thresholds, therefore,
ted to, for example speed, the nature of the this behaviour may cause a warning to be trig-
road surface and the outside temperature. The gered when significant temperature drops oc-
driving distance may be shorter but can be in- cur.
creased if a careful driving style is adopted. After a temperature-related warning, the nom-
With a moderate load and with low stress, inal pressures are displayed again on the con-
the vehicle can be driven for up to 80 km, trol display after driving a short distance.
50 miles.
Sudden tyre pressure loss
Driving properties with damaged tyres No warning can be given in the event of ex-
Driving with damaged tyres changes the vehi- treme, sudden tyre damages caused by exter-
cle's handling characteristics and may lead to nal factors.
situations such as the following:
▷ The vehicle losing traction more quickly. Reset not carried out
▷ Longer stopping distances. Tyres with special approval: the system will not
function correctly if a reset has not been car-
▷ Different self-steering properties. ried out, for example, a flat tyre may be repor-
Adapt your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering ted even though the tyre pressure is correct.
or driving over obstacles, for example kerbs or
potholes. Malfunction
Final tyre failure Message
Vibration or loud noises during the journey
The yellow warning light flashes and
may be an indication that the tyre has finally
then illuminates continuously. A Check
failed.
Control message is shown. Tyre pres-
sure losses may not be detected.
389
Measure ▷ After every tyre or wheel change, the sys-

▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is moun- tem must be initialised once the tyre infla-
ted, for example emergency spare wheel: tion pressure is correct.
have the wheels checked if necessary. ▷ The system must be initialised after the
▷ Fault due to systems or devices with the tyre inflation pressure is adjusted to a new
same radio frequency: the system is auto- value.
matically reactivated upon leaving the field
of interference. Status display
▷ For tyres with special approval: the system It is possible to display the current status of
was unable to complete the reset. Perform the Flat Tyre Monitor, for example to check
a system reset again. whether the Flat Tyre Monitor is active.
▷ Tyre Pressure Monitor malfunction: have 1. "CAR"
the system checked by an authorised Serv- 2. "Vehicle status"
ice Partner or another qualified Service
Partner or specialist workshop. 3. "Flat Tyre Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Flat tyre monitor Initialisation required

An initialisation must be performed in the
Principle following situations:
The flat tyre monitor detects a tyre pressure ▷ After adjusting the tyre inflation pressure.
loss while driving and issues a warning if the ▷ After tyre/wheel change.
tyre pressure has dropped.
Initialisation
General
Initialisation saves the set tyre inflation pres-
The system identifies a tyre pressure loss by sures as reference values for subsequent de-
comparing the rotational speeds of the individ- tection of a flat tyre. Initialisation is started by
ual wheels during the journey. confirming the correct tyre inflation pressures.
A tyre pressure loss changes the diameter, Do not initialise the system if driving with snow
and with it the rotational speed, of the corre- chains fitted.
sponding wheel. The discrepancy is detected
and reported as a flat tyre. 1. "CAR"
The system does not measure the tyre infla- 2. "Vehicle status"
tion pressure as such. 3. "Flat Tyre Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state but do not drive
Operating requirements off.
The following requirements must be met for 5. Start the initialisation: "Perform reset"
the system, otherwise reliable message of a 6. Drive off.
tyre pressure loss is not ensured:
Initialisation is completed while driving which
can be interrupted at any time.
Initialisation resumes automatically when you
continue driving.
390
Messages What to do in the event of a flat tyre
General Standard tyres

When a flat tyre is indicated, the Dynamic Sta- 1. Identify the damaged tyre.
bility Control is turned on, if needed. To do this, check the tyre inflation pressure
in all four tyres, for example using the tyre
Safety information inflation pressure indicator of a tyre repair
kit.
WARNING If all four tyres are inflated to the correct
tyre inflation pressures, the flat tyre monitor
A damaged standard tyre with too little or no
might not have been initialised. In this case
tyre inflation pressure impairs driving charac-
initialise the system.
teristics, for example steering and braking.
Tyres with run-flat capabilities allow a limited If no tyre damage can be found, contact
level of stability to be maintained. There is a an authorised Service Partner or another
risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the qualified Service Partner or a specialist
vehicle is fitted with standard tyres. Comply workshop.
with the notes on run-flat tyres and continu- 2. Repair the flat tyre, for example using a tyre
ing driving with these tyres. repair kit or by changing the wheel.
Run-flat tyres
Flat tyre message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in Safety information
WARNING
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-
sage is shown on the control display. A run-flat tyre with too little or no tyre infla-
tion pressure will change the vehicle's han-
Icon Possible cause dling characteristics, for example there may
There is a flat tyre or substantial tyre be reduced directional stability when braking,
pressure loss. longer braking distances and different self-
steering properties. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Drive with care and do not exceed a
Measure speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph.
1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the
vehicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden
steering manoeuvres. WARNING
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with Continuing to drive with a flat tyre can cause
standard tyres or run-flat tyres. heavy trailers to start snaking. There is a risk
The icon identifying run-flat tyres is a circle of accident or material damage. When driving
with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall. with a trailer and a flat tyre, do not exceed the
speed of 60 km/h, 35 mph. If the trailer starts
391
necessary steering corrections as carefully as Adapt your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
possible. or driving over obstacles, for example kerbs or
potholes.
Maximum speed Final tyre failure

If a tyre is damaged you can continue driv- Vibration or loud noises during the journey
ing, but do not exceed a maximum speed of may be an indication that the tyre has finally
80 km/h, 50 mph. failed.
Reduce your speed and stop the vehicle. Parts
Continuing driving with a flat tyre
of the tyre may detach, which might lead to an
Observe the following if you continue driving accident.
with a flat tyre:
Do not continue driving, but instead contact an
1. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steering authorised Service Partner or another qualified
manoeuvres. Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h,
50 mph. System limits
3. At the next opportunity, check the tyre infla- In the following situations, the system could be
tion pressure in all four tyres. slow to respond or could work incorrectly:
If all four tyres are inflated to the correct ▷ A natural, even tyre pressure loss in all
tyre inflation pressures, the flat tyre monitor four tyres that occurs over time will not be
might not have been initialised. In this case detected. Therefore check the tyre inflation
initialise the system. pressure at regular intervals.
▷ No warning can be given in the event of
Possible driving distance with a deflated tyre sudden tyre damages caused by external
The possible driving distance varies depending factors.
on the load and stresses the vehicle is subjec- ▷ The system has not been initialised.
ted to, for example speed, the nature of the
▷ When driving on snow-covered or slippery
road surface and the outside temperature. The
roads.
driving distance may be shorter but can be in-
creased if a careful driving style is adopted. ▷ Dynamic driving style: drive wheels slip-
ping, high lateral acceleration.
With a moderate load and with low stress,
the vehicle can be driven for up to 80 km, ▷ When driving with snow chains.
50 miles.
Driving properties with damaged tyres

Wheel change
Driving with damaged tyres changes the vehi-
cle's handling characteristics and may lead to General
situations such as the following: For run-flat tyres or when using a tyre repair
▷ The vehicle losing traction more quickly. kit, it is not always necessary to change a
wheel immediately if tyre inflation pressure is
▷ Longer stopping distances.
lost due to a flat tyre.
▷ Different self-steering properties.
If necessary, wheel change tools, such as the
vehicle manufacturer's jack, are offered as op-
tional accessories by an authorised Service
392
Partner, or another qualified Service Partner,

or a specialist workshop. WARNING
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for exam-
Safety information ple snow, ice, tiles or similar, the jack may
slip. There is a danger of injury. Change the
WARNING wheel on a level, firm and non-slip surface if
at all possible.
The jack is only intended for raising the vehi-
cle briefly during a wheel change. Even if the
safety measures are complied with, there is
a risk of the raised vehicle falling over due to WARNING
the jack slipping. There is a danger of injury The jack is only optimised for raising the ve-
or danger to life. If the vehicle is raised with hicle and for use with the jacking points on
the jack, do not lie underneath the vehicle the vehicle. There is a danger of injury. Do
and do not switch on drive-ready state. not lift another vehicle or other loads with the
jack.
WARNING
Supports such as wooden blocks under the WARNING
jack can prevent it from achieving its load ca- If the jack has not been guided into the jack-
pacity due to the restricted height. The load ing point provided, the vehicle might be dam-
capacity of the wooden blocks may be excee- aged when the jack is extended, or the jack
ded, causing the vehicle to tip over. There is could slip. There is a danger of injury or ma-
a danger of injury or danger to life. Do not terial damage. When extending, make sure
place supports under the jack. that the jack is guided into the jacking point
adjacent to the wheel arch.
WARNING
The jack provided by the vehicle manufac- WARNING
turer is intended for changing a wheel in the A vehicle raised with a jack can fall from the
event of a breakdown. The jack is not de- jack if lateral forces are applied. There is a
signed for frequent use; for example, chang- danger of injury or material damage. If the
ing from summer to winter tyres. Using the vehicle is raised, do not apply any lateral
jack frequently may cause it to become jam- forces to the vehicle or pull the vehicle with
med or damaged. There is a danger of in- sudden movements. If the wheel is jammed,
jury or material damage. Only use the jack have it removed by an authorised Service
to change an emergency spare wheel or a Partner or another qualified Service Partner
spare wheel in case of a breakdown. or a specialist workshop.
393
On a level surface
Jack: the Australian/New Zealand
standard AS/NZS 2693
2007 – "Jack" includes the following warning
which BMW herewith adopts: "... no person
should place any portion of their body under
a vehicle that is supported only by a jack".
The jack supplied with your car should not
be used for any purpose other than wheel
changing and should never be used in con-
junction with a vehicle support stand. Rais- Place chocks or other suitable objects in front
ing the vehicle for the purpose of inspection of and behind the wheel diagonally opposite to
should only be performed in a controlled the one being changed.
workshop environment on a hoist by trained
personnel.
On a slight downhill gradient
The following AS/NZS 2693:2007 warnings
are repeated here: the jack should be used
on level firm ground wherever possible. It is
recommended that the wheels of the vehicle
be chocked, and that no person should re-
main in a vehicle that is being jacked.
The jack of your BMW is maintenance-free.
Please observe the information marked on
the jack.
If it is necessary to change a wheel on a slight

downhill gradient, place chocks and other suit-
NOTICE
able objects, for example stones, under the
Using an impact screwdriver to loosen or wheels of the front and rear axles against the
tighten the locking wheel bolt can damage it. direction of roll.
There is a risk of material damage. Only use
a wheel bolt wrench to loosen and tighten the
locking wheel bolt. Locking wheel bolts
Principle
Securing the vehicle against rolling The locking wheel bolts have a special cod-
away ing. The bolts can only be released with the
adapter that matches the coding.
General
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that Overview
the vehicle should additionally be protected The adapter of the locking wheel bolts can be
against rolling away during a wheel change. found in the toolkit or in an oddments tray in
the toolkit.
394
the emergency spare wheel out of the vehi-

cle.
▷ If applicable, set up warning triangle or
flashing light at the correct distance.
▷ Additionally secure the vehicle against roll-
ing away.
▷ Undo the wheel bolts by half a turn.
▷ Locking wheel bolt, arrow 1.

Jacking points
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1. Place the adapter on the locking wheel bolt.
2. Unscrew the locking wheel bolt.
3. After unscrewing the wheel bolt, remove
the adapter again.
Screwing in The jacking points are located in the marked

positions.
1. Place the adapter on the locking wheel bolt.
If necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on
the locking wheel bolt. Raising the vehicle
2. Screw in the locking wheel bolt. The tight-
ening torque is 140 Nm, 101 lb ft.
WARNING
3. After screwing in the wheel bolt, remove
Hands or fingers could get trapped when us-
the adapter again and stow it.
ing the jack. There is a danger of injury. Keep
your hands in the described position when
Preparing the vehicle using the jack, and do not change this posi-
▷ Park the vehicle on firm and non-slip tion.
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Apply the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or select selector lever posi-
tion P.
▷ As soon as the traffic flow permits, have
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and guide them out of the danger area, for
example behind the crash barrier.
▷ Depending on the equipment, take the
tools for changing wheels and, if necessary,
395
1. Hold the jack with one hand, arrow 1, and 5. Make sure that the jack base is extended
grasp the jack crank handle or lever with vertically and at right angles underneath
your other hand, arrow 2. the jacking point.
2. Guide the jack into the rectangular recess 6. Make sure that the jack base is vertical and
of the jacking point closest to the wheel to at right angles below the jacking point after
be changed. extension.
3. Turn the jack crank handle or lever clock- 7. Raise by cranking until the surface of the
wise to extend the jack. jack stands fully on the ground and the
wheel in question is a maximum of 3 cm,
1.2 inches off the ground.
Fitting a wheel
No more than one emergency spare wheel
may be fitted.
1. Unscrew the wheel bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put on the new wheel or emergency spare
4. Remove your hand from the jack as soon wheel and tighten at least two wheel bolts
as the jack is under load and continue to crosswise until finger-tight.
turn the jack crank handle or lever with one
hand. If installing non-original light alloy wheels
not supplied by the manufacturer, the
wheel bolts belonging to the wheels may
also have to be used.
396
4. Tighten the remaining wheel bolts until fin- Safety information

ger-tight and then tighten all the wheel
bolts crosswise.
WARNING
5. Turn the jack crank handle anticlockwise to
retract the jack and lower the vehicle. The emergency spare wheel has special di-
mensions. When driving with an emergency
6. Remove the jack and stow it securely.
spare wheel, the driving properties may
change, for example reduced directional sta-
After wheel change bility when braking, longer braking distance
1. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. The and modified self-steering properties in the
tightening torque is 140 Nm, 101 lb ft. limit range. There is a risk of accident. Drive
2. Stow the faulty wheel in the luggage com- with care and do not exceed a speed of
partment, if necessary. 80 km/h, 50 mph.
3. Check tyre inflation pressure at the next op-
portunity and correct as necessary.
Overview
4. Re-initialise the flat tyre monitor or reset
the Tyre Pressure Monitor.
5. Check the tight fit of the wheel bolts using a
calibrated torque wrench.
6. Drive to the nearest authorised Service
or a specialist workshop to have the dam-
aged tyre replaced.
Emergency spare wheel The emergency spare wheel and the tools for
changing wheels are located in the luggage
compartment under the luggage compartment
Principle floor.
In case of a flat tyre, the emergency spare
wheel can be used as a replacement for the
defective tyre. The emergency spare wheel is
intended for short-term use until the defective
wheel has been replaced.
General
Only fit one emergency spare wheel at most.
Additionally, regularly check the tyre inflation
pressure of the emergency spare wheel in the
luggage compartment and correct the pres-
sure if necessary.
397
Removing emergency spare wheel

1. Remove luggage compartment floor. To do
so, pull the luggage compartment floor up
directly behind the rear seat backrests.
2. Open tensioning strap.
3. Remove tool holder.

4. Remove emergency spare wheel from the
storage tray. Do not remove any covers
when doing this.
Inserting the emergency spare

wheel
1. Place the emergency spare wheel in the
storage tray.
2. Insert the tool holder.
3. Tie the tensioning belt. Make sure that it is
fitted correctly and firmly.
4. Insert the luggage compartment floor.
398
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Engine compartment
tems.
Overview
Engines with 4 or 6 cylinders
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 6 Depending on the motorisation: coolant ex-
2 Mild hybrid technology, cap pansion tank for additional radiator
3 Jump start, positive battery terminal 7 Jump start, negative battery terminal
4 Oil filler neck 8 Vehicle identification number
5 Engine coolant expansion tank
399
MOBILITY Engine compartment
8-cylinder engine
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 5 Oil filler neck

2 Jump start, positive battery terminal 6 Jump start, negative battery terminal
3 Engine coolant expansion tank 7 Vehicle identification number
4 Additional coolant expansion tank cooling
Bonnet
WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
Safety information
components. Certain components in the en-
gine compartment can also move when the
WARNING vehicle is switched off, for example the radia-
Incorrectly performed work in the engine tor fan. There is a danger of injury. Do not
compartment can damage components and reach into an area where there are moving
poses a safety risk. There is a risk of accident parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away
or material damage. Have work in the engine from moving parts.
compartment carried out by an authorised
400
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Opening bonnet
WARNING 1. Pull the lever, arrow 1. The bonnet is un-
The bonnet has protruding parts on the in- locked.
side, for example locking hooks. There is a
danger of injury. When the bonnet is open,
watch out for protruding parts and keep
these areas clear.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not correctly locked, it can
come open during the journey and impair vis-
ibility. There is a risk of accident. Stop imme- 2. After releasing the lever, pull the lever
diately and close the bonnet correctly. again, arrow 2.
The bonnet can be opened.
3. Watch out for any protruding parts on the
WARNING bonnet.
opening and closing the bonnet. There is a Closing the bonnet
danger of injury. When opening and closing,
bonnet is kept clear.
NOTICE
Windscreen wipers which are folded away
from the windscreen can become trapped if
the bonnet is opened. There is a risk of ma-
terial damage. Before opening the bonnet,
Allow the bonnet to drop from a height of ap-
make sure that the windscreen wipers are fit-
proximately 50 cm, approx. 20 in.
ted with wiper blades and are in contact with
the windscreen. The bonnet must engage on both sides.
NOTICE
When closing, the bonnet must lock into
place on both sides. Applying additional pres-
sure can damage the bonnet. There is a risk
of material damage. Open the bonnet again
and close it firmly. Avoid applying additional
pressure.
401
MOBILITY Operating fluids
Operating fluids
Vehicle equipment
evant functions and systems. Please comply The engine has knock control. This means that
with the relevant laws and regulations when different petrol grades can be used.
using the corresponding functions and sys- The use of fuels with a minimum grade has no
tems. influence on the service life of the engine.
Safety information
Fuel grade
NOTICE
General
The fuel system and engine can be damaged
Depending on the region, many filling stations
by the wrong fuel, even in small quantities,
sell fuel that is adapted to winter or summer
and by the wrong fuel additives. In addition,
conditions. Fuel that is sold in winter helps with
the catalytic converter will be permanently
cold starting, for example.
damaged. There is a risk of material damage.
For petrol engines, do not refuel with or add
Petrol the following:
▷ Leaded petrol.
General
▷ Metallic additives, for example manga-
For optimal fuel consumption, the petrol
nese or iron.
should be sulphur-free or have a low sulphur
content. After filling with the wrong fuel, do not press
the Start/Stop button. Contact an authorised
Fuels labelled on the pump as containing
metal must not be used.
You can fill up with fuels with a maximum
ethanol content of 25 %, for example E10 or
E25.
NOTICE
In order to achieve nominal values for driving
Fuel below the specified minimum grade can
performance and consumption, take account
adversely affect engine function or lead to
of the petrol grade specified in the sales litera-
engine damage. There is a risk of material
ture.
damage. Do not refuel with fuel below the
specified minimum grade.
402
Operating fluids MOBILITY
Safety information
NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system NOTICE
and engine. There is a risk of material dam-
The fuel system and engine can be damaged
age. Do not refuel with fuel with a higher
by the wrong fuel, even in small quantities,
ethanol content than recommended. Do not
and by the wrong fuel additives. There is a
refuel with fuel containing methanol, for ex-
risk of material damage.
ample M5 to M100.
Note the following with diesel engines:
▷ Do not fill up with petrol.
Petrol grade
▷ Observe the minimum quality.
The engine is designed to run on petrol com-
▷ Refuel with sulphur-free fuels or fuels
plying with DIN EN 228.
with the lowest possible sulphur content.
Super, RON 95.
▷ The vehicle manufacturer recommends
M Performance model: only using diesel additives and additives
Super Plus, 98 RON. that have been classified as suitable.
After filling with the wrong fuel, do not press
Minimum grade the Start/Stop button. Contact an authorised
Unleaded petrol, RON 91. Service Partner or another qualified Service
Diesel
Diesel quality
General
The engine is designed to run on diesel fuel
The following diesel fuels can be used for refu-
complying with DIN EN 590 and ASTM D975.
elling:
Diesel with up to 7 % biodiesel (B7).
▷ Diesel fuels with a maximum biodiesel con-
tent of 10 %, e.g. B7 or B10.
Minimum grade
▷ Paraffinic diesel fuels, e.g. XTL.
Diesel with up to 10 % biodiesel (B10).
Paraffinic diesel fuel as per EN 15940.
403
BMW Diesel with Displays in the instrument cluster

BluePerformance Fuel reserve indicator light
The fuel reserve indicator light in the instru-
Principle ment cluster notifies you if the reducing agent
BMW Diesel with BluePerformance reduces ni- fill level in the tank is low.
trogen oxides in the diesel exhaust by injecting Do not allow the reducing agent tank to run
the reducing agent AdBlue into the exhaust completely empty, as otherwise it will not be
pipe system. In the catalytic converter, this possible to switch drive-ready state back on
produces a chemical reaction that reduces ni- after stopping the engine.
trogen oxides to a minimum.
A yellow warning light is illumi-
nated in the instrument cluster:
General
filling level too low. The remain-
The vehicle has a tank which requires topping ing range is shown in the instru-
up. ment cluster. Top up with at
There must be a sufficient amount of the re- least 5 litres, 1.3 gal of reducing
ducing agent present in order for drive-ready agent immediately.
state to be activated the usual way.
The reducing agent can be topped up at any AdBlue on the minimum level
time.
The reducing agent tank is
The reducing agent AdBlue is a registered empty. Immediately top up with
trademark of the Verband der Automobilindus- at least 10 litres, 2.7 gal of re-
trie e. V. (VDA). ducing agent. The engine will
The reducing agent is available at many serv- continue to run provided that it
ice stations. is not stopped and all other op-
Preferably top up with reducing agent at a erating conditions are met, for example, there
pump dispenser. is sufficient fuel.
Display on the control display System fault

If there is a system fault, a Check Control mes-
Displaying the fill level and top-up sage is displayed.
quantity
Visit the nearest authorised Service Partner or
The filling level and the exact top-up quantity another qualified Service Partner or a specialist
is shown on the control display. workshop.
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status" Having AdBlue topped up
3. "AdBlue" BMW recommends having the reducing agent
topped up by a Service Partner as part of a
If the filling level is too low, a Check Control regular maintenance schedule.
message is displayed.
If you keep to this maintenance schedule, a
single top-up is generally required between the
maintenance appointments.
404
Under certain circumstances, for example due

to particularly dynamic driving style or operat- NOTICE
ing the vehicle with a trailer, it may be neces-
The constituents of the reducing agent are
sary to top up more than once between main-
highly aggressive. There is a risk of mate-
tenance appointments.
rial damage. Do not allow reducing agent to
As soon as the fuel reserve indicator light is come into contact with vehicle surfaces.
shown in the instrument cluster, have the re-
ducing agent topped up, to avoid problems ac-
tivating drive-ready state. Suitable AdBlue
AdBlue complying with ISO 22241-1
Topping up AdBlue yourself At many service stations, reducing agent is
available at a special pump dispenser. Prefera-
Safety information bly top up with reducing agent at a pump dis-
penser.
WARNING If no pump dispenser is available, reducing
When the reducing agent container is agent can be topped up from a container. Re-
opened, small quantities of ammonia va- ducing agent is available in various containers.
pours can emerge. Ammonia vapours have Preferably use the special bottle recommen-
a pungent smell and irritate the skin, mucous ded by BMW. With this bottle and its special
membranes and eyes. There is a danger of adapter, reducing agent can be topped up con-
injury. Do not inhale ammonia vapours. Do veniently.
not allow reducing agent to come into con-
tact with clothing, skin or eyes, and do not AdBlue at low temperatures
swallow it. Keep children away from reducing At outside temperatures below -11 ℃/+12 ℉,
agents. the reducing agent should only be topped up
directly before the start of a journey.
WARNING Top-up quantity

Operating fluids, for example oils, greases, As soon as the fuel reserve indicator light
coolants and fuels, can contain substances is displayed, top up at least 5 litres, ap-
that are harmful to health. There is a danger prox. 1.3 gal.
of injury or danger to life. Please comply with
the instructions on the containers. Do not al- Displaying the top-up quantity
low operating fluids to come into contact with The exact to-up quantity is shown on control
clothing, skin or eyes. Do not pour operating display.
fluids into other bottles. Keep operating fluids
out of the reach of children. 1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "AdBlue"
405
Reducing agent tank Fuel filler cap, see page 370.

2. Turn the reducing agent tank cap anticlock-
wise and remove.
The fuel filler cap for the reducing agent is lo-

cated next to the fuel filler cap for the fuel tank.
Topping up with reducing agent at the fuel filler flap.
pump dispenser
General
When topping up, hook the fuel pump noz-
zle fully into the filler pipe. Lifting the fuel
pump nozzle while topping up will cause the
following to happen:
▷ The supply is stopped too soon.
▷ Overflow of reducing agent.
4. Use the fuel pump nozzle to add the rec-
The reducing agent tank is full when the fuel ommended top-up quantity as a minimum.
pump nozzle cuts out for the first time.
The tank is full when the fuel pump nozzle
Depending on the fuel pump nozzle, the reduc- cuts out for the first time.
ing agent tank may not be filled completely.
Please comply with the safety regulations dis-
played at filling stations.
Adding reducing agent

1. Open the fuel filler flap.
5. Put fuel filler cap back on and turn clock-

wise.
6. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
406
Filling with an incorrect fluid The display extinguishes after approxi-

mately 1 minute.
General 2. Press the Start/Stop button and switch on
A Check Control message is displayed if the drive-ready state.
tank has been filled with the wrong fluid.
If the wrong type of liquid has been added,
contact an authorised Service Partner or an-
Engine oil
other qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop. General
Engine oil consumption depends on the driving
Safety information style and operating conditions.
Therefore check the engine oil level regularly
WARNING each time you fill up with fuel by taking a de-
After filling with an incorrect liquid, the sys- tailed measurement.
tem may heat up and catch fire. There is a Engine oil consumption may increase due to
risk of fire and injury. Only fill with liquids that the following, for example:
are intended for the tank. Do not start the ▷ Dynamic driving style.
engine after filling with an incorrect liquid.
▷ While running in the engine.
▷ Engine idling.
After filling with reducing agent ▷ Use of engine oil grades rated as unsuita-
ble.
Fuel reserve indicator light
Different Check Control messages are shown
After topping up, the fuel re- on the control display, depending on the en-
serve indicator light continues gine oil level.
to be shown with the remaining The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
range. having the engine oil changed by an author-
Drive-ready state can be activa- ised Service Partner or another qualified Serv-
ted. ice Partner or a specialist workshop.
After driving for a short time, the fuel reserve
indicator light turns off. Safety information
AdBlue on the minimum level NOTICE

After filling up, the display con- Too little engine oil causes engine damage.
tinues to be shown. There is a risk of material damage. Top up
Drive-ready state can only be with engine oil immediately.
activated when the display is no
longer illuminated.
1. Press the Start/Stop button three times.
407
NOTICE A current reading is available after approxi-
Too much engine oil can damage the engine mately 30 minutes of normal driving.
or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of material damage. Do not add too much Displaying the engine oil level
engine oil. If there is too much engine oil, 1. "CAR"
have the engine oil level corrected by an au- 2. "Vehicle status"
thorised Service Partner or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop. 3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
NOTICE
When frequently making short journeys or us-
If the engine oil is not changed at the cor-
ing a sporty driving style, it may not be pos-
rect time, engine wear may increase which
sible to obtain a measurement. In this case,
could cause engine damage. There is a risk
the measurement for the last, sufficiently long
of material damage. Do not exceed the serv-
journey is displayed.
ice date indicated in the vehicle.
Detailed measurement
Electronic oil measurement
Principle
General The engine oil level is checked when the vehi-
cle is stationary and is shown on a scale.
Electronic oil measurement uses two measur-
ing procedures: If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
▷ Monitoring.
shown.
▷ Detailed measurement.
When frequently making short journeys or us- General
ing a sporty driving style, for example fast During measurement, the idle rotational speed
cornering, perform a detailed measurement at is increased slightly.
regular intervals.
Monitoring
▷ Vehicle is standing on level ground.
Principle ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in

selector lever position N or P and accelera-
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
tor pedal not pressed.
during the journey and can be shown on the
control display. ▷ Drive-ready state is switched on by press-
ing the Start/Stop button.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is ▷ Engine is at operating temperature.
shown.
Carrying out a detailed measurement
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
408
3. "Engine oil level"

4. "Engine oil level measurement" NOTICE
5. "Start measurement" Too much engine oil can damage the engine
The engine oil level is checked and shown on a or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
scale. of material damage. Do not add too much
engine oil. If there is too much engine oil,
have the engine oil level corrected by an au-
Topping up engine oil thorised Service Partner or another qualified
General
Do not top up engine oil unless a message
is displayed in the instrument cluster. The top- Overview
up quantity is specified in the message on the The oil filler neck is in the engine compartment.
control display.
Only top up with suitable engine oil grades.
Overview, see page 399.
Stop the vehicle safely and switch off drive-
ready state before topping up with engine oil. Topping up engine oil
Do not add too much engine oil. 1. Open the bonnet.
Opening, see page 401.
Safety information
2. Turn the cap anticlockwise to open.
WARNING
Operating fluids, for example oils, greases,
coolants and fuels, can contain substances
that are harmful to health. There is a danger
of injury or danger to life. Please comply with
the instructions on the containers. Do not al-
low operating fluids to come into contact with
clothing, skin or eyes. Do not pour operating
fluids into other bottles. Keep operating fluids
out of the reach of children. 3. Add engine oil.
4. Tighten cap.
NOTICE Engine oil grades for topping up

Too little engine oil causes engine damage.
There is a risk of material damage. Top up General
with engine oil immediately. Engine oil quality is a critical factor in the serv-
ice life of the engine.
Only top up with the types of engine oil that
are listed.
Some engine oil grades may not be available
in all countries.
409
Safety information Petrol engine
ACEA C2.
NOTICE
ACEA C5.
Oil additives can damage the engine. There
is a risk of material damage. Do not use oil
additives. Diesel engine
ACEA C2.
NOTICE ACEA C3.
Using the wrong engine oil can result in en-

gine malfunctions and damage. There is a Viscosity classes
risk of material damage. When selecting the When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
engine oil, make sure that it is the correct oil the engine oil belongs to one of the following
specification. viscosity classes:
Petrol engine
Suitable engine oil grades SAE 0W-20.
Up to 1 litre approx. 2 pints of an engine oil with
SAE 0W-30.
the following oil specification can be topped
up:
Diesel engine
Petrol engine
SAE 0W-30.
BMW Longlife-12 FE.
SAE 5W-30.
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
SAE 0W-40.
The oil specification BMW Longlife-17 FE+ is
SAE 5W-40.
not suitable for the 50i petrol engine.
Diesel engine The viscosity class SAE 0W-20 is not suitable
for the 50i petrol engine.
BMW Longlife-04.
Viscosity classes with a high viscosity grade
BMW Longlife-12 FE. can increase fuel consumption.
Further information on suitable engine oil
The oil specification BMW Longlife-12 FE is not specifications and viscosity classes can be ob-
suitable for the 25d, 35d, 40d and 50d diesel tained from an authorised Service Partner or
engines. another qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
Alternative engine oil grades
If suitable engine oils are not available, up to
1 litre, approx. 2 pints, of an engine oil with
the following oil specification can be used for
topping up:
410
Coolant level
General
Depending on the motorisation, either one or
two coolant expansion tanks are housed under
the bonnet. Check the coolant levels regularly
and top up.
On factory delivery, the coolant may be over-
filled in the coolant tank. The normal level of
the coolant level is achieved by prolonging the
Coolant operating period.
The coolant level is shown by minimum and
maximum markings in the filler neck of the
General
coolant expansion tank.
Coolant is a mixture of water and coolant addi-
Depending on the motorisation, the coolant
tive.
expansion tank is located on the right or left
Not all commercially available additives are of the engine compartment.
suitable for the vehicle. The vehicle manu-
facturer recommends using coolant with the
BMW LC-18 specification. Do not mix additives Overview, see page 399.
of different colours. Comply with the 50:50
mixing ratio of water to additive. Information Checking the coolant level at the side
regarding suitable additives is available from marks
an authorised Service Partner or another quali- 1. Allow the engine to cool down.
2. Open the bonnet.
Safety information Opening, see page 401.

3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the minimum and maximum markings on
WARNING the coolant expansion tank.
If the cooling system is opened when the en-
gine is hot, coolant can escape and cause Icon Meaning
scalding. There is a danger of injury. Only
open the cooling system when the engine Maximum.
has cooled down. Minimum.
Checking the coolant level in the filler

WARNING neck
Additives are harmful to health and using 1. Allow the engine to cool down.
the wrong additives can damage the engine.
2. Open the bonnet.
age. Do not allow additives to come into con- Opening, see page 401.
tact with clothing, skin or eyes, and do not
swallow them. Only use suitable additives.
411
3. Turn cap on coolant expansion tank slightly

anticlockwise to allow the excess pressure
Washer fluid
to escape.
4. Open cap on coolant expansion tank.
General
5. The coolant level is correct if it is between All window washer nozzles are supplied from
the minimum and maximum markings in one container.
the filler neck. Use a mixture of tap water and screenwash
concentrate for the window washer system, if
necessary with the antifreeze additive.
Recommended minimum fill level: 1 litre,
1.7 Imp. pints.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze additives can contain toxic
6. Tighten cap. substances, and are flammable. There is a
risk of fire and danger of injury. Please com-
Topping up the coolant ply with the instructions on the containers.
1. Allow the engine to cool down. Keep antifreeze additives away from sources
2. Open the bonnet. of combustion. Do not pour operating fluids
into other bottles. Keep operating fluids out of
Opening, see page 401.
the reach of children.
3. Turn cap on coolant expansion tank slightly
anticlockwise to allow the excess pressure
to escape.
WARNING
4. Open cap on coolant expansion tank.
Washer fluid can ignite on contact with hot
5. If required, slowly top up to the correct fill- parts of the engine and catch fire. There is a
ing level; do not overfill. danger of injury or material damage. Only top
6. Tighten cap. up washer fluid when the engine has cooled
7. Have the cause of coolant loss rectified as down. Afterwards fully close the cap of the
soon as possible. washer fluid reservoir.
Disposal
NOTICE
When disposing of coolant and coolant
additives, comply with the relevant en- Silicone additives mixed with the washer fluid
vironmental protection regulations. for their water beading effect on the windows
may damage the car wash. There is a risk
of material damage. Do not add silicone ad-
ditives to the washer fluid.
412
NOTICE
Mixing different screenwash concentrates or
antifreeze additives may damage the car
wash. There is a risk of material damage. Do
not mix different screenwash concentrates or
antifreeze additives. Please comply with the
instructions and mixing ratios stated on the
containers.
Overview
The reservoir for the washer fluid is located in

the engine compartment.
Malfunction
Using undiluted screenwash concentrate or
antifreeze additive based on alcohol may re-
sult in false readings at low temperatures be-
low -15 ℃, +5 ℉.
413
MOBILITY Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment General
Information on service requirements can be
This chapter describes all standard, country- shown on the control display.
specific and optional equipment available for For further information:
Service requirements, see page 187.
optional equipment selected or the national- Service data in the vehicle key
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- Information on maintenance requirement is
evant functions and systems. Please comply continuously stored in the vehicle key. The
with the relevant laws and regulations when Service Partner can read out this data and
using the corresponding functions and sys- suggest a programme of maintenance for your
tems. vehicle.
It is therefore important to give the service ad-
visor the vehicle key that was last used to drive
BMW Maintenance System the vehicle.
The maintenance system indicates what main- Stationary periods

tenance measures are required and thereby
assists in maintaining the road safety and op- Stationary periods when the vehicle is out of
erational safety of the vehicle. use with its vehicle battery disconnected are
not taken into account.
The exact work required and the maintenance
intervals may vary depending on the national- In such cases, have any time-dependent main-
market version. Labour, spare parts, operating tenance procedures, for example those con-
materials and wear materials are charged sep- cerning the brake fluid and, where applicable,
arately. Additional information is available from the engine oil and microfilter/activated carbon
an authorised Service Partner or another quali- filter, updated by an authorised Service Partner
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop. or another qualified Service Partner or a spe-
cialist workshop.
Condition Based Service

Service history
Principle
Maintenance and repairs
Condition Based Service determines the main-
tenance requirement using sensors and spe- Have maintenance and repairs carried out by
cial algorithms which monitor the conditions in an authorised Service Partner or another quali-
which the vehicle is used. fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
The system therefore allows the scope of the

maintenance work to be adapted to the indi-
Entries
vidual usage profile. The maintenance work carried out is entered
in the maintenance records and the vehicle
414
Maintenance MOBILITY
data. As with a service booklet, the entries pro-

vide evidence of regular maintenance.
Socket for on-board
When data is entered into the vehicle's elec-
diagnosis
tronic service history, any service-relevant data
is saved both in the vehicle and in the central General
IT systems of BMW AG, Munich. Devices connected to the socket for on-board
After a change of registered keeper, the new diagnosis trigger the alarm system after lock-
owner will be able to view the data entered ing the vehicle.
in the electronic service history. Similarly, an Remove devices connected to the socket for
authorised Service Partner or another qualified on-board diagnosis before locking the vehicle.
Service Partner or a specialist workshop can
also view the data entered in the electronic
Safety information
service history.
Objection NOTICE
The registered keeper is entitled to contact an Incorrect use of the on-board diagnostic
authorised Service Partner or another qualified socket can cause malfunctions in the vehi-
Service Partner or a specialist workshop and cle. There is a risk of material damage. Serv-
request that no entries are made in the elec- ice and maintenance work involving the on-
tronic service history and that no data relat- board diagnostic socket must be carried out
ing to his/her time as owner is subsequently by an authorised Service Partner, or another
stored in the vehicle or transferred to the ve- qualified Service Partner, or a specialist work-
hicle manufacturer. In such cases, no entries shop, or other authorised persons. Only con-
will be made in the vehicle's electronic service nect devices that have been tested and found
history. to be safe for use with the socket for on-
board diagnosis.
Displays
Service work which has been logged can be
Position
Service requirements, see page 187.
For Australia: maintenance

No maintenance work other than normal main-
tenance is required to keep the emission levels
of your vehicle within the design limits.
There is an on-board diagnostic socket on the
driver’s side for reading out vehicle data.
415
MOBILITY Maintenance
Engine warning light

▷ When the warning light flashes:
There is an engine fault which could
damage the catalytic converter.
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately.
▷ When warning light illuminates:
Emission levels have deteriorated. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Recycling vehicle
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
returning the vehicle to a collection point nom-
inated by the manufacturer at the end of its
life cycle. The relevant national legal provisions
apply to returns and recycling in general. Infor-
mation on recycling and sustainability can be
found on the manufacturer’s country-specific
websites. Further information is available from
an authorised Service Partner or another quali-
416
Replacing parts MOBILITY
Replacing parts
Vehicle equipment in or switch on the windscreen wiper without
a wiper blade installed.
the model range. It may therefore describe NOTICE
equipment and functions which are not avail- Windscreen wipers which are folded away
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the from the windscreen can become trapped if
optional equipment selected or the national- the bonnet is opened. There is a risk of ma-
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- terial damage. Before opening the bonnet,
evant functions and systems. Please comply make sure that the windscreen wipers are fit-
with the relevant laws and regulations when ted with wiper blades and are in contact with
using the corresponding functions and sys- the windscreen.
tems.
Replacing the wiper blades

Toolkit 1. To replace the wiper blades, move the wip-
ers to the fold-out position.
For fold-out position of the windscreen wip-
ers, see page 163.
2. Lift the windscreen wipers away from the
windscreen and hold them securely.
The toolkit is located in the left storage com-

partment of the luggage compartment.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE
The windscreen may sustain damage if a
windscreen wiper falls onto it without the
wiper blade fitted. There is a risk of material
damage. Hold the windscreen wiper firmly
when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold
417
MOBILITY Replacing parts
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out wiper

blade, arrow 2. WARNING
Intense brightness can irritate or harm the
retina of the eye. There is a danger of injury.
Do not look directly into the headlights or
other light sources. Do not remove covers
from LEDs.
Headlight glass
During cool or humid weather, the headlight
4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it into glass can mist over on the inside. When driving
the holder until it audibly engages with the lights switched on, the condensation
disappears after a short time. There is no need
5. Fold in the windscreen wipers.
to replace the headlight glass.
If moisture increases, for example if there are
Lights and bulbs water droplets in the lamp despite the head-
lights being switched on, have the headlights
checked.
General
Lights and bulbs are an important aspect of
driving safety. Vehicle battery
All headlights and other lights use LED or laser
technology. General
In the event of a fault, the manufacturer of the The battery is maintenance-free.
vehicle recommends having the relevant work
More information regarding the battery can be
carried out by an authorised Service Partner or
obtained from an authorised Service Partner or
workshop.
workshop.
Safety information Safety information
WARNING
DANGER
Concentrated laserlight can cause irritation
Touching live components can result in an
or lasting damage to the retina of the eye.
electric shock. There is a danger of injury or
There is a danger of injury. The manufacturer
danger to life. Do not touch any components
of the vehicle recommends having work on
that could be live.
the lighting system, including bulb replace-
ment, performed by an authorised Service
or a specialist workshop.
418
Icon Meaning
WARNING
Rinse any splashes of acid
Vehicle batteries that are classified as unsuit-
with water immediately. If acid
able may damage systems or result in func-
comes into contact with eyes
tions no longer being carried out. There is
or is swallowed, seek medical
a danger of injury or material damage. Only
attention immediately.
use vehicle batteries that have been classi-
fied as suitable by the vehicle manufacturer. No direct sunlight, no frost.
Registering the battery with the Follow the operating instruc-

vehicle tions.
having an authorised Service Partner or an- Explosive gas mixture. Do not
other qualified Service Partner or a specialist seal any openings on the bat-
workshop register the vehicle battery with the tery.
vehicle after the battery has been replaced.
Once the battery has been registered again, Replacing the battery
all comfort functions will be available without
restriction and any Check Control messages General
relating to the comfort functions will no longer
be displayed.
only having the vehicle battery replaced by an
authorised Service Partner or another qualified
Hazard icons Service Partner or a specialist workshop. If the
The following hazard icons can be found on battery is not replaced correctly, the vehicle
the vehicle battery: may not recognise it properly and perfect func-
tioning cannot be guaranteed.
Icon Meaning
No smoking, no naked flames, Notes on removal

no sparks. Observe the following notes on removing the
vehicle battery:
Wear protective goggles.
▷ Park the vehicle and switch off consumers.
▷ First disconnect the power at the negative
Keep away from children. terminal. Then disconnect the power at the
positive terminal.
Risk of acid burns: wear Notes on installation

gloves, do not tilt the battery. Observe the following notes on installing the
vehicle battery:
▷ Remove any foreign bodies from the bat-
tery holder.
▷ Only install the battery in the intended posi-
tion in the vehicle.
419
▷ Keep the battery and vehicle connection Battery charger

contacts clean. Battery chargers developed especially for the
▷ First connect the power at the positive ter- vehicle and suitable for the electrical system
minal. Then connect the power at the neg- can be obtained from an authorised Service
ative terminal. Partner or another qualified Service Partner or
▷ Use the connections, connectors and cov- a specialist workshop.
ers provided.
▷ Connect a hose to the gas outlet opening if Charging the battery
necessary. Only charge the battery via the starting aid ter-
minals in the engine compartment and with
Initial operation the engine switched off.
The battery is operational. No special precau- With mild hybrid technology: only charge the
tions are required for start-up. battery when the bonnet is open.
Charging the battery Jump start terminals, see page 428.
General Open circuit

To ensure the full service life of the battery, Following an open circuit, some equipment will
keep the battery sufficiently charged. have to be reinitialised or individual settings
Charge the battery under the following situa- will need to be updated, for example:
tions: ▷ With memory function: save positions
▷ If the inspection glass on the top of the bat- again.
tery is black. ▷ Time: update.
▷ If there is not enough power to start the ▷ Date: update.
vehicle.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialise system.
The following conditions can have a negative
effect on battery performance: Storing the battery
▷ Frequently driving short distances. Observe the following information on storing
▷ If the vehicle is not used for a period of one vehicle batteries:
month or longer. ▷ Store the battery in a cool and dry place.
▷ Protect the battery from direct sunlight and
Safety information
frost.
▷ Only clean the battery with a damp, anti-
NOTICE static cloth.
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat- ▷ Store the battery upright and secure it
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the against falling over.
vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V
▷ Install the oldest batteries first.
electrical system. There is a risk of material
damage. Only connect battery chargers for ▷ Do not remove the protective cap from the
the vehicle battery to the starting aid termi- contacts.
nals in the engine compartment. ▷ Charge or install the battery by the date on
the battery label at the latest. Once fully
420
charged, the battery will work for another Removing the cover
10 months. 1. Turn the cap to the open padlock icon ,
arrow 1.
Mild hybrid technology
Principle
The vehicle's mild hybrid technology includes
a 48 volt battery. Mild hybrid technology can
reduce fuel consumption.
Mild hybrid technology influences the following
functions.
▷ Automatic Start/Stop function, see 2. Remove cover, arrow 2.
page 151.
▷ Engine-off coasting/coasting, see Notes
page 366. A purple cable runs from the battery to the
centre of the vehicle.
Safety information Do not replace or work on the mild hybrid tech-
nology battery.
DANGER
Disposing of the old battery
electric shock. There is a danger of injury or Dispose of old batteries with an author-
danger to life. Do not touch any components ised Service Partner, another qualified
that could be live. Service Partner or a specialist work-
shop, or hand them in to an authorised collec-
tion point.
Overview Batteries filled with acid should be transported
upright. Protect batteries against falling over
when in transit.
Warranty
See the vehicle purchase contract for informa-
tion on the battery warranty.
Fuses
The mild hybrid technology battery is located
in the engine compartment, under a cover on
the passenger's side. General
The fuses are located at different positions in
the vehicle.
421
Safety information The fuse box may be located behind sound

insulation.
Information on fuse assignment, as well as the
WARNING
positions of any other fuse boxes, is available
Incorrect or repaired fuses can overload elec- on the Internet: fusecard.bmw.com.
trical cables and components. There is a risk
of fire. Do not repair blown fuses or replace Other fuse boxes
them with fuses with a different colour or
amp rating. There are other fuse boxes in the vehicle. In
the event of a fault, contact an authorised
In the interior Partner or a specialist workshop.
In the interior, the fuses are located behind a

cover in the front passenger footwell.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends having
fuses changed by an authorised Service Part-
ner or another qualified Service Partner or a
specialist workshop.
Undo the fastening, arrow, and carefully bend

down the trim panel on the right.
The fuse box is located at the front right.
Inside the luggage compartment

The fuses are located behind a cover on the
right-hand side in the luggage compartment.
Remove the cover from the right-hand side

trim panel.
422
Help in case of a breakdown MOBILITY
Help in case of a breakdown

Vehicle equipment Warning triangle
using the corresponding functions and sys- The warning triangle is housed on the inside of
tems. the boot lid.
Press the unlocking mechanism, arrow 1, and
Hazard warning lights swivel the cover down, arrow 2.
First-aid kit
General
market version, the vehicle may have a first-
aid kit.
Some items in the kit have a limited life.
The button is located in the centre console. Check the use-by dates of the contents regu-
The red light in the button flashes when the larly and replace any items that have expired in
hazard warning lights are switched on. good time.
Storage
The first-aid kit is housed in the net on the
left-hand side of the luggage compartment.
BMW Emergency Service

Principle
BMW Group Roadside Assistance can be con-
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown.
423
MOBILITY Help in case of a breakdown
General automatically. It may be necessary to approve

this on the Control Display.
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi-
cle's condition is sent to BMW Roadside Assis-
tance. It is possible that malfunctions can be Teleservice Assistance
remedied directly. Teleservice Assistance is a country-specific
There are various ways of contacting BMW feature that allows BMW Roadside Assistance
Roadside Assistance. to carry out a more in-depth diagnosis of the
vehicle via mobile radio.
▷ Via a Check Control message.
Teleservice Assistance can be started after a
Supplementary text messages, see
request by BMW Roadside Assistance.
page 176.
▷ By calling with a mobile phone. 1. Park the vehicle safely.
▷ Via the BMW app. 2. Apply the parking brake.
Depending on the national-market version and 3. Control display is switched on.

vehicle type, a different roadside assistance 4. Confirm Teleservice Assistance.
provider can be assigned via the Connected-
Drive Customer Portal if necessary.
BMW Accident Assistance
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment Principle
with intelligent emergency call or BMW BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con-
ConnectedDrive services. tacted if help is required in the event of an
▷ Mobile reception. accident.
General
Starting BMW Roadside Assistance If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder-
manually ately severe accident, which did not trigger any
airbags, a Check Control message is displayed
When equipped with Teleservices, support is
in the instrument cluster. A corresponding text
provided first through Teleservice Diagnosis
message also appears on the control display.
and then by Teleservice help if required.
When BMW Accident Assistance is activated,
1. "APPS" data on the vehicle's condition is transferred to
2. "Installed apps" BMW.
3. "BMW Assistance" Depending on the national-market version and
4. "BMW Roadside Assistance" vehicle type, a different accident assistance
provider can be assigned via the Connected-
Follow the displays on the control display.
Drive Customer Portal if necessary.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the detailed ve-
hicle data required for diagnosis to be transfer-
red via mobile radio. This data is transferred
424
Operating requirements Emergency call

▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
with intelligent emergency call or BMW
Intelligent emergency call
ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Mobile reception. Principle
▷ Standby state is switched on. The system can be used to trigger an emer-
gency call automatically or manually in emer-
Starting BMW Accident Assistance gency situations.
If an accident is detected automatically General

A BMW Accident Assistance text message is Depending on the equipment and the national-
shown on the control display. market version, the vehicle may have an emer-
The connection can be established directly: gency call system.
"Contact accident assistance" Press the SOS button in an emergency only.
For a short time, the Check Control message The intelligent emergency call system estab-
for BMW Accident Assistance can also be lishes a connection with the BMW emergency
retrieved from the saved Check Control mes- call centre.
sages. Even if no emergency call through BMW is
For further information: possible, in some cases an emergency call
may still be established to a public emergency
Check Control, see page 175.
call number. This depends on factors such
as the specific mobile phone network and na-
Starting BMW Accident Assistance tional regulations, among others.
manually
For technical reasons, it might not be possible
BMW Accident Assistance can also be contac- to make an emergency call in highly adverse
ted independently of the automatic accident conditions.
detection function.
1. "APPS" Overview
2. "Installed apps"
3. "BMW Assistance"
4. "BMW Accident Assistance"
Follow the displays on the control display.
SOS button.
425
Operating requirements The emergency call centre ends the emer-

▷ Standby state is switched on. gency call.
▷ Emergency call system is functional.

Malfunction
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
The emergency call function may be impaired.
emergency call: the integrated SIM card in
the vehicle is activated. The LED in the area of the SOS button flashes
for approximately 30 seconds. A Check Control
Automatic triggering message is shown.
In certain circumstances, for example deploy- Have it checked by an authorised Service Part-
ment of the airbags, an emergency call may ner or another qualified Service Partner or a
be placed automatically immediately after an specialist workshop.
accident of appropriate severity. Pressing the
SOS button does not affect the automatic
emergency call.
Fire extinguisher
Manual triggering Principle
1. Tap the cover flap. The fire extinguisher can be used to put out
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the vehicle fires.
LED in the button area is illuminated green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when the
General
emergency call has been activated. Depending on the equipment and the national-
If a cancellation request is shown on the market version, the vehicle may have a fire ex-
control display, the emergency call can be tinguisher.
cancelled.
Safety information
If the situation permits, wait in the vehicle
until voice contact has been established.
▷ The LED flashes green when the connec- WARNING
tion to the emergency call has been estab- Incorrect use of the fire extinguisher can
lished. cause injury. There is a danger of injury. Ob-
When an emergency call is made through serve the information below when using the
BMW, data such as the vehicle's current fire extinguisher:
position, if this can be determined, is sent ▷ Do not inhale the extinguishing agent.
to the emergency call centre in order to de- If the extinguishing agent has been in-
cide what rescue measures are required. haled, move the affected person into
If questions asked by the emergency call fresh air. If the casualty experiences
centre remain unanswered, rescue meas-
ures are implemented automatically.
Even if the vehicle occupants can no longer
hear the emergency call centre through the
loudspeakers, the emergency call centre
can still hear the vehicle occupants speak.
426
breathing difficulties, contact a doctor another qualified Service Partner or a specialist

immediately. workshop.
▷ Do not allow the extinguishing agent Make a note of the next maintenance date for
to come into contact with the skin. Pro- the fire extinguisher.
longed contact with the extinguishing Replace the fire extinguisher after use or have
agent can cause the skin to dry out. it refilled.
▷ Do not allow the extinguishing agent to
come into contact with the eyes. In the
event of contact with the eyes, rinse Jump start
them immediately with plenty of water.
In case of prolonged discomfort, contact
General
a doctor.
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the engine
can be started from another vehicle's battery
using two jump leads. Only use jump leads
WARNING
with fully insulated terminal clamps.
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
Safety information
that items in the vehicle are stowed securely
and cannot get into the driver's footwell. DANGER
electric shock. There is a danger of injury or
Overview danger to life. Do not touch any components
The fire extinguisher is located in the interior, that could be live.
for example under the seat or in the glove
compartment.
WARNING
Removing the fire extinguisher
Connecting the jump lead in the wrong se-
Open the buckles on the retaining strap. quence can cause sparks. There is a danger
of injury. Please comply with the correct se-
Using the fire extinguisher quence when connecting.
To use the fire extinguisher, follow the manu-
facturer's instructions on the fire extinguisher
and the information supplied with it. NOTICE
Contact between the bodywork of the two ve-
Stowing the fire extinguisher hicles when jump-starting can cause a short
1. Insert the fire extinguisher into the holder. circuit. There is a risk of material damage.
2. Hook in and close the buckles. Make sure there is no contact between vehi-
cle bodies.
Maintenance and refilling
Have the fire extinguisher checked every
2 years by an authorised Service Partner or
427
Preparations Starting the engine

1. Check whether the battery in the other vehi- Never use spray products to start the engine.
cle shows 12 V voltage. Information about
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
the voltage is provided on the battery.
allow it to run for a few minutes at a slightly
2. Switch off the engine of the donor vehicle. higher idle rotational speed.
3. Switch off any power consumers in both If starting a vehicle with diesel engine: allow
vehicles. the engine of the donor vehicle to run for
approximately 10 minutes.
Jump start terminals 2. Start the engine of the vehicle to be started
The jump start terminal point in the engine in the usual way.
compartment serves as the positive battery If an initial start attempt fails, wait a few
terminal. minutes before trying again to allow the
A special connection on the body serves as the discharged battery to recharge.
negative battery terminal in the engine com- 3. Allow both engines to run for a few mi-
partment. nutes.
For further information: 4. Disconnect the jump leads in reverse order
Overview of the engine compartment, see to connection.
page 399. Check the battery and have it recharged if nec-
Open the lid of the positive battery terminal. essary.
Connecting the cables

Before starting, switch off all unnecessary
Tow-starting/towing away
power consumers, for example the radio, on
both vehicles. Safety information
1. Open the cover of the jump start terminal.
2. Connect a terminal clamp of the positive/+ WARNING
jump lead to the positive battery terminal When tow-starting or towing away with acti-
or the corresponding jump start terminal on vated Intelligent Safety Systems or activated
the donor vehicle. Cruise Control, individual functions may mal-
3. Connect the second terminal clamp to the function. There is a risk of accident. Turn off
positive battery terminal or to the corre- all Intelligent Safety Systems and Cruise Con-
sponding jump start terminal on the vehicle trol before tow-starting or towing away.
being started.
4. Connect a terminal clamp of the negative/–
jump lead to the negative battery termi-
nal or the corresponding engine or body transporting the vehicle
ground on the donor vehicle.
5. Connect the second terminal clamp to the
General
negative battery terminal or to a corre- The vehicle must not be towed for transport.
sponding engine or body ground on the ve-
hicle being started.
428
Safety information Towing other vehicles
NOTICE
General
Switch on the hazard warning lights in line with
If the vehicle is towed away with one axle
local regulations.
raised, the vehicle can be damaged. There
is a risk of material damage. Only have the If the electrical system of the vehicle being
vehicle transported on a loading platform. towed has failed, the vehicle must be made
identifiable to other road users, for example by
placing a sign or the warning triangle in the
rear window.
NOTICE
The vehicle may be damaged when raising Safety information
and securing it.
There is a risk of material damage.
WARNING
▷ Use suitable equipment to raise the ve-
If the permitted total weight of the towing
hicle.
vehicle is less than that of the vehicle being
▷ Do not raise or secure the vehicle by towed, the towing eye may be torn off or it
its towing eye, body parts or suspension may not be possible to control the vehicle.
parts. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the
total weight of the towing vehicle is greater
Pushing the vehicle than the weight of the vehicle being towed.
To remove a broken-down vehicle from a dan-

ger area, it can be pushed over a short dis-
tance at a maximum speed of 10 km/h, 6 mph. NOTICE
For further information: If the towbar or the towing rope is not at-
tached correctly, other vehicle parts can be
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, see
damaged. There is a risk of material damage.
page 165.
Attach the towbar or towing rope to the tow-
ing eye correctly.
Recovery vehicle
Towbar
The towing eyes of both vehicles should be on
the same side.
If it is impossible to avoid attaching the towbar
at an angle, note the following:
▷ Clearance may be restricted when corner-
ing.
▷ Lateral force will be generated if the towbar
Only have the vehicle transported on a loading
is installed at an angle.
platform.
Towing rope
Note the following if using a towing rope:
429
▷ Use nylon ropes or straps that will allow the ▷ Avoid transverse loads on the towing eye,
vehicle to be towed smoothly. for example do not raise the vehicle by the
▷ Fasten the towing rope so it is not twisted. towing eye.
▷ Check the towing eye and towing rope fas- ▷ Check the towing eye mounting regularly.
tening regularly.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of 50 km/h,
Toolkit, see page 417.
30 mph.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of 5 km, Safety information
3 miles.
▷ Ensure that the towing rope is taut when
the towing vehicle drives off. NOTICE
If the towing eye is not used as intended,
Towing eye the vehicle or towing eye may be damaged.
There is a risk of material damage. Observe
General the notes on using the towing eye.
Thread for towing eye
Always keep the screw-on towing eye in the

vehicle.
The towing eye can be screwed in at the front Press the marking on the edge of the cover to
or rear of the vehicle. press it out.
The towing eye is located in the toolkit.
Observe the following notes when using the Tow-starting
towing eye:
Do not attempt to tow-start the vehicle.
▷ Only use the towing eye supplied with the
vehicle. If necessary, start the engine using the jump
start.
▷ Turn the towing eye at least 5 turns clock-
wise and screw it in tight and as far as it Have the cause of the starting problems rec-
will go. If necessary, tighten with a suitable tified by an authorised Service Partner or an-
object. other qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
▷ After use, unscrew the towing eye in an
anti-clockwise direction. For further information:
▷ Only use the towing eye for towing on Jump start, see page 427.
paved roads.
430
Care MOBILITY
Care
Vehicle equipment High-pressure cleaners

NOTICE
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the When cleaning with high-pressure clean-
optional equipment selected or the national- ers, excessive pressure or excessive tem-
market version. This also applies to safety-rel- peratures can damage various components.
evant functions and systems. Please comply There is a risk of material damage. Maintain
with the relevant laws and regulations when a sufficient distance and do not spray for an
using the corresponding functions and sys- extended period of time. Comply with the in-
tems. structions for the high-pressure cleaner.
Vehicle wash Distances and temperature

▷ Maximum temperature: 60 ℃, 140 ℉.
General ▷ Minimum distance to sensors, cameras,

seals, and lights: 30 cm, approx. 12 in.
Regularly remove foreign bodies, for example
leaves, from the area below the windscreen ▷ Minimum distance to the glass sunroof:
with the bonnet raised. 80 cm, 31.5 in.
Wash the vehicle frequently, especially in win-

ter. Heavy soiling and road salt can cause
Automatic car washes
damage to the vehicle.
Safety information
Safety information
NOTICE
NOTICE The vehicle can be damaged if automatic car
washes are used incorrectly. There is a risk
Damages may occur if the fuel filler flap is
of material damage. Observe the following
open while washing. There is a risk of mate-
notes:
rial damage. Close the fuel filler flap before
washing. Remove any dirt behind the fuel ▷ Textile car washes or systems using soft
filler flap with a cloth. brushes are preferable, to avoid damage
to the paintwork.
▷ Do not drive into delete car washes or
washing bays with guide rails higher
than 10 cm, 4 in, to avoid damage to the
body.
431
MOBILITY Care
▷ Note the maximum tyre width of the Soak impurities, for example insect residues,
guide rail to avoid damage to tyres and with shampoo and wash off with water.
rims. Remove ice with a de-icer spray; do not use an
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid ice scraper.
damaging them.
▷ Deactivate the windscreen wipers and After vehicle wash
the rain sensor (if fitted) to avoid dam- After vehicle wash, briefly apply the brakes
age to the wiper system. to dry them, otherwise braking effect may be
temporarily reduced. The heat generated by
braking dries the brake discs and brake pads
Entering a car wash with a Steptronic
and protects them against corrosion.
transmission
Completely remove residues on the wind-
screens to avoid affecting visibility due to
NOTICE smearing and to reduce wiping noise and
The selector lever position P is automatically wiper blade wear.
engaged when standby state is switched off.
The wheels are locked. There is a risk of
material damage. Do not switch off standby Vehicle care
state if the vehicle is to roll, e.g. in conveyor
car washes. Care products
The vehicle must be able to roll freely while in General
the car wash.
BMW recommends using care and cleaning
Some car washes require you to leave the ve- products from BMW. Suitable care products
hicle. It is not possible to lock the vehicle from are available from an authorised Service Part-
the outside in selector lever position N. If an ner or another qualified Service Partner or a
attempt is made to lock the vehicle, a signal specialist workshop.
sounds.
For further information: Safety information
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, see
page 165.
WARNING
Exiting from a car wash Cleaning agents can contain hazardous sub-
stances or pose a health risk. There is a dan-
Make sure that the vehicle key is in the vehicle.
ger of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
Switch on drive-ready state. the doors or windows. Use only products that
For further information: are intended for vehicle cleaning. Observe
the notes on the packaging.
Drive-ready state, see page 44.
Lights
Do not rub wet lights dry, and do not use
abrasive, alcohol-based, or corrosive cleaning
agents.
432
Care MOBILITY
Vehicle paintwork In case of major contaminations, use a moist

soft sponge or microfibre cloth with a suitable
General interior cleaners.
Regular care promotes driving safety and pre- Remove aggressive substances, for example
serves your vehicle's value. Environmental ef- sunscreen, immediately to prevent the syn-
fects in areas with high air pollution or natural thetic leather from being altered or discol-
contaminants, for example tree resin or pollen, oured.
may affect the vehicle paintwork. Base the fre-
quency and extent of vehicle care on the de- Care of upholstery fabrics
gree of contamination.
Immediately remove aggressive substances, General
for example spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird Regularly clean the upholstery with a vacuum
droppings, to prevent paintwork damage and cleaner.
discolouration. In the event of heavy soiling, for example
stains caused by drinks, use a soft sponge or
Matt paintwork a lint-free microfibre cloth with suitable interior
Only use cleaning and care products that are cleaning agents.
suitable for vehicles with matt paintwork. Clean the upholstery up to the seams using
wide wiping movements. Avoid rubbing vigo-
Leather care rously.
Dust and road dirt will become worked into
pores and folds, resulting in considerable abra- Safety information
sion and causing the leather surface to be-
come prematurely brittle.
NOTICE
Remove dust from the leather at regular inter-
Open hook and loop fasteners on articles of
vals with a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
clothing can damage the seat covers and
To protect against discolouration, for example other cloth upholstery in the vehicle. There is
from clothing, clean and care for the leather a risk of material damage. Make sure that the
approximately every two months. hook and loop fasteners are closed.
Clean light-coloured leather more frequently as
it has the tendency to soil faster.
Use leather cleaner, otherwise dirt and grease
Care of special parts
will attack the protective coating of the leather.
Light alloy wheels
Synthetic leather care When cleaning the wheels while they are in-
stalled on the vehicle, only use neutral rim
Clean the synthetic leather regularly with a
cleaner with a pH value between 5 and 9.
damp microfibre cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Do not use abrasive cleaners or high-pressure
Dust and road dirt will otherwise become cleaners above 60 ℃/140 ℉. Observe the
worked into pores and folds, resulting in con- manufacturer's instructions.
siderable abrasion and causing the surface to
Corrosive, acidic or alkaline cleaners may de-
become prematurely brittle.
stroy the protective coatings of adjacent parts,
for example brake disc.
433
MOBILITY Care
After cleaning, briefly apply the brakes to dry Plastic parts

them. The heat generated by braking dries the
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion. NOTICE
Cleaning agents containing alcohol or sol-
Chrome-like surfaces vents, for example nitro thinners, cold clean-
Chrome-like surfaces, particularly those that ers, fuel or similar can damage plastic parts.
have been exposed to road salt, should be There is a risk of material damage. Clean
cleaned carefully with plenty of water, with with a microfibre cloth. Lightly moisten the
added shampoo if required. cloth with water if necessary.
Clean with a microfibre cloth.

Rubber parts
Lightly moisten the cloth with water if neces-
The surfaces of rubber parts can be contami-
sary.
nated or lose their shine due to environmental
influences. Only use water and suitable care Do not soak the headliner.
products for cleaning.
Rubber parts subjected to high wear and tear Seat belts
should be treated regularly with rubber care
products. Do not use silicone-based care prod- WARNING
ucts for treating rubber seals, otherwise these
Chemical cleaners can cause irreparable
could be damaged and become a source of
damage to the fabric of the seat belts. The
noise.
protective effect of the seat belts will be lost.
There is a danger of injury or danger to life.
Wiper blades
Only use a mild soap and water solution for
The wiper blades are cleaned by using the cleaning the seat belts.
window washer system.
Avoid additional manual cleaning of the wiper Dirt on the seat belt straps can interfere with
blades to prevent a reduction in wipe quality. the action of the reel and is a safety hazard.
Only clean the seat belt straps with a mild
Fine wood parts soap solution while still fitted to the vehicle.
Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with Do not allow seat belts to retract until they are
a damp cloth only. Then dry with a soft cloth. dry.
Kenaf Carpets and floor mats

Treat parts made from kenaf fibres with a suit-
able care product only.
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
that items in the vehicle are stowed securely
and cannot get into the driver's footwell. Only
use floor mats that are suitable for the ve-
hicle and can be securely fastened to the
434
Care MOBILITY
floor. Do not use loose floor mats, and do from an authorised Service Partner or another
not place several floor mats on top of one an- qualified Service Partner or a specialist work-
other. Make sure that there is sufficient space shop.
for the pedals. Ensure that floor mats are se-
curely reattached after removal, for example
for cleaning.
Floor mats can be removed from the vehicle

to enable the interior to be cleaned more thor-
oughly.
In the event of heavy soiling, clean floor car-
pets using a microfibre cloth and water or tex-
tile cleaner. Rub back and forth in the direction
of travel to prevent matting.
Sensors and camera lenses

Clean sensors or camera lenses using a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
cleaner.
Displays, operating elements and

protective glass of the Head-up
display
NOTICE
The surfaces can be damaged by improper
cleaning, e.g. with chemical cleaners, mois-
ture or liquids of all kinds. There is a risk of
material damage.
▷ Avoid applying excessive pressure and
do not use abrasive materials.
▷ Use a dry, clean antistatic microfibre
cloth for cleaning displays.
▷ Clean the operating elements and, de-
pending on the equipment, clean the
protective glass of the Head-up display
using a damp microfibre cloth and com-
mercially available dish-washing soap.
Laying up the vehicle

Special measures need to be taken if putting
the vehicle out of use for longer than three
months. Additional information is available
435
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
tems.
General
The technical data and specifications in the on signs on the vehicle or can be requested
Owner's Handbook are reference figures. Data from an authorised Service Partner or another
relating to a specific vehicle can deviate from qualified Service Partner or a specialist work-
this, for example, due to selected optional shop.
equipment, national-market versions or coun- The information in the vehicle documents al-
try-specific measurement procedures. Detailed ways takes precedence over the information in
values can be found in the permit documents, the Owner's Handbook.
Payload
The payload stated in the Owner's Handbook the payload and generally reduces it. The ac-
refers to a vehicle without a driver with stand- tual payload depends on the actual weight and
ard equipment and does not take into account the technically permissible gross weight when
any optional equipment. Optional equipment the vehicle is loaded and must be determined
can change the actual weight of the vehicle on a vehicle-by-vehicle basis.
and generally increases it. This also changes
Dimensions
Dimensions can vary depending on the model In addition, the height of the vehicle may vary,
version, equipment or country-specific meas- for example, due to tyres and load.
urement method.
BMW 5er Saloon
Width with mirrors mm (in) 2126 (83.7)
Width without mirrors mm (in) 1868 (73.5)
436
Technical data REFERENCE
BMW 5er Saloon
Height mm (in) 1479 (58.2)
Length mm (in) 4972 (195.7)
Wheelbase mm (in) 2975 (117.1)
Smallest turning circle diameter m (ft) 12.4 (40.7)
Weights
520i — a)
Kerb weight ready for use, with 75 kg, 165 lb kg (lb) 1655 (3649)
load, tank 90 % full, no optional equipment
Permitted total weight kg (lb) 2250 (4960)
Payload kg (lb) 670 (1477)
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 1045 (2304)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1265 (2789)
Permitted roof load kg (lb) 100 (220)
a) The information is only valid for model code 31BH.

The model code is contained within the vehicle identification number at positions 4 to 7 from the
left.
520i — b)
Kerb weight ready for use, with 75 kg, 165 lb kg (lb) 1685 (3715)
load, tank 90 % full, no optional equipment
b) The information is only valid for model code 71AG, 72AG, 76AG, 78AG, 79AG, 15DD or 18DD.
left.
437
530i
Kerb weight ready for use, with 75 kg, 165 lb load, tank kg (lb) 1700 (3748)
90 % full, no optional equipment
540i
530i xDrive
540i xDrive
438
540i xDrive
M550i xDrive powered by BMW M
518d
520d — a)
439
520d — a)
a) The information is only valid for model code 11DC, 12DC, 14DC, 16DC, 18DC, 19DC or 58DD.
left.
520d — b)
b) The information is only valid for model code 31BL, 32BL or 37BL.
left.
530d — a)
a) The information is only valid for model code 52DC or 17AH.

left.
440
530d — b)
b) The information is only valid for model code 11AH.

left.
520d xDrive — a)
a) The information is only valid for model code 31DC or 39DC.

left.
520d xDrive — b)
441
520d xDrive — b)
b) The information is only valid for model code 51BL or 52BL.

left.
530d xDrive — a)

left.
530d xDrive — b)
b) The information is only valid for model code 31AH or 32AH.

left.
442
540d xDrive
Trailer operation
520i — a)
Trailer loads according to EU operating permit. Consult an authorised Service Partner or another
qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop about options for increasing the loads.
Trailer load without brake kg (lb) 750 (1653)
Trailer load with brake on upward gradient up to 12 % kg (lb) 2000 (4409)
Maximum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 90 (198)
Minimum trailer nose weight kg (lb) 25 (55)
Rear axle load limit, towing vehicle kg (lb) 1400 (3086)
Permitted total weight, towing vehicle kg (lb) 2340 (5159)
a) The information is only valid for model code 31BH.

left.
520i — b)
443
520i — b)
b) The information is only valid for model code 71AG, 72AG, 76AG, 78AG, 79AG, 15DD or 18DD.
left.
530i
540i
444
530i xDrive
540i xDrive
445
518d
520d — a)
a) The information is only valid for model code 11DC, 12DC, 14DC, 16DC, 18DC, 19DC or 58DD.
left.
446
520d — b)
b) The information is only valid for model code 31BL, 32BL or 37BL.
left.
530d — a)

left.
447
530d — b)
b) The information is only valid for model code 11AH.

left.
520d xDrive — a)
a) The information is only valid for model code 31DC or 39DC.

left.
448
520d xDrive — b)
b) The information is only valid for model code 51BL or 52BL.

left.
530d xDrive — a)

left.
449
530d xDrive — b)
b) The information is only valid for model code 31AH or 32AH.

left.
540d xDrive
Capacities
BMW 5er Saloon
Fuel tank, approx. Litres (gal) 66.0 (14.5)
Please observe the additional information

about fuel grade, see page 402.
450
Seats for child restraint systems REFERENCE
Seats for child restraint systems

Vehicle equipment Information for
manufacturers of child seats
the model range. It may therefore describe General
equipment and functions which are not avail- Information about which child restraint sys-
able in a vehicle, for example on account of the tems can be used on each seat, in accordance
optional equipment selected or the national- with the ECE-R 16 and ECE-R 129 standards.
tems.
Left-hand drive vehicles:Suitability of child restraint systems for each

vehicle seat
Seat position 1 3 – Air- 3 – Air- 4 5 6

bag ON bag OFF
Seat position suitable No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

for universal fastening forward rearward
with a belt. facing facing
i-Size seat position. No No No Yes No Yes
Seat position suita- No No No Yes No Yes

ble for side mount-
ing: L1/L2.
Largest rear- No No No R3 No R3
facing mount-
ing: R1/R2x/R2/R3.
Largest front-facing No No No F3 No F3
mounting: F2X/F2/F3.
Largest suitable No No No B3 No B3
booster mount: B2/B3.
A seat position without i-Size approval is not compatible with an i-Size support stand.
A seat position with lower ISOFIX anchors, but with no top tether, is not available.
There are no seat belt buckles for adults between the two bottom ISOFIX anchors.
451
REFERENCE Seats for child restraint systems
Seat number Position in the vehicle Seat number Position in the vehicle
1 Front left 6 Second-row seating right
2 Front centre 7 Third-row seating left
3 Front right 8 Third-row seating centre
4 Second-row seating left 9 Third-row seating right
5 Second-row seating centre
Right-hand drive vehicles: suitability of child restraint systems for each

vehicle seat
Seat position 1 – Airbag 1 – Airbag 3 4 5 6

ON OFF
Seat position suitable Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes

for universal fastening forward rearward
with a belt. facing facing
i-Size seat position. No No No Yes No Yes
Seat position suita- No No No Yes No Yes

ble for side mount-
ing: L1/L2.
Largest rear- No No No R3 No R3
facing mount-
ing: R1/R2X/R2/R3.
Largest front-facing No No No F3 No F3
mounting: F2X/F2/F3.
Largest suitable No No No B3 No B3
booster mount: B2/B3.
A seat position without i-Size approval is not compatible with an i-Size support stand.
A seat position with lower ISOFIX anchors, but with no top tether, is not available.
There are no seat belt buckles for adults between the two bottom ISOFIX anchors.
Seat number Position in the vehicle Seat number Position in the vehicle
1 Front left 5 Second-row seating centre
2 Front centre 6 Second-row seating right
3 Front right 7 Third-row seating left
4 Second-row seating left
452
Seats for child restraint systems REFERENCE
Seat number Position in the vehicle
8 Third-row seating centre
9 Third-row seating right
453
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
General Paraguay
Here is where any updates to the Owner's

Handbook for the vehicle are listed.
Updates after going to press

After the Integrated Owner's Handbook in
the vehicle went to press, the following chap-
ters were updated in the printed Owner's
2022-03-I-00136
Handbook:
License Texts and Certifications Serbia
Body Domain Controller
Botswana
BOCRA
REGISTERED No:
BOCRA/TA/2022/7123
Jamaica
И005 22
This product has been type approved by Ja-
maica: SMA
South Africa
Equipment Identifier: BDC-03
Jordan
TRC No. TRC/34/9946/2022
TA-2022/0382
454
Appendix REFERENCE
UAE
Ukraine
Bodie, що сповістила: UA.TR.028

Частотний діапазон: 125 kHz
Максимальна потужність передавача: 66
dBµA/m
455
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9 Adapting the content, iDrive 52
Adaptive brake assist 241
3D View, see Surround View 296 Adaptive brake light, see Dynamic brake
48 V technology, see Mild hybrid technol- lights 235
ogy 421 Adaptive Drive 307
Adaptive Headlights 197
A Adaptive lighting functions 196
Adaptive M suspension 308
ABS, see Anti-lock Braking System 241 Adaptive M suspension Professional 308
Acceleration assistant, see Launch Control 168 ADAPTIVE, see Driving Experience Control 156
Acceleration sensor, see G-Meter 173 Adaptive suspension 307
Accessories and parts 10 AdBlue at minimum 404
Accident Assistance, see BMW Accident Assis- AdBlue, see BMW diesel with BluePerform-
tance 424 ance 404
Accident prevention, see Active Protection 238 AdBlue, topping up 404
ACC, see Cruise Control with Distance Con- Additives, engine oil grades 409
trol 253 After-run of fan, see Exhaust gas particulate
Activated carbon filter, see Interior filter 310 filter 349
Activation, airbag 204 Airbags 202
Activation points, Panorama View 301 Airbags, indicator/warning light 204
Activation, trailer operation 358 Airbag switch, see Key switch for front passen-
Activation word 56 ger airbag 204
Active bonnet, see Active pedestrian protec- Air conditioning function, climate control 312
tion 205 Air distribution, manual 314
Active comfort suspension, see Adaptive Air pressure, tyres 372
Drive 307 Air quality 310
Active Cruise Control 253 Air recirculation function 313
Active Guard Plus, see Intelligent Safety 207 Air vents, see Ventilation 315
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 207 Alarm system 115
Active M Sport differential 244 All-season tyres, see Winter tyres 376
Active Park Distance Control 280 All-wheel drive, see BMW xDrive 244
Active pedestrian protection 205 Alternating-code hand-held transmitter 330
Active Protection 238 Ambient Air Package 323
Active Roll Stabilisation 307 Ambient lighting 200
Active seat ventilation 139 Amount of air, automatic air conditioning 314
Active seat ventilation, climate control Android Auto, connection to vehicle 84
rules 139 Android Auto preparation, connection to vehi-
Active shock absorber adjustment, see Adap- cle 84
tive M suspension 308 Android Auto preparation, smartphone inte-
Active steering, integral 244 gration 84
456
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Antifreeze additive, see Washer fluid 412 Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans-
Antifreeze protection, see Washer fluid 412 mission 163
Anti-lock Braking System 241 Automatic unlocking 114
Anti-theft security system 89 Automating habits, BMW Intelligent Personal
Anti-theft security system, locking wheel Assistant 59
bolts 394 AUTO programme, automatic air condition-
Anti-trap mechanism, glass sunroof 121 ing 312
Anti-trap mechanism, windows 117 AUTO programme, intensity 313
Apple CarPlay preparation, connection to vehi- Average consumption 173, 174
cle 83 Average consumption, see Trip data 189
Apple CarPlay preparation, smartphone inte- Axle loads, permitted 437
gration 83
Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, B
Entertainment, Communication 6
Aquaplaning 350 Backrest angle 125
Arrival time at the destination, navigation 175 Backrest contour, see Lumbar support 126
Assistant for leaving parking space 289 Backrest, seats 123
Assisted Driving Mode, see Steering and Lane Backrest upper section, front 127
Control Assistant 266 Backrest width 127
Assisted Driving Plus 271 Ball head, electrically adjustable 358
Assisted Driving View 172 Bar for tow-starting/towing away 429
Attentiveness Assistant 239 Battery, disposal 421
Attentiveness camera, driver, see Driver Atten- Battery, vehicle 418
tion Camera 68 Belts, see Seat belts 127
Audio, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Biodiesel 403
Entertainment, Communication 6 Blower, see Amount of air 314
AUTO H button, see Parking brake 156 Bluetooth connection 81
Automatic activation, see Climate control Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
rules 139 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Automatic air conditioning 310 BMW Accident Assistance 424
Automatic air recirculation control 313 BMW Assistance, see Owner's Handbook for
Automatic car washes 431 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Automatic dimming, see High-beam Assis- BMW diesel with BluePerformance 404
tant 198 BMW Digital Key 99
Automatic driving lights 194 BMW display key 92
Automatic driving lights control 194 BMW display key, malfunction 96
Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 156 BMW Drive Recorder 236
Automatic locking 114 BMW gesture control 59
Automatic parking function, exterior mirror 135 BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 55
Automatic programme, automatic air condi- BMW Maintenance System 414
tioning 312 BMW Natural Interaction, see BMW gesture
Automatic rear air-conditioning system 316 control 59
Automatic Stability Control 243 BMW Roadside Assistance 423
Automatic Start/Stop function 151 BMW Services, see Owner's Handbook for
Automatic time setting 67 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
BMW xDrive 244
457
Bonnet 400 CANCEL button, Active Cruise Control 253

Bonus range, ECO PRO 364 CANCEL button, Cruise Control 250
Boot lid 109 Can holder, front, see Cup holder, front 339
Boot lid contactless opening and closing 106 Can holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 339
Boot lid, emergency release 111 Care 431
Boot lid, locking, see Valet parking mode 111 Care, displays, screens 435
Bottle holder, front, see Cup holder, front 339 Care, Head-up display 435
Bottle holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 339 Care, light-alloy wheels 433
Bottleneck support, see Steering and Lane Care of upholstery fabrics 433
Control Assistant 266 Care products 432
Brake Assist 241 Care, vehicle 432
Brake assist, adaptive 241 Caring Car, BMW Intelligent Personal Assis-
Brake discs, running in 348 tant 59
Brake discs, see Brake system 348 Car key, see Vehicle key 87
Brake light, adaptive, see Dynamic brake Carpet, care 434
light 235 CarPlay, connection to vehicle 83
Brake lights, dynamic 235 Carrying children 140
Brake pads, running in 348 Carrying children safely 140
Brake pads, see Brake system 348 Cartridge change, see Ambient Air Pack-
Brake system 348 age 323
Braking, notes 350 Car wash 431
Braking safely 350 Car washes, automatic 431
Breakdown, help 423 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust sys-
Break recommendation, see Attentiveness As- tem 349
sistant 239 CBS, see Condition Based Service 414
Brightness, control display 69 Central display, see Control display 50
Button, central locking system 103 Central key, see Vehicle key 87
Buttons on the steering wheel 34 Central locking switch, see Central locking sys-
Button SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 425 tem 103
Button, start/stop 151 Central locking system 103
Centre armrest, front 339
C Centre console 37
Changes, technical, see Your own safety 9
Calendar day, see Date 67 Change, wheels and tyres 375
Calibration of the front seats 126 Changing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 418
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli- Changing the battery, vehicle key 90
gent Safety 207 Charging a smartphone, see Wireless charging
Camera, instrument cluster, see Driver Atten- tray 334
tion Camera 68 Charging cradle for smartphones, see Wireless
Camera lenses, care 435 charging tray 334
Camera, Reversing Assist Camera, see Sur- Chassis number, see Vehicle identification
round View 296 number 16
Camera, Reversing Assist Camera, without Check Control 175
Surround View 282 Checking tyre pressure, see Tyre Pressure
Camera, see Surround View 296 Monitor 383
Cameras, see Sensors in the vehicle 39 Child locks 150
458
Child restraint systems, i-Size 144 Connecting, mobile devices 78

Child restraint systems, see Carrying children Consumption display, average consump-
safely 140 tion 173, 174
Child safety seat fasteners, ISOFIX 143 Consumption display, current consump-
Child seat classes, see Suitable seats for child tion 173, 174
restraint systems 145 Consumption display, ECO PRO 364
Child seat installation 141 Consumption, see Trip data 189
Child seats, see Carrying children safely 140 Contactless opening and closing of the boot
Chrome-like surfaces, care 434 lid 106
Chrome-plated surfaces, care 434 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
Cleaning, displays, screens 435 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Cleaning, Head-up display 435 Continuing driving with flat tyre, see Flat tyre
Climate control 310 monitor, checking tyre pressure, see Flat tyre
Climate control rules 139 monitor 390
Closing with a smartphone, see BMW Digital Continuing driving with flat tyre, see Tyre Pres-
Key 99 sure Monitor 383
Closing with the Key Card 97 Control display 50
Coasting 366 Control display, brightness 69
Coasting in idle 366 Control display, pop-ups 69
Coat hooks 340 Controller 51
Cold start, see Engine start 44 Control systems, driving stability 241
Collision Warning with braking function 209 Conveyor car wash 431
Collision Warning with city braking func- Coolant 411
tion 209 Coolant level 411
Comfort Access 104 Coolant temperature, see Engine tempera-
Comfort closing, vehicle key 89 ture 186
Comfort opening, vehicle key 89 Cooling, maximum 312
COMFORT, see Driving Experience Control 154 Cornering light 197
Communication, see Owner's Handbook for Corrosion, brake discs 351
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Crossing-traffic warning 303
Compact wheel, see Emergency spare Crossroads Warning with city braking func-
wheel 397 tion 214
Compartments in the doors 338 Cruise control, see Cruise control 250
Compass 175 Cruise Control with Distance Control 253
Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 79 Cruise control without distance control 250
Compatible mobile phones 79 Cup holder, front 339
Compressor 379 Cup holder, rear 339
Condensation when vehicle is parked 351 Current consumption 173, 174
Condensation, windscreen 314 Customer support, see Owner's Handbook for
Condition Based Service 414 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 D
ConnectedDrive Services, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Damages, tyres 374
Communication 6 Dashboard, see Instrument cluster 170
Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 332 Dashcam, see BMW Drive Recorder 236
459
Data protection, settings 72 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 200

Data, see Deleting personal data 72 Display panel, see Instrument cluster 170
Data storage medium, see Vehicle data and Displays 170
data protection 10 Displays and icons 7
Data, technical 436 Displays, ECO PRO 362
Date 67 Display, see Control display 50
Daytime driving lights 196 Display, speed limit, see Speed Limit Info 246
DCC, see Cruise control without distance con- Disposal, coolant 412
trol 250 Disposal, vehicle battery 421
Deactivation, airbag 204 Disposing of the old battery 421
Defrosting, windscreen 314 Distance Control, see Cruise Control 253
De-icing 314 Distance to destination, on-board com-
Deleting, personal data 72 puter 175
Departure schedule, see Pre-cooling/pre-heat- Distance warning, see Park Distance Con-
ing 318 trol 276
Departure time, pre-cooling 319 Door handle lighting, see Welcome light 195
Departure time, pre-heating 319 Door opening angle, Surround View 297
Departure times, pre-conditioning 322 Downhill gradient 351
Destination distance, on-board computer 175 Drinks holder, front, see Cup holder, front 339
Destination entry, see Owner's Handbook for Drinks holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 339
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Drive mode, ECO PRO 362
Detecting traffic lights 265 Drive mode, see Driving Experience Con-
Device, connecting 78 trol 154
Device list 79 Drive-off assistant 241
Device, pairing 78 Drive-off Assistant, see Dynamic Stability Con-
Devices, managing 79 trol 241
Devices, suitable 79 Drive power, reduced 184
Diagnostic connection 415 Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 68
Diesel fuel 403 Driver assistance, driving, see Intelligent
Diesel particulate filter, see Exhaust gas partic- Safety 207
ulate filter 349 Driver assistance, parking, see Parking assis-
Differential lock 244 tance systems 276
Digital Key, see BMW Digital Key 99 Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 207
Digit input, iDrive 47 Driver assistance systems 246
Dimensions 436 Driver Attention Camera 68
Dimming exterior mirror 135 Drive-ready state, engine start 44
Dimming interior mirror 135 Drive-ready state, see Operating condition of
Direct selection buttons, see Favourite but- the vehicle 43
tons 49 Drive Recorder 236
Display, iDrive 47 Driver profiles 73
Displaying notifications, BMW Intelligent Per- Driver profile, setting up 73
sonal Assistant 70 Driver profiles, welcome display 73
Display in the windscreen, see Head-up dis- Driving 151
play 192 Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 207
Display key, malfunction 96 Driving comfort 307
Display key, see BMW display key 92 Driving Experience Control 154
460
Driving lane lines, Reversing Assist Cam- Emergency braking, see PostCrash –
era 283 iBrake 238
Driving lane lines, Surround View 297 Emergency call 425
Driving lights control, automatic 194 Emergency Lane Assistant 274
Driving notes, general 349 Emergency release, boot lid 111
Driving notes, running in 348 Emergency release, fuel filler flap 371
Driving Stability Control Systems 241 Emergency release, parking lock 167
Driving, Start/Stop button 151 Emergency service, see BMW Accident Assis-
Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 367 tance 424
Driving through water 350 Emergency service, see BMW Roadside Assis-
Driving tips, see General driving notes 349 tance 423
Drying air, see Air conditioning function 312 Emergency spare wheel 397
DSC, see Dynamic Stability Control 241 Emergency Stop Assistant 234
DTC, see Dynamic Traction Control 243 Energy recuperation 173, 174
Dynamic brake lights 235 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 151
Dynamic Cruise Control, see Cruise control 250 Engine compartment 399
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive M suspen- Engine coolant 411
sion 308 Engine cooling system 411
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive suspen- Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 366
sion 307 Engine oil filler neck 409
Dynamic ECO light function 196 Engine oil grades for topping up 409
Dynamic Stability Control 241 Engine oil level, checking electronically 408
Dynamic Traction Control 243 Engine oil temperature 186
Engine oil, topping up 409
E Engine sound, adjusting 308
Engine start, see Drive-ready state 44
ECO light function, dynamic 196 Engine start, see Jump start 427
ECO PRO 362 Engine stop, see Drive-ready state 44
ECO PRO, bonus range 364 Engine temperature 186
ECO PRO, driving style analysis 367 Entering an address, Navigation, see Own-
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Experience er's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,
Control 154 Communication 6
ECO PRO, Route-ahead Assistant 365 Entering letters and numbers 48
ECO PRO, see Driving Experience Control 154 Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook for
Efficient4x4, see BMW xDrive 244 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Electric glass sunroof 119 Entertainment, selection list in the instrument
Electronic oil measurement 408 cluster 189
Electronic Stability Programme ESP, see Dy- Equipment, interior 329
namic Stability Control 241 ESP Electronic Stability Programme, see Dy-
Emergency assistance, see BMW Accident As- namic Stability Control 241
sistance 424 Evasion Assistant 212
Emergency assistance, see BMW Roadside Exchange, wheels and tyres 375
Assistance 423 Exhaust gas particulate filter 349
Emergency brake, see Emergency Stop Assis- Exhaust, see Exhaust system 349
tant 234 Exhaust system 349
Exterior lights, locked vehicle 89
461
Exterior lights when unlocking 88 Floor carpet, care 434

Exterior mirror 134 Floor mats, care 434
Exterior mirror, automatic parking function 135 Fog lights, changing, see Lights and bulbs 418
Exterior mirror inner 135 Fold-out position, windscreen wiper 163
Exterior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle Foot brake 350
function 135 Fragrance cartridge, see Ambient Air Pack-
External start, see Jump start 427 age 323
Eye for securing cable, trailer operation 360 Fragrance, see Ambient Air Package 323
Eye for towing 430 Front airbags 202
Eyes, see Lashing eye in the luggage compart- Front-collision warning, see Collision Warn-
ment 342 ing 209
Front-collision warning, see Crossroads Warn-
F ing 214
Front-collision warning, see Intelligent
Factory settings, see Resetting vehicle data 69 Safety 207
Failure message, see Check Control 175 Front-collision warning, see Pedestrian warn-
False alarms, see Avoiding false warnings 116 ing 217
False warnings, avoiding 116 Front-collision warning, see Road Priority
Fan run-on, see Exhaust gas particulate fil- Warning 229
ter 349 Front passenger's mirror, tilting down, see Au-
Fastening seat belts, see Seat belts 127 tomatic parking function 135
Fatigue Warning, see Attentiveness Assis- Front passenger airbag, deactivating/activat-
tant 239 ing 204
Fault displays, see Check Control 175 Front passenger airbag, indicator light 205
Favourite buttons, iDrive 49 Front seats 123
Filling pressure, tyres 372 Fuel 402
Filter, see Interior filter 310 Fuel filler cap 370
Fine wood parts, care 434 Fuel filler flap 370
Fire extinguisher 426 Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 371
First-aid kit 423 Fuel grade 402
First steps, see Setup assistant 73 Fuel level indicator 183
Flat tyre, continue driving, see Flat tyre moni- Fuel recommendation 402
tor 390 Fuel, saving 361
Flat tyre, fixing 378 Fuel tank capacity 450
Flat tyre message, see Flat Tyre Monitor 391 Fuel tank, see Capacities 450
Flat tyre message, see Tyre Pressure Moni- Fuses 421
tor 386
Flat tyre monitor 390 G
Flat tyre, see Flat tyre monitor 390
Flat tyre, see Tyre Pressure Monitor 383 Garage door opener, see Integrated universal
Flat tyre warning light, see Flat Tyre Moni- remote control 329
tor 391 Gear change, Steptronic transmission 163
Flat tyre warning light, see Tyre Pressure Mon- General driving notes 349
itor 386 General settings 67
Flat tyre, wheel change 392 Gesture control 59
Flood, driving through 350 Gestures, see BMW gesture control 59
462
Glare protection, see Sun visor 332 Home lights, switching on 90

Glass sunroof, closing automatically 114 HomeLink, see Integrated universal remote
Glass sunroof, electric 119 control 329
Glass sunroof, initialising system 121 Home page, see Internet 7
Glove compartment 337 Horn 34
G-Meter 173 Hotel function, see Valet parking mode 111
GPS navigation, navigation, see Owner's Hot exhaust system 349
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Hour, see Time 67
Communication 6
I
H
iBrake – PostCrash 238
Handbrake, see Parking brake 156 Ice, see Outside temperature 186
Hand-held transmitter, alternating-code 330 Ice warning, see Outside temperature 186
Hands-free system, see Owner's Handbook Icons and displays 7
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Identification number, see Vehicle identification
tion 6 number 16
Hazard warning lights 423 Identification of recommended tyres 376
Head airbag 203 Identification of run-flat tyres 377
Headlight flasher 160 iDrive 47
Headlight glass 418 Ignition key, see Vehicle key 87
Headlights, adaptive 197 Important considerations 140
Headlights, care 432 Inclination, backrest 125
Headlights, setting, see Right-hand/left-hand Indicator light, front passenger airbag 205
traffic 199 Indicator lights 176
Headliner 38 Individual air distribution 314
Head restraints and seats 123 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 73
Head restraints, front 131 Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless
Head restraints, rear 132 charging tray 334
Head-up display 192 Initialisation, see Flat Tyre Monitor 390
Head-up display, care 435 Input comparison 48
Head-up Display position, saving, see Memory Installing child restraint systems 141
function 136 Instrument cluster 170
Heating, see Pre-cooling 318 Instrument lighting 200
Heavy load, stowing 341 Instrument panel, see Instrument cluster 170
Height, vehicle 436 Integral Active Steering 244
Help in case of a breakdown 423 Integrated key 102
Help when driving off on uphill gradients, see Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle 6
Drive-off assistant 241 Integrated universal remote control 329
High-beam Assistant 198 Intelligent emergency call 425
High-beam headlight 160 Intelligent Personal Assistant 55
Hill Start Assist, see Drive-off assistant 241 Intelligent Safety 207
Holder for drinks, front 339 Intended use 9
Holder for drinks, rear 339 Intensity, AUTO programme 313
Holder, pennant 352 Interior equipment 329
Home lights 195 Interior filter 310
463
Interior lights 200 Laser high-beam headlight 199

Interior lights, locked vehicle 89 Lashing eyes in the luggage compartment 342
Interior lights when unlocking 88 Lashing straps, see Lashing eyes in the lug-
Interior mirror 135 gage compartment 342
Interior mirror, outer 134 Last service, see Service history 188
Interior movement detector 116 Lateral Parking Aid, Surround View 297
Interval Display, see Service requirements 187 Lateral Parking Aid without Surround View 281
Ioniser, see Ambient Air Package 323 Launch Control 168
i-Size child restraint systems 144 Laying up the vehicle 435
ISOFIX, child safety seat fasteners 143 Laying up, vehicle 435
Leather care 433
J Leaving parking space 289
LED headlights, replacing, see Lights and
Jacking points 395 bulbs 418
Journey data 189 Left-hand traffic, light setting 199
Joystick, Steptronic transmission 163 Length, vehicle 436
Jump start 427 Light-alloy wheels, care 433
Jump starting, see Jump start 427 Light in exterior mirror, see Crossing-traffic
Jump start terminals 428 Warning 303
Lighting 194
K Lighting, loudspeaker, see Bowers & Wil-
kins 201
Kenaf, care 434 Light in the exterior mirror, see Lane Change
Key Card 97 Warning 223
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 104 Lights 194
Key, mechanical 102 Lights and bulbs 418
Key, see BMW display key 92 Lights, care 432
Key, see Vehicle key 87 Light switch 194
Key switch for front passenger airbag 204 LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 249
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 163 List, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 189
Knee airbag 203 List, messages, see Notifications 70
Load 341
Loading the luggage compartment, see Stow-
L ing loads 341
Loads 341
Lane boundary, warning 219
Loads, stowing and securing 341
Lane Change Assistant 272
Local time, see Time 67
Lane Change Warning 223
Locking, automatic 114
Lane control assistant, see Steering and Lane
Locking, doors and windows 150
Control Assistant 266
Locking, see Opening and closing 87
Lane Departure Warning 219
Locking, settings 113
Lane Keeping Assistant with active side col-
Locking wheel bolts 394
lision protection, see Side collision warn-
Locking with the vehicle key 89
ing 226
Lock, wheel bolts 394
Language, setting 68
Lock, window lifters, see Safety switch 118
Laser headlights, replacing, see Lights and
bulbs 418
464
Logging on, mobile devices, see Connec- Mirror position, saving, see Memory func-
tions 78 tion 136
Loudspeaker lighting, see Bowers & Wil- Mirror, vanity 332
kins 201 Mobile communications in the vehicle 350
Low-beam headlight, operation 195 Mobile devices, managing 79
Lower back support, see Lumbar support 126 Mobile phone, connecting 78
Luggage compartment 341 Mobile phone, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-
Luggage compartment emergency release 111 igation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Luggage compartment, extending 343 Mobile phones, suitable 79
Luggage compartment lid, see Boot lid 109 Mobility system, see Tyre repair kit 378
Luggage compartment with emergency spare MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 253
wheel, extending 345 Mode, ECO PRO 362
Luggage rack, see Roof bars 352 Moisture in the headlights, see Headlight
Lumbar support 126 glass 418
Monitoring tyre pressure, see Flat tyre moni-
M tor 390
Monitoring tyre pressure, see Tyre Pressure
Maintenance requirement, see Condition Monitor 383
Based Service 414 Monitor, see Control display 50
Maintenance System, BMW 414 MP3 player, see Owner's Handbook for Navi-
Make-up mirror 332 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Malfunction, BMW display key 96 M Sport differential 244
Malfunction displays, see Check Control 175 M suspension, adaptive, see Adaptive M sus-
Malfunction, vehicle key 91 pension 308
Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 163 Multifunction hook 342
Manual operation, air distribution 314 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 34
Manual operation, amount of air 314 Multimedia, see Owner's Handbook for Navi-
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 371 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Navi- Music track, gesture control 60
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Massage seat, front 137 N
Matt paintwork, care 433
Maximum cooling 312 Navigation data, on-board computer 175
Maximum speed, display, see Speed Limit Navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Navi-
Info 246 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Maximum speed, winter tyres 376 Neck restraints, front, see Front head re-
Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 423 straints 131
Memory function 136 Neck restraints, rear, see Rear head re-
Messages, see Check Control 175 straints 132
Messages, see Notifications 70 Net, luggage compartment 342
Methyl ester, see Diesel 403 Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels,
Metres, see Instrument cluster 170 care 433
Microfilter, see Interior filter 310 No-overtaking indicator 246
Mild hybrid technology 421 No Passing information, see Speed Limit Dis-
Minimum tread depth, tyres 374 play with no-overtaking indicator 246
Notes 6
465
Notifications 70 Park Assist 285

Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing away 429 Park Assist, leaving parking space 289
Park Assist Plus, see Surround View 296
O Park Distance Control 276
Parking aid, see Park Distance Control 276
OBD, see On-board diagnosis 415 Parking assistance systems 276
Obstacle marking, Reversing Assist Cam- Parking Assistant Plus, see Parking assistance
era 283 systems 276
Obstacle marking, Surround View 297 Parking Assistant Plus, see Surround View 296
Octane number, see Petrol grade 403 Parking Assistant, see Park Assist 285
Odometer, see Trip data 189 Parking Assistant, see Parking assistance sys-
Oil filler neck 409 tems 276
Oil grades for topping up, engine 409 Parking, Automatic Hold, see Parking
Oil level, checking electronically 408 brake 156
Oil service interval, see Service require- Parking brake 156
ments 187 Parking brake function, see Active Park Dis-
Oil, topping up 409 tance Control 280
On-board computer, see Trip data 189 Parking light 195
On-board diagnosis 415 Parking lock, unlocking electronically 167
On-board monitor, see Control display 50 Particle filter, see Exhaust gas particulate fil-
One-touch signalling 160 ter 349
Open circuit 420 Particulate filter, see Interior filter 310
Opening and closing 87 Part replacement 417
Opening with a smartphone, see BMW Digital Parts and accessories 10
Key 99 Payload, technical data 437
Opening with the Key Card 97 PDC, see Park Distance Control 276
Operating boot lid, vehicle key 90 Pedestrian protection, active 205
Operating condition of the vehicle 43 Pedestrian warning with brake function 217
Operating menus, iDrive 47 Pennant holder 352
Operating principle, iDrive 47 Personal Assistant 55
Operation by voice control 55 Personal data, deleting 72
Optimum shift indicator 188 Personal Profile, see Driver profiles 73
Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 8 Personal settings 72
Outlets, see Ventilation 315 Petrol 402
Outside air, see Automatic air recirculation Petrol grade 403
control 313 Petrol particulate filter, see Exhaust gas partic-
Outside temperature 186 ulate filter 349
Overheating of the engine, see Engine temper- Phone call, gesture control 60
ature 186 Physical units, see Setting units of measure-
Owner's Handbook on language, BMW Intelli- ment 68
gent Personal Assistant 57 Place for children 140
Plasters, see First-aid kit 423
P Plastic parts, care 434
Pop-ups, control display 69
Paintwork, vehicle care 433 Possible gestures, gesture control 60
Panorama View 301 PostCrash – iBrake 238
466
Power display, instrument cluster 184 Rear-wheel steering, see Integral Active Steer-
Power display, see Sport displays 191 ing 244
Powermeter, see Power display 184 Rear window heating 315
Power window regulators 116 Recirculation, see Air recirculation function 313
Pre-conditioning via Remote Engine Start 320 Recommended gear for fuel-efficient driving,
Pre-cooling/pre-heating 318 see Optimum shift indicator 188
Pressure, tyres 372 Recommended makes of tyre 376
Pressure warning, see Flat tyre monitor, tyre Recycling, see Recycling 416
pressure warning, see Flat tyre monitor 390 Reduced drive power 184
Pressure warning, see Tyre Pressure Moni- Reducing agent, see BMW diesel with Blue-
tor 383 Performance 404
Prevention of rear-end collision, see Rear Colli- Refuelling 370
sion Prevention 228 Remote 3D View 305
Profiles, see Driver profiles 73 Remote control for audio, see Owner's
Protective function, glass sunroof, see Anti- Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment,
trap mechanism 121 Communication 6
Protective function, windows, see Anti-trap Remote Control Parking 292
mechanism 117 Remote control, see Vehicle key 87
Remote control, universal 329
R Remote Engine Start, see Pre-condition-
ing 320
Racing track 354 Remote services, see Owner's Handbook for
Radar sensors, see Sensors in the vehicle 39 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Radiator fan, see Exhaust gas particulate fil- Remote Software Upgrade 63
ter 349 Renewal, wheels and tyres 375
Radio communication signals 350 Replacement of parts 417
Radio, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Replacement, wheels and tyres 375
Entertainment, Communication 6 Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 418
Rain closure, see Glass sunroof, closing auto- Replacing front lights, see Lights and
matically 114 bulbs 418
Rain sensor 161 Replacing headlights, see Lights and bulbs 418
Range 187 Replacing light-emitting diodes, see Lights and
Rapeseed methyl ester RME, see Diesel 403 bulbs 418
Real Time Traffic Information, see Owner's Replacing lights, see Lights and bulbs 418
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Replacing parts 417
Communication 6 Replacing rear lights, see Lights and bulbs 418
Rear Collision Prevention 228 RES CNCL button, Active Cruise Control 253
Rear fog light 199 RES CNCL button, Cruise Control 250
Rear fog light, replacing, see Lights and Reserve warning, see Range 187
bulbs 418 Resetting, vehicle data 69
Rear light, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 418 Reset, Tyre Pressure Monitor 385
Rear luggage rack 353 Reset, vehicle settings 69
Rear seat backrests, folding down 343 Restraint systems for children, see Carrying
Rear seat belt warning 130 children safely 140
Rear-view mirror with automatic anti-dazzle Restricted Driving, see BMW Digital Key 99
function 135
467
Rest state, see Operating condition of the vehi- Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 207
cle 43 Saving energy, see Optimum shift indica-
RESUME button, Active Cruise Control 253 tor 188
RESUME button, Cruise Control 250 Scenting, see Ambient Air Package 323
Retreaded tyres 376 Sealing compound, see Tyre repair kit 378
Reversing Assistant 290 Seat belts 127
Reversing Assist Camera, see Surround Seat belts, care 434
View 296 Seat belt warning for driver and front passen-
Reversing Assist Camera, without Surround ger seat 130
View 282 Seat belt warning, see Seat belts 130
Revolution counter 183 seat calibration 126
Right-hand traffic, light setting 199 Seat heating 138
RME rapeseed methyl ester, see Diesel 403 Seat heating, climate control rules 139
Road Priority Warning 229 Seat position, saving, see Memory function 136
Roadside Assistance, see BMW Accident As- Seats and head restraints 123
sistance 424 Seats, front 123
Roadside Assistance, see BMW Roadside As- Seat ventilation, active 139
sistance 423 Securing, loads 341
Roller sunblinds, rear side windows 119 Selection list in the instrument cluster 189
Roller sunblinds, rear window 118 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 163
Rolling in idle, see Coasting 366 Sensors, care 435
Roll stabilisation, see Active Roll Stabilisa- Sensors in the vehicle 39
tion 307 Service 414
RON, see Petrol grade 403 Service history 188
Roof bars 352 Service performed, see Service history 188
Roof load, permitted 437 Service requirements 187
Roof luggage bars, see Roof bars 352 Service requirement, see Condition Based
Rope for tow-starting/towing away 429 Service 414
Roundabout light 197 Service, see BMW Accident Assistance 424
Route-ahead Assistant 365 Service, see BMW Roadside Assistance 423
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Service, see Service requirements 187
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 SET button, Active Cruise Control 253
RSC, see Run-flat tyres 377 SET button, Cruise Control 250
Rubber parts, care 434 Set clock 67
Run-flat capabilities, tyres 377 Set day, see Date 67
Run-flat tyres 377 Set time, see Time 67
Run-flat tyres, see Run-flat tyres 377 Setting, control display 69
Running in 348 Settings, general 67
Settings, locking/unlocking 113
S Settings, resetting, vehicle 69
Settings, seats and head restraints 123
Safe seating position 123 Settings, steering wheel 135
Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key 99 Setup assistant 73
Safety package, see Active Protection 238 Shift Lights, revolution counter 185
Safety switch, windows 118 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 163
Safety systems, see Airbags 202
468
Shock absorber adjustment, active, see Adap- Sound settings, see Owner's Handbook for
tive M suspension 308 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Side airbag 202 Spanner, see Toolkit 417
Side collision warning 226 Spare wheel, see Emergency spare wheel 397
Side lights 195 Speech recognition 55
Side nozzles, see Ventilation 315 Speed Limit Assist 262
Side protection, Surround View, see Lateral Speed Limit Device, Manual Speed Lim-
Parking Aid 297 iter 249
Side protection without Surround View, see Speed limit, display, see Speed Limit Info 246
Lateral Parking Aid 281 Speed limiter, manual 249
Signal horn, horn 34 Speed Limit Info 246
Signals on unlocking, see Acknowledgement Speed limit warning 69
signals 113 Sport differential 244
Sizes, see Dimensions 436 Sport displays 191
Sliding/tilting roof, see Electric glass sun- SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Experience
roof 119 Control 154
Slipperiness, see Outside temperature 186 SPORT PLUS, see Driving Experience Con-
Slippery road, see Outside temperature 186 trol 154
Smallest turning radius, vehicle 436 Sport programme, Steptronic transmission 163
Smartphone, connecting 78 SPORT, see Driving Experience Control 154
Smartphone integration, Android Auto prepa- Sport suspension, see Adaptive M suspen-
ration 84 sion 308
Smartphone integration, Apple CarPlay prepa- Sport suspension, see Adaptive M suspension
ration 83 Professional 308
Smartphone, operating via voice input 58 Stability control systems 241
Smartphone, see Owner's Handbook for Navi- Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 8
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Standby state, see Operating condition of the
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's vehicle 43
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Start/Stop button 151
Communication 6 Starting, see Drive-ready state 44
Snaking movement of the trailer, see Trailer Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 44
Stability Control 357 Starting the engine with the Key Card 97
Snow chains 382 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for
Socket for on-board diagnosis 415 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Sockets, electrical devices 332 Status indicator, tyres 385
Soft-close function for doors, doors 111 Status information, iDrive 48
Software update, see Remote Software Up- Status of the Owner's Handbook 8
grade 63 Status, vehicle 191
Software upgrade, see Remote Software Up- Steering and Lane Control Assistant 266
grade 63 Steering column adjustment 135
Software version, see Remote Software Up- Steering, see Integral Active Steering 244
grade 63 Steering wheel, adjusting 135
Soot particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particu- Steering wheel, buttons 34
late filter 349 Steering wheel heating 136
SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 425 Steering wheel heating, climate control
Sound, engine, adjusting 308 rules 139
469
Steering wheel position, saving, see Memory Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Navi-
function 136 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Steptronic sport transmission, see Steptronic Temperature, automatic air conditioning 311
transmission 163 Temperature display, see Outside tempera-
Steptronic transmission 163 ture 186
Stopping the engine, see Drive-ready state 44 temperature, engine oil 186
Storage compartment, centre console 338 Tensioning strap, see Lashing eyes in the lug-
Storage compartment, luggage compart- gage compartment 342
ment 343 Terminal, jump start 428
Storage compartments 337 Thigh support 126
Storage options 337 Tilt alarm sensor 116
Storage, see Laying up the vehicle 435 Tilting down, front passenger's mirror, see Au-
Storage, tyres 377 tomatic parking function 135
Stowing, loads 341 Time 67
Suitable devices 79 Time of day, see Time 67
Suitable mobile phones 79 Time setting, automatic 67
Summer tyres, tread 374 Toolkit 417
Sun visor 332 Tools 417
Supplementary Owner's Handbook 7 Top View, see Surround View 296
Surround View 296 Torque display, see Sport displays 191
Surround View, gesture control 60 Total weight, permitted 437
Suspension, electronic, see Adaptive M sus- Total weight, trailer operation 443
pension 308 Touchpad, Controller 53
Suspension settings, see Driving Experience Tourist function, see Right-hand/left-hand traf-
Control 154 fic 199
Switches, see Vehicle cockpit 34 Towbar 429
Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Expe- Tow fitting, see Towing eye 430
rience Control 154 Towing away 428
SYNC programme, automatic air condition- Towing eye 430
ing 314 Towing rope 429
System, alarm, see Alarm system 115 Towing, see Tow-starting and towing
System language, setting, see Language 68 away 428
System settings, see General settings 67 Tow-starting 428
Traction control system, see Dynamic Stability
T Control 241
TRACTION, driving dynamics 243
Tailgate, see Boot lid 109 Traffic information, see Owner's Handbook for
Tank display 183 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Technical changes, see Your own safety 9 Traffic jam assistant, see Assisted Driving
Technical data 436 Plus 271
Telephone, connecting 78 Traffic light detection 265
Telephone, see Owner's Handbook for Navi- Traffic-queue assistant, see Assisted Driving
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Plus 271
Telephone, selection list in the instrument Trailer loads 443
cluster 189 Trailer nose weight, technical data 443
Trailer operation 355
470
Trailer operation, activation 358 Units, see Setting units of measurement 68

Trailer operation, technical data 443 Universal remote control 329
Trailer Stability Control 357 Unloaded weight 437
Trailer tow hitch, ball head, electrically adjusta- Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 163
ble 358 Unlocking, automatic 114
Trailer tow hitch, Reversing Assist Camera Unlocking, see Opening and closing 87
view 283 Unlocking, settings 113
Trailer tow hitch, Surround View 297 Unlocking, vehicle key 88
Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 163 Updates after going to press 8
Tread, tyres 374 Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 63
Trip data 189 Upper retaining strap, top tether 144
Trip odometer, see Trip data 189 Urban Cruise Control, see Traffic light detec-
Turn indicator, indicator light 180 tion 265
Turn indicator, operation 159 USB connection 85
Turn indicator, replacing bulbs, see Lights and USB port, position in the vehicle 333
bulbs 418 Use, intended 9
Turn Indicator, see Turn indicator 159
Turning circle lines, Reversing Assist Cam- V
era 283
Turning circle lines, Surround View 297 Valet parking mode 111
Turning radius, vehicle 436 Vanity mirror 332
Turning up, dimming, see High-beam Assis- Variable light distribution 197
tant 198 Variable steering, see Integral Active Steer-
Tyre age 375 ing 244
Tyre change 375 Vehicle acknowledgement signals 113
Tyre damages 374 Vehicle battery 418
Tyre inflation pressure 372 Vehicle breakdown, see Help in case of a
Tyre makes, recommendation 376 breakdown 423
Tyre pressure 372 Vehicle care 432
Tyre Pressure Monitor 383 Vehicle cockpit 34
Tyre Pressure Monitor, reset 385 Vehicle data and data protection 10
Tyre pressure warning, see Tyre Pressure Vehicle data, resetting 69
Monitor 383 Vehicle equipment 8
Tyre repair kit 378 Vehicle identification number 16
Tyres and wheels 372 Vehicle key 87
Tyre sealant, see Tyre repair kit 378 Vehicle key, additional 91
Tyre settings 384 Vehicle key, changing the battery 90
Tyres with run-flat capabilities 377 Vehicle key, integrated key 102
Tyre tread 374 Vehicle key, loss 91
Vehicle key, malfunction 91
U Vehicle key with display, malfunction 96
Vehicle key with display, see BMW display
UCC, see Traffic light detection 265 key 92
Ultrasonic sensors, see Sensors in the vehi- Vehicle paintwork, care 433
cle 39 Vehicle, running in 348
Units of measurement, setting 68 Vehicle status 191
471
Vehicle wash 431 Welcome light when unlocking 88

Ventilation 315 Wheelbase, vehicle 436
Ventilation, see Pre-cooling 318 Wheel change 392
Video recording, see BMW Drive Recorder 236 Wheels and tyres 372
Video, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Wheels and tyres, exchange 375
Entertainment, Communication 6 Widgets, iDrive 48
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 16 Widgets, instrument cluster 173, 174
Voice control 55 Width, vehicle 436
Voice control system 55 Wi-Fi 82
Voice input, gesture control 60 Wi-Fi connection 82
Voice input, see BMW Intelligent Personal As- Wi-Fi hotspot 82
sistant 55 Window glass, defrosting 314
Volume, gesture control 60 Window lifters 116
Volume, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Windscreen, defrosting 314
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Windscreen washer jets 162
Windscreen washing system, see Wiper sys-
W tem 160
Windscreen wiper, fold-out position 163
Warning function, rear-end collision 228 Windscreen wipers 160
Warning function with wrong direction of travel, Windscreen wipers, see Wiper system 160
see Wrong-way Warning 232 Winter storage, see Laying up the vehicle 435
Warning in case of crossing traffic 303 Winter tyres 376
Warning light in exterior mirror, see Crossing- Winter tyres, tread 374
traffic Warning 303 Wiper blades, changing 417
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Lane Wipers, see Wiper system 160
Change Warning 223 Wiping fluid, see Washer fluid 412
Warning lights 176 Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless
Warning messages, see Check Control 175 charging tray 334
Warnings, false 116 Wireless charging tray for smartphones 334
Warning triangle 423 WLAN connection, see Wi-Fi connection 82
Warranty 9 WLAN hotspot, see Wi-Fi hotspot 82
Warranty Booklet, see Warranty 9 WLAN, see Wi-Fi 82
Washer fluid 412 Wood parts, care 434
Washer fluid, reservoir 412 Wordmatch principle, see Input comparison 48
Washer jets, windows 162 Workshop, see Service requirements 187
Washing bay view, Surround View 297 Wrong-way Warning 232
Washing fluid, see Washer fluid 412
Wash, vehicle 431 X
Water on roads 350
Water, see Condensation when vehicle is xDrive 244
parked 351
Web page, see Internet 7 Y
Website 7
Weights 437 Your own safety 9
Welcome display, driver profiles 73
Welcome light 195
472
*BL5A6ADA500R*
01405A6ADA5 en

OwnersManuals2.com
OwnersManuals2.com
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.
YOUR DIGITAL VEHICLE INFORMATION.
The BMW Driver's Guide app tells you all about your vehicle's
equipment and offers additional content and functions:
Everything you need to know

about navigation, entertainment and
communication
Photo-realistic animated content

demonstrating various vehicle functions
Keyword search
360° View: An interactive virtual tour of

the interior and exterior of your vehicle
Smart Scan for Apple iPhone: Icon

and optical character recognition on the
buttons inside the vehicle
Available in more than 30 languages
Can be downloaded and used offline

*BL5A6ADA500R*
01405A6ADA5 en

2023 BMW 5 Series 6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 BMW 5 Series 6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Content A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A6ADA5 - X/22 OwnersManuals2.com

After a vehicle software update – for example, a Remote Software Up-

© 2022 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Validity of Owner's Handbook Printed Owner's Handbook

Context-sensitive help BMW Driver's Guide App

"..." Texts on a display in the vehicle for

Lists The production date is defined as the calendar

Parts and accessories with the assistance of the relevant authorities,

Data processing Personal data

Stored data Furthermore, the manufacturer has product

Mobile devices BMW ConnectedDrive

Transparency concerning vehicle data

The vehicle identification number is addition-

The windows and the glass sunroof are closed

Central locking buttons

Unlocking the vehicle

Comfort Access Contactless opening and closing of the

The vehicle automatically recognises the vehi- Correct foot movement

Fully grip the handle of a vehicle door.

Locking the vehicle

With your finger, touch the grooved area on

▷ Press and hold the button on the

If applicable, the doors are also unlocked. Driver's door

With automatic tailgate operation:

Around the steering wheel Switch cluster

1 Light switch 1 Selector lever

Indicator and warning lights iDrive

Buttons on the Controller

To go to the main menu.

To go to the Media/Radio menu.

To go to the Communication menu.

To go to the navigation map.

To go to the destination entry menu

To go to the previous screen.

To go to the Options menu.

Activating voice input

Say the command.

Cancelling voice input

Adjustment and operation

▷ Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide

Press the switch up or down.

Adjusting the distance: manual head Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Press the switch to adjust the steering wheel

Manual steering wheel adjustment

1. Fold the lever down. Button Function

1. Set the desired position.

2. Press the button. The lettering in To activate/deactivate traffic

Radio 1. Press the button on the Controller.

A list of results is displayed. ▷ Use the knurled wheel on the steering

4. "Phone calls and audio"

Automatic Start/Stop function

Cancelling the selector lever lock Light and vision

Press and hold the button to cancel the selec-

Engaging selector lever position P

High-beam headlight, headlight

Press the lever forwards or pull it back.

Lights and lighting Wiper system

Lighting functions Switching on the wiper system

Rear fog light.

Side lights. Press the lever upwards to the desired posi-

Parking light, left.

Press the lever down.